ROSCOE - B001733e - User Guide

Advantage CA-Roscoe
 
Interactive Environment
User Guide
r6
This documentation and any related computer software help programs (hereinafter referred to as the
“Documentation”) is for the end user’s informational purposes only and is subject to change or withdrawal by CA at
any time.
This Documentation may not be copied, transferred, reproduced, disclosed, modified or duplicated, in whole or in
part, without the prior written consent of CA. This Documentation is confidential and proprietary information of CA
and protected by the copyright laws of the United States and international treaties.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, licensed users may print a reasonable number of copies of the documentation for
their own internal use, and may make one copy of the related software as reasonably required for back-up and
disaster recovery purposes, provided that all CA copyright notices and legends are affixed to each reproduced copy.
Only authorized employees, consultants, or agents of the user who are bound by the provisions of the license for
the product are permitted to have access to such copies.
The right to print copies of the documentation and to make a copy of the related software is limited to the period
during which the applicable license for the Product remains in full force and effect. Should the license terminate for
any reason, it shall be the user’s responsibility to certify in writing to CA that all copies and partial copies of the
Documentation have been returned to CA or destroyed.
EXCEPT AS OTHERWISE STATED IN THE APPLICABLE LICENSE AGREEMENT, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, CA PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENTATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
OR NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT WILL CA BE LIABLE TO THE END USER OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY
LOSS OR DAMAGE, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, FROM THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION, INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, GOODWILL, OR LOST DATA, EVEN IF CA IS EXPRESSLY
ADVISED OF SUCH LOSS OR DAMAGE.
The use of any product referenced in the Documentation is governed by the end user’s applicable license
agreement.
The manufacturer of this Documentation is CA.
Provided with “Restricted Rights.” Use, duplication or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to the
restrictions set forth in FAR Sections 12.212, 52.227-14, and 52.227-19(c)(1) - (2) and DFARS Section 252.227-
7014(b)(3), as applicable, or their successors.
All trademarks, trade names, service marks, and logos referenced herein belong to their respective companies.
Copyright  2005 CA. All rights reserved.

Contents
About This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Part I. Getting Started (General Information)
Chapter 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 Command Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.1 Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.2 Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2 Command Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2.1 Using Reserved Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2.1.1 Using the Double Comma (,,) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2.1.2 Using the Asterisk (*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2.1.3 Using the Minus Sign (-) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.2.1.4 Using the Plus Sign (+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.2.2 Using String Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.2.2.1 String Delimiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.3 Command Execution Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.4 Correcting Invalid/Incomplete Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.4.1.1 Handling Erroneous Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.4.1.2 Handling Erroneous Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.4.1.3 Handling Invalid PF/PA Key Assignment . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2.4.1.4 Handling Confirmation Messages/Information Displays . . 2-12
2.5 Displaying Previously Executed Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
| 2.6 Eliminating Duplicate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Chapter 3. Controlling Character Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 Defining the Language Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Controlling Character Recognition and Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.1 Entering and Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.2 Specifying Character Strings With Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3 Controlling Non-Displayable Character Translation . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Chapter 4. Defining Column Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1 Setting Temporary Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2 Setting Session Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.1 Using the STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Contents iii
4.2.1.1 When to Use STATUS DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.1.2 When to Use STATUS AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.2 Using the SET BOUNDS Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2.3 Using the BOUNDS Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Chapter 5. Defining the Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1 General Comments About Modifying the Display Format . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 Defining Display Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.1 Setting Temporary Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.2 Setting Session Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.2.1 Using the STATUS DISPLAY and STATUS AWS Display . . 5-4
5.2.2.2 When to Use STATUS DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.2.3 When to Use STATUS AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.3 Using the SET DISPLAY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3 Defining Sequence Number Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.4 Defining Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1 Displaying/Changing Display and Boundary Settings . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 Displaying/Changing Session Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.3 Display Site-Defined Attribute Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.4 Display Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.5 Synopsis of Session Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Chapter 7. Printing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.1 Identifying Data to be Printed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2 Qualifying the Data to be Printed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2.1 Controlling Sequence Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2.2 Formatting the Printed Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2.3 Naming and Referencing Print Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.2.3.1 Naming Print Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.2.3.2 Referencing Print Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.2.4 Printing Multiple Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.2.5 Printing Selected Lines/Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.2.5.1 Limiting Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.2.5.2 Limiting Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.2.6 Requesting Completion Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.2.7 Using a System Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.3 Controlling Printing Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.3.1 Changing a Printing Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.3.1.1 Changing for a Single Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.3.1.2 Changing for the Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.3.2 Displaying Printing Location Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.3.3 Obtaining Information About Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.4 Controlling and Monitoring Print Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.4.1 Cancelling Request(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.4.2 Displaying Print Request Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.4.3 Holding/Releasing Request(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.4.4 Rerouting Request(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Chapter 8. Selecting a Screen Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
iv User Guide
8.1 Screen Format Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.1.1 The Command Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.1.2 The System Control Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.1.3 The Execution Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.2 Splitting the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.2.1 Invoking a Full-Screen Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.2.2 Invoking a Partial-Screen Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.2.3 Resplitting Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.2.4 Swapping Active Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.2.5 Terminating Split Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.3 Changing the Screen Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.4 Locking the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Chapter 9. Sending/Receiving Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9.1 Receiving Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2 Transmitting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.2.1 Using the SEND Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.2.2 Using the BulletinBoard System (BBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Chapter 10. Signing On and Off Advantage CA-Roscoe . . . . . . . . . 10-1

10.1 Signing On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.1.1 Using the Advantage CA-Roscoe Sign-on Screen . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.1.2 Accessing Advantage CA-Roscoe from VTAM Terminals . . . 10-3
10.1.3 Accessing Advantage CA-Roscoe Through XTPM . . . . . . . . 10-4
10.1.3.1 Advantage CA-Roscoe From Advantage CA-Roscoe . . . . 10-4
10.1.3.2 Advantage CA-Roscoe From CICS Terminals . . . . . . . . 10-6
10.1.3.3 Advantage CA-Roscoe From TSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10.2 Customizing Sign On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.2.1 Changing/Creating a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.2.2 Creating a Sign-on Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
10.3 Signing Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10.3.1 Automatic Signoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10.3.2 Explicit Signoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11.1 The Default PF/PA Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.2 Using PF/PA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.2.1 Types of Assignments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.3 Reviewing Processing Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11.4 Changing Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
11.4.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
11.4.2 Assigning Commands/Keyword Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
11.4.2.1 Assignment Limitations: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
11.4.2.2 Assignment Techniques: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
11.4.3 Assigning Keyword Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
11.4.3.1 Scroll Function Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
11.4.3.2 Special Purpose Function Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15
Chapter 12. Using the Training Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

12.1 The Advantage CA-Roscoe Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Contents v
12.2 The HELP Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.3 The Online Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
Part II. The AWS (Creating and Manipulating Data)
Chapter 13. AWS: Introducing the AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

13.1 Attaching an AWS to the Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.2 Attaching an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.3 Bringing Data Into an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.4 Changing AWS Names/Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.5 Creating an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
13.6 Detaching an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13.7 Discarding an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13.8 Positioning the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13.8.1 Positioning via the Internal Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13.8.2 Positioning to Specific Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13.8.2.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11
13.8.2.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
13.9 Reattaching the Current AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
13.10 Selecting an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Chapter 14. AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

14.1 Adding Character Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.1.1 Inserting a String Within a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.1.2 Prefixing or Suffixing a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.2 Reordering AWS Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14.3 Editing Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
14.3.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
14.3.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
14.4 Editing Character Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
14.4.3 Tracking Edited Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Chapter 15. AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS . . . . . . 15-1
15.1 Copying Data Within the Active AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
15.1.1.1 To Copy a Single Line: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
15.1.1.2 To Copy a Range of Lines: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
15.1.1.3 To Duplicate the Copied Lines at the Destination: . . . . . 15-2
15.1.2.1 Copy Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
15.1.2.2 Using Overlay Destination Line Commands . . . . . . . . 15-5
15.1.2.3 Repeat Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
15.2 Copying Data to an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
15.2.1 Alternate Form of Screen Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
15.2.2 Copying All or a Range of Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
15.2.3 Copying Based on a Character String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9
15.3 Copying Data Between Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
vi User Guide
Chapter 16. AWS: Deleting Data From an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

16.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
16.1.1 Deleting by Line Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
16.1.2 Deleting by Presence/Absence of a String . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
16.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-4
16.3 Using 3270 Hardware Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
16.3.1 Using the ERASE EOF Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
16.3.2 Using the DELETE Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Chapter 17. AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information . . . . . . 17-1
Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS . . . . . 18-1

18.1 Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
18.1.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
18.1.1.1 Opening the Execution Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
18.1.1.2 Using Power Typing Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
18.1.2.1 Opening the Execution Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6
18.1.2.2 Using SET AUTOINSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7
18.1.2.3 Using Power Typing Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-8
18.1.3 Using a Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
18.1.3.1 Defining a Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
18.1.3.2 Inserting a Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
18.1.4 Using a PF Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
18.1.5 Using the Command Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
18.2 Formatting Inserted Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-13
18.2.1 Using Automatic Indentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-13
18.2.2 Using the Software Tab Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-14
18.2.2.1 Setting Tabs and Defining a Tab Character . . . . . . . . . 18-14
18.2.2.2 Using Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-15
Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1

19.1 Centering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
19.2 Controlling Capitalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5
19.2.2 Using a Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-6
19.3 Reformatting Text Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7
19.4 Shifting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-10
19.5 Splitting and Joining Text Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-13
19.5.1.1 Splitting Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-13
19.5.1.2 Joining Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-14
Contents vii
19.5.2.1 Splitting Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-16
19.5.2.2 Joining Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-17
Chapter 20. AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1

20.1 Finding Specific Occurrences of a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
20.2 Including/Excluding Lines Containing a String . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5
20.2.1.1 INCL and EXCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5
20.2.1.2 SEARCH and OMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-6
20.3 Customizing the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9
20.3.1 Translating the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9
20.3.2 Delimiting the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9
20.3.3 Qualifying the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9
20.3.4 Specifying the String in Hexadecimal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
20.3.5 Positioning the Resulting Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11
Chapter 21. AWS: Moving Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1

21.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2
21.2.1.1 Using Overlay Destination Line Commands . . . . . . . . 21-4
Chapter 22. AWS: Renumbering Data in the AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

22.1.1 Renumbering Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1
22.1.2 Display Sequence Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
22.1.3 Include Sequence Numbers in the Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
22.1.4 Set AWS Sequence Number Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
22.1.5 Including Advantage CA-Roscoe Sequence Numbers With
PRINT/SUBMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3
Chapter 23. AWS: Saving and Updating a Library Member . . . . . . 23-1

23.1 Creating a Library Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
23.1.1 An Advantage CA-Roscoe library member name MUST: . . . 23-2
23.1.2 Member Name Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
23.1.3 Assigning a Description and/or Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3
23.2 Updating a Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5
Part III. Data Sets (Browsing and Maintaining Data Sets)
Chapter 24. Data Sets: Introducing the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . 24-1
24.1 Attaching the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2
24.1.1 Using Wildcard Characters to Create a Catalog or VTOC
Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-7
24.1.2 Using Wildcard Characters to Create an AllFusion
CA-Librarian, PDS or Volume Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-8
24.2 Using Data Set Facility Function Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-9
24.3 Using Data Set Facility Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-11
viii User Guide

24.3.1 Entering Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-11
24.3.2 Refreshing a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-14
Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal . 25-1
25.1 Attaching an AllFusion CA-Librarian Selection List . . . . . . . . . 25-2
25.1.2 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3
25.1.3 Selection List Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-3
25.1.3.1 Selecting Alternate Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-4
25.1.3.2 Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-5
25.1.3.3 Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-5
25.2 Attaching a Catalog Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-7
25.2.3.2 Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-10
25.3 Attaching a Generation Data Group Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-13
25.4 Attaching a PDS Member/AllFusion CA-Librarian Module . . . . . 25-15
25.4.2 Using the Data Set Facility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-15
25.4.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-16
25.4.4 Attached Data Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-17
25.5 Attaching a PDS Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-18
25.5.3.1 Load Library Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-19
25.5.3.3 Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-20
25.5.3.5 Non-Load Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-22
25.5.3.7 Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-23
25.6 Attaching a Sequential Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-25
25.7 Attaching a Volume Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-27
25.7.3.2 Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-29
25.8 Attaching a VTOC Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-32
Contents ix
25.8.3.2 Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-35
25.9 Selecting the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-37
Chapter 26. Data Sets: Browsing Data Set Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1

26.1 Detaching Data Set Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2
26.2 Locating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-3
26.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-3
26.2.2 Including/Excluding List Containing a String . . . . . . . . . . 26-4
26.2.3 Customizing the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-5
26.2.3.1 Translating the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-5
26.2.3.2 Delimiting the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-5
26.2.3.3 Qualifying the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-5
26.2.3.4 Specifying the Hexadecimal Representation of a String . . 26-6
26.2.3.5 Screen Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-6
26.3.2 Positioning to Name Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-8
26.4 Reattaching a Data Set Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-10
Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks . . . . . 27-1

27.1 Allocating a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2
27.1.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3
27.1.2.1 Allocate Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-3
27.1.2.2 Allocate SMS Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-6
27.2 Cataloging a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-9
27.3 Copying a Data Set Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-11
27.3.1.1 Copying a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-12
27.3.1.2 Copying Unattached Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-13
27.4 Compressing a Partitioned Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-18
27.5 Define Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-19
27.6 Define GDG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-22
27.7 Delete Data Set/Member/Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-25
27.7.4 Delete Confirmation Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-30
27.8 Inquiring About a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-32
27.9 Inquiring About a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-36
27.10 Printing a Data Set Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-40
x User Guide
27.10.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-40
27.10.1.1 Printing a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-40
27.10.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-41
27.10.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-45
27.11 Releasing Allocated Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-47
27.12 Renaming Data Sets/Members/Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-48
27.12.3.1 Renaming Members/Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-51
27.12.3.2 Renaming Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-52
27.13 Uncataloging a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-53
27.14 Writing to a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-54
Part IV. Jobs (Submitting and Managing Jobs)
Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1

28.1 Check Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2
28.1.1 JCL Syntax Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2
28.2 Submitting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-4
28.2.1 Controlling Notification Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-4
28.2.2 Controlling Sequence Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-5
28.2.3 Expanding +INC Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-7
28.2.4 Expanding -INC Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-8
28.3 Using the Job Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-9
28.3.1 Wildcard Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-11
28.3.2 Using Job Facility Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-11
28.4 Using Job Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-13
28.4.1 Job Facility Operator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-15
Chapter 29. Jobs: Displaying Job-Related Information . . . . . . . . . 29-1

29.1 Displaying Job Execution Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-2
29.2 Displaying Class/Destination Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-4
29.3 Displaying Initiator Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-5
29.4 Displaying Job Queue Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-6
29.5 Displaying Job-Specific Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-7
Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1

30.1 Attaching Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2
30.1.1.1 Using the Job Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-3
30.1.1.2 Using a Job Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-3
30.1.1.3 When Can a Job be Viewed? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-4
30.1.1.4 What is the SYSOUT class? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-4
30.1.1.5 What Is the Current Status of the Submitted Job? . . . . . 30-5
30.1.1.6 Who Can Attach a Job? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-5
30.2 Browsing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-7
30.2.1 Detaching Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-7
Contents xi
30.2.2 Locating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-8
30.2.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-8
30.2.2.2 Including/Excluding Lists Containing a String . . . . . . . 30-9
30.2.2.3 Customizing the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-10
30.2.3 Positioning the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-12
30.2.3.1 Positioning Between Multiple Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-12
30.2.3.2 Positioning Within a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-13
30.2.3.3 Positioning to Named Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-13
30.2.4 Reattaching Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-14
30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-16
30.3.1 Altering File Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-16
30.3.2 Copying Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-19
30.3.3 Displaying File Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-22
30.3.3.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-22
30.3.3.2 Using the Job Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-24
30.3.4 Printing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-25
30.3.5 Canceling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-28
Part V. The Library System (Browsing and Managing Local Data)
Chapter 31. Library: Introducing the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . 31-1

31.1 Notes About the Library System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-2
31.2 Attaching the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-3
31.3 Using Library Facility Function Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-6
31.4 Using the Library Facility Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-7
Chapter 32. Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal . . . . . 32-1

32.1 Attaching a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2
32.1.2 Using the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-4
32.1.3 Format of Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-5
xii User Guide

32.1.4 Reordering the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-7
32.2 Attaching a Member Directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-9
32.2.2 Using the Library Facility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-9
32.2.4 Format of Member Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-10
Chapter 33. Library: Browsing Attached Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-1

33.1 Detaching the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-2
33.2 Locating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-3
33.2.2 Including/Excluding Lists Containing a String . . . . . . . . . . 33-4
33.2.3.1 Translating the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-5
33.2.3.2 Delimiting the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-5
33.2.3.3 Qualifying the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-5
33.3.2 Positioning to Named Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-8
33.4 Reattaching the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-10
Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks . . . . . 34-1

34.1 Altering Member Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-2
34.2 Copying a Member/Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-5
34.2.1.1 Copying Unattached Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-6
34.3 Delete a Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-10
34.3.4 Delete Confirmation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-11
34.4 Inquiring About a Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-13
34.5 Printing a Library Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-15
34.6 Renaming Library Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-20
Contents xiii
Part VI. Additional Facilities
Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1

35.1 Beginning a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2
35.1.1 What Can You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2
35.2 Message Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-4
35.3 Viewing a Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-6
35.3.1 Viewing a Thread Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-7
35.4 Create a Thread or Thread Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-9
35.5 BulletinBoard Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-12
35.5.1 The Utility Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-12
35.5.2 Setting BulletinBoard Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-13
35.5.3 View News Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-14
35.5.4 Prune a BBS Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-15
| 35.5.5 Deleting an Unwanted Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-15
35.5.6 Print a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-15
35.5.7 Print a Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-17
35.6 Advantage CA-Roscoe User Dialog Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . 35-19
35.6.1 Send a Message to Another Advantage CA-Roscoe User . . . . 35-19
35.6.2 The ZMsg Mode and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-19
35.6.3 ZMsg Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-20
35.6.4 Viewing Messages on ZMsg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-22
35.6.5 Sending a Message to an Advantage CA-Roscoe User . . . . . 35-22
35.6.6 Set ZMsg Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-24
35.6.7 Locate Another Advantage CA-Roscoe User Using Unicenter
CA-SysView Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-25
Chapter 36. Advantage CA-Roscoe and DB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-1
Chapter 37. DMF - Dialog Management Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-1
Chapter 38. ETSO - Application Execution System . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-1

38.1 Determining Executable Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-2
38.2 Executing Applications Under ETSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-3
38.2.1 Allocating Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-4
38.2.1.1 Allocating an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-4
38.2.1.2 Allocating a Library Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-4
38.2.1.3 Allocating the Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-5
38.2.1.4 Allocating Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-5
38.2.2 Querying and Freeing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-6
38.2.3 Initiating Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-7
38.3 Executing Distributed Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-9
38.4 Executing TSO Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-10
Chapter 39. RPF - Roscoe Programming Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-1
Chapter 40. SKETCH - CICS/IMS Panel Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-1
Appendixes
xiv User Guide

Appendix A. Using Typewriter Devices With Advantage CA-Roscoe A-1
A.1 Beginning a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.2 Establishing Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.3 Signing On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A.4 Ending an Advantage CA-Roscoe Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.5 Using a Typewriter Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A.6 Using Advantage CA-Roscoe Commands and Facilities . . . . . . . A-8
A.7 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A.8 Viewing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
A.9 Non-Executable Commands and Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X-1
Contents xv
xvi User Guide
About This Guide
This Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive Environment User Guide provides a

task-oriented description of Advantage CA-Roscoe. It describes how you can
use Advantage CA-Roscoe commands and facilities to perform a variety of
activities.
About This Guide xvii

Organization
Chapter Description
1 Introduces Advantage CA-Roscoe.
2 Provides general information about Advantage
CA-Roscoe commands.
3 Controling character recognition.
4 Defining column boundaries.
5 Defining the display format.
6 Displaying and changing the display and column
boundaries and session attributes. Also describes how to
display site-defined attribute values, the time, and the
date.
7 Printing data at a system or 328x-type printer.
8 Describes the Advantage CA-Roscoe screen format, how
to split the screen, change screen sizes and lock the
screen.
9 Sending and receiving messages.
10 Signing on and off Advantage CA-Roscoe.
11 Using and customizing PF and PA key assignments.
12 Obtaining additional information about Advantage
CA-Roscoe.
13 Introduces the AWS and describes how to attach,
change, create, detach, discard, position, and reattach an
AWS.
14 Changing data within an AWS by adding or changing
character strings.
15 Coping data within and into an AWS.
16 Deleting data from an AWS.
17 Displaying and changing AWS information.
18 Entering data into an AWS and formating that data.
19 Formating text within the AWS.
20 Locating all or specific occurrences of data within an
AWS.
21 Moving data within an AWS.
22 Renumbering the contents of an AWS.
23 Saving and updating data as a library member.
xviii User Guide

Chapter Description
24 Introduces the Data Set Facility.
25 Attaching data or a Selection List.
26 Locating data, positioning the display, detaching a data
set object, and then reattaching it.
27 Describes how to perform a variety of data management
tasks. These tasks include allocating, cataloging,
copying, compressing, deleting, inquiring, printing,
releasing, renaming, uncataloging, and writing data.
28 Introduces the job output facilities and describes how to
syntax check and submit jobs for execution.
29 Displaying job execution status, class/destination status,
initiator status, and job queue status.
30 Attaching job output, browsing the job, and performing
such tasks as altering file attributes, copying output,
displaying file attributes and printing the job at a system
or 328x-type printer.
31 Introduces the Library Facility.
32 Attaching data or a Selection List.
33 Locating data, positioning the display, detaching data,
and then reattaching it.
34 Performing such library management tasks as altering
attributes, copying, deleting, inquiring, printing, and
renaming members.
35 Introduces the BulletinBoard System.
36 Introduces Advantage CA-Roscoe/DB2.
37 Introduces the Dialog Management Facility.
38 Introduces the Extended Time Sharing Option (ETSO).
39 Introduces the ROSCOE Programming Facility (RPF).
40 Introduces SKETCH.
APPENDIX A Using typewriter devices with Advantage CA-Roscoe.
About This Guide xix

Revisions and Enhancements
|
| The following information has been provided as a quick reference regarding

| revisions and enhancements that have been made in the the core release and
| the Service Packs that followed.
|Summary of Revisions for Service Pack 7

| Additional specifications have been provided regarding attaching a data set
| object at the terminal.
Service Pack 6
To allow multiple archiving products, two new Advantage CA-Roscoe start-up
parameters (RECALVL2 and RECALVL3) have been added.
When installing and using the JCK monitor to check JCL in Advantage
CA-Roscoe's AWS, a blank screen is often encountered without any error
messages or indication of any kind that there is a problem. Messages and
options have been added to specify and list out the options passed to
JCLCHECK. New options for JCL include: -D, -X, and -A. JCK-D display
parms passed to JCLCHECK. JCK-X turns off Advantage CA-Roscoe's SVC
screening of issues and JCK-A places output to an Advantage CA-Roscoe
AWS.
New messages have been added to describe problems that can occur during
execution of JCK that would have normally returned with no indication of a
problem.
Service Pack 5
Editorial and minor technical changes have been made throughout this
manual.
xx User Guide
Summary of Revisions in this Edition
Advantage CA-Roscoe supports the six-digit job number support added with
z/OS JES2/JES3 1.2. See Chapter 29, “Jobs: Displaying Job-Related
Information” and 30.1.1, “Using a Primary Command” for more information.
About This Guide xxi

Enhancements to Advantage CA-Roscoe 6.0
■ Displaying Session Attributes/Information:
The STATUS SESSION display now includes the new field:
SPLIT Contains current split screen setting.
■ The Job Facility:
Advantage CA-Roscoe 6.0 contains a panel-driven RPF system to facilitate
job processing. It is invoked using the AJOB command, and is referred to
as the Job Facility. The Job Facility can be used to:
– attach jobs
– display a job's execution status
– display job-related information
– alter file attributes
– copy jobs
– print jobs
– cancel jobs
xxii User Guide

Advantage CA-Roscoe Publications
The following publications are supplied with Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive
Environment. They are divided into a User Series and a System Series.
User Series Contents

Name
Command Reference Describes all Advantage CA-Roscoe primary and
Guide line commands and Monitor commands.
Extended Development Describes how: 1) the Application Programming
Tools Guide Interface (API) can be used by applications
executing under ETSO to take advantage of
Advantage CA-Roscoe facilities, and 2) the
interactive facilities provided by SKETCH can be
used to generate and maintain panels used in
programs running under CICS or IMS.
Getting Started Introduces Advantage CA-Roscoe to
non-programmers.
Release Guide Provides a summary of the enhancements included
in this release.
RPF Language Guide Describes all components of the RPF language and
how to write RPF programs. It also describes the
Dialog Management Facility (DMF) which can be
used to develop, maintain and execute panel-driven
RPF applications.
User Guide Provides task-oriented descriptions of how to use
Advantage CA-Roscoe.
About This Guide xxiii

System Series Contents
Name
Extended Facilities for Describes how sites can make extensions to their
System Programmers Advantage CA-Roscoe system. This includes
Guide creating site-written Monitor routines and
customizing security and other online exits.
Installation Guide Describes the steps to follow when installing or
upgrading Advantage CA-Roscoe.
Messages and Codes Explains all messages that might be received by
Guide individuals using Advantage CA-Roscoe or by the
individual responsible for maintaining Advantage
CA-Roscoe.
Programs and Utilities Describes Advantage CA-Roscoe execution
Guide requirements. Also describes maintenance and
reporting programs for the accounting facility,
Active Work Space (AWS), library system, and user
profile system.
Security Administration Describes implementation of internal and external
Guide security to protect your Advantage CA-Roscoe
system.
System Commands Guide Describes commands used to control and monitor
Advantage CA-Roscoe and to obtain performance
information about that execution.
System Reference Guide Intended for the individual responsible for
maintaining Advantage CA-Roscoe. It describes
Advantage CA-Roscoe and its components.
xxiv User Guide

Related Publications
The CA Common Services r11 for z/OS SP6 (formerly known as Unicenter
TNG Framework for OS/390 and CA Common Services for z/OS and OS/390
Services) documentation can be found on http://supportconnect.ca.com.
The following manuals relate to Advantage CA-Roscoe and are on

http://supportconnect.ca.com.
Title Contents
Advantage CA-Earl Reference Guide Contains detailed information about
Advantage CA-Earl statements,
parameters, and coding rules. Also
explains the Advantage CA-Earl
Reporting Service.
Advantage CA-Earl User Guide Designed for users interested in
learning about Advantage CA-Earl. It
presents an introduction to
Advantage CA-Earl features and
capabilities.
Advantage CA-Earl Systems Lists the installation options for
Programmer Guide Advantage CA-Earl and instructions
for modifying them. Also describes
size requirements and program
execution.
Advantage CA-Earl Examples Guide Contains sample programs that show
a variety of common applications.
About This Guide xxv

CA Common Services for z/OS
CA Common Services for z/OS are a common set of services that may be used
by any MVS Computer Associates product. These services are maintained
separately from the product and are documented and installed separately as
well. Advantage CA-Roscoe uses CAIRIM for installation services and security.
Licensing Management Program (LMP)
Advantage CA-Roscoe now interfaces with CAIRIM services to determine

product licensing authorization.
xxvi User Guide

Reading Syntax Diagrams
The formats of all statements and some basic language elements are illustrated
using syntax diagrams. Read syntax diagrams from left to right and top to
bottom.
The following terminology, symbols, and concepts are used in syntax

diagrams.
Keywords: Appear in uppercase letters, for example, COMMAND or PARM.

These words must be entered exactly as shown.
Variables: Appear in italicized lowercase letters, for example, variable.
Required Keywords and Variables: Appear on a main line.
Optional Keywords and Variables: Appear below a main line.
Default Keywords and Variables: Appear above a main line.
Double Arrowheads Pointing to the Right: Indicate the beginning of a

statement.
Double Arrowheads Pointing to Each Other: Indicate the end of a

statement.
Single Arrowheads Pointing to the Right: Indicate a portion of a statement,

or that the statement continues in another diagram.
Punctuation Marks or Arithmetic Symbols: If punctuation marks or

arithmetic symbols are shown with a keyword or variable, they must be
entered as part of the statement or command. Punctuation marks and
arithmetic symbols can include:
, comma > greater than symbol

. period < less than symbol
( open parenthesis = equal sign
) close parenthesis ¬ not sign
+ addition − subtraction
* multiplication / division
About This Guide xxvii

The following is an example of a statement without parameters.
Statement Without Parameters

──COMMAND─────────────────────────────────────────────────────
You must write:
COMMAND
Required parameters appear on the same horizontal line (the main path of the
diagram) as the command or statement. The parameters must be separated by
one or more blanks.
Statement with Required Parameters

──COMMAND──PARM1──PARM2───────────────────────────────────────
You must write:
COMMAND PARM1 PARM2
Delimiters such as parentheses around parameters or clauses must be included.
Delimiters Around Parameters

──COMMAND──(PARM1)──PARM2='variable'──────────────────────────
If the word variable is a valid entry, you must write:
COMMAND (PARM1) PARM2='variable'
Where you see a vertical list of parameters as shown in the following example,
you must choose one of the parameters. This indicates that one entry is
required and only one of the displayed parameters is allowed in the statement.
Choice of Required Parameters

──COMMAND──┬─PARM1─┬──────────────────────────────────────────
├─PARM2─┤
└─PARM3─┘
You can choose one of the parameters from the vertical list, such as in the
following examples:
COMMAND PARM1
COMMAND PARM2
COMMAND PARM3
xxviii User Guide

When a required parameter in a syntax diagram has a default value, it
indicates the value for the parameter if the command is not specified. If you
specify the command, you must code the parameter and specify one of the
displayed values.
Default Value for a Required Parameter

┌─YES─┐
──COMMAND──PARM1=─┴─NO──┴───PARM2─────────────────────────────
If you specify the command, you must write one of the following:
COMMAND PARM1=NO PARM2

COMMAND PARM1=YES PARM2
A single optional parameter appears below the horizontal line that marks the
main path.
Optional Parameter
──COMMAND──┬───────────┬──────────────────────────────────────
└─PARAMETER─┘
You can choose (or not) to use the optional parameter, as shown in the
following examples:
COMMAND
COMMAND PARAMETER
If you have a choice of more than one optional parameter, the parameters
appear in a vertical list below the main path.
Choice of Optional Parameters

──COMMAND──┬───────┬──────────────────────────────────────────
├─PARM1─┤
└─PARM2─┘
You can choose any of the parameters from the vertical list, or you can write
the statement without an optional parameter, such as in the following
examples:
COMMAND
COMMAND PARM1
COMMAND PARM2
About This Guide xxix

For some statements, you can specify a single parameter more than once. A
repeat symbol indicates that you can specify multiple parameters. The
following examples include the repeat symbol.
Repeatable Variable Parameter

┌──
──────────┐
─variable─┴───────────────────────────────────────
──COMMAND───
In the preceding example, the word variable is in lowercase italics, indicating

that it is a value you supply, but it is also on the main path, which means that
you are required to specify at least one entry. The repeat symbol indicates that
you can specify a parameter more than once. Assume that you have three
values named VALUEX, VALUEY, and VALUEZ for the variable. Some of
your choices are:
COMMAND VALUEX
COMMAND VALUEX VALUEY
COMMAND VALUEX VALUEX VALUEZ
If the repeat symbol contains punctuation such as a comma, you must separate
multiple parameters with the punctuation. The following example includes the
repeat symbol, a comma, and parentheses.
Separator with Repeatable Variable and Delimiter

┌─,────────┐
─variable─┴──)─────────────────────────────────
──COMMAND──(───
In the preceding example, the word variable is in lowercase italics, indicating

that it is a value you supply. It is also on the main path, which means that
you must specify at least one entry. The repeat symbol indicates that you can
specify more than one variable and that you must separate the entries with
commas. The parentheses indicate that the group of entries must be enclosed
within parentheses. Assume that you have three values named VALUEA,
VALUEB, and VALUEC for the variable. Some of your choices are:
COMMAND (VALUEC)
COMMAND (VALUEB,VALUEC)
COMMAND (VALUEB,VALUEA)
COMMAND (VALUEA,VALUEB,VALUEC)
The following example shows a list of parameters with the repeat symbol.
Optional Repeatable Parameters

┌──
─────────┐ ┌──
─────────┐ ┌──
─────────┐
┬───────┬┴───
──COMMAND─── ┬───────┬┴───
┬───────┬┴──────────────
└─PARM1─┘ └─PARM2─┘ └─PARM3─┘
xxx User Guide

Some choices you can make include:
COMMAND PARM1
COMMAND PARM1 PARM2 PARM3
COMMAND PARM1 PARM1 PARM3
For example, YES in the following diagram, its special treatment indicates it is
the default value for the parameter. If you do not include the parameter when
you write the statement, the result is the same as if you had actually specified
the parameter with the default value.
Default Value for a Parameter

──COMMAND──┬─────────────────┬──PARM2─────────────────────────
│ ┌─YES─┐ │
└─PARM1=─┴─NO──┴──┘
Because YES is the default in the example preceding, if you write:
COMMAND PARM2
you have written the equivalent of:
COMMAND PARM1=YES PARM2
In some syntax diagrams, a set of several parameters is represented by a single

reference, as in this example:
Variables Representing Several Parameters

──COMMAND──┬─────────────────────┬────────────────────────────
├─PARM1───────────────┤
└─┤ parameter-block ├─┘
parameter-block:
├──┬──────────────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────┤
├─PARM2────────────┤
└─PARM3─┬───────┬──┘
├─PARM4─┤
└─PARM5─┘
The parameter-block can be displayed in a separate syntax diagram.
Choices you can make from this syntax diagram therefore include (but are not
limited to) the following:
COMMAND PARM1
COMMAND PARM3
COMMAND PARM3 PARM4
Note: Before you can specify PARM4 or PARM5 in this command, you must
specify PARM3.
About This Guide xxxi

A note in a syntax diagram is similar to a footnote except that the note appears
at the bottom of the diagram box.
──COMMAND──┬─────────┬────────────────────────────────────────
(1)
└─PARM1─── ┘
Note:
1 This is a note about the item.
xxxii User Guide

Part I. Getting Started (General Information)
Chapter 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 Command Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.1 Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.2 Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2 Command Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2.1 Using Reserved Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.2.2 Using String Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.3 Command Execution Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.4 Correcting Invalid/Incomplete Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
2.5 Displaying Previously Executed Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
| 2.6 Eliminating Duplicate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Chapter 3. Controlling Character Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 Defining the Language Character Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Controlling Character Recognition and Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.1 Entering and Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.2 Specifying Character Strings With Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3 Controlling Non-Displayable Character Translation . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Chapter 4. Defining Column Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1 Setting Temporary Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2 Setting Session Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.1 Using the STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.2 Using the SET BOUNDS Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.2.3 Using the BOUNDS Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Chapter 5. Defining the Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1 General Comments About Modifying the Display Format . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 Defining Display Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.1 Setting Temporary Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.2 Setting Session Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.2.3 Using the SET DISPLAY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3 Defining Sequence Number Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.4 Defining Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1 Displaying/Changing Display and Boundary Settings . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 Displaying/Changing Session Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.3 Display Site-Defined Attribute Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6.4 Display Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
6.5 Synopsis of Session Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Chapter 7. Printing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.1 Identifying Data to be Printed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2 Qualifying the Data to be Printed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2.1 Controlling Sequence Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2.2 Formatting the Printed Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2.3 Naming and Referencing Print Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.2.4 Printing Multiple Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.2.5 Printing Selected Lines/Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.2.6 Requesting Completion Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.2.7 Using a System Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.3 Controlling Printing Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.3.1 Changing a Printing Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.3.2 Displaying Printing Location Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.3.3 Obtaining Information About Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.4 Controlling and Monitoring Print Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.4.1 Cancelling Request(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.4.2 Displaying Print Request Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7.4.3 Holding/Releasing Request(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.4.4 Rerouting Request(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Chapter 8. Selecting a Screen Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.1 Screen Format Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.1.1 The Command Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.1.2 The System Control Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.1.3 The Execution Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8.2 Splitting the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.2.1 Invoking a Full-Screen Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.2.2 Invoking a Partial-Screen Split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
8.2.3 Resplitting Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.2.4 Swapping Active Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
8.2.5 Terminating Split Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8.3 Changing the Screen Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
8.4 Locking the Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Chapter 9. Sending/Receiving Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9.1 Receiving Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2 Transmitting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.2.1 Using the SEND Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.2.2 Using the BulletinBoard System (BBS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Chapter 10. Signing On and Off Advantage CA-Roscoe . . . . . . . . . 10-1

10.1 Signing On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.1.1 Using the Advantage CA-Roscoe Sign-on Screen . . . . . . . . 10-2
10.1.2 Accessing Advantage CA-Roscoe from VTAM Terminals . . . 10-3
10.1.3 Accessing Advantage CA-Roscoe Through XTPM . . . . . . . . 10-4
10.2 Customizing Sign On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10.2.1 Changing/Creating a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
User Guide
10.2.2 Creating a Sign-on Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
10.3 Signing Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10.3.1 Automatic Signoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10.3.2 Explicit Signoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

11.1 The Default PF/PA Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
11.2 Using PF/PA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.2.1 Types of Assignments: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
11.3 Reviewing Processing Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7
11.4 Changing Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
11.4.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
11.4.2 Assigning Commands/Keyword Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
11.4.3 Assigning Keyword Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Chapter 12. Using the Training Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

12.1 The Advantage CA-Roscoe Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
12.2 The HELP Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
12.3 The Online Tutorial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5
User Guide
Chapter 1. Introduction
Advantage CA-Roscoe is an online program development system that you can

use to perform tasks such as:
■ Entering and editing data
■ Saving the data in the Advantage CA-Roscoe library or an OS data set for
later use
■ Submitting the data as a jobstream for background execution
■ Viewing the files comprising a job
■ Browsing and maintaining OS data sets
Advantage CA-Roscoe can be used at any 3270-type terminal (such as the IBM
3278 or 3290) and at typewriter devices (such as the IBM 3767 or any device
that operates in a manner similar to a teletype terminal).
The sample screen displays used in this manual assume that you are using a
3270-type terminal. While the content of the displays is accurate, the width of
the displays has been modified so that they will fit within the margins of this
manual.
If you are using a typewriter device, see Appendix A for additional

information about using that device with Advantage CA-Roscoe.
Chapter 1. Introduction 1-1

1-2 User Guide
Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components
This chapter describes:

■ The types of commands supported by Advantage CA-Roscoe (line
commands and primary commands).
■ Conventions for using Advantage CA-Roscoe commands. This includes:
– Using reserved characters.
– Using reserved words.
– Using a string operand with a command (like how the string may be
specified and, if necessary, what characters to use as string delimiters).
– The execution hierarchy used to evaluate commands.
– How to correct invalid and incomplete commands.
– How to redisplay previously executed commands.
Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components 2-1

2.1 Command Types
2.1 Command Types

Advantage CA-Roscoe supports both primary commands and line commands.
Primary Commands Entered in the Command Area of the screen. Monitor
commands and RPF program names are also entered in
the Command Area.
Line Commands Entered in the sequence number field of the Execution
Area to modify the contents of the active AWS. To use
line commands, the screen display format must have an
unprotected sequence number field. You can establish
this format by changing the modifiable STATUS
DISPLAY screen or by entering:
SET DISPLAY AWS NUMX
If you use line commands frequently, you may want to
add this command to your sign-on program.
The following example shows a screen where SET DISPLAY AWS NUMX is in
effect. Here, primary and line commands are used together. When the Enter
key is pressed, a line for data entry is inserted after line 3600, and then all
occurrences of PRT are changed to PART.
SET DISPLAY AWS NUMX Display Format
EDIT /PRT/PART/

>
> AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS 7 72
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
34 RECORD CONTAINS 133 CHARACTERS
35 LABEL RECORDS ARE OMITTED
I36 DATA RECORD IS INVENTORY-REPORT-LINE.
37 1 INVENTORY-REPORT-LINE.
38 5 CARRIAGE-CONTROL PIC X.
39 5 FILLER PIC X(9).
2.1.1 Primary Commands

You can enter one or more primary commands on each line of the Command
Area. When entering multiple commands on a line, you must remember that:
1. Each command must be complete within the line (for example, commands
cannot be continued).
2. When multiple commands are typed on a line, they must be separated by
a command delimiter. The default delimiter is usually the ampersand (&).
The following illustrates how the ampersand is used to separate
commands on a line.
2-2 User Guide

2.1 Command Types
Using the Command Delimiter
RENUMBER & UPDATE INVLIST_

>
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5...
...... ================================ T O P ==============
1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
2.1.2 Line Commands

You may enter one line command in any of the lines comprising the sequence
number field. Note that at the top and bottom of an AWS, the sequence
number field contains '......'. These periods are unprotected, and allow you to
enter a line command before the first line of that AWS or after the last line of
that AWS.
Line commands can have numeric or string operands.

■ A numeric operand is entered with the command in the sequence number
field. It indicates the number of times an operation is to occur (for
example, D3, in the following example deletes lines 3400 through 3600).
■ A string operand is entered in the data portion of the line containing the
command. It must always be delimited. When the command is executed,
the original data are restored. (INCL, in the following example displays
every occurrence of the string DIVISION, from line 3700 through the end
of that AWS.)
Placement of Line Command Operands

>
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
D3 4 RECORD CONTAINS 133 CHARACTERS
36 DATA RECORD IS INVENTORY-REPORT-LINE.
INCL /DIVISION/TORY-REPORT-LINE.
When using a string operand, the line command can be placed anywhere
within the sequence number field.

2.1 Command Types
When using a numeric operand, the following evaluation hierarchy is

performed:
■ If all or part of the sequence number field following the command is
deleted, the command is interpreted as entered. (See lines 200 and 300 in
the following example.)
■ If the sequence number field following the command is not deleted, the
position of the cursor affects command interpretation.
– If the cursor is in the sequence number field, all numeric values up to
the cursor are treated as part of the command. (See lines 500 and 600
in the following example.)
– If the cursor is in the first displayed position within the data portion of
the line, all numeric values following the command within the
sequence number field are treated as part of the command. (See lines
800 and 900 in the following example.)
– If the cursor is in any other position within the data portion of the line,
only those numeric values that differ from those originally displayed
in the sequence number field are treated as part of the command. (See
lines 1100 and 1200 in the following example.)
The first two examples shown below indicate how the deletion of all or part of
the sequence number field following a line command eliminates the concern
about cursor positioning. The remaining examples show how the cursor
position can affect command interpretation.
Using Line Commands With Numeric Operands
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....

...... ============================= T O P =================
1
D2_ Cmd is D2; 2 lines deleted
D3 _ Cmd is D3; 3 lines deleted
4
D55 Cmd is D5; 5 lines deleted (cursor after
D56 Cmd is D5; 5 lines deleted (cursor one
7 forward from cmd)
8D9 _ Cmd is D9; 9 lines deleted
D9 _ Cmd is D9; 9 lines deleted
1
D11 _ Cmd is D; 1 line deleted
D212 _ Cmd is D2; 1 line deleted
2-4 User Guide

2.2 Command Conventions

This section describes the characters that can be used in Advantage CA-Roscoe
commands. It also discusses how to:
■ Use the special Advantage CA-Roscoe reserved characters.
■ Use Advantage CA-Roscoe reserved words.
■ Specify a string operand with a command.
The characters that may be used in Advantage CA-Roscoe commands fall into
the categories shown in the following table.
Type Characters Included

Alphabetic Uppercase and lowercase character plus the national
currency symbols. (See Chapter 3, “Controlling
Character Recognition.”)
Numeric 0-9
Special All characters appearing on a standard terminal
keyboard, except the alphabetic and numeric characters
and the comma, asterisk and space.
Binary All EBCDIC bit combinations that cannot be entered
from a standard keyboard.
Separator Space. A space is used to separate a command from its
first operand and to separate operands from each other.
Reserved Double comma (,,), asterisk (*), minus sign (-) and the
plus sign (+). (See the next section, 2.2.1, “Using
Reserved Characters.”)
2.2.1 Using Reserved Characters

This section describes the special functions provided by the reserved characters
,, (double comma), * (asterisk), - (minus sign) and + (plus sign).
2.2.1.1 Using the Double Comma (,,)
The double comma can be used in a command to represent the last line of the
active AWS, library member, attached data set object or attached job output
file. For example, to display line 500 through the end of the active AWS, you
would enter:
ATTACH 5 ,,

To copy lines 800 through the end of the library member INVLIST to the
bottom of the active AWS, you would enter:
COPY INVLIST 8 ,, B
2.2.1.2 Using the Asterisk (*)
The asterisk can be used to indicate:

■ The name of the last fetched, saved or updated library member. For
example, to update the contents of the last fetched member, you would
enter:
UPDATE
■ The line where the pointer is currently positioned in an AWS, library
member, or attached job output file. For example, to display the contents
of the active AWS beginning with the line at which the pointer is currently
positioned, enter:
ATTACH ,,
■ The last display of attached data when used with the keywords AWS, JOB
or LIB. For example, if you have been viewing job output, you can reattach
the active AWS and begin the display with the last displayed screen by
entering:
ATTACH AWS
■ Command deferral. Any primary command, Monitor command, or RPF
program that follows an asterisk is not executed until the asterisk is
deleted. For example, assume you want to copy lines 500 through 800 to a
specific location within the active AWS, but you do not know the line
number of that location. By preceding the command with an asterisk, as in:
COPY 5 8
you can type the line numbers you know and then scroll through the
active AWS to determine the destination line number. The command
preceded by the asterisk and any subsequent commands is not executed
until you remove the asterisk.
2.2.1.3 Using the Minus Sign (-)
Use the minus sign to reexecute the last executed primary command, Monitor
command or RPF program. For example, if you have just issued the command
DISPLAY ROS+ to see the status of all jobs whose names begin with ROS,
enter:
to reexecute the same command.
2-6 User Guide

2.2.1.4 Using the Plus Sign (+)
Use the plus sign to redisplay one or more previously executed primary
commands, Monitor commands, or RPF program names. For example, assume
the last command you executed was:
ATTACH DSN ROSCOE.TEST(SOURCE1)
To redisplay this command so that you can modify it, all you need enter is:
+
Optionally, you may include a number with the + to specify which previously
executed command you want displayed. For additional information about
using the plus sign, see the section, 2.5, “Displaying Previously Executed
Commands.”
2.2.2 Using String Operands

Many of the Advantage CA-Roscoe primary and line commands have string
operands. The notation conventions show this operand as:
charstr Any sequence of printable entities specified in character format
string Any sequence of entities specified in either character format or its
hexadecimal representation
If the syntax of a command shows the operand as either /charstr/ or /string/,

it must be bound by a special character that delimits the operand.
2.2.2.1 String Delimiters
The special character used to delimit the operand and the special character
used as the command delimiter cannot be used within the string.

For consistency, the Advantage CA-Roscoe documentation uses the slash (/) as
a string delimiter. Other valid characters include:
| vertical bar
'%' percent sign
¬ logical not - if not used as the default tab character
& ampersand - if not used as the default command delimiter
( left parentheses
) right parentheses
_ underscore
- dash or minus sign
+ plus sign
= equal sign
! exclamation point
¢ cent sign
: colon
' '
semi-colon
" quotation mark
' apostrophe
} right brace
{ left brace
? question mark
< less than sign
> greater than sign
. period
2-8 User Guide

2.3 Command Execution Hierarchy
2.3 Command Execution Hierarchy

When the Enter key is pressed, the Execution Area is examined first.
■ If line commands have not been entered, all changes made to the data
displayed in the Execution Area are recorded.
■ If line commands have been entered, they are validated. If any error is
encountered, execution halts until the error is corrected, no changes made
to the displayed data are recorded and no line or primary commands are
executed.
If the line commands are all valid, changes made to the displayed data are
recorded and the line commands are executed.
The contents of the Command Area is then examined.
As each word is encountered, it is evaluated according to the hierarchy shown

in the following example.
Primary Command Evaluation Hierarchy

--<-- DOES THE 'WORD' MATCH A PRIMARY COMMAND OR COMMAND ->--
| NO ABBREVIATION? YES |
| |
|-<-- DOES THE 'WORD' MATCH THE FIRST THREE CHARACTERS -->-|
| NO OF A MONITOR COMMAND NAME? YES |
| |
|-<-- DOES THE 'WORD' MATCH THE NAME OF A MEMBER IN THE -->-|
| NO USER'S LIBRARY? YES |
| |
|-<-- DOES THE 'WORD' MATCH THE NAME OF A MEMBER IN THE -->-|
| NO SITE/USER EXECUTION LIBRARY? YES |
| |
ß ß
DISPLAY EXECUTE
ERROR MESSAGE

Note: If you press a PF/PA key instead of the Enter key, the PF/PA key is
evaluated before any other action is taken. See Chapter 11,
“Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys” for additional information.

2.4 Correcting Invalid/Incomplete Commands

This section describes how to handle erroneous line commands and primary
commands. Notice that the following example contains an invalid line
command (like INCX) and an incomplete primary command (like FETCH with
no member name).
Invalid/Incomplete Commands
FETCH & ATTACH

>
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
2 PROGRAM-ID. INVLIST.
DD3
DD4
INCX /WS-END-OF-FILE-SWITCH/
2.4.1.1 Handling Erroneous Line Commands
Line commands are evaluated before primary commands. Also, all line
commands are evaluated before any is executed. If one or more errors are
found, a message is displayed in the data portion of the affected line(s) and
halts processing. No changes to the data are applied; no line commands are
executed; no primary commands are executed. The following example
illustrates the type of message displayed when an invalid command is
encountered.
Invalid Line Command Message
FETCH & ATTACH

>
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
DD3
DD4
INCX <<< ATX1 INVALID COMMAND >>>
-
To correct a line command, you can:

1. Overtype it with a valid command. (In the previous figure, you could
overtype INCX with INCL.)
When the Enter key is pressed, any changes made to the displayed data
are recorded and the line commands are executed.
2-10 User Guide

2. Blank out the sequence number field using the DELETE key, the ERASE
EOF key or the space bar.
When the Enter key is pressed, the line containing the error is restored,
changes made to the displayed data are recorded and any other line
commands are executed.
3. Use the RESET line command.
RESET causes all outstanding line commands (both valid and invalid) and
all changes made to the currently displayed data to be ignored.
2.4.1.2 Handling Erroneous Primary Commands
After evaluating and executing any line commands that may have been
entered, each primary command is evaluated before it is executed. If no errors
are found, the commands are executed in the order in which they are
encountered.
If an invalid or incomplete command is found, the command containing the

error and any subsequent commands are not executed. As illustrated in the
following example a message is displayed and the cursor is positioned to the
beginning of the command in error. (Valid commands preceding the command
in error are executed, and are no longer displayed.)
Sample Incomplete Primary Command
FETCH & ATTACH

> CMD13 INSUFFICIENT NUMBER OF OPERANDS SPECIFIED
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
3 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.
You can now correct that command. You can also add, delete or change any
command that is displayed. You can even insert commands ahead of the
corrected command. When you press the Enter key, the commands are
executed.
2.4.1.3 Handling Invalid PF/PA Key Assignment
If a PF/PA key assignment is invalid, the commands comprising the

assignment, plus any others entered in the Command Area, are displayed. For
example, if PF1 is assigned:
SET DISPLAY XXX
that command is displayed when you press PF1. (A message explaining the
error is displayed on the Response Line.)

To continue execution, you can correct the displayed command and press the
Enter key. (You should correct the PF key assignment as soon as possible.)
If the length of the unexecuted commands exceeds the length of a line in the
Command Area and the Command Area is comprised of:
■ One Line: unexecuted commands that do not fit on that line are truncated.
■ Two or Three Lines: unexecuted commands that do not fit on the first line
are displayed on the second and subsequent lines.
2.4.1.4 Handling Confirmation Messages/Information Displays
Some Advantage CA-Roscoe commands write confirmation messages (like

SUBMIT) or display information (like ATTACH). When one of these
commands is encountered in a series of commands, execution halts when that
command is executed.
To execute any remaining commands, press the Enter key again.
2-12 User Guide

2.5 Displaying Previously Executed Commands

You can display a list of the most recently executed commands by issuing the
command:
STATUS COMMAND
For example, assume that you have just executed the following series of
commands:
IMPORT DSN=ROSCOE.TEST(SAMPLE1)
RENUMBER 1 1
SAVE WIDGET
EDIT /AAA/BBB/
UPDATE
The following example illustrates the display that might be produced if you
now entered the command STATUS COMMAND.
STATUS COMMAND: Sample Display
_

>
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
COMMAND BUFFER IS 256 BYTES AND CONTAINS 8 COMMANDS
1 STATUS COMMAND
2 UPDATE
3 EDIT /AAA/BBB/
4 SAVE WIDGET
5 RENUMBER 1 1
6 IMPORT DSN=ROSCOE.TEST(SAMPLE1)
7 rpf-program-name
8 EXEC pfx.rpf-program-name

The executed commands are stored in a command buffer. (The size of the
buffer is defined by site management.) When the contents of the buffer are
displayed, it begins with the most recently executed command (like STATUS
COMMAND), and includes all of the commands that are currently stored
within the buffer area.
This list of commands is useful when, for example, you want to redisplay or
reexecute a previously executed command.

To redisplay:
■ The last executed primary command, Monitor command, or RPF program:
Use the plus sign (+), as in:
+
You then have the option of modifying or reexecuting the command by

entering the minus sign (-). (See 2.2.1, “Using Reserved Characters” for
additional information.) For example, if the last executed command was
SUBMIT ABC, you can use the plus sign to redisplay the command,
modify it and then press the Enter key to submit another job.
■ A series of commands: repeatedly execute the + to scroll back through the
previous commands.
■ A specific command:
Specify a value with the +, where the value is the relative number of the
previously executed command.
If you do not remember the position of the command in a command series,
enter STATUS COMMAND to display a list of the most recently executed
commands.
Using the series of commands shown in the previous figure, you can
redisplay the IMPORT command by entering:
+6
Optionally, you can display a maximum of three previously executed
commands, as in:
+6,3
2-14 User Guide

2.6 Eliminating Duplicate Commands
2.6 Eliminating Duplicate Commands

|
| Optionally, you can indicate to Advantage CA-Roscoe to save or not save the
| command in the command recall buffer if the command is equal to the
| previous command. This option called "DUPCR" can be set as a system wide
| variable and defaults that duplicate commands will always be saved.
| Users can designate that duplicate commands not be saved by entering:

| SET DUPCR NO
| To save duplicate commands, enter:

| SET DUPCR YES

2-16 User Guide
Chapter 3. Controlling Character Recognition
This chapter describes how to:

■ Change the language character set you are using.
■ Control uppercase/lowercase character recognition and treatment.
■ Control the translation of non-displayable characters.
Chapter 3. Controlling Character Recognition 3-1

3.1 Defining the Language Character Set
3.1 Defining the Language Character Set

As distributed, it is assumed that you will be entering, editing and displaying
data that conforms to the U.S. English character set. (U.S. English characters
include uppercase A through Z, lowercase a through z, plus the symbols @, #
and $.)
If the terminals at your site support a different language character set, your
site management will have established that language character set as the
default.
If your site management has designated that multiple character sets may be
used, you will be told which ones are supported. To change from one
character set to another, you can use either:
■ SET CHARSET command
■ Modifiable displays provided by the STATUS SESSION and STATUS AWS
commands
3-2 User Guide

3.2 Controlling Character Recognition and Treatment
3.2 Controlling Character Recognition and Treatment

You can use the SET MODE command or the modifiable screen provided by
the STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS command to define how Advantage
CA-Roscoe is to recognize and translate:
■ Data that you enter or edit in an AWS.
■ Character strings specified with commands such as EDIT, FIRST, INCL,
and so on.
3.2.1 Entering and Editing Data

To control character translation, you can set the mode to:
BASIC All alphabetic data that you enter or edit is translated to
uppercase characters. This is normally the default when you
sign on.
XTENDED All alphabetic data that you enter or edit is retained exactly as
you entered it (it can contain a combination of uppercase and
lowercase characters).
STANDARD Resets the translation mode to your company's default.
Data that is in an AWS may be retranslated using a variety of primary or line

commands. See Chapter 19, “AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS” for
additional information.
3.2.2 Specifying Character Strings With Commands

The current translation mode setting also affects how characters strings
specified with Advantage CA-Roscoe commands are treated. For example, if
you enter the command:
first division
and the current setting is:

■ BASIC - the string is treated as though it was entered in all uppercase
characters (the search is for the first occurrence of the string DIVISION).
■ XTENDED - the string is not translated (the search is for the string
division).
Chapter 3. Controlling Character Recognition 3-3

3.3 Controlling Non-Displayable Character Translation
3.3 Controlling Non-Displayable Character Translation

You can also use the SET MODE command to define how Advantage
CA-Roscoe is to translate non-displayable characters.
By default, non-displayable characters are translated to blanks when data on

the same line is typed or changed. To control this translation, you can set the
mode to:
NOPRESERVE Non-displayable characters are translated to blanks when
other data on the same line is typed. This is the default
when you sign on.
PRESERVE Non-displayable characters are not translated to blanks
when other data on the same line is typed.
3-4 User Guide

Chapter 4. Defining Column Boundaries
This chapter describes how you can change column boundaries for the
following:
■ Execution of a single command
■ Remainder of your terminal session. When you alter the boundaries for
your session, you can use:
– Modifiable displays provided by the STATUS DISPLAY command and
STATUS AWS commands
– SET BOUNDS primary command
– BOUNDS line command, when an AWS is attached
By default, the operation of primary and line commands that edit, locate, or
shift data extends the full width of the line. If you enter:
FIRST PROCEDURE
the full width of every line is searched until either the string is found or the
end of the data or the search limit is reached.
Chapter 4. Defining Column Boundaries 4-1

4.1 Setting Temporary Boundaries
4.1 Setting Temporary Boundaries

You can change the default boundaries for the execution of a single primary
command. To do so, specify the appropriate column numbers with the
command. For example,
FIRST 2 3 FILLER
displays the first occurrence of FILLER within columns 20 through 30 of the

currently attached data. After the command is executed, the previously
established or default boundaries are reestablished.
Note: Once a character string has been specified with the commands EXCL,
FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT and PREV, the string is remembered until
you change it. For example, if you issued the command:
FIRST FILLER
and you now want to find the next occurrence of the same string
within columns 50 through 70, all you need to enter is:
NEXT 5 7
The display beginswith the next line containing

FILLER
within columns 50 and 70 and the previously established or default

boundaries are reestablished.
4-2 User Guide

4.2 Setting Session Boundaries

To change column boundaries for your terminal session, you can use the
following:
■ Modifiable display produced by the STATUS DISPLAY command
■ SET BOUNDS command
■ BOUNDS line command (when an AWS is attached
Once set, they remain in effect until you change them or end your session.
4.2.1 Using the STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS

Both STATUS DISPLAY and STATUS AWS provide modifiable screens which
can be used to change column boundaries.
4.2.1.1 When to Use STATUS DISPLAY
The modifiable screen provided by STATUS DISPLAY contains the display

formats used when the active AWS, a data set object, job output file or library
member is attached.
To change a column boundary, position the cursor to the appropriate LEFT

BOUNDS or RIGHT BOUNDS field. Then, overtype the displayed value with
the appropriate column number.
For example, suppose the boundary settings for the active AWS are 10 and 72.
To changes these values to 1 and 80, respectively, type 1 in the LEFT BOUNDS
field, and then position the cursor to the RIGHT BOUNDS field and type 80
there. (When STATUS DISPLAY is issued, the cursor is automatically placed in
the LEFT BOUNDS field for AWS.) The next time you attach the contents of
the active AWS, your column boundaries will be set to 1 and 80.
4.2.1.2 When to Use STATUS AWS
When you are working with multiple AWSs, use the STATUS AWS command
to display information about the active, and all existing, AWSs that you are
using. In addition to the current display format information, this modifiable
display provides information about all attributes associated with the AWSs.
See Chapter 17, “AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information” for details.

4.2.2 Using the SET BOUNDS Command

To change column boundaries:
■ For the currently attached data:
Enter the SET BOUNDS command with the appropriate left and right
column boundary values, as in:
SET BOUNDS 5 8
In this example, the action of subsequent commands that edit, locate and
shift data affect only the contents of columns 50 through 80.
■ For a particular type of attached data:
Include the AWS, DSN, JOB, or LIB keyword(s) with the SET BOUNDS
commands. In the following example, the first SET BOUNDS command
changes the boundaries for data in the active AWS or an attached library
member; the second command changes the boundaries for an attached data
set object:
SET BOUNDS AWS LIB 1 8
SET BOUNDS DSN 2 25
To reset column boundaries:

■ For the currently attached data, enter:
SET BOUNDS or SET BOUNDS OFF
■ For data that is not currently attached, you must include the appropriate
keyword, as in:
SET BOUNDS LIB OFF
To set or reset the column boundaries for all forms of attached data, use the
ALL keyword with the command, as in:
SET BOUNDS ALL 9 12 or SET BOUNDS ALL OFF
To illustrate the use of temporary and session boundaries, assume you have
attached an AWS and are currently editing its contents. If you enter the
commands:
SET BOUNDS 1 5 & EDIT /ABC/XYZ/
FILL 1 6 /XXXXXX/ & FIRST AAA
then SET BOUNDS sets the boundaries to columns 10 through 50. EDIT
changes every occurrence of ABC within those columns to XYZ. FILL
temporarily overrides the boundaries so that the string XXXXXX can be placed
in columns 1 through 6. Finally, FIRST uses the session boundaries (columns
10 through 50) to locate the first occurrence of the string AAA.
4-4 User Guide

4.2.3 Using the BOUNDS Line Command

When setting column boundaries for the active AWS, you can use the
BOUNDS line command. To do this,
■ Type BOUNDS in the sequence number field of a line.
■ Then place the special characters < and > in the data portion of the same
line at the positions where the boundaries are to be set.
The following example shows how you would set the boundaries to columns 9
and 43, respectively.
BOUNDS Line Command: Setting Column Boundaries
>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
BOUNDS ID<NTIFICATION DIVISION. >
BOUNDS Line Command: Resulting Column Boundaries
>

> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4..>.+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============

When positioning the characters < and >:

■ If the desired location contains data, overtype the character with the
appropriate special character. The character will be redisplayed when the
■ If no data appear in the appropriate location (the character is to be placed
on a blank line or after the last character of a line containing data), use the
space bar to position to the appropriate location. (The data in the
Execution Area is evaluated prior to the execution of any line command
and null spaces are deleted.)
The Scale Line in the previous example reflects the designated column
boundary locations (the < and > are displayed in the appropriate positions on
the Scale Line).
When the display is invoked by SET DISPLAY NUMX, the Scale Line always
reflects the column boundaries, whether they are set by the SET BOUNDS
primary command or the BOUNDS line command.
4-6 User Guide

Chapter 5. Defining the Display Format
This chapter describes how you can change:

■ The display margins either temporarily or for the terminal session.
■ The sequence number display.
■ The format in which the data are displayed (for example, character format
only, or character and its hexadecimal representation).
Chapter 5. Defining the Display Format 5-1

5.1 General Comments About Modifying the Display Format
5.1 General Comments About Modifying the Display

Format
You can use the SET DISPLAY command or the modifiable screen provided by
the STATUS DISPLAY command to perform any of these changes. (When
working with one or more AWSs, you can also use the modifiable display
provided by the STATUS AWS command.)
When using the SET DISPLAY command, you can include one or more
changes with the command. For example, you could enter:
SET DISPLAY 1 5 (to change display margins)
SET DISPLAY NUMX (to change sequence number display)
SET DISPLAY CHAR (to change data format display)
or
SET DISPLAY 1 5 NUMX CHAR
Subsequent sections describe how to change each specific display format

component.
5-2 User Guide

5.2 Defining Display Margins

By default, the display margins begin with column one and extend the width
of the terminal screen. You can change these display margins temporarily or
for the remainder of your session.
When changing the display margins:

■ The margin values must be between 1 and the maximum line length (for
example, 255 for an AWS, library member or job output; the LRECL length
for a data set object).
■ The value of the right margin must be equal to or greater than the value of
the left margin.
The resulting display begins with the right margin and continues until the left
margin or the maximum width of the screen is filled.
5.2.1 Setting Temporary Margins

You can temporarily change the display margins by:
1. Pressing the PF key to which the SCROLL RIGHT or SCROLL LEFT
function is assigned, or
2. Replacing either or both of the values in the COLS field on the System
Information Line, where the first value identifies the left margin and the
second field identifies the right margin.
When you specify a new margin setting, leading zeros are not required. If they
are omitted, eliminate the old value so that the field contains only your new
margin setting.
These margins apply only to what is currently attached and remain in effect
until the attachment is changed. For example, if an AWS is currently attached
and you press the PF key to which SCROLL RIGHT is assigned, the new
display margins will:
■ Remain in effect while the current AWS contents is displayed.
■ Revert to the previous setting when you:
– Delete or replace the contents of this AWS. The margins revert to the
previously established margins.

– Attach a data set object, job, or library member. The margins revert to
the previous setting if you are reattaching, or default setting if the
designated data was not previously attached.
Note: Operands of the search-related commands (such as FIRST or INCL),

allow you to designate the screen positioning that is to occur when a
match is found. Depending on the positioning requested through the
command, your display margins may change when one of these
commands is executed.
5.2.2 Setting Session Margins

You can change the display margins for the remainder of your session by
issuing the SET DISPLAY command or changing the modifiable screen
provided by the STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS command.
5.2.2.1 Using the STATUS DISPLAY and STATUS AWS Display
Display margins can be changed using the modifiable screen provided by the
STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS command.
5.2.2.2 When to Use STATUS DISPLAY
The modifiable screen provided by STATUS DISPLAY contains the display

formats used when the active AWS, a data set object, job output file or library
member is attached.
To change a display margin, position the cursor to the appropriate SET

DISPLAY LEFT or SET DISPLAY RIGHT field. Then, overtype the displayed
value with the appropriate column number.
For example, assume the display margins for the active AWS are 10 and 50. To
change these values to 1 and 72, respectively, type 1 in the SET DISPLAY
LEFT field and type 1; then position the cursor to the SET DISPLAY RIGHT
field and type 72. When you reattach the active AWS, your display margins
will be set to 1 and 72.
5.2.2.3 When to Use STATUS AWS
When you are working with multiple AWSs, use the STATUS AWS command
display information about the active, and all existing, AWSs that you are
using. In addition to the current display format information, this modifiable
display provides information about all attributes associated with the AWSs.
See Chapter 17, “AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information” for details.
5-4 User Guide

5.2.3 Using the SET DISPLAY Command

The SET DISPLAY command can be used to:
■ Change both the left and right margins: Specify two numeric values with
the command, as in:
SET DISPLAY 1 5
■ Change only the left display margin: Specify a single numeric value, as in:
SET DISPLAY 1
The display begins with column ten and extend the width of the terminal
screen.
■ Change only the right display margin: Specify a numeric value prefixed
with a comma:
SET DISPLAY ,9
The display ends with column 90 and show as much of the preceding data
as will fit within the width of the line.
■ Reset the display margins to begin with the column 1:
SET DISPLAY
All of the preceding examples affect the data that is currently displayed. To set
display margins for data that is not currently displayed, include the keyword
ALL or any combination of the keywords AWS, DSN, JOB or LIB. For
example, to set all display margins to 50 through 80, you would enter:
SET DISPLAY ALL 5 8
If you then specified,

SET DISPLAY AWS LIB 7 72
the display margins in effect when you attach the active AWS or a library
member will be set to columns 7 through 72; while the display margins for job
output and data set objects will remain set at columns 50 through 80.

5.3 Defining Sequence Number Display
5.3 Defining Sequence Number Display

You can control the display of sequence numbers using:
■ The modifiable screen provided by the STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS
AWS command.
■ The SET DISPLAY command.
In all cases, specify the keywords NUM, NUMX, NONUM and NUM2, with:
NUM Each line begins with a six digit protected sequence number
field that is followed by data.
NUMX Each line begins with a six digit unprotected sequence number
field that is followed by data. NUMX must be in effect if you
want to use line commands to edit the contents of the active
AWS.
NONUM Each line contains only data; no sequence numbers are
displayed.
NUM2 Two lines are displayed for each data line. The first line
contains the six digit protected sequence number field; the
second line contains only data.
Notes:
■ If you include the FLIP operand when you assign SET DISPLAY to a PF
key, you can bounce the display between sequence number display
settings. For example, if you assign PF2 the value:
LET PF2 = 'SET DISPLAY FLIP NONUM NUMX'
The display format changes every time you press PF2.
■ You can use ALL or any combination of the keywords AWS, DSN, JOB
and LIB to qualify the scope of the SET DISPLAY command. For example,
to enable the use of line commands when editing the active AWS and to
prohibit the display of sequence numbers with all other forms of attached
data, you would enter:
SET DISPLAY AWS NUMX DSN JOB LIB NONUM
Since the display margins and data display operands are not included with
these commands, those that are currently in effect will remain unchanged.
5-6 User Guide

5.4 Defining Data Display

By default, data are displayed in its character format. If the data contain
non-printable characters, they are not displayed.
You can change the data display format to have the data displayed in both its
character format and its hexadecimal representation by:
■ Changing the modifiable STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS screen by
overtyping the appropriate field with either CHAR or HEX.
■ Specifying the HEX or CHAR operand with the SET DISPLAY command.
The following example illustrates the display before issuing the SET DISPLAY
HEX command.
Character Display
SET DISPLAY HEX_

>
> AWS() SCRL FULL COLS 1 72
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.
...... ============================= T O P ===============
1 HOWARD THOMAS W
2 SMITHSON SALLY S
3 WALTERS JOHN
=============================== B O T T O M ==============
The following example illustrates the display that results after issuing the
command SET DISPLAY HEX. (SET DISPLAY CHAR returns the data to
character format.)
Character and Hex Display
>

> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.
...... ============================= T O P ===============
1 HOWARD THOMAS W
4CDECDC4444444ECDDCE4444E4
86619438641261
---------------------------------------------------
2 SMITHSOM SALLY S
4EDCECEDD44444ECDDE44444E4
249382652133822
---------------------------------------------------
3 WALTERS JOHN
4ECDECDE444444DDCD44444444
613359216851
---------------------------------------------------

The highlighted areas in the previous example indicate the hexadecimal

representation of the data shown in the upper screen. Notice that columns 27
and 29 contain data that is not displayable or modifiable in its character
format.
When data are displayed in HEX format, the resulting data are:
■ Modifiable when displaying the contents of the active AWS. You can
modify:
– Printable characters on the character line. (Non-printable characters are
shown as blanks, which are not modifiable.)
To ensure your changes are properly applied, no character translation
occurs when SET DISPLAY HEX is in effect. This means that even if
you have specified SET MODE BASIC, lowercase characters are not
translated to uppercase characters.
– Hexadecimal representation on the two vertical hexadecimal lines.
These lines are always modifiable.
Since there can be no confusion about the hexadecimal representation
of a character, lowercase characters are translated to uppercase when
SET MODE BASIC is in effect.
■ Not modifiable when a library member, job output file or data set object is
displayed.
Notes:
■ If you include the FLIP operand when you assign SET DISPLAY to a PF
key, you can bounce the display between its character and hexadecimal
formats. For example, if you assign PF1 the value:
LET PF1 = 'SET DISPLAY FLIP CHAR'
The display format changes every time you press PF1.
■ As with the other forms of SET DISPLAY, you can use the ALL, AWS,
DSN, JOB and LIB keywords to qualify the scope of the command. These
operands are useful when you want to designate the data display format
for data that is not currently attached.
5-8 User Guide

Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information
This chapter describes how you can:

■ Display and change screen display and column boundary settings
■ Display and change session attributes
■ Display site-specified system attributes
■ Display the current time and date
At any time during your session, you can display information about the
attributes that are currently in effect. For example, to display the current
column search boundaries and display margins, you would enter:
STATUS DISPLAY
You can change most of the session attributes using either modifiable displays
or primary commands. (The section, 6.5, “Synopsis of Session Attributes”
contains a list of the primary commands, associated STATUS displays and a
brief description of the attributes affected.)
Changing these attributes allows you to customize your session to meet your
own unique needs. If you find that you always want certain attributes to be in
effect, you can include the appropriate primary commands in a sign-on
program. (A sign-on program is executed every time you sign on to Advantage
CA-Roscoe or split the screen. See Chapter 10, “Signing On and Off
Advantage CA-Roscoe” for additional information.)
Note: For information about displaying and changing AWS attributes, see
Chapter 17, “AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information.”
Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information 6-1

6.1 Displaying/Changing Display and Boundary Settings

To see information about the display formats and column boundaries that are
currently in effect, enter the command:
STATUS DISPLAY
This display is modifiable. To produce a non-modifiable display, include the

LIST operand with the command, as in:
STATUS DISPLAY LIST
The following example illustrates the type of information provided by STATUS

DISPLAY.
STATUS DISPLAY Command: Sample Display
>

> AWS() SCRL FULL COLS 1 79 A<name>
>....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6
ROSCOE BOUNDS/DISPLAY STATUS
SET CURRENT
BOUNDS DISPLAY DISPLAY
LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT LEFT RIGHT
AWS: 1 8 1 72 1 72 NUMX CHAR CJUST
LIB: 1 8 1 72 1 72 NUM CHAR CJUST
JOB: 1 255 1 72 1 72 NUM CHAR CJUST
DSN: 1 32767 1 72 1 72 NUM CHAR CJUST
MODE ===> BASIC CURSOR ===> INIT

Note: STATUS DISPLAY provides information about the active AWS. When
working with one or more AWSs, use the STATUS AWS command to
display and change the display formats and column boundaries or all
existing AWSs. See Chapter 17, “AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS
Information” for additional information.
See Chapter 5, “Defining the Display Format” for information.
6-2 User Guide

BOUNDS Contains: Current or default left and right column boundary

settings to be used by any command that locates, edits or
shifts data.
Change: Overtype field BOUNDS LEFT or RIGHT with
appropriate column number; use SET BOUNDS command. (If
an AWS is attached, the STATUS AWS command or BOUNDS
line command may be used.) See Chapter 4, “Defining
Column Boundaries” for information.
SET DISPLAY Contains: Left and right display margins established by
default, the last executed SET DISPLAY command, or the last
change to this display.
Change: Overtype SET DISPLAY LEFT or RIGHT with
appropriate column number(s); use SET DISPLAY command.
(If an AWS is attached, the STATUS AWS command can be
used.)
CURRENT DISPLAY
Contains: Left and right display margins temporarily set by
the last command locating data outside of the SET DISPLAY
boundaries or by the values typed in the COLS field.
Change: This field is not modifiable.
num Contains: Current or default sequence number display setting.
Change: Overtype field with NUM, NUMX, NUM2 or
NONUM; use SET DISPLAY command. (If an AWS is
attached, the STATUS AWS command can be used.)
char Contains: Current or default data display mode.
Change: Overtype field with CHAR or HEX; use SET
DISPLAY command. (If an AWS is attached, the STATUS
AWS command can be used.)
cjust Contains: Current or default screen positioning to occur as a
result of executing a FIRST, LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL, or
EXCL primary command.
Change: Overtype field with CENTERED, LOCKED,
JUSTIFIED or CJUSTIFIED; use SET SEARCH command. (If
an AWS is attached, the STATUS AWS command can be
used.)
MODE Contains: Current or default character translation mode.
Change: Overtype field with BASIC, XTENDED or
STANDARD; use SET MODE command. (If an AWS is

CURSOR Contains: Current or default location at which the cursor is

positioned after a command is executed.
Change: Overtype field with HOME, INIT or DATA; use SET
CURSOR command.
6-4 User Guide

6.2 Displaying/Changing Session Attributes

To display information about your terminal session, enter the command:
STATUS SESSION
To begin the display with the line containing a specific attribute, include the
first one to four characters of the field name. For example, to begin the
display with the line containing DATE FMT, you could enter:
STATUS SESSION D or
STATUS SESSION DA or
STATUS SESSION DAT or
STATUS SESSION DATE
You can reposition the display by:

■ Using PF keys to scroll the display forward or backward.
■ Placing the cursor at the line containing the desired field and pressing the
PF key assigned to forward or backward scrolling. (To do this, the SCRL
field on the System Information Line must be set to CSR.) The resulting
display begins with the line at which the cursor was positioned.
Finally, you can produce a non-modifiable display by including the LIST

operand with the command, as in:
STATUS SESSION LIST
Unless noted otherwise, an attribute shown in the modifiable display can be

changed using the appropriate SET command or by overtyping the field. (Note
that some of the attributes have site-defined default and maximum values. To
display these values, use the STATUS SYSTEM command.)
The following example illustrates the type of information provided by the

STATUS SESSION command at a 43-line terminal.

STATUS SESSION Command Display
|
> APPLID(A4IROS3) USER(PH,DORDA2) L PENDING

| > AWS(PH.DUPCR) SCRL CSR COLS 1 79 PAU(PH.RAMB) A<AMB>3
| >....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7..
| ROSCOE SESSION STATUS
| ATTACH ==> PAUSE

| AUTOFF ==> 24 ON AUTOINDENT ==> OFF
| AUTOINSERT ==> 1 OFF AWS TRANS ==> N
| CHAR SET ==> US ENGLISH CHAR TRANS ==> B
| CMD LINE ==> 3 1 COPYDEST ==> (NONE)
| CURREC ==> N/A DATE FMT ==> AMERICAN SHORT
| DELIMITER ==> & DSNCMLSTL ==> ERROR
| DSNCNT ==> 1 DSNEMPTY ==> OFF
| DSNRECALL ==> NONE DUPCR ==> YES
| EDITCHNG ==> OFF ESCAPE ==> ..
| EXECPFX ==> DFLT HELPPFX ==> DFLT DFLT
| JOBCNT ==> 1
| LANGUAGE ==> ENGLISH
| MASTER ==> NONE
| MAXREC ==> NONE MONLEVEL ==> ERROR
| MONTRAP ==> ON MSGLEVEL ==> INFO
| PFKDELIM ==> / RPSDEST ==> USPRNCPK
| RPSNOTIFY ==> OFF SAVE ATTR ==> SHARED
| SEARCH ==> NODBCS SEA MODE ==> NOMIX
| SEND ==> ALL SIGNON ==> PH.SIGX
| SPLIT ==> CSR STATS ==> ON
| STMTCNT ==> 496 SUBMIT ==> 8 INC SEQ
| TLOCK ==> 3 OFF LOGOFF WRITECNT ==> 5
|
ATTACH Contains: Current or default setting designating whether
execution is to pause after an ATTACH command is
executed.
Change: Overtype field with PAUSE or NOPAUSE; use
SET ATTACH command.
AUTOFF Contains: Two fields, where the first field shows the
current number of minutes of inactivity that is allowed
before the terminal is automatically signed off, and the
second field shows the status of the automatic sign-off
facility.
Change: Overtype the first field with a numeric value
not exceeding your site maximum and the second field
with ON or OFF; use SET AUTOFF command. (STATUS
SYSTEM shows the default and maximum values.)
6-6 User Guide

AUTOINDENT Contains: Current or default setting indicating whether

the cursor is to be automatically positioned under the
first character of the preceding data line when lines are
inserted through the INPUT primary command, the I or
IB line command or the PF key to which the INPUT
function is assigned.
Change: Overtype the field with ON or OFF; use SET
AUTOINDENT command.
AUTOINSERT Contains: Current or default setting indicating the
number of data entry lines to be inserted when all data
entry lines inserted by the I or IB line command have
been filled.
Change: When inactive, overtype first field with numeric
value indicating the number of lines to be inserted.
When active, overtype first field with numeric value or
OFF.
| AWS TRANS Contains: Current or default setting of the AWS translate
| parameter which determines whether non-displayable
| characters are to be translated to blanks when other data
| on the same line is entered or changed.
| Change: Overtype fields with N, or P; use SET MODE
| PRESERVE.
CHAR SET Contains: Language character code representing the data
that the user can enter and display at the terminal.
Change: Overtype field with a language code defined at
your site; use SET CHARSET command. (If an AWS is
| CHAR TRANS Contains: Current or default setting of the character set
| translate options.
| Change: Overtype field with B(asic), X(tended) or
| S(tandard); use SET MODE B/X command.
CMD LINE Contains: Two fields showing the current or default
number of lines comprising the Command Area in: 1)
the current presentation area, and 2) each presentation
area when the screen is next split.
Change: Overtype field(s) with a numeric value between
1 and 3; use SET CMDLINES command.
COPYDEST Contains: Name of the AWS that is to receive data
copied through :C or (NONE) if no AWS has been
designated.
Change: Overtype field with the name of an existing
AWS; use the SET COPYDEST command.

CURREC Contains: Total number of lines that you have saved in

the library, or N/A if you have no library line limit (for
example, MAXREC is NONE).
DATE FMT Contains: Two fields, where the first field shows the
current or default format used when dates are displayed
at the terminal, and the second field shows whether the
year will be displayed as two or four digits.
Change: Overtype the first field with AMERICAN,
EUROPEAN or INTERNATIONAL, and the second field
with SHORT or LONG; use SET DATEFORM command.
(STATUS SYSTEM shows the default values).
DELIMITER Contains: Current or default special character used to
separate (for example, delimit) commands when multiple
commands are typed in the Command Area.
Change: Overtype field with any special character or
OFF; use SET command.
DSNCMLST Contains: Current or default setting designating the type
of messages that are to be directed to the member
ZZZZZCMP following COMPRESS requests.
Change: Overtype field with INFO or ERROR; use SET
DSNCMLST.
DSNCNT Contains: Current or default number of lines to be
searched within an attached data set object.
Change: Overtype field with MAX or a numeric value
indicating the number of lines to be searched; use SET
DSNCNT command. (STATUS SYSTEM shows the
default and maximum values.)
DSNEMPTY Contains: Current or default setting designating whether
the Data Set Facility is to attempt to read data sets
whose DSCB indicates that they are empty.
Change: Overtype field with ON or OFF; use SET
DSNEMPTY command.
DSNRECALL Contains: Current or default setting designating the
action to be taken when an operation is to be performed
on data sets migrated by the IBM program product
DFHSM.
Change: Overtype field with WAIT, NOWAIT or NONE;
use SET DSNRECALL command.
6-8 User Guide

| DUPCR Contains: Current or default setting of the retain

| duplicate command option.
| Change: Overtype field with three character field "YES"
| or "NO "; use the SET DUPCR command.
EDITCHNG Contains: Current or default setting indicating whether
the sequence number field of lines affected by an edit
operation is to contain a change indicator.
EDITCHNG command.
ESCAPE Contains: Current or default escape character string used
to exit an application executing under ETSO.
Change: Overtype field with a one- to three-character
string; use SET ESCAPE command.
EXECPFX Contains: Current or default RPF execution library
setting(s).
Change: Overtype field(s) with a prefix, DFLT or NONE;
use SET EXECPFX command.
HELPPFX Contains: Current or default HELP library setting(s).
Change: Overtype field(s) with a prefix, DFLT or NONE;
use SET HELPPFX command.
JOBCNT Contains: Current or default number of lines to be
searched within an attached job output.
Change: Overtype field with MAX or a numeric value
not exceeding your site-defined maximum; use SET
JOBCNT command. (STATUS SYSTEM shows the default
and maximum values.)
LANGUAGE Contains: Language used for displayed messages and
HELP screens.
MASTER Contains: Current or default status of AllFusion
CA-Librarian -INC statement expansion. It shows NONE
if this facility is not active and no master file is in effect,
or ON or OFF and master file name if this facility is
active.
Change: Overtype first field with ON or OFF and
second field with name of AllFusion CA-Librarian
master file (the name may be changed but not deleted);
use SET MASTER command.
MAXREC Contains: Maximum number of lines you may save in
the library, or NONE if there is no limit.

MONLEVEL Contains: Current or default setting designating whether

Monitor command informational messages are to be
displayed.
MONLEVEL command.
MONTRAP Contains: Current or default setting designating whether
Monitor command error messages and prompts are to be
displayed.
MONTRAP command.
MSGLEVEL Contains: Current or default setting designating whether
primary command informational messages are to be
displayed.
MSGLEVEL command.
PFKDELIM Contains: Default or current special character used to
separate (for example, delimit) commands when multiple
commands are assigned to a PF key.
Change: Overtype field with any special character; use
SET PFKDELIM command.
RPSDEST Contains: Current or default printing location that is to
be used when the PRINT command is issued, or
NO DFLT if no default location is assigned to this
terminal, or
NOT ACT if RPS is not currently active, or
NOT AUTH if this terminal is not authorized to use
RPS, or
NOT AVAL if information cannot be obtained due to
site or RPS restrictions.
Change: Overtype field with any system or 328x-type
printer location; use SET RPSDEST command. (Use the
DEST operand of the PRINT command to change the
printing location for a single execution of the command.)
RPSNOTIFY Contains: Default or current setting designating whether
messages are to be displayed when PRINT requests are
printed.
RPSNOTIFY command.
6-10 User Guide

SAVE ATTR Contains: Current or default access attribute setting used

when you create (for example, SAVE) a library member.
Change: Overtype field with SHARED or RESTRICTED;
use SET SAVEATTR command.
SEARCH Contains: Current or default setting designating the
DBCS format status.
Change: Overtype field with DBCS or NODBCS; use SET
SEARCH command.
| SEA MODE Contains: Current or default setting of the search mode.
| Change: Overtype field with 5-character "MIX " or
| "NOMIX"; use SET MODE MIX/NOMIX command.
SEND Contains: Current or default setting controlling the
display of received SEND messages.
Change: Overtype field with ALL, OPER or NONE; use
SET SEND command.
SIGNON Contains: Current user sign-on RPF.
Change: Overtype field with the correct RPF name.
SPLIT Contains: Current or default split screen setting.
Change: Overtype field with CSR, FULL, or PART; use
SET SPLIT command.
STATS Contains: Current or default setting indicating whether
SPF-type directory information is to be added/updated
to the PDS directory entry for a member.
Change: Overtype field with ON, ASIS or OFF; use SET
STATS command.
STMTCNT Contains: Current or default RPF program loop limit (the
number of RPF statements that can be executed without
an intervening read/write operation).
Change: Overtype field with MAX, RESET or a numeric
value not exceeding 32760; use SET STMTCNT
command. (STATUS SYSTEM shows the default and
maximum values.)
SUBMIT Contains: Three fields showing the current or default
setting indicating the: 1) width of the data to be
submitted, 2) expansion of embedded +INC statements,
and 3) inclusion of sequence numbers.
Change: Overtype the first field with CARD, PRT, WIDE
or a numeric value between 8 and 254, the second field
with INCLUDE or NOINCLUDE, and the third field
with SEQ or NOSEQ; use SET SUBMIT command.

TLOCK Contains: Three fields showing: 1) number of minutes of

inactivity allowed before the Terminal Lock screen is
displayed, 2) current or default status of the automatic
terminal lock facility, and 3) whether OFF may be
entered from the Terminal Lock screen.
Change: Overtype the first field with a numeric value
not exceeding your site-defined maximum, the second
field with ON or OFF, and the third field with LOGOFF
or NOLOG; use SET TLOCK command. The NOW
operand may only be used with SET TLOCK. (STATUS
SYSTEM shows the default and maximum values.)
WRITECNT Contains: Current or default RPF program terminal write
limit (the number of terminal writes that can be executed
without an intervening read).
Change: Overtype field with numeric value not
exceeding 32760; use SET WRITECNT command.
6-12 User Guide

6.3 Display Site-Defined Attribute Values

To produce a non-modifiable display containing site-defined default and
maximum values for specific commands, enter the command:
STATUS SYSTEM
The following example illustrates the resulting display.
STATUS SYSTEM Command: Sample Display
_

>
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
ROSCOE SYSTEM STATUS
AUTOFF ===> ON AUTTLOCK ===> OFF

AUTOFF DEFAULT ===> 9 AUTTLOCK DEFAULT ===> 5
AUTOFF MAXIMUM ===> 24 AUTTLOCK MAXIMUM ===> 144
JOBCNT DEFAULT ===> 999999 DSNCNT DEFAULT ===> 1

JOBCNT MAXIMUM ===> 999999 DSNCNT MAXIMUM ===> 999999
DATE FORMAT ===> AMERICAN SHORT
STMTCNT DEFAULT ===> 496 RCSESCPF ===> PF12

STMTCNT MAXIMUM ===> 3276 RCSESCCH ===> :

AUTOFF Status of the automatic sign-off facility.
AUTOFF DEFAULT Site-defined default time period before the terminal
is signed off.
AUTOFF MAXIMUM Maximum value that can be specified with the SET
AUTOFF command.
AUTTLOCK Status of automatic terminal lock facility.
AUTTLOCK DEFAULT Site-defined default time period before the
Terminal Lock screen is displayed.
AUTTLOCK MAXIMUM Maximum value that can be specified with the SET
TLOCK command.

DATE FORMAT Two position field showing:

1. Format for dates displayed at the terminal, and
2. Code indicating the number of digits used to
represent the year.
DSNCNT DEFAULT Site-defined number of lines to be searched within
a data set object if no value is specified with a
search-related command.
DSNCNT MAXIMUM Maximum value that can be specified with the SET
DSNCNT command.
JOBCNT DEFAULT Site-defined number of lines to be searched within
a job if no value is specified with a search-related
command.
JOBCNT MAXIMUM Maximum value that can be specified with the SET
JOBCNT command.
RCSESCCH Site-defined special character used to prefix a
one-character command that is to be used to direct
input to RCS.
RCSESCPF Site-defined PF key that is to be used to indicate
direct input to RCS.
STMTCNT DEFAULT Site-defined default number of RPF statements that
can be executed without an intervening read/write
operation.
STMTCNT MAXIMUM The maximum value that can be specified with the
SET STMTCNT command.
6-14 User Guide

6.4 Display Time and Date
6.4 Display Time and Date

At any time during your session you can issue the TIME command. The
following example shows the command itself, and the next example illustrates
the information that is provided by this command.
TIME Command
TIME
>
> AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS 7 72
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
============================= T O P =============
1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION
TIME Command: Sample Display
>

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+..
9/6/88 15.3.27 - ELAPSED 1:29:4 - CPU .34
The information written to the terminal includes:

■ Current date
■ Current time
■ Elapsed time of your session
■ Amount of CPU time for for your session
After viewing this information, you can reattach the data you were working
with, or issue any other Advantage CA-Roscoe command.

6.5 Synopsis of Session Attributes

This table identifies: 1) the primary commands you can use to change your
session attributes, 2) the form of the STATUS command that produces the
appropriate modifiable display, and 3) a brief description of each attribute
involved.
Command Status Command Attribute Affected

SET SESSION Special character used as
command delimiter.
SET ATTACH SESSION Pausing of command execution
after an ATTACH command is
executed.
SET AUTOFF SESSION Automatic sign-off facility control.
SET SESSION Position of cursor when lines are
AUTOINDENT inserted through the INPUT
command, I or IB line command,
or the PF key assigned to the
INPUT function.
SET AUTOINSERT SESSION Number of lines to be inserted
when lines inserted by I or IB line
command are filled.
SET AWSDSPLY AWS Data protection and highlighting
attributes for active AWS.
SET BOUNDS DISPLAY Default column boundaries to be
and AWS used with commands that edit,
locate and shift data.
SET CHARSET SESSION Language character set
and AWS representing data user can enter
and display.
SET CMDLINES SESSION Number of lines comprising the
Command Area of the screen.
SET COPYDEST SESSION Name of the AWS that is to
receive data copied through :C.
SET CURSOR DISPLAY Location at which the cursor is
positioned after a command
executes.
SET DATEFORM SESSION Format of dates displayed at the
terminal.
6-16 User Guide


SET DISPLAY DISPLAY Display format including: 1)
and AWS display margins, 2) sequence
number display and 3) form in
which data are to be displayed.
SET DSNCMLST SESSION Type of messages to be directed to
the library member ZZZZZCMP
when a COMPRESS request is
executed.
SET DSNCNT SESSION Default number of lines to be
searched within a data set object.
SET DSNEMPTY SESSION Data Set Facility attempts to read
data sets whose DSCB indicate
they are empty.
SET DSNRECALL SESSION Action to be taken when an
operation is to be performed on
data sets migrated by IBM
DFHSM.
SET DUPCR SESSION To determine if duplicate
commands are to be saved in the
command recall buffer.
SET EDITCHNG SESSION Lines affected by an edit operation
are to be identified.
SET EOF AWS Extent of deletion to occur when
the ERASE EOF key is pressed.
SET ESCAPE SESSION Escape sequence used to exit an
application executing under ETSO.
SET EXECPFX SESSION RPF Execution Libraries.
SET FILL AWS Trailing character to be used with
lines in active AWS.
SET JOBCNT SESSION Default number of lines to be
searched within job output file.
SET MASTER SESSION Expansion of embedded AllFusion
CA-Librarian -INC statements in
submitted jobs.
SET MODE DISPLAY Character translation mode.
and AWS
SET MONLEVEL SESSION Monitor command information
message display.


SET MONTRAP SESSION Error message and prompts
display issued by Monitor
commands within an RPF
program.
SET MSGLEVEL SESSION Primary command informational
message display.
SET PFKDELIM SESSION Special character used to delimit
commands assigned to a PF/PA
key.
SET RPSDEST SESSION Location where data identified
through the PRINT command is to
print.
SET RPSNOTIFY SESSION Display of notification messages
when a PRINT request completes.
SET SAVEATTR SESSION Default access attribute used when
creating a library member.
SET SCROLL N/A SCRL field setting.
SET SEARCH DISPLAY Screen positioning when FIRST,
and AWS LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL or
EXCL are executed. Data in DBCS
format.
SET SEND SESSION Display of received SEND
message.
SET STATS SESSION SPF-type directory information to
be added/updated.
SET STMTCNT SESSION RPF program loop limit.
SET SUBMIT SESSION Characteristics of submitted data,
including inclusion of sequence
numbers, expansion of +INC
statements, and width of data.
SET SYSID N/A Display of Advantage CA-Roscoe
ID.
SET TLOCK SESSION Automatic Terminal Lock facility.
SET USERID N/A Display of user ID.
SET WRITECNT SESSION RPF program terminal write limit.
6-18 User Guide

Chapter 7. Printing Data
This chapter describes how you can print data at a system or 328x (or
compatible) printer. The descriptions cover how to:
■ Identify the data you want to print. It can be all or part of:
– The currently displayed screen.
– The active AWS.
– One or more library members or the Library Selection List.
Also see Chapter 34, “Library: Performing Library Management
Tasks” for information about printing data through the Library Facility
Print Function panel or the Selection List.
– The currently attached job output file.
Also see Chapter 30, “Jobs: Viewing Job Output” for information
about using the modifiable STATUS JOB display to print job output.
– The currently attached data set object.
Also see Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks”
for information about printing data through the Data Set Facility Print
Function panel or a Selection List.
■ Qualify the data that you want printed (for example, printing multiple
copies or printing only selected lines or columns of the data).
■ Control printers and printing locations. This includes:
– Displaying information about available printers and printing locations.
– Directing your data to print at an alternate location (like a different
system or 328x-type printer).
■ Control and monitor the data after it has been scheduled for printing.
Chapter 7. Printing Data 7-1

7.1 Identifying Data to be Printed
7.1 Identifying Data to be Printed

As illustrated, you can print data from a variety of different sources.
Basic Command Description

PRINT <AWS> Prints the entire contents of the active AWS. The AWS
need not be attached. (The AWS keyword is optional.)
PRINT mem(s) Prints a maximum of 12 unattached library members. (To
print a member that does not belong to you, include the
owner's prefix.)
PRINT LIB Prints all of the currently attached library member or
Selection List.
PRINT DSN Prints all of the currently attached data set object.
PRINT JOB Prints all of the currently attached job output file.
PRINT SCREEN Prints all of the currently displayed screen.
Data from any of the sources identified in the previous figure can be combined
as long as the total number does not exceed 12. To illustrate, the following
example shows how you can combine data from eight different sources. This
example also uses the INSEP operand to cause the data from each source to
begin on a new page:
PRINT MEM1 DSN AWS 1 4 AWS 9 1 JOB LIB AAA.MEM2 SCR INSEP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
You can also print a copy of the current screen display when an RPF program
or other application (like ETSO or CA-eMAIL+) is in control of the terminal.
Assuming that the CA defaults are in effect, you can do this by entering:
:P
in any unprotected field and pressing PF12. (The cursor must immediately
follow the command :P.)
If the CA defaults are not in effect, the STATUS SYSTEM display will identify
the site-defined:
■ Escape character: The field RSCESCCH identifies the character to use. The
default is a colon (:).
■ PF key: The field RCSESCPF identifies the PF key to use. The default is
PF12.
7-2 User Guide

7.2 Qualifying the Data to be Printed

This section describes many of the PRINT command operands that you can use
to control how your data are printed. For a detailed description of all the
operands, see the Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive Environment Command
Reference Guide.
7.2.1 Controlling Sequence Numbers

Use the NUM or NONUM operands of the PRINT command to designate
whether the Advantage CA-Roscoe-generated sequence numbers are to be
printed. For example, to print the contents of the active AWS and have
sequence numbers included in columns 1 through 6, you would enter:
PRINT NUM
If you do not specify either of these operands when printing:

■ The contents of the active AWS, the current AWS sequence number
attribute controls whether sequence numbers are included.
■ An unattached library member, the member's sequence number attribute
controls whether sequence numbers are included.
■ An attached data set object, job output file or library member/Selection
List, the current display format governs whether sequence numbers are
included (for example, if SET DISPLAY NUM is in effect, sequence
numbers are included).
■ Screen display, no sequence numbers are included.
7.2.2 Formatting the Printed Data

You can use the CAPS, TYPE and FORMAT operands to format the data to be
printed.
CAPS Operand:
CAPS causes alphabetic characters in the data to be printed in uppercase

characters. For example:
PRINT INVLIST CAPS
prints any alphabetic characters in the library member named INVLIST in

uppercase. (The data itself is not changed.)

TYPE Operand:
TYPE can be used to designate which printer control characters are to be

recognized, where:
TYPE ANS Recognizes ANSI control characters.
TYPE DEF Recognizes Advantage CA-Roscoe formatting
pseudo-commands. (This is the default.)
TYPE MCC Recognizes machine control characters.
When TYPE DEF is in effect, you can use:

■ Advantage CA-Roscoe formatting pseudo-commands with data that is in
the active AWS. These commands, which must begin in column 1, include:
.SK v or To include v number of blank li
:SK v output.
.TOP or :TOP To force a new page.
■ The TM and BM operands to change the site-defined top and bottom
margins, respectively. For example, if you want to begin printing six lines
from the top of the page (for example, have five blank lines precede the
data) and stop printing nine lines from the bottom, you would enter:
PRINT TYPE DEF TM 5 BM 9
Notes:
– Use the PRINT DEVICE command to determine the default and
current top and bottom margins.
– The left and right margins are determined by the placement of the
data. In the following screen, for example, the data extends from
columns 5 through 53.
PRINT Command: Using Formatting Pseudo-Commands
PRINT TYPE DEF_

>
> AWS(PRI.INVLIST1) SCRL FULL COLS 1 72
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5...
================================ T O P ==============
1 This data illustrates the use of the formatting
2 pseudo-commands.
3 :p.
4 The preceding .SK 2 command causes two blank
5 lines to be inserted in the printed output.
6 :TOP
7 The :TOP command causes a page EJECT to occur.
8
9 The pseudo-commands must begin in the first posi-
1 tion of a line and be the only data on that line.
7-4 User Guide

FORMAT Operand:
FORMAT can be used to specify the desired data format, where:

FORMAT DUMP Each line is formatted with offsets, hexadecimal data and
EBCDIC data to the right of the line.
FORMAT CHEX Each line is formatted with offsets and hexadecimal data to
the right of the line.
FORMAT VHEX Each line is formatted in character data with hexadecimal
data shown vertically below.
7.2.3 Naming and Referencing Print Requests

When you execute the PRINT command, the data are scheduled for printing
and an information message is displayed. The message contains:
RPS1 REQUEST tag, number SCHEDULED FOR LOCATION id
where:
tag Optional name that you can assign to the print request.
number Print request number assigned by Advantage CA-Roscoe.
id Location at which the request is scheduled for printing.
Note: A print request is any data that you direct to a system or 328x-type
printer.
7.2.3.1 Naming Print Requests
You can assign a name (referred to as a tag) to a print request. If included, the
tag must be one- to eight- characters in length, begin with an alphabetic
character, and be bound by apostrophes, as in:
PRINT 'MASTER' DSN
Here, the name MASTER is assigned to the print request that prints the
contents of the currently attached data set object.
7.2.3.2 Referencing Print Requests
To reference a scheduled print request (that is, to hold a request), you must
include either the Advantage CA-Roscoe-assigned request number or the
user-assigned tag name with the appropriate command. See 7.4, “Controlling
and Monitoring Print Requests” for additional information.

7.2.4 Printing Multiple Copies

You can use the COPY operand of the PRINT command to specify how many
copies of the request are to be printed. (If the operand is omitted, one copy is
printed.) For example, to print four copies of the member named INVLIST,
enter:
PRINT INVLIST COPY 4
7.2.5 Printing Selected Lines/Columns

You can limit a print request to include only the data appearing within a
selected range of lines or columns.
7.2.5.1 Limiting Lines
■ To print a range of lines within the active AWS, include the appropriate
starting and ending line numbers with the command, as in:
PRINT 1 5
■ To print a range of lines within an attached data set object, job output file
or library member, specify the appropriate line numbers after identifying
the data to be printed, as in:
PRINT JOB 1 5
■ When printing data from multiple sources, identify the data to be printed
and the appropriate line numbers, as in:
PRINT INVLIST 6 1 AWS 12 23 DSN 1 5
■ To print any display that does not include line numbers (like the current
screen display or a Data Set Facility Selection List), assume that the data
are numbered from one by one. To print the first ten lines of the current
screen display,
PRINT SCREEN 1 1
7.2.5.2 Limiting Columns
You can also limit a print request to include only the data appearing within
specific columns.
■ If the display includes a Scale Line (like the active AWS, a library member,
attached job output file or data set object), use the Scale Line values to
determine the appropriate column numbers. For example, if you enter:
PRINT JOB COLS 1 3
only the data appearing within column 10 through 30 will be included in
the print request.
7-6 User Guide

■ If the display does not include a Scale Line (like the current screen
display), the left-most displayed position is assumed to be column one. If
you enter:
PRINT SCREEN COLS 1 1
only the data appearing in the first ten positions on the screen are included
in the print request.
7.2.6 Requesting Completion Notification

Site management has the option of allowing you to receive a message at your
terminal when your print request has printed. If your site is using this facility,
you can override your site default for:
■ A specific request using the NOTIFY or NONOTIFY operand. For example,
if your site default prohibits notification messages, you can use the
NOTIFY operand to override this setting for a specific request, as in:
PRINT INVLIST NOTIFY
■ For your terminal session using the modifiable STATUS SESSION display
or the SET RPSNOTIFY command.
In the following example, SET RPSNOTIFY ON will display notification

messages when the first two requests are printed. The NONOTIFY operand
will prohibit the message when the third request is printed.
SET RPSNOTIFY ON
PRINT
PRINT INVLIST
PRINT NONOTIFY
7.2.7 Using a System Printer

In addition to the facilities described thus far, you can use the following
PRINT command operands when directing data to a system printer:
■ CLASS Operand:
CLASS can be used to designate which print class is to be used, as in:
PRINT JOB CLASS A
If you do not specify a print class, your site-defined default is used. (You
can use the PRINT DEVICE command to display information about the
printer and the print classes assigned to it. PRINT DEVICE is described in
7.3.3, “Obtaining Information About Printers.”)
■ BURST Operand:
If the printer supports the burster-trimmer-stacker option, you can use this
operand to have the output burst into separate sheets.
■ FCB Operand:

FCB can be used to specify the Forms Control Buffer to be used when
producing the output, as in:
PRINT JOB FCB B6
7-8 User Guide

7.3 Controlling Printing Locations

Printing locations are defined by your site management, and consist of one or
more 328x-type printers or a system printer. Your management can associate
multiple printing locations with each terminal.
When you issue the PRINT command, your data are directed to the default
printing location associated with your terminal.
7.3.1 Changing a Printing Location

The majority of time, you will want to print your data at the default printing
location associated with your terminal. There may be occasions, however,
when you want to print data at a different location (like at a system printer
location if your default is a 328x-type printer location or at another 328x-type
printer location).
You can change your printing location for a single request or for the remainder
of your terminal session.
7.3.1.1 Changing for a Single Request
To specify an alternate location for a single request, use the DEST operand
with the PRINT command. For example, to print the contents of the active
AWS at the location identified as PR05, you would enter:
PRINT DEST PR5
7.3.1.2 Changing for the Session
Use the SET RPSDEST command to alter the default printing location for the
duration of your terminal session (or until you execute another SET RPSDEST
command). For example, to change the default printing location to PR12, you
would enter:
SET RPSDEST PR12 2
7.3.2 Displaying Printing Location Information

You can get information about your site-defined printing locations.
■ To display a list of all printing locations associated with your terminal,
enter:
PRINT LOCATION
The first displayed location is the default location assigned to your
terminal. The current printing location (which is either the default or an
alternate you assigned) is preceded by an asterisk.
■ To display information about your default printing location, enter:

PRINT LOCATION
The resulting display provides information about the location where your
print requests are normally directed. The information shows, for example,
the maximum number of lines and copies you can print at that location.
When you issue the command:
STATUS SESSION
the field RPSDEST contains the name of your current (or default) printing
location.
■ To display information about a specific location, enter the command
followed by the name of that location. For example, if you entered:
PRINT LOCATION PR17
Information associated with the printing location identified as PR17 is
displayed.
7.3.3 Obtaining Information About Printers

To list the printers defined to Advantage CA-Roscoe, enter:
PRINT DEVICE
To display information about a specific printer, enter:

PRINT DEVICE printer-name
where printer-name is the name your site has assigned to that printer.
The display includes such information as the:

■ Current and default top and bottom margins
■ Current and default page length and width
Note: If you need to use a non-standard size paper (like the paper width
and/or length differs from the default), include the PW and PL
operands with the PRINT command. For example, if you are using
paper that allows only 50 print lines where each line can contain a
maximum of 40 characters, you would enter:
PRINT PL 5 PW 4
7-10 User Guide

7.4 Controlling and Monitoring Print Requests

This section describes a variety of ways you can control data that is scheduled
for printing.
7.4.1 Cancelling Request(s)

If, after scheduling a request, you decide that you do not want the request
printed, you can terminate it through the PRINT CANCEL command. For
example, to cancel a request that has been assigned the number 598, you
would enter:
PRINT CANCEL 598
You can use the tag name in place of the request number, as in:
PRINT CANCEL MASTER
To terminate all of your own outstanding requests, enter:

PRINT CANCEL ALL
7.4.2 Displaying Print Request Status

Whether you use the notification facility (described in the section Requesting
Completion Notification), you can monitor the progress of your print requests
using the PRINT STATUS command.
To check the status of all of your outstanding print requests, you can enter
either:
PRINT STATUS or PRINT STATUS ALL
To check the status of a particular request, you must include the tag or print
request number of the desired request. For example, to check the status of a
print request whose tag name is MASTER, enter:
PRINT STATUS MASTER
To check the status of the print request assigned the number 278, enter:
PRINT STATUS 278

7.4.3 Holding/Releasing Request(s)

You can use the PRINT HOLD command to hold any of your outstanding
print request(s). To hold a request, specify its assigned request number or tag
name. For example, to hold the request assigned the tag name of MASTER,
you would enter:
PRINT HOLD MASTER
To hold all of your outstanding print requests, you would enter:

PRINT HOLD ALL
Having held one or more requests, you can release them using the PRINT
RELEASE command, as in:
PRINT RELEASE MASTER
or
PRINT RELEASE 598
or
PRINT RELEASE ALL
You can use PRINT HOLD and PRINT RELEASE to rearrange the priorities of
your own print requests. The steps you follow are:
1. Hold all of your outstanding requests at the appropriate location.
2. Release the print request you want printed first, then release your
remaining print requests.
7.4.4 Rerouting Request(s)

As long as a print request is outstanding (for example, it has not started to
print), you can change the location at which it is to be printed. For example, to
reroute the request named ABC from location PRT01 to PRT12, you would
enter:
PRINT ROUTE DEST PRT1 TO PRT12 'ABC'
This example assumes that the terminal's default printing location is PRT01
and that ABC was implicitly scheduled to print at that location. If you reroute
a held request, the request is automatically released.
7-12 User Guide

Chapter 8. Selecting a Screen Format
This chapter describes the basic format of the screen displayed during an
Advantage CA-Roscoe session. It also discusses how you can:
■ Split the screen, (allowing two concurrent Advantage CA-Roscoe
subsessions)
■ Lock the screen by invoking the Terminal Lock Facility
Chapter 8. Selecting a Screen Format 8-1

8.1 Screen Format Description

As illustrated in the following example the Advantage CA-Roscoe screen is
segmented into a Command Area 1, System Control Area 2, and Execution
Area 3.
ROSCOE Screen Format
_

1
>
> AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS 1 72 2
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
================================ T O P ======================
3
4
6
7 CONFIGURATION SECTION.
8 SOURCE-COMPUTER. IBM-381.
9 OBJECT-COMPUTER. IBM-381.
1 3
11 INPUT-OUTPUT SECTION.
12 FILE-CONTROL.
13 SELECT INVENTORY-FILE
14 ASSIGN TO UT-S-SYSIN.
15 SELECT INVENTORY-REPORT
16 ASSIGN TO UT-S-SYSPRINT.

Note: This screen and all others shown in this manual are representations of
the actual screens. The screen widths are modified to allow them to fit
within the margins of this manual. This results in an abbreviated
System Information and Scale Line.
8.1.1 The Command Area

By default, the Command Area comprises the first three lines of the screen.
You can change the number of lines by specifying a value between 1 and 3
with the SET CMDLINES command.
This area is where you enter all primary commands, Monitor commands and
RPF program names. You can enter one or more commands or program names
per line. (See Chapter 2, “Commands and Command Components” for
additional information about entering commands in this area.)
8-2 User Guide

8.1.2 The System Control Area

The System Control Area consists of the following three lines:
1. Response Line
This protected line is used to display informational and error messages.
The right side of this line is also used to identify what may be pending
(for example, data that is attached but not currently displayed). The
PENDING message is preceded by one or more of the following codes:
D Data Set Facility is pending.
E Application executing under ETSO is suspended.
J Job output is pending.
L Library Facility is pending.
Sv Full-screen split has occurred. v will be 1 or 2 indicating which
full-screen split is pending.
T ETSO Subtask is active.
2. System Information Line
The System Information Line is used to display information about the
currently displayed data. (The line is blank when data are not being
displayed.) This line consists of:
The Name Field
This protected field identifies the data currently displayed. The
information is presented in one of the following formats:
AWS() or AWS(pfx.mem)
The contents of an AWS is displayed. The data is
modified. If it is unnamed (the data has not been
FETCHed from the library or SAVEd in it), only bounding
parentheses are shown. If the data are named, the prefixed
member name is placed between the parentheses.
DSN() dsn A data set object is displayed. The data are not modifiable;
portions of selection lists and function panels are
modifiable. The fully qualified name of the data set object
is shown on the line below this keyword.
HLP(..HELP..) A HELP member is displayed. It is not modifiable.
JOB(name, no) Job output is displayed. The data are not modifiable. The
job name and number are bound by parentheses following
the keyword.
LIB(pfx.mem) Library facility data are displayed. The displayed member
is not modifiable; portions of the selection list and
function panels are modifiable. When a member is

displayed, its prefixed name, bound by parentheses,

follows the keyword.
STA(name, no) Information about the currently attached job output is
displayed. Portions of the display are modifiable.
The right side of the display might also contain:
A<name> An AWS is attached. Its name is bound by < and >.
PGM(pfx.mem)
An RPF program is executing. PGM is followed by the
prefixed name of the library member containing the
executing program.
PAU(pfx.mem) An RPF program is executing and is in a pause state. PAU
is followed by the prefixed name of the library member
containing the executing program.
The SCRL Field
This modifiable field contains the value used by the PF keys that are
assigned scrolling functions. You can change this value at any time by
issuing the SET SCROLL command, or by positioning the cursor to the
start of this field and entering one of the values shown in the following
table.
Permanent Scroll Action Taken When Key Pressed

Value Direction
FULL Forward/Backward Scroll one line less than the number
of lines in the Execution Area.
Left/Right Scroll the width of the screen.
FRAM or Forward/Backward Scroll the number of lines in the
Page Execution Area.
HALF Forward/Backward Scroll one-half the number of lines in
the Execution Area.
CSR Forward/Backward Scroll to begin or end the display
with the line containing the cursor.
Left/Right Scroll to begin or end the display
with the column containing the
cursor.
v Forward/Backward Scroll the specified number of lines
(v may be 1 through 9999.)
8-4 User Guide

Note that the display is unchanged if you attempt to scroll:

■ Forward or backward, and there are not a sufficient number of lines to
begin or end the display with the designated line.
■ Left or right, and there are not a sufficient number of characters in the
appropriate direction to begin or end the line with the designated
column.
The following chart shows the temporary values that you can type in the
SCRL field.
Temporary Scroll Action Taken When Key Pressed

Value Direction
MAX Forward/Backward Scroll the display to the first or last
line of the data.
Left/Right Scroll the display to the first or last
column of the data.
PFv Forward/Backward, Execute the function assigned to the
Left/Right designated PF key.
The previous SCRL field value is restored after MAX or PFn is executed.

The COLS Field

This modifiable field contains numbers representing the left and right
display margins. By default, the values are set to the maximum width
permitted by the display format and type of terminal being used.
To change the margins, you can: 1) use the SET DISPLAY command, or 2)
position the cursor to the appropriate field and overtype the current value
with the new.
Note: Leading zeros are not required. If omitted, eliminate the old value
so that the field contains only the new margin value.)
For additional information, see Chapter 5, “Defining the Display Format.”
3. The Scale Line
The last line in the System Control Area is reserved for the Scale Line. This
protected line reflects the current display margins. For example, if the left
display margin is 7, the displayed data begins with column 7. The Scale
Line also begins with 7 and is aligned over the first displayed position.
When appropriate, special characters are placed on the Scale Line. They
are:
<> Indicating the current left and right search boundaries.
¬ Indicating tab positions. The default tab character is ¬. If a
different character is being used, that character will appear on
the Scale Line.
* Indicating the location of both a search boundary and tab
position.
8.1.3 The Execution Area

The remaining lines on the screen are used to enter, edit and display data.
These lines are referred to as the Execution Area. The actual number and
length of the displayed lines depends on the type of terminal being used.
When an AWS is attached, line commands can be used to enter and modify
the displayed data. (For additional information about using line commands,
see Chapter 2, “Commands and Command Components.”)
8-6 User Guide

8.2 Splitting the Screen

You can divide the physical terminal screen into two logical presentation areas
by performing a:
■ Partial-screen split - both presentation areas are displayed, or
■ Full-screen split - the active presentation area fills the screen.
When the screen is split, each presentation area represents a single Advantage
CA-Roscoe subsession. Each subsession is allocated its own AWS and can be
used to perform any command or function handled through the single display
format. These subsessions allow you to have two simultaneous independent
Advantage CA-Roscoe sessions. (If there is a site sign-on program or if you
have a sign-on program, these programs are executed each time you split the
screen.)
When you split the physical screen into two logical presentation areas, each
screen contains:
■ A Command Area, consisting of one to three lines. (Use the SET
CMDLINES command to specify the number of lines comprising this area.)
■ A System Control Area, containing a Response Line, System Information
Line and Scale Line.
■ An Execution Area, containing the maximum number of lines allowed as
determined by the type of split screen you invoked.
The minimum size of a presentation area is 11 lines. The maximum size is

determined by the type of screen split being requested.
8.2.1 Invoking a Full-Screen Split

To request a full-screen split (as illustrated in the following example) position
the cursor to the last line of the current screen and press PF1 or PF13. The
screen is split and the new presentation area fills the entire screen. An Sv
PENDING message identifies the other presentation area that can be recalled at
any time.
Note: PF1 or PF13 are the Advantage CA-Roscoe default PF key settings to
split the screen.

Full-Screen Split - Before

>
> <....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
...... ================================= T O P ======================
1 AAAAA
...... ============================== B O T T O M ===================
Full Screen Split -- After
-
> S1 PENDING
>
>....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7
To cause a full-screen split when a partial-screen split is currently in effect,

move the cursor to the last line of the appropriate presentation area and press
PF1 or PF13. That presentation expands to to fill the terminal screen.
Alternate Full-Screen Split
If an RPF program or another application (like ETSO or CA-eMAIL+) is in

control of the terminal, you can request a full-screen split by entering:
:S
in any unprotected field of the screen and pressing PF12. (The cursor must
immediately follow the command.) Note that the colon and PF key
assignment are the Advantage CA-Roscoe defaults. Use the STATUS SYSTEM
command to determine if your site management has changed these defaults.
8-8 User Guide

8.2.2 Invoking a Partial-Screen Split

When a partial-screen split is invoked, both presentation areas are displayed.
As illustrated in the following example, they are separated by a protected,
highlighted line containing asterisks. The cursor is placed in the Command
Area of the lower screen.
Continuing the previous example, if you want to:

■ divide the screen equally:
Position the cursor within the first or last 11 lines of the physical screen or
to the middle line of the screen and press PF1 or PF13. (If you position the
cursor to the last line, a full-screen split is invoked when you press the PF
key.)
Partial-Screen Split
>

> <....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
...... ================================= T O P =======================
1 AAAAA
...... ============================== B O T T O M ====================

_
>
>
>....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7

If the physical screen contains an even number of lines, the upper
presentation area will contain one more line than the lower presentation
area.
■ divide the screen unequally:
Position the cursor to any line other than those used to perform an equal-
or full-screen split and press PF1 or PF13. (For example, if you position
the cursor to the thirteenth line of a 43-line terminal screen and press PF1
or PF13, the upper screen will contain 12 lines, the separator will be on the
thirteenth line and the lower presentation area will use the remaining lines.

8.2.3 Resplitting Screens

With one exception, you can change the size of the presentation areas after the
initial split by resplitting the screen. (The exception is that resplitting is not
valid when a :S or :W was used to create the current display.)
To resplit, press PF1 or PF13 after moving the cursor to:

■ The last line of a presentation area to cause a full-screen split.
■ Within the first or last 11 lines of a presentation area to cause an equal
partial-screen split.
■ Any other line to cause an unequal partial-screen split.
Note that you cannot change the screen size if an RPF program executing in
either presentation area contains the command SET SCREEN NOMODIFY.
8.2.4 Swapping Active Screens

Only one presentation area is active at a time. The active area is the one
containing the cursor. When you press the Enter key or a PF/PA key, terminal
input is read from the active presentation area. Commands or PF/PA key
functions are executed in only the active area. Any data or commands that
you have typed in the inactive presentation area remain displayed. No action
is taken in the inactive screen.
When a partial-screen split is in effect, use the cursor positioning keys to move
the cursor from one area to the other, the new presentation area becomes
active; the old presentation area is inactive.
■ If the newly activated presentation area is less than three-fourths the size
of the deactivated presentation area, the sizes of the two areas are
interchanged.
■ If the cursor is positioned to the line separating the two areas, both
presentation areas are considered inactive.
You can activate one presentation area while deactivating the other by pressing
PF2 or PF14, the Advantage CA-Roscoe default PF-key assignments for
swapping. This bounces the cursor from the active presentation area to the
inactive area. Thus, activating the new area.
When a full-screen split is in effect, pressing PF2 or PF14 causes the logical
screens to be bounced, where the new screen contains the cursor and is, thus,
the active screen.
8-10 User Guide

Alternate Full-Screen Swap
When a full-screen split is in effect and an RPF program or another application

(like ETSO or CA-eMAIL+) is in control of the terminal, you can swap the
logical screens by entering:
:W
8.2.5 Terminating Split Screens

To terminate full- or partial-split screens, press PF3 or PF15, the Advantage
CA-Roscoe default PF-key assignments for END. The presentation area:
■ Containing the cursor is terminated.
■ Not containing the cursor becomes the active presentation area and
expands to fill the screen.
You can end your Advantage CA-Roscoe session while the screens are split by
entering OFF or OFFON in either presentation area.
If, when you terminate split screens or sign-off Advantage CA-Roscoe, there is
data in an AWS with a RECOVERABLE attribute, it is saved in a library
member named SAVAWSnn, where nn is a unique identifier.
Alternate Full-Screen Split Termination
If a full-screen split is in effect and an RPF program or another application

(like ETSO or CA-eMAIL+) is in control of the terminal, you can terminate
split screen processing by entering:
:E

8.3 Changing the Screen Size
8.3 Changing the Screen Size

Depending on how 3270-type terminals are defined at your site, you may be
able to change the size of the physical or logical Advantage CA-Roscoe screen
by issuing the SCREEN command. For example,
SCREEN FLIP
allows you to bounce between the terminal's primary and alternate screen
sizes. Additional operands of this command permit you to switch to a specific
size, as in:
SCREEN 2
which changes the screen size to 24 rows by 80 columns. See the Advantage
CA-Roscoe Interactive Environment Command Reference Guide for additional
information about using this command.
8-12 User Guide

8.4 Locking the Screen

There may be times when you need to leave your terminal for a few minutes
and do not want to sign off or allow anyone to access your session. At these
times, you can use the SET TLOCK command to activate the Terminal Lock
Facility. For example, if you enter:
SET TLOCK NOW
the terminal lock screen (as illustrated in the following example) is displayed.
Terminal Lock Screen
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
||||| TLO1 TERMINAL LOCKED ||||||||
||||| ||||||||
||||| KEY your-key DATE 9/19/94 ||||||||
||||| TERMID terminal-id TIME 14.35.5 ||||||||
||||| APPLID application-id VERSION 6. ||||||||
||||| ||||||||
||||| To continue enter password => ||||||||
||||| To terminate enter 'OFF' => ||||||||
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
||||||||| ||||| ||||| || ||| ||||| |||||
|||||||| || |||| || ||||| ||||||||| |||||| || ||||| ||||||||||
|||CA-| || |||| || ||||| ||||||||| |||||| || ||||| |||||||||||
|||||| |||| || ||||| ||| |||||| || ||||| ||||||||
||||| ||| |||| || ||||||||||| ||| |||||| || ||||| |||||||||||||
|||| ||| ||| || ||||||||||| ||| |||||| || ||||| ||||||||||||||
||| ||| ||| ||| ||| || ||||| |||||||||
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

When this screen is displayed, you must enter either your Advantage
CA-Roscoe password (to resume your session) or the OFF command (to
terminate your session).
Note: The Terminal Lock Facility is not available if you have no Advantage
CA-Roscoe password, are using a typewriter device, or are accessing
Advantage CA-Roscoe through a terminal defined to CICS.

There are two other ways the Terminal Lock Screen can be displayed.
1. When an RPF program or another application (like ETSO or CA-EMAIL+)
is in control of the terminal, you can force the Terminal Lock screen by:
■ Checking the STATUS SYSTEM display to verify the site-defined
escape character prefix (identified by the RCSESCCH field) and PF key
(identified by the RCSESCPF field).
■ Assuming the defaults are in effect, entering in any unprotected field
of the display:
:L
and pressing PF12. (The cursor must immediately follow the command
:L.)
2. Site management can force the terminal to be locked if there is no activity
for a site-specified period of time. (If the Advantage CA-Roscoe Automatic
Signoff Facility is in use when the Terminal Lock screen is displayed, you
will be signed off Advantage CA-Roscoe if there is no terminal activity
within the site-specified time period.)
To display or change the site-defined time periods, issue the commands:

STATUS SYSTEM To display the site-defined default and maximum
inactivity periods. If your site management is not using
the facility, it is noted on this display. (The
AUTTLOCK values provide information about the
Terminal Lock Facility; the AUTOFF values provide
information about the Automatic Signoff Facility.)
STATUS SESSION To display and alter the current settings, where the
TLOCK field is for the Terminal Lock Facility and the
AUTOFF field is for the Automatic Signoff Facility.
In addition to causing the Terminal Lock screen to be displayed, you can use
the SET TLOCK command to: 1) activate the Terminal Lock Facility, if it is
inactive and 2) change the site-defined inactivity period. See the Advantage
CA-Roscoe Interactive Environment Command Reference Guide for additional
information about the SET TLOCK command.
8-14 User Guide

Chapter 9. Sending/Receiving Messages
You can use the SEND command or the BulletinBoard System to direct a
message containing one or more lines to any other Advantage CA-Roscoe user.
Chapter 9. Sending/Receiving Messages 9-1

9.1 Receiving Messages

By default, SEND-related messages are displayed on the Response Line of your
terminal. You can use the SET SEND command to control whether these
messages are to be displayed. For example, if you enter:
SET SEND OPER
only messages sent by the operator are displayed. (Regardless of the setting,
the messages are always added to your library member ZZZZZMSG.)
To permit messages created by the SEND command to be displayed, you

would enter:
SET SEND ALL
If you are signed on and receiving messages when someone sends you a
message and it is a:
■ One-Line Message:
The message is displayed on the Response Line the next time you press the
Enter key or a PF key. As shown in the following example, the message
text is preceded by the sender's prefix.
SEND Command: Receiving a One-Line Message

> pfx RECEIVED YOUR REPORT. THANKS, JOHN
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
■ Multi-Line Message:
The following example illustrates the format of the message you receive
the next time you press the Enter key or a PF key.
9-2 User Guide

SEND Command: Receiving Multi-Line Message Notification
> MSG FROM USERID IN MEMBER: ABC.Z161525 COMMITTEE REPORT

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
The message contains variable information:

key Sender's sign-on key (USERID in the above example)
zmddhhmm Name of the member in your library that contains the
message. This unique name consists of the character z, the
month (in hexadecimal), the day, the hour and the minute
the member was created. In the previous figure the
member Z1061525 was created on January 6 at 3:25 PM. A
member created on October 15 at 9:15 AM would be
named ZA150915 (where the second character, A,
represents the month October in hexadecimal).
string Optional note that the sender included with the SEND
command (for example, COMMITTEE REPORT).
Whether you are signed on or receiving messages, an entry is always added to

the top of the your library member ZZZZZMSG. Each entry consists of two
lines, where the first line indicates the date, time and sender's name. The
second line contains either: 1) the one-line message or 2) the name of the
library member that was created to hold the multi-line message.

9.2 Transmitting Messages

You can direct: 1) a one-line message to the Response Line of another
Advantage CA-Roscoe user's terminal, or 2) a multi-line message to a special
library member in another user's library.
9.2.1 Using the SEND Command

To send a message using the SEND command, you must:
1. Identify the Recipient:
You can use either the sign-on key or prefix of the user to whom you want
to send the message. For example, to send a message to the user whose
sign-on key is JONES, you would enter:
SEND KEY=JONES ...
If JONES' prefix is JNS, you could send the message by entering:
SEND PFX=JNS ...
2. Specify the Message:
If the message is brief (no longer than 64 characters in length), you can
include it with the SEND command itself, as in:
SEND KEY=JONES 'RECEIVED YOUR REPORT. THANKS, JOHN'
The message must be delimited by a special character not found in the
message.
If you want to send a multi-line message, you can place the text in either
the active AWS or a library member. Then, when you issue the SEND
command, you must identify the location of the message, as in:
SEND AWS KEY=JONES
In this example, the keyword AWS identifies the location of the message.
When you send a multi-line message, you can optionally include a note
with the command, as in:
SEND MYREPORT KEY=JONES /COMMITTEE REPORT/
In this case, the contents of the member named MYREPORT is sent to the
recipient identified as JONES. The message displayed on the recipient's
Response Line will include the note COMMITTEE REPORT.
9-4 User Guide

3. Qualify the Message:

There may be occasions when you want to control the transmission or
display of your message. For example,
■ If you want your message transmitted only if the recipient is currently
signed on and accepting messages, you can include the NOW operand
with the command, as in:
SEND KEY=JONES 'MUST SEE YOU IMMEDIATELY' NOW
If the recipient is not signed on or is not receiving messages, you will
receive a message stating that your message was not transmitted.
■ If you want to send a confidential message to another user and not
have it displayed on the user's Response Line, you can include the
NODSPLY operands, as in:
SEND KEY=JONES 'THE PASSWORD IS ABLE' NODSPLY
In this case, the message is written directly to the recipient's library
member ZZZZZMSG.
9.2.2 Using the BulletinBoard System (BBS)

To send a one-line message to another Advantage CA-Roscoe user using the
BulletinBoard System, invoke the ZMsg Mode (PF12) from any BBS screen.
This mode allows you to send messages to other Advantage CA-Roscoe users
and still remain in your BulletinBoard session. These messages are like any
other Advantage CA-Roscoe one-line SEND messages.
Note: See BBS - BulletinBoard System on page 35-1 for more information
about using the ZMsg mode.
On the ZMsg screen, fill in the fields with the appropriate information. Enter
the Advantage CA-Roscoe prefix or the key of the user you are sending the
message to. If the key or prefix does not exist, you will receive an error
message on the Error/Status line. Enter the message text in the Message field.
To send the message, press Enter. The message is sent, and your message field
is immediately updated to include this information. The Status line on the top
of the screen tells you that the message was sent, and to what prefix.

9-6 User Guide
Chapter 10. Signing On and Off Advantage
CA-Roscoe

■ Sign on to Advantage CA-Roscoe.
■ Customize your sign-on process by:
– Creating, changing, or deleting your password
– Creating, changing, or deleting your sign-on program
■ Sign off Advantage CA-Roscoe either explicitly or automatically.
Chapter 10. Signing On and Off Advantage CA-Roscoe 10-1

10.1 Signing On
10.1 Signing On
In addition to describing the Advantage CA-Roscoe sign-on screen, this section
provides information about how to bypass the sign-on screen when signing on
from VTAM terminals or accessing Advantage CA-Roscoe from CICS
terminals, a TSO session or another Advantage CA-Roscoe.
10.1.1 Using the Advantage CA-Roscoe Sign-on Screen

When the Advantage CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is displayed at a 3270-type
terminal, the current date and time are shown on the right side of the screen.
The version of Advantage CA-Roscoe being executed is displayed in the lower
right-hand corner of the screen.
The following example illustrates the Advantage CA-Roscoe sign-on screen

that is displayed at 3270-type terminals.

>APPLID(A4IROS3)
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|||| |||||||
|||| |||||||
|||| KEY _ DATE 9/19/92 |||||||
|||| PASSWORD TIME 14.35.49 |||||||
|||| GROUP CODE TERMID A1IX17 |||||||
|||| NEW PASSWORD > |||||||
|||| > (Repeat for verification) |||||||
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|||||||| ||||| ||||| ||| ||| ||||| |||||
||||||| || |||| || ||||| ||||||||| |||||| || ||||| ||||||||||
||CA-| || |||| || ||||| ||||||||| |||||| || ||||| |||||||||||
||||| |||| || ||||| ||| |||||| || ||||| ||||||||
|||| ||| |||| || ||||||||||| ||| |||||| || ||||| ||||Ver 6.||
||| ||| ||| || ||||||||||| ||| |||||| || ||||| ||||Glvl 944|
|| ||| ||| ||| ||| || ||||| |||||||||
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|||| COPYRIGHT (C) 1994 COMPUTER ASSOCIATES INTERNATIONAL, INC. ||||||
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

To sign on to Advantage CA-Roscoe, complete the following fields:
KEY (Required.) Enter the sign-on key assigned to you by
site management. The cursor is positioned to this field
when the sign-on screen is displayed.
PASSWORD (May be required.) Enter your password if you have
been assigned one.
A password protects you against unauthorized access.
Thus, for security reasons, your password is not
displayed when you enter it.
10-2 User Guide

10.1 Signing On
GROUP CODE (Optional.) Enter the appropriate information.

This field provides a way for you to enter additional
security information requested by your site management.
Data entered in this field is not displayed.
NEW PASSWORD (Optional.) Enter a new password, if appropriate. To
verify that you have spelled your password correctly,
reenter it on the next line.
See 10.2.1, “Changing/Creating a Password” for
After completing the appropriate fields, press the Enter key to have the
information transmitted to Advantage CA-Roscoe. As soon as you are signed
on:
■ The system sign-on message is displayed, if established by your site
management.
■ The system sign-on program is executed, if established by your site
management.
■ Your sign-on program is executed, if you have created one.
10.1.2 Accessing Advantage CA-Roscoe from VTAM Terminals

If the Advantage CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is not displayed, you must enter a
VTAM application ID to establish contact with Advantage CA-Roscoe.
Your site management will tell you what application ID to use. If the ID is, for
example, ROSCOE, you can display the Advantage CA-Roscoe sign-on screen
by entering:
ROSCOE
and pressing the Enter key. You can now sign on as described earlier.
You can bypass the Advantage CA-Roscoe sign-on screen by entering sign-on
information with the VTAM application ID. To do this, you would use the
format:
──applid──signonkey──┬─────────────────────────────┬──────────
└─/password─┬─────────────┬─/─┘
└─/group-code─┘
Examples:
If your sign-on key is SMITH and you have no password or group code, you
would enter:
ROSCOE SMITH

10.1 Signing On
If you sign-on key is SMITH and your password is MYPASS, you would enter:
ROSCOE SMITH/MYPASS
If any of the sign-on information is incorrect, the Advantage CA-Roscoe

sign-on screen is displayed and all sign-on information must be reentered.
10.1.3 Accessing Advantage CA-Roscoe Through XTPM

XTPM (External Teleprocessing Monitor) is a component of Advantage
CA-Roscoe that allows users to access Advantage CA-Roscoe from terminals
defined to CICS/VS, TSO, or another Advantage CA-Roscoe.
10.1.3.1 Advantage CA-Roscoe From Advantage CA-Roscoe
You can sign on to one Advantage CA-Roscoe from another Advantage

CA-Roscoe at any time using the ETSO CALL command in the form:
──CALL──prog──┬────────────────────┬──┬────────────┬──────────
└─signonkey/password─┘ └─ROSID=code─┘
where prog is the name of an Advantage CA-Roscoe XTPM Interface module.

Note: The target Advantage CA-Roscoe must be the same release as the host
Advantage CA-Roscoe (the one from which you are invoking sign-on.)
You cannot sign on to an Advantage CA-Roscoe of another release
level.
For example, if your sign-on key is MYSIGNON and your password is MINE,
you might enter:
CALL ROSXROS 'MYSIGNON/MINE'
See Appendix B of the Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive Environment Installation

Guide for detailed instructions on installing the Advantage CA-Roscoe XTPM
Interface module.
Notes:
■ If you do not enter your sign-on key and password, either:
– The information is provided by your site security system and the
Advantage CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is bypassed
– The Advantage CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is displayed
■ There is an optional user group code:
– If specified explicitly, will be passed to the target Advantage
CA-Roscoe.
10-4 User Guide

10.1 Signing On
– If specified implicitly with an asterisk (*), the user group code from
your current Advantage CA-Roscoe session will be passed to the target
– If your site security system is providing the sign-on information, the
user group code from your current Advantage CA-Roscoe session will
be passed to the target Advantage CA-Roscoe.
■ ROSID= allows you to designate which Advantage CA-Roscoe you want to
sign on to. You may omit ROSID= if:
– Your site is executing a single Advantage CA-Roscoe, or
– You have no preference as to which Advantage CA-Roscoe you are
signed on to when your site is executing multiple Advantage
CA-Roscoe systems.
If your site is executing multiple Advantage CA-Roscoe systems, it is possible

to bounce between the host and target systems. For example, assume that:
■ You are currently executing on a host Advantage CA-Roscoe identified as
ROS1. The RCS escape character is a semi-colon (;) and the RCS escape PF
key is PF12 (as identified by the RCSESCCH and RCSESCPF field of the
STATUS SYSTEM display).
■ You want to begin a session on a target Advantage CA-Roscoe identified
as ROSA. Its RCS escape character is the colon (:) and its RCS escape PF
key is PF12.
First, create a full-screen split. In the new screen, enter the CALL command
with the appropriate program name and identify the target Advantage
CA-Roscoe, as in:
──CALL──prog──┬──────────────────────┬──ROSID=ROSA────────────
└─signonkey──/password─┘
You are now signed on to the Advantage CA-Roscoe identified as ROSA. To

bounce back to the ROS1, your host Advantage CA-Roscoe, enter: '; (Host
Advantage CA-Roscoe RCS Escape Character)'
;W
and press PF12, where the ; is defined as the host Advantage CA-Roscoe RCS
escape character.
When you are returned to ROS1, the ETSO application is viewed as

suspended. You can execute Advantage CA-Roscoe commands, RPF programs,
and so on. You can swap back to the target Advantage CA-Roscoe at any time
to continue your session on ROSA.

10.1 Signing On
Since the target Advantage CA-Roscoe has a different RCS escape character, it
is possible to request a full-screen split on that Advantage CA-Roscoe. This
gives you four Advantage CA-Roscoe screens, two on the host and two on the
target. It is also possible for you to access yet another Advantage CA-Roscoe
from the target.
When you end your target Advantage CA-Roscoe session you are returned to
your host Advantage CA-Roscoe session.
As can be seen by the preceding example, it is possible for you to access

multiple Advantage CA-Roscoes from a single terminal.
10.1.3.2 Advantage CA-Roscoe From CICS Terminals
From a terminal defined to CICS/VS, you can sign on to Advantage

CA-Roscoe through: 1) a menu-driven or formatted site-defined screen, or 2)
by entering a site-defined transaction ID.
When using a transaction ID, the sign-on format is:
──transid──┬──────────────────────────┬──┬────────────┬───────
└─signonkey─┬───────────┬──┘ └─ROSID=code─┘
└─/password─┘
For example, if the Advantage CA-Roscoe transaction ID is ROSC, your

sign-on key is MYSIGNON and your password is MINE, you might enter:
ROSC MYSIGNON/MINE
Notes:
■ See the Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive Environment Installation Guide for
complete information about setting up CICS interface modules and
TRANSID resources.
– The information is provided by your site security system and, thus, the
Advantage CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is bypassed, or
– The Advantage CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is displayed.
sign on to. You can omit ROSID= if:
CA-Roscoe systems.
When you end your Advantage CA-Roscoe session, you are returned to CICS.
10-6 User Guide

10.1 Signing On
10.1.3.3 Advantage CA-Roscoe From TSO
From the TSO READY prompt or from ISPF/PDF Option 6, you can access
Advantage CA-Roscoe using the sign-on format:
──cpid──┬──────────────────────────┬──┬──────────────────┬────
└─signonkey─┬───────────┬──┘ └─ROSID=─┬──────┬──┘
└─/password─┘ └─code─┘
where cpid is the name of a site-defined TSO Command Processor. For

example, if the TSO Command Processor for Advantage CA-Roscoe is ROSF,
your sign-on key is MYSIGNON and your password is MINE, you might
enter:
ROSF MYSIGNON/MINE
Notes:
– The information is provided by your site security system and, thus, the
Advantage CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is bypassed, or
– The Advantage CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is displayed.
sign on to. You may omit ROSID= if:
CA-Roscoe systems.
When you end your Advantage CA-Roscoe session, you are returned to TSO.
WARNING:
The TSO restriction on the use of PA1 is applicable during your Advantage
CA-Roscoe session. If you should press the PA1 key, it is ignored.

10.2 Customizing Sign On

This section describes how you can create, change or delete your Advantage
CA-Roscoe password and sign-on program. Note that your site management
may restrict your ability to perform some or all of these actions.
10.2.1 Changing/Creating a Password

Your site management has the option of:
■ Requiring you to maintain a password. (This is to protect you against
unauthorized access.)
■ Controlling whether you can change or delete your password.
■ Requiring you to change your password on a periodic basis.
If your site permits you to control your password, you have two different
methods for creating, changed and deleting it.
Method 1 - When Signing On
You can use the NEW PASSWORD fields on the Advantage CA-Roscoe
sign-on screen to:
■ Create a Password.
Enter your password in the NEW PASSWORD field. To verify that the
password is spelled correctly, reenter it on the next line. The password
must be one to ten characters in length and cannot contain a slash (/) as
one of its characters.
■ Change a Password.
Enter your current password in the PASSWORD field. Then enter your
new password in the NEW PASSWORD field (and on the following line
for verification). The next time you sign on to Advantage CA-Roscoe, your
new password is in effect.
■ Eliminate a Password.
Enter spaces in the NEW PASSWORD field and on the following line.
Method 2 - During a Session

Note: Your site management may prohibit the use of the PASSWORD
primary command. If the use of PASSWORD is not restricted, you can
use it at any time during your terminal session.
10-8 User Guide

You can use the PASSWORD command to:

■ Create a Password.
Enter the command PASSWORD and a one- to ten-character password that
does not contain a slash (/). For example, to establish E637 as your
password, you would enter:
PASSWORD E637
■ Change a Password.
Enter the PASSWORD command followed by the new password. Your
new password will be in effect the next time you sign on.
■ Eliminate a Password.
Enter the command PASSWORD with no operand, as in:
PASSWORD
10.2.2 Creating a Sign-on Program

Note: Site management has the option of designating whether you may
create, change or delete a sign-on program.
A sign-on program consists of one or more Advantage CA-Roscoe commands

that are saved as a library member. If you have a sign-on program, it is
executed every time you sign on to Advantage CA-Roscoe and every time you
split the screen.
A sign-on program is useful when, for example, you want certain Advantage
CA-Roscoe session attributes to always be in effect. Rather than entering the
commands establishing each attribute every time you sign on to Advantage
CA-Roscoe, you can include the commands in a library member and then have
the commands in that member automatically executed for you. (See Chapter 6,
“Displaying Session Attributes/Information” for additional information.)
The following example contains a sample sign-on program. In addition to

using some of the commands that set session attributes, it also changes the
functions assigned to some of the PF keys.

Sample Sign-on Program
SAVE MYSIGN_

>
> AWS( ) SCRL FULL COLS 1 72
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....6....+
...... ================================ T O P =====================
1 <<MYSIGN>>
2 SET MODE XTENDED : Set character translation
3 SET DISPLAY ALL 1 72 NUM : Set display format
4 SET DISPLAY AWS 7 8 NUMX : Set AWS display format
5 TAB $ : Set tab character
6 TAB 16 2 42 : Set tab positions
7 SET ; : Set command delimiter
8 : PF key assignments follow
9 LET AWS.PF13 = '+FETCH +C1+/ATTACH'
1 LET JOB.PF13 = '+ATTACH JOB +C1+'
11 LET DSN.PF13 = '+ATTACH DSN +C1+'
12 LET LIB.PF13 = '+ATTACH +C1+'
13 LET PF14 = '+DETACH +C1+'
14 LET PF15 = '+SCROLL +C1+ +C2+ +C3+'
============================= B O T T O M ==================

When creating a library member that is to be your sign-on program:
■ Only one command may appear per line in the member.
■ The first line in the member should contain the library member name.
If you do include the name, it must be bound by angle brackets (<< and
>>). (Notice line 100 in the previous figure contains <<MYSIGN>>, where
MYSIGN is the name of the member.)
■ Comments may be included in the program.
A comment is indicated by a colon (:) that is preceded and followed by at
least one space. Any words following the colon are treated as comments
and ignored. (Notice the use of comments in the sample sign-on program
in the previous figure.)
To establish or change the member containing your sign-on program, enter the
command SIGNON followed by the appropriate library member name. For
example:
SIGNON MYSIGN
establishes the library member named MYSIGN as your sign-on program.

Once established, the library member remains your sign-on program until you
specify another one or eliminate the existing one.
To eliminate a sign-on program, enter the SIGNON command with no

operand, as in:
SIGNON
10-10 User Guide

Eliminating a sign-on program does not delete the library member. It simply
prevents the commands comprising that member from being executed each
time you sign on to Advantage CA-Roscoe.

10.3 Signing Off
10.3 Signing Off

You can explicitly terminate your session at any time. You or your site may
also use the Advantage CA-Roscoe automatic sign-off facility to terminate a
session that has been inactive for a specified period of time.
If any existing AWS with a RECOVERABLE attribute contains data when you
sign off (or are automatically signed off), the contents of each AWS is saved as
a library member named SAVAWSnn, where nn is a unique ID.
10.3.1 Automatic Signoff

Sites have the option of using the Advantage CA-Roscoe automatic sign-off
facility. When this facility is activated, you are automatically signed off if your
terminal is inactive for a site-specified time period. Most sites set the time
period so that few of their users are affected.
To change the site-defined inactivity period:

■ Use the SET AUTOFF primary command, or
■ Change the modifiable STATUS SESSION display.
The time that you specify may not exceed your site-defined maximum. (Use
the STATUS SYSTEM command to display the site-defined default and
maximum inactivity time periods.)
If your site is not using this facility, it is noted on the STATUS SYSTEM
display. You then have the option of activating and deactivating the facility
using the SET AUTOFF command.
10-12 User Guide

10.3 Signing Off
10.3.2 Explicit Signoff

You have two ways to explicitly terminate your session.
■ To sign off Advantage CA-Roscoe, enter:
OFF
If you are at a VTAM site, you can use operands of this command to
terminate a session and begin another session, bypassing the VTAM logon
screen and Advantage CA-Roscoe sign-on screen. (The Advantage
CA-Roscoe Interactive Environment Command Reference Guide, Reference
Summary Guide and HELP facility described the operands that can be used
with OFF.)
■ To sign off Advantage CA-Roscoe and cause the sign-on prompt screen to
be displayed, enter:
OFFON
If you are using multiple Advantage CA-Roscoe sign-on keys, you can use
the OFFON command to simultaneously sign off under one key and sign
on under another. For example, suppose you are using the two sign-on
keys JONES and BROWN. If you are currently signed on under JONES,
you can terminate your session and start a new session under BROWN by
entering:
OFFON BROWN

10-14 User Guide
Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys
This chapter describes:

■ The default PF/PA key assignments distributed with Advantage
CA-Roscoe.
■ How to use the default assignments, especially when supplying variable
information,
■ The processing hierarchy used to determine the PF/PA key assignment to
be used and then performing that assignment.
■ How to change your PF/PA key assignments.
Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys 11-1

11.1 The Default PF/PA Key Assignments

The following chart shows the PF and PA key assignments provided with
Advantage CA-Roscoe. You will notice that each key can have a maximum of
four unique assignments.
Note: This manual assumes you are using the distributed default PF and PA
key assignments. Your site has the option of using these assignments or
changing them. You also have the option of changing the PF key
assignments.
KEYS AWS DSN JOB LIB

PA1 Ignore Changes same same same
PA2 HELP PFKEYS same same same
ROSCOE
PF1 SPLIT same same same
PF2 SWAP same same same
PF3 END same same same
PF4 ATTACH DSN SELECT C1 ATTACH EXEC PFK4
C1 JOB * FILE
C1
PF5 ATTACH JOB EXEC PFK5 ATTACH EXEC PFK5
C1 C2 C3 JOB * C1 C2
C3
PF6 Reexecute same same same
PF7 SCROLL BACK same same same
C1 C2
PF8 SCROLL same same same
FORWARD C1
C2
PF9 GO same same same
PF10 SCROLL LEFT same same same
C1
PF11 SCROLL RIGHT same same same
C1
PF12 INPUT same same same
PF13 EXEC PFK13 same same same
11-2 User Guide

KEYS AWS DSN JOB LIB

PF18 Reexecute same same same
PF19 SCROLL BACK same same same
C1 C2
PF20 SCROLL same same same
FORWARD C1
C2
PF21 GO same same same
PF22 SCROLL LEFT same same same
C1
PF23 SCROLL RIGHT same same same
C1
PF24 INPUT same same same

11.2 Using PF/PA Keys

A PF or PA key can have a maximum of four unique assignments. The
assignment it performs depends on the type of data currently attached. As
illustrated in the preceding chart a key may perform a different assignment
depending on whether an AWS, a data set, job output file or library member is
attached.
11.2.1 Types of Assignments:

A PF or PA key assignment may be either fixed or variable.
■ Fixed Assignments:
A fixed assignment is complete unto itself. It needs no additional
information to perform its assigned function. For example, PF1 is assigned
the fixed function:
SPLIT
When you press this key, your physical Advantage CA-Roscoe screen is
split into two logical screens. If PF1 were assigned the function:
SCROLL FORWARD 1 LINES
your display would be repositioned ten lines forward every time you
pressed this key.
■ Variable Assignments:
A variable assignment lets you supply variable information. Depending
on the particular assignment, this information may either be optional or
required. Assume that PF8 is assigned the function:
SCROLL FORWARD C1 C2
where C1 and C2 are Command Line variables. When this PF key is
pressed, the lines comprising the Command Area are read and any
information found there is assigned sequentially to the variables in the
assignment. For example, if you typed:
5 LINES
in the Command Area and then pressed PF8, the key is treated as though
the fixed assignment:
SCROLL FORWARD 5 LINES
11-4 User Guide

This assignment also illustrates that you can supply:

– No Variable Input:
If no information is found in the Command Area and the assignment
is valid without further qualification, the function is performed (for
example, SCROLL FORWARD is a valid assignment and is performed).
If it is not, a message is issued.
– An Insufficient Amount of Information:
If an insufficient amount of information is found in the Command
Area, the available information is sequentially assigned to the variables
and the assignment is checked to see if it is valid. If it is, the function
is performed and any unused variables are ignored. For example, if the
Command Area contains:
MAX
when PF8 is pressed, the key is treated as though it had the
assignment:
SCROLL FORWARD MAX
Since this is a valid assignment, it is performed. The unused variable
(C2) is ignored.
When using PF/PA keys with variable assignments, you can:

■ Terminate Variable Input:
You can use the command delimiter to end variable input. For example,
suppose you want to scroll to the bottom of the active AWS and renumber
its contents. You can do this by typing:
MAX & RENUMBER
in the Command Area where the ampersand (&) is the command
delimiter. The assignment is treated as:
SCROLL FORWARD MAX
since the command delimiter terminates variable input. Therefore,
RENUMBER is recognized as a command and is not treated as the value of
the variable C2.
■ Include Spaces in a Variable:
To include a space with a value, bound the value with delimiters. For
example, assume that PF8 is assigned the function:
SCROLL FORWARD C1
and you want to reposition the display by five lines. You can do this by
typing:
'5 LINES'

in the Command Area and pressing PF8. For the assignment, 5 LINES is
treated as a single value; when the assignment is performed, it is treated as
SCROLL FORWARD 5 LINES.
■ Enter Variables and Other Commands/Data:
When a PF/PA key with a variable assignment is pressed, the entire
Command Area is read to build a valid PF/PA key assignment. All of the
information needed by a PF/PA key must appear on the same line and
precede any other command or data.
When an assignment includes variables, the combined length of the
assignment after the variables have been replaced by values plus any
additional commands/data found in the Command Area must not exceed
255 characters in length.
11-6 User Guide

11.3 Reviewing Processing Hierarchy
11.3 Reviewing Processing Hierarchy

Two actions are taken when you press a PA or PF key, where:
1. The assignment to be used is determined.
■ If you are currently using a Monitor command that has subcommands
(like DISPLAY) and there are special site assignments for that Monitor,
the appropriate site-defined function is selected. If there are no
site-defined assignments, the user-defined function is selected.
■ If you are not using such a Monitor command, the key is checked to
see if there is a user-defined function. If there is, that function is
selected. If there is not, the site-assigned function is selected.
2. The assignment is performed.
■ If a PA key is pressed, the selected assignment is performed.
■ If a PF key is pressed, the Command Area is read for input, if needed,
and for any additional commands that may be entered there. The
commands in the assignment (plus those entered from the terminal)
are then executed.
The assignment (and associated commands) are executed until:
■ It is successfully completed.
■ The first command that causes an implicit or explicit pause (like
DISPLAY with MORE or ATTACH). Any unexecuted commands are
displayed in the Command Area of the screen. To resume execution of
those commands, press the Enter key.
Note: If the pause was caused by an RPF program containing a panel,
the panel overrides the display of unexecuted commands (the
unexecuted commands are lost).
■ An error is encountered. Any unexecuted commands are displayed. To
resume execution, correct, change or delete the command in error and
press the Enter key. (See Chapter 2, “Commands and Command
Components” for additional information about correcting
invalid/incomplete commands.

11.4 Changing Assignments

Caution PA KEY Warning
When a PA key is pressed, 3270 hardware limitations prevent Advantage

CA-Roscoe from knowing: 1) any of the changes made to the screen, and 2)
the current position of the cursor when split screens are in effect.
It is strongly recommended that you do not change the default PA key

assignments. If you do change the defaults, only commands can be
assigned to PA keys (no functions may be assigned). Exercise care when
assigning commands, especially if you frequently split screens. Examples:
■ If UPDATE * is assigned to a PA key that is pressed, the command is
issued but changes made to the screen are not applied to the library
member (or to that AWS).
■ If you assign DETACH JOB to a PA key and then split the screen to
attach two jobs, the wrong job may be detached when you press the
PA key. (The last known cursor position is used (for example, where
the cursor was placed for the last terminal write). Advantage
CA-Roscoe does not know if you moved the cursor to a different
screen.)
You have the option of changing any of the PF/PA key assignments provided
by your site. New assignments:
■ Can be established at any time during a terminal session.
■ Remain in effect until you sign off or change them. If you decide that you
always want certain assignments to be in effect, you can add the
commands establishing those assignments to your signon program. Then,
each time you sign on, the commands are executed and the PF/PA
functions are automatically reassigned for you.
11.4.1 Syntax
The syntax to assign a function to a PF or PA key is:
──LET──┬────────┬──┬─PAv─┬──=──'string'───────────────────────
└─scope.─┘ └─PFv─┘
scope Qualifies the operational range of this key. If omitted, the

operation applies to all forms of attached data. If specified, it
must be one of the following:
11-8 User Guide

AWS. Designates that the operation affects only the active

AWS.
DSN. Designates that the operation affects only the
attached data set object.
JOB. Designates that the operation affects only the
attached job output.
LIB. Designates that the operation affects only the
attached library member.
PAv PA key whose assignment is to be changed, where v is a value
between 1 and 10.
PFv PF key whose assignment is to be changed, where v is a value
between 1 and 24.
'string' Function to be performed. It must be delimited by
apostrophes. It may contain Command Line or RPF variables
and, after the variables have been replaced by their values,
must not exceed 255 characters in length. (See the next section
for additional information about assigning functions.)
11.4.2 Assigning Commands/Keyword Functions

This section describes:
■ Assignment limitations
■ Assignment techniques
11.4.2.1 Assignment Limitations:
PA Keys You can assign one or more commands or one of the designated
keyword functions of a PA key.
PF Keys You can assign one or more commands or any keyword function to
a PF key. When assigning commands and keyword functions, you
may include multiple commands but only one function.
The keyword functions are described in the next section.
11.4.2.2 Assignment Techniques:
■ Assigning a Single Fixed Value:

The value to be assigned must be delimited by apostrophes ('), as in:
LET PF16 = 'SPLIT'
The function assigned to PF16 will be performed whenever the key is
pressed.

You can qualify the assignment so that it applies to a specific form of

attached data. To do this, include the appropriate qualifier (like AWS,
DSN, JOB or LIB) with the PF key designation, as in:
LET AWS.PF16 = 'SET DISPLAY AWS FLIP NUMX'
Now, when you press PF16, the type of data currently attached is
determined. If it is:
– The active AWS: you will bounce the display between an unprotected
sequence number field and no sequence number field.
– Any other form of attached data: the screen will be split.
■ Assigning Multiple Values:
When multiple commands are assigned to a PF/PA key, the commands
must be separated by a slash (/). For example, if you assigned:
LET JOB.PF8 = 'SET DISPLAY JOB NONUM/SET MODE BASIC/SET ;'
and then press this key when job output is attached. The display excludes
sequence numbers, the character translation mode is basic and the
semicolon (;) is the command delimiter.
Note: The slash (/) is the default separator character. You can change
this character using the SET PFKDELIM command or through the
modifiable STATUS SESSION display.
■ Assigning Commands With String Operands:
Commands that have string operands fall into one of two categories, 1)
those requiring that the string always be delimited, and 2) those requiring
that the string be delimited only if it could be confused for a keyword
operand of that command.
When assigning commands with string operands, it is a good practice to
delimit the string. Note that the delimiter may be any special character
except an apostrophe, the PF/PA key assignment delimiter or the
command delimiter. In the following example, the logical not sign (¬) is
used to delimit the string JOB. (If the delimiters where omitted, JOB would
be treated as a keyword operand of the FIRST command.)
LET PF8 = 'SET DISPLAY NONUM/FIRST ¬JOB¬'
■ Assigning RPF Programs:
You can assign a RPF program name to a PF or PA key, as illustrated by:
LET PF9 = 'EXEC AAA.WIDGET'
or
LET PF9 = 'AAA.WIDGET'
or
LET PF9 = 'WIDGET'
If the RPF program name matches the name of a primary or Monitor
command, use either the EXEC command or slash (/) to cause explicit
program invocation. (If the program is in an Execution Library, the slash
must be used.) The following assignment shows how you can renumber
11-10 User Guide

the active AWS and explicitly execute a program named FETCH when you
press PF10:
LET PF1 = 'RENUMBER//FETCH'
Remember that the slashes in this example are serving two purposes. The
first slash separates the commands; the second slash explicitly invokes RPF
program execution.
■ Assigning Variable Values:
You can include Command Line and RPF variables in a PF key
assignment. RPF variables can be included in a PA key assignment.
– Defining Variables:
When variables are used within an assignment, the assignment must
begin with a special character (a plus sign in these examples) that is
also used to delimit the variable portion of the assignment, as in:
LET PF4 = '+FETCH +C1+/ATTACH' or
LET PF5 = '+RENUMBER/SAVE +C1+'
If you omit the special character, the variable is not recognized. (In
both cases, C1 is assumed to be a library member name, not a
Command Line variable.)
Caution IMPORTANT:
When variables are used in an assignment, the length of the
assignment, after all variable substitution has been performed, plus
any other commands/data specified in the Command Area may
not exceed 255 characters.
– Using Command Line Variables

You can assign a maximum of eight Command Line variables (named
C1 through C8) to any PF key. Command Line variables cannot be
assigned to PA keys.
If you use Command Line variables in an assignment, you must
provide variable information in the Command Area of the screen. For
example, assume the following assignment is in effect:
LET PF4 = '+FETCH +C1+/ATTACH'
When PF4 is pressed, the Command Area is read for the needed
variable information. If WIDGET appears in the Command Area, the
assignment is treated as though the following commands were entered:
FETCH WIDGET & ATTACH
When you include multiple Command Line variables in an assignment,
each one must be delimited by the same special character, as in:
LET AWS.PF4 ='+ATTACH +C1+ +C2+ +C3+ +C4+'
So, when PF4 is pressed, the values found in the Command Area are
assigned sequentially to the variables. A value need not be supplied

for all of the variables in an assignment. If the supplied values form a

valid command, the remaining variables are ignored. For example,
assume that the preceding definition is in effect and the Command
Area contains:
JOB
This assignment is treated as though the command ATTACH JOB *
was entered. Since this is a valid command, the variables C3 and C4
are ignored and the command is executed.
The same principles apply when using any of the predefined keyword
functions instead of, or with, commands. For example, assume the
following definition is in effect:
LET PF12 = '+SCROLL +C1+ C2+ +C3+'
With this definition, you may enter any of the following:
FORWARD
BACKWARD HALF
FORWARD 5 LINES
■ RPF Variables
Any RPF system or storage variable can be included in a PF or PA key
definition. When you use a storage variable (like L1 or P12), it must be
assigned a value before you press the associated PF key. For example,
assume the following definition is in effect:
LET AWS.PF5 = '+FETCH +L1+'
If L1 contains no value or a value that is inappropriate for the assignment,
an error message is displayed.
11.4.3 Assigning Keyword Functions

This section describes the keywords that you can use to designate:
1. Location where the display is to be scrolled
2. An action that is to be performed
When assigning these keywords, they must always be delimited, as in:

LET AWS.PF1 = 'SCROLL BACK'
11.4.3.1 Scroll Function Assignments
The following functions can be used to position the display. Unless noted
otherwise:
■ These functions can only be assigned to PF keys, and
■ Any changes made to the current frame are applied.
Note: A frame is equivalent to the number of lines in the Execution Area.

(Page is a synonym for frame.)
11-12 User Guide

POSITION BOTTOM The display is positioned so that it ends with the

last displayable line.
POSITION TOP The display is positioned so that it begins with the
first displayable line.
SCROLL BACK The display is positioned backward based on the
value specified in the SCRL field of the System
Information Line. If the number of remaining lines
is less than the SCRL field value, the action is
identical to POSITION TOP.
SCROLL BACK Csr The display is positioned so that the line at which
the cursor is positioned is the last displayed line. If
the number of preceding lines is less than the size
of the Execution Area, the display is unchanged.
SCROLL BACK [v] FRames or SCROLL BACK [v] Pages
The display is positioned backward one or v
frames. If less than vframes precede the current
frame, the action is identical to POSITION TOP.
SCROLL BACK Full The display is positioned backward one line less
than the total number of lines in the current frame
(the first line of the new display is the last line of
the old). If less than a full frame of lines precede
the current frame, the action is identical to
POSITION TOP.
SCROLL BACK Half The display is positioned back one-half frame. If
less than a half frame of lines precede the current
frame, the action is identical to POSITION TOP.
SCROLL BACK [v] [Lines]
The display is positioned backward one or v lines.
If less than vlines precede the current frame, the
action is identical to POSITION TOP.
SCROLL BACK Max Display positioning is identical to POSITION TOP.
SCROLL FORWARD The display is positioned forward based on the
value specified in the SCRL field of the System
Information Line. If the number of remaining lines
is less than the SCRL field value, the action is
identical to POSITION BOTTOM.
SCROLL FORWARD Csr The display is positioned forward so that the line
at which the cursor is positioned is the first
displayed line.
SCROLL FORWARD [v] FRames or SCROLL FORWARD [v] Pages
The display is positioned forward one or v frames.
If less than vframes remain, the action is identical
to POSITION BOTTOM.

SCROLL FORWARD Full

The display is positioned forward one line less than
the total number of lines in the current frame (the
last line of the new display is the first line of the
old). If less than a full frame of lines remain, the
action is identical to POSITION BOTTOM.
SCROLL FORWARD Half
The display is positioned forward one-half frame. If
less than a half frame of lines remain, the action is
identical to POSITION BOTTOM.
SCROLL FORWARD [v] [Lines]
The display is positioned forward one or v lines. If
less than v lines remain, the action is identical to
POSITION BOTTOM.
SCROLL FORWARD Max
Display positioning is identical to POSITION
BOTTOM.
SCROLL LEFT The extent of the left shift is determined by
subtracting the left margin value from the right
margin value, as specified in the COLS field of the
System Information Line. This value is then
subtracted from the left margin and the display is
repositioned.
SCROLL LEFT v The display is shifted left that number of positions.
(It cannot be shifted beyond column 1.) The value
must be positive and greater than 0. If zero is
specified, no shifting occurs.
SCROLL LEFT MAX The display is shifted left to begin with the first
position of the line.
SCROLL RIGHT The extent of the right shift is determined by
subtracting the left margin value from the right
margin value, as specified in the COLS field of the
System Information Line. This value is then added
to the right margin and the frame is repositioned.
SCROLL RIGHT v The display is shifted right that number of
positions. (It cannot be shifted beyond the
rightmost margin for the type of data being
displayed; for example, 255 for an AWS.) The
value must be positive and greater than 0. If zero
is specified, no shifting occurs.
SCROLL RIGHT MAX The display is shifted right to end with the last
position of the line (for example, 255 when an AWS
is attached; LRECL value when a data set is
attached).
11-14 User Guide

11.4.3.2 Special Purpose Function Assignments
The following functions control split-screen processing. They can only be

assigned to PF keys.
END Split-screen processing is terminated; the two logical screens are
returned to a single physical screen.
SPLIT Split-screen processing is invoked; the physical screen is divided
into two logical screens.
SWAP Active and inactive split screens are interchanged; the cursor is
moved from one logical screen to the other.
The following functions can be assigned to a PF or PA key:

INPUT As a PA key assignment, changes made to the current frame are
ignored. Blank lines are inserted before the first line displayed in
the current screen.
Caution: After entering data, press a PF key or the Enter key. If
a PA key is pressed, all inserted lines will be lost.
As a PF key assignment, changes made to the current frame are
applied. If the cursor is in the Execution Area, blank lines are
inserted after the line at which the cursor is positioned. If the
cursor is not in the Execution Area, blank lines are inserted
before the first line displayed in the current screen.
REPEAT Changes made to the current frame are ignored. The attached
data remains attached.
As a PF key assignment, commands found in the Command Area
are executed.
As a PA key assignment, commands found in the Command Area
are ignored if this function is assigned to a PA key.
The remaining functions can only be assigned to PF keys:

+ The last executed command is redisplayed.
- The last executed command is reexecuted.
ENTER The display is positioned based on the function assigned to the
Enter key. Normally, the display retains its position.
QUIT Changes made to the current frame are ignored; attached data are
detached. Commands entered in the Command Area are
executed.
Note: : See Chapter 2, “Commands and Command Components” for

information about + and -.

11-16 User Guide
Chapter 12. Using the Training Aids
This chapter describes the user documentation and online tools that are
provided with Advantage CA-Roscoe.
Chapter 12. Using the Training Aids 12-1

12.1 The Advantage CA-Roscoe Documentation
12.1 The Advantage CA-Roscoe Documentation

In addition to this manual, each Advantage CA-Roscoe user should have
access to:
■ Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive Environment Command Reference Guide for a
detailed description of all Advantage CA-Roscoe commands.
■ Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive Environment Getting Started for an
introduction to Advantage CA-Roscoe oriented to: 1) non-programmers,
and 2) individuals familiar with IBM TSO ISPF/PDF.
■ Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive Environment RPF Language Guide for a
description of the ROSCOE Programming Facility (RPF).
Finally, each user should have a copy of the Advantage CA-Roscoe Reference
Summary and, optionally, a copy of the RPF Reference Summary.
12-2 User Guide

12.2 The HELP Facility

The online HELP facility is a quick and easy way to get information about
Advantage CA-Roscoe commands and facilities. For example, to display
information about the SAVE command, enter:
HELP SAVE
The following example illustrates part of the information that is displayed.
HELP Command: Sample Display
_

>
> HLP(...HELP...) SCROLL FULL DISPLAY 1 79
>....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6
SAVE
Function: Places contents of active AWS into library as a

member.
Syntax: SAVE mem < p<q> > < 'string' >

< NOSEQ/SEQ <s<l>>/COBOL >
< SHARED/EXECONLY/RESTRICTED >
mem Name to be assigned to member being created.

Must comply with naming conventions and not
currently exist in user's library.
p First line of AWS to be saved.
. . .

As with all HELP displays, the information presented includes:
Function A one-sentence description of the command or facility.
Syntax The syntax of the command.
Level List of HELP members that provide additional or related
information about the command or facility.
The following figure identifies the PF keys that are used to position within and
between HELP displays.
Display PF Keys Action

If there is more information PF7/PF19 Scrolls to start of display.
available than fits on the
current screen
PF8/PF20 Scrolls forward.

Display PF Keys Action

If the display indicates that PF10/PF22 Scrolls to prior level.
level information is available
PF11/PF23 Scrolls to next level.
To obtain information about the HELP facility itself, enter the command:
HELP
Other HELP displays that you may want to review are:

HELP MESSAGE x Displays a description of the designated messages (like
HELP MESSAGE CMD01).
HELP PFKEYS Displays information about: 1) PF/PA key assignments,
2) how to use the default assignments, and 3) how to
change the assignments.
HELP NEW Displays information about the current release of
12-4 User Guide

12.3 The Online Tutorial

The Tutorial provides a way for you to learn more about Advantage
CA-Roscoe. It simulates an actual Advantage CA-Roscoe terminal session and
introduces the most frequently used Advantage CA-Roscoe commands and
facilities.
The Tutorial presents you with a menu of 12 independent learning modules.

You can complete the modules in order, use only certain modules, or vary the
order in which you complete the modules.
To obtain more information about the Tutorial, enter:

HELP TUTORIAL
The resulting HELP display explains how to invoke the Tutorial at your
company.

12-6 User Guide

Part II. The AWS (Creating and Manipulating Data)
Chapter 13. AWS: Introducing the AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

13.1 Attaching an AWS to the Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
13.2 Attaching an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
13.3 Bringing Data Into an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
13.4 Changing AWS Names/Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
13.5 Creating an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
13.6 Detaching an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
13.7 Discarding an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9
13.8.1 Positioning via the Internal Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
13.9 Reattaching the Current AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
13.10 Selecting an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Chapter 14. AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

14.1 Adding Character Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.1.1 Inserting a String Within a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.1.2 Prefixing or Suffixing a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
14.2 Reordering AWS Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
14.3 Editing Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4
14.4 Editing Character Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
14.4.3 Tracking Edited Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8
Chapter 15. AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS . . . . . . 15-1
15.1 Copying Data Within the Active AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2
15.2 Copying Data to an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7
15.2.1 Alternate Form of Screen Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8
15.3 Copying Data Between Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-11
Chapter 16. AWS: Deleting Data From an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

16.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
16.1.1 Deleting by Line Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
16.1.2 Deleting by Presence/Absence of a String . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2
16.3 Using 3270 Hardware Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
16.3.1 Using the ERASE EOF Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-6
16.3.2 Using the DELETE Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Chapter 17. AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information . . . . . . 17-1
Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS . . . . . 18-1

18.1 Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2
18.1.3 Using a Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-9
18.1.4 Using a PF Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
18.1.5 Using the Command Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-11
18.2 Formatting Inserted Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-13
18.2.1 Using Automatic Indentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-13
18.2.2 Using the Software Tab Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-14
Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1

19.1 Centering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-2
19.2 Controlling Capitalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5
19.3 Reformatting Text Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7
19.4 Shifting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-10
19.5 Splitting and Joining Text Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-13
Chapter 20. AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1

20.1 Finding Specific Occurrences of a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
20.2 Including/Excluding Lines Containing a String . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5
20.3 Customizing the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9
20.3.1 Translating the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9
20.3.2 Delimiting the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9
20.3.3 Qualifying the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9
20.3.4 Specifying the String in Hexadecimal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
20.3.5 Positioning the Resulting Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-11
User Guide
Chapter 21. AWS: Moving Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1
21.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-2
Chapter 22. AWS: Renumbering Data in the AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

22.1.1 Renumbering Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1
22.1.2 Display Sequence Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
22.1.3 Include Sequence Numbers in the Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
22.1.4 Set AWS Sequence Number Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-2
PRINT/SUBMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-3
Chapter 23. AWS: Saving and Updating a Library Member . . . . . . 23-1

23.1 Creating a Library Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
23.1.1 An Advantage CA-Roscoe library member name MUST: . . . 23-2
23.1.2 Member Name Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-2
23.1.3 Assigning a Description and/or Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-3
23.2 Updating a Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23-5
User Guide
Chapter 13. AWS: Introducing the AWS
When you sign on to Advantage CA-Roscoe, an AWS (or Active Work Space)
is automatically allocated for your use. If you split the screen, a second AWS is
automatically allocated for that subsession (a split screen appears). These
AWSs are named ROSn, where n is a unique identifier. (The name of the AWS
that you are currently working with is shown at the right side of the System
Information Line.) All data entry and editing that you do during your
Advantage CA-Roscoe session is done in one of these temporary work areas.
Note: See Chapter 8, “Selecting a Screen Format” for information about the
Advantage CA-Roscoe split screen facility.
You can place data in an AWS by entering it from the terminal or copying it
from the Advantage CA-Roscoe library, an attached job output file or an OS
data set. After editing the data, you can store it as a member in the Advantage
CA-Roscoe library, print a copy of it at a 328x-type or system printer, submit it
to the operating system, write it to a data set or delete it.
The data in an AWS is stored in the form of variable length records not
exceeding 255 characters in length. (Each line in an AWS is considered to be a
record.) These records are kept in order by six-digit sequence numbers that
are created and maintained externally from your data. The maximum number
of records that you can have in an AWS is set by your site management.
Any data remaining in an AWS when you sign off is automatically saved for
you if the AWS has a RECOVERABLE attribute. The data is saved in the
Advantage CA-Roscoe library as a member. One member is created for each
recoverable AWS that you are using. The members are named SAVAWSnn,
where nn is a unique identifier. These members are also created in the event of
a network shutdown or system failure. The next time you sign back on to
Advantage CA-Roscoe, you can use these members to restore your AWS(s).
Chapter 13. AWS: Introducing the AWS 13-1

13.1 Attaching an AWS to the Terminal
13.1 Attaching an AWS to the Terminal

The rest of this chapter describes how you can:
■ Attach the currently active or a specific AWS.
■ Bring data from a variety of sources into the AWS.
■ Change the name and/or attributes of any existing AWS.
■ Create one or more AWSs.
■ Detach the active AWS.
■ Discard (remove) an existing AWS.
■ Position the display within the active AWS.
■ Reattach the active AWS.
■ Select an existing AWS for display.
13-2 User Guide

13.2 Attaching an AWS
13.2 Attaching an AWS

The ATTACH command is used to bind an existing AWS to the terminal so
that all or part of its contents can be displayed and modified.
To view the entire contents of the currently active AWS, enter:

ATTACH
To view the entire contents of a specific AWS and make it the active AWS, you
might enter:
ATTACH AWS SAMPLE
where SAMPLE is the name assigned to an existing AWS.
When working with the currently active AWS, you can use ATTACH to:
■ Limit the display to a particular range of lines. For example, to view only
lines 200 through 800 of the currently active AWS, you would enter:
ATTACH 2 8
■ Begin the display with the first occurrence of a particular character string.
For example, assume that the active AWS contains a COBOL program and
you want to begin the display with the line containing PROCEDURE
DIVISION. To do this, enter:
ATTACH 'PROCEDURE DIVISION'
The display begins with the first line in the active AWS that contains the
specified string. (Note that the string specified with ATTACH must be
enclosed by a special character that is not found within the string itself.)

13.3 Bringing Data Into an AWS
13.3 Bringing Data Into an AWS

You can place data into an AWS by:
■ Entering data directly from the terminal - using the commands described
in Chapter 18, “AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS.”
■ Copying data into the AWS - using the commands described in
Chapter 15, “AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS,” you can
copy data from:
– Another AWS
– The current screen display
– A library member
– An attached data set object
– An attached job output file
See Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” and
Chapter 34, “Library: Performing Library Management Tasks” for additional
commands that can be used to place data within an AWS.
13-4 User Guide

13.4 Changing AWS Names/Attributes
13.4 Changing AWS Names/Attributes

You can change the name or attribute(s) of any existing AWS using the
commands:
■ RENAME - to change the name of an existing AWS, as in:
RENAME AWS SAMPLE TEST
which renames the AWS named SAMPLE to TEST.
■ ALTER AWS - to change the attributes of an existing AWS, as in:
ALTER AWS TEST SPLIT ALTERAWS
which discards the AWS named TEST when the screen in which the
CREATE command was entered is terminated. (Attributes that are not
included with the ALTER command remain unchanged. See 13.5,
“Creating an AWS” for additional information about AWS attributes.
You can also use the modifiable display provided by the STATUS AWS
command to rename or change AWS attributes. See Chapter 17, “AWS:
Displaying/Changing AWS Information” for details.

13.5 Creating an AWS

When you sign on to Advantage CA-Roscoe, you automatically have two
AWSs assigned to you for your session. (Their names are ROSn, where n is a
unique identifier.)
You can use the CREATE command to name and define the attributes of one
or more additional AWSs. The maximum number of additional AWSs that you
can work with is set by site management.
To create an AWS, you might enter:

CREATE AWS SAMPLE
where SAMPLE is the name assigned to this AWS. You can use almost any
one- to eight-character name that conforms to Advantage CA-Roscoe member
naming conventions. (The restricted names are FLIP, NEXT, PREV, ROSn,
SYSn and TMPn (where n is a numeric value); B, F, N, P, T, and R are also
restricted.)
Since no attributes are defined with the CREATE command in the preceding
example, the default values are used. The attributes that you can assign to an
AWS (and their default values) are:
■ RECOVERABLE or NONRECOVERABLE
These define whether the contents of the AWS is to be backed up on disk
and recovered in the event of a session or system failure. The default is
RECOVERABLE.
■ SESSION, SPLIT, RPF or LEVEL:
These define the retention period for the AWS, where:
SESSION Discards the AWS when you end your session. (Default)
SPLIT Discards the AWS when the screen in which the AWS was
created is terminated.
RPF Discards the AWS when the RPF application containing
the CREATE command terminates (In this case,
application refers to the initiating RPF program and all of
its subordinate RPF programs.)
LEVEL Discards the AWS when the RPF program containing the
CREATE command terminates.
■ ACTIVE or INACTIVE
These define whether the AWS is to become the active AWS for the screen
containing the command. The default is ACTIVE.
13-6 User Guide

■ IMPLICIT or EXPLICIT
These define how the AWS is to be identified when a SELECT command is
issued. The default is IMPLICIT. (See 13.10, “Selecting an AWS” for
additional information.)
■ NEW, REUSE or RETAIN
These define the type of AWS being created, where:
NEW Indicates this is a new AWS. (Default)
REUSE Reuses an existing AWS after deleting its contents.
RETAIN Reuses an existing AWS while retaining its contents.
The attributes described thus far relate only to an AWS that you create. Once
created, each AWS has its own attributes that affect how data are displayed
and handled. To display all of the attributes associated with each existing
AWS, use the command:
STATUS AWS
Also see Chapter 17, “AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information” for a

description of all AWS attributes.

13.6 Detaching an AWS
13.6 Detaching an AWS

The currently active AWS remains attached to the terminal until you:
■ CREATE another AWS with an ACTIVE attribute.
■ ATTACH or SELECT another existing AWS.
■ Execute a command (like ATTACH LIB) that causes output to the
Execution Area.
■ Execute the DETACH command, explicitly releasing the AWS.
■ Execute the DISCARD command, explicitly removing the current AWS.
■ Press the CLEAR key.
13-8 User Guide

13.7 Discarding an AWS
13.7 Discarding an AWS

You can remove a specific AWS by:
■ Explicitly identifying the AWS via the DISCARD command, as in:
DISCARD AWS TEST
where the AWS named TEST is removed and its contents deleted.
■ Implicitly removing it when activating another AWS, as in:
SELECT SAMPLE DISCARD
where the current AWS is discarded when the AWS named SAMPLE is
activated.
You can also use the modifiable display provided by the STATUS AWS
command to discard one or more AWSs. (See Chapter 17, “AWS:
Displaying/Changing AWS Information” for details.)
Finally, the retention attribute associated with an AWS also controls when that
AWS will be discarded. For example, if you create an AWS with the retention
attribute of SPLIT, that AWS is discarded when the split screen where the
CREATE command was executed is terminated. (See 13.5, “Creating an AWS”
for additional information.)

13.8 Positioning the Display

This section describes how you can position the display of the currently active
AWS:
■ Based on the position of an internal pointer.
■ To a specific line by using primary and line commands.
13.8.1 Positioning via the Internal Pointer

Advantage CA-Roscoe maintains internal pointers that are positioned to a line
based on the execution of a command. While pointer positioning occurs with
all forms of attached data, it is most frequently used when manipulating the
contents of an AWS. For example, if you enter the command DELETE 500, the
AWS pointer is positioned to the line following the deleted line. You can then
reference that line by replacing a command's line number operand with an
asterisk (*). To illustrate how you might use pointer positioning, assume that
you enter the commands:
DELETE 6 9
COPY 21
ATTACH ,,
The resulting display will begin with line 2101 because:

■ Lines 600 through 900 are deleted. The AWS pointer is positioned to the
line following the last deleted line (the line following 900).
■ The line at which the pointer is currently positioned is then copied after
line 2100. The pointer is reset to the last copied line (the new line 2101).
■ The AWS contents are then redisplayed, beginning with the line at which
the pointer is currently positioned.
This example assumes that all three commands appear in the Command Area
when the Enter key is pressed. The results would be different if the active
AWS is attached and the commands are entered one at a time, where:
■ Lines 600 through 900 are deleted. The AWS pointer is positioned to the
line following the last deleted line. The data are then redisplayed. The
redisplay of attached data causes the pointer to be positioned to the first
displayed line.
■ The line where the pointer is currently positioned (the first line of the
active AWS) is then copied after line 2100. The data are again redisplayed.
Again, the AWS pointer is positioned to the first displayed line.
■ The AWS contents are then explicitly redisplayed. The display begins with
the first line of the active AWS.
13-10 User Guide

When using the asterisk (*) to reference the current pointer position, you can
qualify it with a positive or negative value, as in:
*-5 References the line that is five lines after the current pointer position.
*+5 References the line that is five lines before the current pointer position.
For additional information, see the Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive Environment

Command Reference Guide. When applicable, the command descriptions include
the position of the pointer after the command is executed.
13.8.2 Positioning to Specific Lines

This section describes how you can position the display to a specific line. Also
see Chapter 20, “AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS” for information about
positioning the display to begin with a line that contains a specific character
string.
13.8.2.1 Using Primary Commands
If the AWS that you are viewing exceeds the number of lines in your terminal
screen, you can reposition the display by:
■ Pressing any of the scrolling PF keys.
■ Using the POINT command with the LINE operand. For example, to
reposition the display to begin with line 2500, you would enter:
POINT AWS LINE 25
To position to the first or last line of the display, you would enter:
POINT AWS LINE T or POINT AWS LINE B
When browsing the STATUS AWS display, entering an * (asterisk) in the
first unprotected field for a specific entry repositions the display to begin
with that entry.

13.8.2.2 Using Line Commands
The line commands shown in the following figure can be used to reposition
the displayed data. Simply enter the appropriate line command in the
sequence number field of the display.
COMMAND ACTION AFTER COMMAND EXECUTED
v Display begins with line v (display begins with line 500 if that
value is typed in the sequence number field of any line).
* Display begins with the line that contained the *. Can be
qualified with:
+v Display begins v number of lines after the line that
contained the command.
-v Display begins v number of lines before the line that
contained the command.
+P [v] Display scrolled forward one or v number of pages, where a page
equals the number of lines in the Execution Area.
-P [v] Display scrolled backward one or v number of pages.
T+ Display begins with the first line of the active AWS. Can be
qualified with:
v Display begins v number of lines after the first line of the
active AWS.
B- Display contains the last line of the active AWS. Can be qualified
with:
v Display begins v number of lines before the last line of the
active AWS.
13-12 User Guide

13.9 Reattaching the Current AWS
13.9 Reattaching the Current AWS

At any time during your terminal session, you can attach another AWS, a data
set object, job output, or a library member/selection list. After browsing that
data, you can return to the AWS. For example, the following screens show
how you can ATTACH a library member, displays it so you can browse it, and
from there you can reATTACH the data you have been viewing.
ATTACH INVLIST

>
> AWS(XYZ.SAMPLE) SCRL FULL COLS 7 72 LINE 1
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+..
...... ============================== T O P ========================
2 PROGRAM-ID. SAMPLE.

ATTACH AWS
>
> LIB(XYZ.INVREPT) SCRL FULL COLS 7 72
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+..
============================== T O P ========================
2 PROGRAM-ID. INVREPT.
>

> AWS(XYZ.SAMPLE) SCRL FULL COLS 7 72 LINE 1
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+..
============================== T O P ========================
2 PROGRAM-ID. SAMPLE.
When you reATTACH the AWS, the display begins with the first line of the
prior display. To reattach at a different location within the same data, you can:
■ Use the AWS operand with the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV commands
to begin the display with the line containing a specific string, as in:
FIRST AWS /DD/
■ Use the AWS operand with the INCL or EXCL command to begin the
display with a list of lines containing (or not containing) a specific string,
as in:
INCL AWS /DD/
■ Use the AWS operand of the POINT command to begin the display with a
specific line, as in:
POINT AWS LINE 72

13.10 Selecting an AWS
13.10 Selecting an AWS

You can use the SELECT command to activate and display an existing AWS.
The AWS can be activated by:
■ Name. For example, to activate the AWS named SAMPLE, you would
enter:
SELECT SAMPLE
Note: If the AWS was created with an EXPLICIT attribute, you can only
activate it by explicitly specifying its name with the SELECT
command.
■ Relative position, if it was created with the IMPLICIT attribute. For
example, to display the next or prior AWS, enter:
SELECT AWS NEXT
or
SELECT AWS PREV
To bounce the display between the currently active AWS and the the
previously active AWS, enter:
SELECT AWS FLIP
Additional operands of the SELECT command allow you to:

■ Discard the AWS you are currently viewing when you activate a different
AWS, as in:
SELECT AWS SAMPLE DISCARD
where the AWS you are currently viewing is discarded, and the AWS
named SAMPLE is activated.
■ Retain the attributes associated with the current AWS when you activate a
different AWS, as in:
SELECT AWS SAMPLE NOATTR
where the AWS named SAMPLE is activated and its attributes are
overridden by the attributes of the AWS that had been current.
■ Designate which internal pointer is to be used when an AWS is activated.
One pointer is used by the SELECT command; the other pointer marks a
line affected by the execution of a command. By default, the
SELECT-related pointer is used. To override this pointer, you would enter:
SELECT SAMPLE NOPOINT
where the resulting display begins with the line at which the
command-related pointer is positioned.
13-14 User Guide

Chapter 14. AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS

■ Add a character string to one or more lines using the FILL, PREFIX, and
SUFFIX primary commands.
■ Reorder specific records of an AWS.
■ Edit one or more characters within one or more lines using the XLATE
primary command or the XL, XLB, or XLT line commands.
■ Edit character strings within one or more lines using the EDIT primary
command or an E, EB, EE, or ET line command. (You can also trace lines
affected by an edit operation.)
Note: At most sites, data that you add or change in an AWS is automatically
translated to its corresponding uppercase characters (the word division
is translated to DIVISION). You can control how the data that you
change is to be treated. See Chapter 3, “Controlling Character
Recognition” for additional information.
Chapter 14. AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS 14-1

14.1 Adding Character Strings
14.1 Adding Character Strings

You can add a character string at the beginning (using the PREFIX command),
anywhere within (using the FILL command) or at the end (using the SUFFIX
command) of one or more lines within the active AWS.
14.1.1 Inserting a String Within a Line

The FILL command can be used to insert a character string into specific
columns of one or more lines comprising the active AWS.
To limit the operation to specific columns, include the appropriate column

numbers before the string, as in:
FILL 73 79 'INVLIST'
where columns 73 through 79 of every line in the active AWS will contain the
string INVLIST. If column numbers are omitted, the column boundaries
currently in effect are used. Thus, if the current column boundaries are 1
through 80 and you enter:
FILL ''
columns 1 through 80 of every line in the active AWS will contain ***. (If the
column range is greater than the string, the string is repeated.)
Note: Column boundaries specified with the command effect only the
execution of the command. See Chapter 4, “Defining Column
Boundaries” for additional information.
To limit the operation to specific lines, specify the appropriate line numbers
after the string, as in:
FILL 73 79 'INVLIST' 1 12
14.1.2 Prefixing or Suffixing a Line

When using the PREFIX or SUFFIX command, the default is to prefix or suffix
every line within the active AWS with the designated string, as in:
PREFIX 'TESTONLY'
Both PREFIX and SUFFIX allow you to limit their operation to a specific range
of lines by including the appropriate line numbers after the string, as in:
SUFFIX 'SAMPLE' 3 9
Neither operation is performed if the result would cause a line to exceed 255
characters.
14-2 User Guide

14.2 Reordering AWS Records
14.2 Reordering AWS Records

This section describes how you can use the ORDER (AWS) command to
reorder the contents of an AWS.
Use the ORDER command to invoke the Advantage CA-Roscoe internal sort
routine. Reorder specific records of the AWS in descending order, as in:
ORDER AWS COL 1 7 DES
If more than one AWS is active, specify the name of the AWS to be reordered,
as in:
ORDER AWS TMP2 COL 1 7 DES
You can reorder multiple groups of AWS records. Specify the columns to be
reordered, and the sorting order (ASCending or DEScending). If no order is
specified, the data will be sorted in ASCending order. You must use the word
'AND' (or its character equivalent) to separate the sorting boundaries, as in:
ORDER AWS COL 1 7 DES AND COL 17 24
Note: The word 'AND' can also be represented by the '&' (ampersand) or '@'
(the at sign).
If sites or users set the '&' as a command delimiter, it will override the
sort syntax and function as a delimiter. To use '&' within the ORDER
command, the command delimiter must be set to another character.
See 6.5, “Synopsis of Session Attributes” on page 6-16 for information
on changing the command delimiter.
A maximum of six order criteria are permitted. When sorting multiple column
groups, the sort is done in order of the columns specified. So, in the example
above, columns 1 through 7 are reordered, and then columns 17 through 24
are sorted with respect to the first sort.

14.3 Editing Characters

This section describes how you can use primary or line commands to change
one or more characters.
Note: If you want to change a string of characters, see 14.4, “Editing
Character Strings.”
14.3.1 Using a Primary Command

Use the XLATE command to replace one character with another, as in:
XLATE /A/B/
where every occurrence of the character A is replaced with the character B.

Multiple characters can be specified as search and replacement characters, as
in:
XLATE /A1/B9 /
where every occurrence of the character A is replaced with a B, every 1 is

replaced with a 9, and every * is replaced with a space.
Note: The search and replacement characters must be delimited by a special
character that is not one of the search or replace characters.
You can limit an operation to specific columns and/or lines. Specify the
columns to be searched before the character(s). Specify the line numbers to be
searched after the character(s), as in:
XLATE 2 75 /-/ / 1 92
where only the data within columns 20 through 75 of lines 100 through 9200
are to be affected.
Note: Column boundaries specified with the command effect only the
execution of that command. See Chapter 4, “Defining Column
14-4 User Guide

14.3.2 Using Line Commands

The line commands used to perform character replacement are:
XLB Replaces the search character(s) with the replacement character(s)
on every line beginning with the line on which it is entered and
continuing through the last line in the active AWS.
XLT Replaces the search character(s) with the replacement character(s)
on every line beginning with the first line of the active AWS and
continuing through the line on which the command is entered.
XL [v] Replaces the search character(s) with the replacement character(s)
beginning with the line on which it is entered and continuing for
v number of lines. If no number is specified, only the line
containing the command is changed.
Enter the appropriate command in the sequence number field. Then enter the
search and replacement character(s) in the data portion of the same line. As
illustrated in the following screen, the strings must be delimited.

>
> AWS(AAA.DATEFILE) SCRL FULL COLS 7 72
> <..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....
61 ORDER NO. DATE REQUESTED DATE DELIVERED
XLB2 '/'- '
63 A12984-XX 9/14/91 12/15/91
64 A23563-XX 1/4/92 2/1/92
65 A45887-XX 6/2/92 9/19/92
The following screen shows the result of the edit.

>
> <..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....
61 ORDER NO. DATE REQUESTED DATE DELIVERED
62
63 A12984-XX 9-14-91 12-15-91
64 A23563-XX 1-4-92 2-1-92
65 A45887-XX 6-2-92 9-19-92
Once search and replacement characters are specified, they are remembered
until you change them. This allows you to selectively change specific
occurrences of a character.

14.4 Editing Character Strings

You can change a character string within the active AWS using primary or line
commands.
Note: If you want to change one or more single characters, see section 14.3,
“Editing Characters.”

Use the EDIT command to replace one character string with another string.
The first string specified with the command is the original (or search) string.
The second string is the replacement string. For example, to replace every
occurrence of the string INVENTORY-BALANCE with the string
INVENTORY-AMOUNT, you would enter:
EDIT /INVENTORY-BALANCE/INVENTORY-AMOUNT/
The character strings must be delimited by a special character not found

within either of the strings.
You can limit an edit operation to specific columns and/or lines. Specify the
columns to be searched before the character strings. Specify the line numbers
to be searched after the strings. For example:
EDIT 2 75 /INVENTORY-BALANCE/INVENTORY-AMOUNT/ 1 92
causes the command to affect only the data within columns 20 through 75 of
lines 100 through 9200.
Note: Column boundaries specified with the command affect only the
By default, the search is for any string of characters that match the edit string.
To avoid possible confusion, you can qualify the string with the keyword
WORD, BEGIN, PREFIX, EMBED, SUFFIX, or END. (See Chapter 20, “AWS:
Locating Data Within an AWS” for additional information about these
qualifiers.) For example, if you enter:
EDIT /THE/AN/ WORD
the search is for every occurrence of THE that is preceded and followed by a
non-alphanumeric character. If you omitted the qualifier, words such as
OTHER and THERE would match the search string and would be changed.
14-6 User Guide

In addition to replacing a character string, you can also use EDIT to:
■ Delete a character string from one or more lines.
By defining a null replacement string, every occurrence of the search string
will be deleted. For example, to delete every occurrence of the string
INVENTORY-BALANCE from the active AWS, you would specify:
EDIT /INVENTORY-BALANCE//
Lines containing the string are not deleted; only the string is deleted from
those lines.
■ Replace the entire contents of one or more lines.
Defining a null search string, the contents of every line will be overlaid
with the replacement string. For example, to replace the current contents of
lines 1800 through 2000 with the string FILLER, you would enter:
EDIT //FILLER/ 18 2

The edit line commands are:
EB Replaces the search string with the replacement string on every line
beginning with the line on which it is entered and continuing through
the last line in the active AWS.
ET Replaces the search string with the replacement string on every line
beginning with the first line of the active AWS and continuing
through the line on which the command is entered.
EE Replaces the search string with the replacement string on every line
within the block of lines. (An EE must appear in the sequence number
field of the first and last line of the range.)
E [v] Replaces the search string with the replacement string beginning with
the line on which the string is entered and continuing for v number of
lines. If no number is specified, only the line containing the command
is changed.
Enter the appropriate command in the sequence number field. Then enter the
search and replacement character strings in the data portion of the same line.
The strings must be delimited.


>
> <..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+6....+....
...... ============================= T O P =======================
EB 1 /PART-NUMBER-MSTR/PART-NUMBER-OUT/_
Once edit strings are specified, they are remembered until you change them by
entering another edit line command. This allows you to selectively change
specific occurrences of a string. For example, assume you only want to change
certain occurrences of the string THIS to THAT. Once you have specified the
string, you can scroll through the active AWS, entering the appropriate edit
line command where needed.
14.4.3 Tracking Edited Lines

You can keep track of lines changed by an edit operation using the SET
EDITCHNG command or the modifiable STATUS SESSION display.
Using the primary command to illustrate, you can activate the tracking facility
by entering:
SET EDITCHNG ON
When the facility is active, any subsequent EDIT primary command or E, EB,
or ET line command causes a change indicator to appear in the sequence
number field of affected lines. The indicator remains in the sequence number
field until you:
■ Replace the contents of the active AWS,
■ Issue the RESET line command or SET EDITCHNG RESET command, or
■ Enter the SET EDITCHNG OFF command, or deactivate the facility via the
STATUS SESSION display.
The following examples illustrate how you might use this facility. Notice that
the search string is qualified as a prefix. Therefore, line 6700 is not affected.
SET EDITCHNG ON
EDIT /IN-/INPUT-/ PREFIX
>
> <..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+6....+....
61 WORKING-STORAGE SECTION.
62 1 HOLDING-AREA.
63 2 IN-NAME PIC X(6) 'ROSCOE'.
64 2 IN-ADDR PIC X(9) 'PRINCETON'.
65 2 IN-STATE PIC X(2) VALUE 'NJ'.
66 1 WORK-AREA.
67 2 DATE-IN-PROCESS PIC X(8) 'XX/XX/XX'.
14-8 User Guide


>
> <..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+6....+....7...
61 WORKING-STORAGE SECTION.
62 1 HOLDING-AREA.
==CHG> 2 INPUT-NAME PIC X(6) 'ROSCOE'.
==CHG> 2 INPUT-ADDR PIC X(9) 'PRINCETON'.
==CHG> 2 INPUT-STATE PIC X(2) VALUE 'NJ'.
66 1 WORK-AREA.
67 2 DATE-IN-PROCESS PIC X(8) 'XX/XX/XX'.
The change indicators placed in the sequence number field are modifiable. This
means you can overtype any indicator with a line command. After the
command is executed, the indicator is redisplayed.
If you want to track another edit operation, you can remove the change
indicators by issuing the RESET line command or:
SET EDITCHNG RESET
To deactivate the facility, either modify the STATUS SESSION display, or issue
the command:
SET EDITCHNG OFF
When the facility is deactivated, the change indicators remain displayed. To

remove these indicators, either:
■ Deactivate the facility by issuing:
SET EDITCHNG OFF RESET or
■ Issue the RESET line command after the facility is deactivated.
If you want to see a non-modifiable display of lines affected by the execution

of the EDIT primary command, specify the TRACE command prior to EDIT, as
in:
TRACE
EDIT 'FILLER'FILLER'
NOTRACE
TRACE causes all affected lines to be displayed. While this facility is active,
each time you execute the EDIT command, a list of affected lines is displayed.
The NOTRACE command deactivates this facility.

14-10 User Guide
Chapter 15. AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an
AWS
This chapter describes how you can copy data:

■ From one location to another within the active AWS using the COPY
primary command, copy line commands, or repeat line commands.
■ Into an AWS from another AWS, a screen display, library member,
attached data set object or attached job output file using the COPY, COPYS
and COPYX primary commands.
■ From one split screen to the active AWS in the other split screen using the
XCOPY, XCOPYS and XCOPYX primary commands. All copy operations
are nondestructive (the lines being copied are not deleted from their
original location).
Chapter 15. AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS 15-1
15.1 Copying Data Within the Active AWS

This section explains how you can use primary or line commands to copy data
from one location to another within the active AWS.

When copying data, you must identify the line(s) to be copied and the
destination of the operation. The destination can be specified as:
v Number of the line at, or after, which the data are to be placed.
* After the line at which the AWS pointer is currently positioned.
T Before the first line of the active AWS.
B or ,, After the last line of the active AWS.
15.1.1.1 To Copy a Single Line:
Enter the COPY command followed by the number of the line to be copied
and the destination line number, as in:
COPY 295 36
In this example, the contents of line 2950 is to be copied at or after line 3600.
(If the destination line number exists, the data are inserted after it. If the line
number does not exist, the data are placed at that line number.)
15.1.1.2 To Copy a Range of Lines:
Enter the COPY command with the number of the first and last line to be
copied plus the destination. For example, to copy lines 2500 through 2700 to
the top of the active AWS, you would enter:
COPY 25 27 T
15.1.1.3 To Duplicate the Copied Lines at the Destination:
Use the Nv operand to duplicate lines, where v is the number of times the
data are to be repeated. For example, to copy lines 700 through 900 at, or after,
line 2500 and have those lines repeated three times, you would enter:
COPY 7 9 25 N3

You can use the:
■ Copy line commands to duplicate one or more lines to another location
within the active AWS.
■ Repeat line commands to repeat one or more lines immediately after
themselves.
15-2 User Guide

15.1.2.1 Copy Line Commands
As with the primary commands, you must indicate the line(s) to be copied and
the destination of that operation. (The destination line commands are shown
in the following table.)
■ To copy a single line:
Type C in the sequence number field of the line to be copied. (Also
include a destination line command in the sequence number field of the
appropriate line.)
■ To copy a block of lines:
Type CC in the sequence number field of the first and last lines to be
copied. (Also include a destination line command in the appropriate
sequence number field.)
Note: The lines involved in the operation need not appear on the same
screen. You can scroll the display forward or backward while the
command is pending (waiting for a matching copy or destination
line command).
■ To copy a range of lines:
In addition to the appropriate destination line command, type one of the
following line commands in the appropriate sequence number field:
Cv To copy v number of lines (for example, entering C5 causes the
line containing the command plus the next four lines to be
copied).
CB To copy all lines from the line containing the command through
the last line of the active AWS.
CT To copy all lines from the first line in the active AWS through the
line containing the command.
■ To copy repeatedly:
Type CR (for a single line copy) or CCR (on the first and last lines, for a
block copy) in the appropriate sequence number field. Then, type a
destination line command on the appropriate target sequence number field.
The destination line command that you use will either cause the CR or
CCR command(s) to remain displayed, allowing you to copy the same
line(s) to multiple locations, or remove the commands. (You can also use
the RESET line command to remove a pending CR or CCR command.)
The following table shows all of the destination line commands for Copy.
Command Type Meaning

A [v] Destination Only After this line, insert one or v number
of copies.
B [v] Before this line, insert one or v number
of copies.
BB [v] After the last line in the active AWS
insert one or v number of copies.
TT [v] Before the first line in the active AWS,
O [v] Overlay At Overlay one or v number of lines with
Destination copied data.
OD [v] Overlay one or v number of lines with
copied data and remove pending CR
or CCR line command.
OO Overlay block of lines, where OO is
entered on the first and last line of the
block of lines to be overlaid.
OB Overlay all lines from the line
containing the command through the
end of the active AWS with the copied
data.
OT Overlay all lines from the first AWS
line through the line containing the
command with the copied data.
AD [v] Destination And After this line, insert one or v number
Remove Pending of copies.
CR
BD [v] CCR Line Before this line, insert one or v number
Command of copies.
BBD [v] After the last line in the active AWS,
TTD [v] Before the first line in the active AWS,
15-4 User Guide

15.1.2.2 Using Overlay Destination Line Commands
The following example illustrates how you can use overlay destination line
commands. Only the blank characters in the target lines are overlaid with
corresponding data from the source lines.
AWS: Copy Line Commands Using Overlay
>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
C 8 SAMPLE PIC X( ).
O2 9 PART-DESCRIPTION-IN
1 INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN
>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
8 SAMPLE PIC X( ).
9 PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X( ).
1 INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC X( ).
The number of lines to be overlaid must be equal to or greater than the

number of lines being copied. For example, the upper screen in the previous
example shows that one line is to be copied (800) and that two lines are to be
overlaid with that data (900 and 1000). The lower screen shows the result,
where PIC X( ) has overlaid the corresponding blank positions in the
designated lines. (SAMPLE has been ignored since its corresponding positions
contain data.)
15.1.2.3 Repeat Line Commands
To copy one line immediately after itself, enter the R line command in the
appropriate sequence number field. To repeat one line multiple times, use Rv
where v is the number of times the line is to be repeated. To repeat a block of
lines, enter the RR line command in the sequence number field of the first and
last line to be repeated.
The following example illustrates the result of entering R4 on line 3200.

(Notice that the sequence numbers of the repeated lines are incremented by 1,
so as to have minimal impact on preexisting sequence numbers.)
AWS: Repeat Line Command Example
>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
3 PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X(26).
31 INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC S9(5).
R4 2 FILLER PIC X(3).
33 FD INVENTORY-REPORT
>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
3 PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X(26).
31 INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC S9(5).
32 FILLER PIC X(3).
321 FILLER PIC X(3).
15-6 User Guide

15.2 Copying Data to an AWS

You can use the COPY, COPYS and COPYX commands to bring data from the
current screen display, another AWS, a library member, an attached data set
object or an attached job output file into an AWS. When using these
commands, you must designate the source of the data being copied and its
destination within the active AWS. Optionally, you can direct the data to an
AWS other than the currently active one.
──┬─COPY──┬──source ...──AWS-destination──┬─────────┬─────────
├─COPYS─┤ └─TP name─┘
└─COPYX─┘
The source operands that identify the data to be copied are:

AWS name From the designated existing AWS.
DSN From the attached data set object. (Also see Chapter 27, “Data
Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” for information
about other ways you can copy a data set object into the
active AWS.)
JOB From the attached job output file.
LIB From the attached library member or Selection List. (Also see
Chapter 34, “Library: Performing Library Management
Tasks” for information about other ways you can copy library
data into the active AWS.)
mem Name of the library member to be copied.
SCREEN From the current screen display.
The destination of the copy operation within the active AWS or designated
AWS must be specified as:
v Number of the line at, or after, which the data are to be inserted in
the AWS.
T Before the first line of the AWS.
B or ,, After the last line of the AWS.
R Replace the contents of the AWS.
By default, the commands COPY, COPYS and COPYX bring data into the
active AWS. You can designate a different existing AWS by using the TO
name operand. Thus,
COPY DSN T
copies the currently attached data set object to the currently active AWS, while:
COPY AWS SAMPLE1 B TO SAMPLE2
copies the entire contents of the AWS named SAMPLE1 to the bottom of the
AWS named SAMPLE2.
15.2.1 Alternate Form of Screen Copy

Assuming the CA defaults are in effect, you can also copy the screen when an
RPF program or another application (like ETSO or CA-eMAIL+) is in control of
the terminal by entering:
:C
in any unprotected field and pressing PF12. (The cursor must immediately
follow the command :C.)
If the CA defaults are not in effect, the STATUS SYSTEM display identifies the:
■ Escape character: The field RCSESCCH identifies the character to use. The
default is a colon (:).
■ PF key: The field RCSESCPF identifies the PF key to use. The default is
PF12.
The screen is copied to the AWS identified by the SET COPYDEST command.
Note: An AWS destination must be in effect for this type of copy operation to
work successfully.
15.2.2 Copying All or a Range of Lines

You can use the COPY command to:
■ Copy all lines:
Enter the COPY command, the keyword indicating the source of the data
and the destination. For example, to copy the currently displayed screen
after line 900 of the active AWS, enter:
COPY SCREEN 9
If line 900 does not exist, the data are copied at that line number.
■ Copy a range of lines:
Enter COPY, the appropriate source keyword, the number of the first and
last line to be copied, and the destination, as in:
15-8 User Guide

COPY DSN 12 25 B TO SAMPLE

where lines 1200 through 2500 from the currently attached data set object
are to be copied to the bottom of the AWS named SAMPLE.
15.2.3 Copying Based on a Character String

You can use the command:
■ COPYS to copy line(s) from the source that contain a particular string into
the active or designated AWS, as in:
COPYS JOB /ADDRESS/ 12
where every line from the attached job output file containing the string
ADDRESS is copied to, or immediately after line 1200 in the active AWS.
(A source keyword, the appropriate string and a destination are required.)
■ COPYX to copy line(s) from the source that do not contain a particular
string to the active or a designated AWS, as in:
COPYX DSN /FILLER/ B TO TEST1
where every line from the attached data set object not containing the string
FILL is copied to the bottom of the AWS named TEST1.
Both COPYS and COPYX allow you to specify a range of lines to be searched
for a string. To do this, include the appropriate line numbers after the string.
For example, to copy every line between 1 and 300 that contain the string
NAME from the library member UPLIST into the active AWS at, or
immediately after, line 1200, you would enter:
COPYS UPLIST /NAME/ 1 3 12
By default, the entire line of the source data are searched for the specified
string.
You can limit the search operation to a specific range of columns. To limit the
search operation when copying from:
■ A library member, attached data set object or attached job output file:
– Use the SET BOUNDS primary command or BOUNDS line command
to change the column boundaries associated with the source data. (See
Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additional information.
– Specify a column range with the command, using the values shown on
the Scale Line. For example, to copy every line containing the string
FILLER within columns 10 through 50 of the attached job output file to
the bottom of the active AWS, you would enter:
COPYS JOB 1 5 /FILLER/ B
■ The displayed screen or a Selection List:

Assume that the left-most displayed position is column one and include
the appropriate numbers, as in:
COPYX SCR 1 3 // R
where every line from the current screen not containing *** in the first
thirty positions of the line is copied to the active AWS and replaces its
contents.
15-10 User Guide

15.3 Copying Data Between Screens

When you are working with split screens, you can use the XCOPY, XCOPYS
and XCOPYX commands to copy data from one split screen to the other. The
data are placed in the active AWS of the screen that contains the command. As
with the other copy operands, this is a nondestructive operation (the lines
being copied are not deleted from the source destination).
──┬─XCOPY──┬──┬────────────┬──AWS-destination─────────────────
├─XCOPYS─┤ └─source ...─┘
└─XCOPYX─┘
The source operands allow you to designate the data that is to be copied. The
operands are:
DSN From the data set object attached in the other screen. (Also see
Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” for
information about other ways you can copy a data set object into
the active AWS.)
JOB From the job output file attached in the other screen.
LIB From the library member or Selection List attached in the other
screen. (See Chapter 34, “Library: Performing Library Management
Tasks” for information about other ways you can copy library data
into the active AWS.)
mem Name of the library member to be copied.
If no source is specified, the default is the active AWS.
The destination of the copy operation within the active AWS can be specified
as:
v Number of the line at, or after, which the data are to be inserted in
the active AWS.
R Replace the contents of the active AWS.
15.3.1 Copying All or a Range of Lines

You can copy all or part of the data from the other split screen into the AWS
of the screen containing the command.
■ To copy all lines:
Enter the XCOPY command, the optional keyword indicating the source of
the data, and the destination, as in:
XCOPY DSN 9
where the entire contents of the data set object attached in the other split
screen is copied to, or immediately after, line 900 of the screen containing
the command.
Enter XCOPY, the appropriate optional source keyword, the number of the
first and last line to be copied, and the destination, as in:
XCOPY 1 12 B
Since no source keyword is specified in this example, lines 100 through
1200 from the active AWS in the other split screen are copied after the last
line of the active AWS in the screen containing the command.
15.3.2 Copying Based on a Character String

You can use the command:
■ XCOPYS to copy lines containing a particular character string from the
other split screen into the AWS of the screen containing the command.
■ XCOPYX to copy lines not containing a particular character string from
the other split screen into the AWS of the screen containing the command.
You can use these commands to copy all or selected lines.

■ To copy all lines containing the string RECORD-NUMBER in the job
output file attached in the other screen to the top of the active AWS in the
screen containing the command:
XCOPYS JOB /RECORD-NUMBER/ T
■ To copy every line between 1 and 300 that contains the string NAME from
the data set object attached in the other split screen to, or immediately
after, line 1200 of the active AWS in the screen containing the command:
XCOPYS DSN /NAME/ 1 3 12
By default, the entire line in the source data are searched for the specified
string.
When copying from:
15-12 User Guide

■ A library member, attached data set object or attached job output file. You
can limit the search operation to specific columns by:
– Using the SET BOUNDS primary command or BOUNDS line
command to change the column boundaries associated with the source
data. (See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additional
information.
– Specifying a column range with the command, using the values shown
on the Scale Line, as in:
XCOPYS JOB 1 5 /FILLER/ B
where every line containing the string FILLER in columns 10 through
50 of the job attached in the other screen is copied to the bottom of the
active AWS in the screen containing the command.
■ The displayed screen or a Selection List: You can limit the search to a
specific column by assuming that the left-most displayed position is
column one and include the appropriate numbers, as in:
XCOPYS SCR 1 3 // R
where every line from other screen containing *** in the first thirty
positions of the line is copied to the active AWS of the screen containing
the command and replaces its contents.
Column numbers and line numbers can be specified together, as in:

XCOPYS JOB 1 5 /FILLER/ 12 25 R
where only columns 10 through 50 of lines 1200 through 2500 of the attached
job are searched for the string FILLER. All matching lines are copied to the
active AWS, replacing its prior contents.
15-14 User Guide
Chapter 16. AWS: Deleting Data From an AWS
This chapter describes how you can delete data from the active AWS using:
■ The DELETE primary command to delete one or more lines.
■ The DELETES and DELETEX primary commands to delete lines containing
(or not containing) a specific string.
■ The delete line commands.
■ 3270 hardware facilities (for example, ERASE EOF and DELETE keys).
Chapter 16. AWS: Deleting Data From an AWS 16-1

16.1 Using Primary Commands

You can use primary commands to delete one or more lines from the active or
a specific AWS. The deletion can be by line number(s) or by the presence or
absence of a specific character string.
16.1.1 Deleting by Line Number

You can use the DELETE command to delete all or part of the contents of an
AWS:
■ To delete the entire contents of the active AWS, enter:
DELETE
■ To delete one line from a specific AWS, include the appropriate line
number and the AWS name, as in:
DELETE AWS SAMPLE 25
where line 2500 is to be deleted from the AWS named SAMPLE.
■ To delete a range of lines, include the first and last line numbers in the
range. For example, to delete lines 1600 through 3500 from the active AWS,
enter:
DELETE 16 35
When deleting a range of lines, you can indicate the last line of the end of
the AWS by specifying two consecutive commas (,,). For example, to delete
every line beginning with line 1600 through the end of the AWS named
SAMPLE, enter:
DELETE AWS SAMPLE 16 ,,
16.1.2 Deleting by Presence/Absence of a String

Use the DELETES and DELETEX commands to delete lines from the active or
a specific AWS based on the occurrence of a specific character string. (Use the
EDIT primary or line commands to delete a string without deleting the line.)
■ Use DELETES to delete lines that contain a particular string. For example,
to delete all lines from the active AWS that contain the string
PART-NUMBER-OUT, you would enter:
DELETES 'PART-NUMBER-OUT'
■ Use DELETEX to perform the opposite function - to delete lines not
containing a specified string. For example, to delete all lines from the AWS
named SAMPLE that do not contain the string NEW-RECORD, you would
enter:
DELETEX AWS SAMPLE 'NEW-RECORD'
16-2 User Guide

By default, every line in the AWS is searched for the specified string. With
both DELETES and DELETEX, you can limit the number of lines searched. For
example, to delete all lines from the active AWS containing the string XYZ
within lines 1 through 400, enter the line numbers after the string:
DELETES 'XYZ' 1 4
Also by default, the area within the current (or default) column boundaries is
searched for the string. To limit the columns involved, enter the number of the
starting and ending columns searched. For example, to delete only those lines
that do not contain INVENTORY-BALANCE in columns 1 through 50 of the
active AWS, enter the column numbers before the string:
DELETEX 1 5 'INVENTORY-BALANCE'
You can combine the operands to limit the search to a specific column range
within specific lines, as in:
DELETEX AWS SAMPLE 1 5 'NEW RECORD' 1 12
where every line within the AWS named SAMPLE not containing NEW
RECORD in columns 1 through 500 of lines 100 through 1200 is deleted.

16.2 Using Line Commands

You can use line commands to delete:
■ A single line:
Enter a D in the sequence number field of each line to be deleted.
■ A block of lines:
Enter DD in the sequence number field of the first and last lines of the
block. When deleting a block of lines, the entire range need not appear on
one screen. The display can be scrolled forward and backward while a DD
command is pending (while waiting for a matching DD command to be
entered).
■ A range of lines:
In the sequence number field of the appropriate line, enter:
Dv To delete v number of lines (for example, D5 deletes the line
containing the command and the next four lines).
DB To delete all lines from the line containing the command
through the last line of the active AWS.
DT To delete all lines from the first line through the line containing
the command.
■ One or more lines based on the presence or absence of a string:
When using the commands shown in the following table, enter the
command in the sequence number field and the string in the data portion
of the same line. Once the string has been specified, it is remembered for
any subsequent delete line command.
16-4 User Guide

LINE COMMAND MEANING

DS [v] [/string/] Deletes line (or lines within v number of lines)
containing string.
DSB [/string/] Deletes all lines containing string from this line to end
of active AWS.
DST [/string/] Deletes all lines containing string from first line
through this line.
DU [/string/] Deletes all lines from this line until first line containing
string.
DX [v] [/string/] Deletes line (or lines within v number of lines) not
containing string.
DXB [/string/] Deletes all lines not containing string from this line to
end of active AWS.
DXT [/string/] Deletes all lines not containing string from first line
through this line.

16.3 Using 3270 Hardware Facilities

Advantage CA-Roscoe supports the delete facilities available at 3270-type
terminals as explained in the following subsections.
16.3.1 Using the ERASE EOF Key

The current setting of the SET EOF and SET FILL commands determines the
extent of deletion that is to occur when you use the ERASE EOF key to delete
a line, where with:
SET EOF DELETE1 If SET FILL BLANK is in effect and the left display
margin is column one, the entire line is deleted. If
the left display margin is other than column one,
data beyond the right display margin is not
deleted.
If SET FILL NULL is in effect, the cursor is in
column one and the left display margin is column
one, the entire line is deleted. If the cursor is
positioned to any other column (regardless of the
left display margin), data beyond the right display
margin is not deleted.
SET EOF DELETE If SET FILL BLANK is in effect, the entire line is
deleted if all of the data within the current display
margins is erased.
If SET FILL NULL is in effect, the entire line is
deleted if the cursor is in the first displayed
position (not necessarily column one). If the cursor
is placed anywhere else, the contents of the line is
deleted from the cursor position to the end of the
display.
SET EOF ERASE If the cursor is in the first displayed position of the
line (not necessarily column one) when ERASE
EOF is pressed, all of the displayed line is deleted
(the line itself remains). (Data to the right or left of
the current display margins is not deleted.)
If the cursor is in any other position, the data from
the cursor location to the right display margin is
deleted.
16-6 User Guide

16.3.2 Using the DELETE Key

The DELETE key deletes data one character at a time. To do so, position the
cursor to the first character to be deleted and press the DELETE key. The
character is deleted and the displayed data are shifted one position to the left.
Any data existing beyond the right display margins is unaffected by this delete
and shift operation.

16-8 User Guide
Chapter 17. AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS
Information
To display information about the active AWS plus all of the AWSs that are
currently in use, enter the command:
STATUS AWS
Portions of the resulting display are modifiable. To produce a non-modifiable

display, include the LIST operand, as in:
STATUS AWS LIST
The following example illustrates the type of information displayed. Note that
if the bottom marker (== END OF LIST ==) is not displayed, the number of
AWSs exceeds the screen size. Use PF keys to scroll the display.
STATUS AWS Command: Sample Display
>

> AWS() SCRL FULL COLS 1 79 A<ROS1>+
>....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....
ROSCOE AWS STATUS TOTAL SESSION\SPLIT RECOVERABLE
MAX: 6 CURR: 2 MAX: 2 CURR: 2 M
NAME STATUS ROS MEMBER CHG LINES INCR LAST CURRENT ACT
ASSOCIATED DATASET NAME VOLUME UNIT
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
ROS1 (NONE) CHG 24 1 24 24
(NONE)
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
MYAWS ABC.MYMEM 1137 1 1137 1
TEST.SOURCE(MYSOURCE) MUROS1 338
======================= END OF LIST =======================

Chapter 17. AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information 17-1

Use the modifiable display to perform one or more of the following functions
by typing the appropriate code in the first field of the display.
A Attach AWS.
AT Alter AWS attributes. (Overtype the appropriate field(s) in the display
with the new attribute value(s).)
D Delete contents of AWS.
DS Discard AWS and delete its contents.
S Select AWS. (The AWS is activated but not displayed.)
R Rename AWS. (Type the new AWS name in the STATUS field.)
X Terminate display.
* Position Selection List to begin with the designated AWS.
When appropriate, the second shaded area (the STATUS field) will indicate the
result of the operation after it is performed.
The amount of available information exceeds the width of 80-character screens.

The information is, therefore, divided into alternate displays. You can change
the display to view different information by entering:
SELECT ALT [v]
where v is the number of the display to be viewed next. If you omit the
number, you will proceed sequentially through the different displays. (The
ALT field in the following figures contains the number of the alternate display
in which each field appears.) The first two lines in the Execution Area remain
constant as you scroll the display, and contain the fields:
TOTAL Made up of two fields of information:
1. CURRENT: Number of AWSs currently in effect for
the user session.
2. MAX: Number of AWSs that can be created for the
user session.
SESSION\SPLIT Made up of two fields of information:
1. CURRENT: Number of AWSs with the SESSION or
SPLIT attributes that are active for the user session.
2. MAX: Number of AWSs that can be created with the
SESSION or SPLIT attributes.
RECOVERABLE Made up of two fields of information:
1. CURRENT: Number of recoverable AWSs in effect.
2. MAX: Number of recoverable AWSs that can be
created.
Note: See 13.5, “Creating an AWS” on page 13-6 for more information.
17-2 User Guide

The remaining fields are described in the following table. Note that the
modifiable fields include information about how their values can be changed.
Field Name Description ALT

NAME Name of the AWS. ALL
ROS MEMBER Name of the last FETCHed, SAVEd or 1
UPDATEd library member or (NONE).
CHG Changed data indicator shown if data in 1
AWS is new or does not match the member
identified by last FETCH, COPY replace,
SAVE or UPDATE.
LINES Number of lines in the AWS or 0 if the 1
AWS is empty.
INCR Current line number increment or 100 if the 1
AWS is empty.
Change: Use the RENUMBER command.
LAST Number of the last line in the AWS or 1
blank if the AWS is empty.
CURRENT Number of the line at which the pointer is 1
positioned or blank if AWS is empty.
ACT Number of the split screen (1 or 2) in which
the AWS is active. If blank, the AWS is
available for use but not active.
ASSOCIATED Fully-qualified name of the data set 1
DATASET NAME COPYed or IMPORTed into the AWS or
(NONE).
VOLUME Serial number of the volume containing the 1
COPYed or IMPORTed data set or blank.
UNIT Unit name associated with the device on 1
which the data set resides or blank.
L-BOUNDS-R Current or default left and right column 2
boundary settings used by any command
that locates, edits, or shifts data.
Change: Use the AT function code and
overtype the appropriate field with the new
column boundaries; use the modifiable
STATUS DISPLAY screen, SET BOUNDS
command or BOUNDS line command.

L-SET DIS-R Left and right display margins established 2
by default, the last executed SET DISPLAY
command or the last change made to either
the STATUS DISPLAY or this screen.
overtype the appropriate field with the new
left or right display margin; use the SET
DISPLAY command or the modifiable
STATUS DISPLAY screen.
L-CUR DIS-R Left and right display margins temporarily 2
set by the: 1) last command that located
data outside of the established display
margins, or 2) value types in the COLS
field.
NUMBR Current or default sequence number 2
display setting.
overtype the field with NUM, NUMX,
NUM2 or NONUM; use the SET DISPLAY
command or the modifiable STATUS
DISPLAY screen.
DISP Current or default data display mode. 2
overtype the field with CHAR or HEX; use
the SET DISPLAY command or the
modifiable screen STATUS DISPLAY
screen.
POSTN Current or default screen positioning to 2
occur as a result of executing a FIRST,
NEXT, LAST, PREV, INCL or EXCL
primary command.
overtype the field with CJUST, JUST, CENT
or LOCK; use the SET SEARCH command
or the modifiable STATUS DISPLAY screen.
FILL Current or default trailing character to be 2
used in the AWS.
overtype the field with BLANK or NULL;
use the SET FILL command.
17-4 User Guide

MODE Current or default character translation 2
mode.
overtype field with BASIC, XTENDED or
standard; use SET MODE command or
modifiable STATUS DISPLAY screen.
TAB Current or default tab character followed 2
SETTINGS by the tab positions currently in effect.
overtype the:
1. First field with the special character to
be used as the tab character; use TAB
command.
2. Remaining fields with one to eight
column numbers; use TAB command.
CHARACTER Language character set code representing 3
SET the data that you can enter and display at
the terminal.
overtype the field with a language code
defined at your site; use SET CHARSET
command or modifiable STATUS SESSION
screen.
RECOVERY Current or default setting indicating 3
whether the contents of this AWS is to be
recovered in the event of a session or
system termination.
overtype the field with REC or NREC; use
ALTER AWS command.
DISCARD Current or default setting indicating when 3
this AWS is to be discarded.
overtype the field with SESSION, SPLIT,
RPF or LEVEL; use ALTER AWS command.

SELECT Current or default setting indicating how 3
this AWS can be referenced by the SELECT
command.
overtype the field with IMPLICIT or
EXPLICIT; use ALTER AWS command.
EOF Current or default extent of deletion that is 3
to occur when the ERASE EOF key is
pressed.
overtype the field with ERASE, DELETE or
DELETE1; use SET EOF command.
DSPLY Current or default data protection and 3
highlighting attribute.
overtype the field with U, UH, S or SH; use
SET AWSDSPLY.
SEQUENCE Current or default AWS sequence number 3
attribute.
overtype the field with NOSEQ, COBOL or
two numeric values where the first is
starting value and the second is the length
of the field (for example, 73 8); use SEQ or
NOSEQ command. (This attribute is also
changed by the execution of a CHAIN,
FETCH, MERGE or SAVE command.)
17-6 User Guide

Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in
an AWS
This chapter describes the different facilities that you can use to enter data into
the active AWS. It also describes how you can manually or automatically
format the data while entering it.
Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS 18-1

18.1 Entering Data
18.1 Entering Data

This section describes how you can:
■ Use primary and line commands to enter data into the active AWS.
■ Define and use a mask to insert data into the active AWS.
■ Use a PF key to open the AWS for data entry.
■ Add, delete or replace data from the Command Area.
Note: At most sites, data that you enter into the active AWS is automatically
translated to its corresponding uppercase characters (for example, if
you enter division, it is translated to DIVISION). You can control how
the data that you enter is to be recognized and treated. See Chapter 3,
“Controlling Character Recognition” for additional information.
18.1.1 Using Primary Commands

This section describes how you can enter data into an AWS that is either
empty or contains one or more lines by using:
■ INPUT - To open the Execution Area
■ INPUT TEXTENTR - To open the Execution Area for power typing
18.1.1.1 Opening the Execution Area
To add data to an empty active AWS, enter the command:

INPUT
As illustrated in the following example, the screen is opened to accept input,

the current (or default) increment is used for line number sequencing and the
cursor is placed at the to first line of the Execution Area, ready for data entry.
AWS: INPUT Command Adding Data to Empty AWS
18-2 User Guide

18.1 Entering Data
>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
1 _
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
11
12
13
14
15
========================== B O T T O M ==============

If you fill all lines in the Execution Area and still have more data to enter,
press the Enter key. The data you have entered is recorded in the active AWS
and a new screen is displayed. The first line in the Execution Area of the new
screen will contain the last line of data that you entered.
To indicate that you have completed data entry, either:

1. Press the Enter key or any PF key having a scroll function, or
2. Move the cursor to the Command Area and enter a command.
Either of these actions causes the screen to close. Any data that had not been
recorded in the active AWS is now recorded, all unused lines are deleted from
the Execution Area, and the beginning and end of the data in that AWS is
noted with TOP and BOTTOM markers.
You can also use the INPUT command to:
■ Insert data between existing lines.
Enter INPUT and the number of the line after which data are to be
inserted, as in:
INPUT 38
The following example illustrates the resulting screen. Notice that line 3800
is the first line in the Execution Area. The next existing line, 3900, is
displayed as the last line and is unnumbered to allow for multiple screens
of data entry. The intervening lines are available for data entry. To avoid
renumbering the existing contents, these inserted lines are incremented by
one.
If the designated line number (for example, 3800) does not exist, the
insertion begins at that line number. The first AWS line with a number less

18.1 Entering Data
than the specified line number is shown as the top line in the Execution
Area.
AWS: INPUT Command Inserting Data Between Two Lines
>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
381 _
382
383
384
...... 5 FILLER PIC X(3).
■ Insert data before the first line of the active AWS.

Enter the command as:
INPUT T
The resulting display contains the Execution Area opened for data entry.
(The inserted lines are numbered from 1 and incremented by 1.) The first
line of this AWS is shown as the last line of the Execution Area.
■ Add data to the end of the active AWS.
Enter the command as:
INPUT
or
INPUT B
The resulting display shows the last line of this AWS as the first line in the
Execution Area which is opened to accept input.
The current line number increment is used for sequence numbering. If the
next generated sequence number will exceed 999999, Advantage CA-Roscoe
stops accepting input. While this condition rarely occurs, issuing the
RENUMBER command with a lower starting sequence number and increment
value usually resolves the problem.
In all cases, the cursor is automatically positioned to the first line in the
Execution Area, ready for data entry.
If you fill the Execution Area, press the Enter key to continue entering data.
The entered data are recorded in the active AWS and a new screen is
displayed. The first line in the Execution Area of the new screen contains the
last line of data that you entered. (If the data you inserted generates sequence
numbers that overflow into existing AWS sequence numbers, the contents is
renumbered by 1 until the overflow condition is rectified.)
To terminate data entry you can press the Enter key or

move the cursor to the Command Area and enter a command.
18-4 User Guide

18.1 Entering Data
Either of these actions causes the screen to close. All unused lines are deleted
from the Execution Area, any data that has not been recorded in the active
AWS is then recorded, and the beginning and end of the data in this AWS is
noted with TOP and BOTTOM markers.
18.1.1.2 Using Power Typing Techniques
When you use the TEXTENTR operand of the INPUT command, the format of
the Execution Area is different than when this operand is not used.
With INPUT TEXTENTR:

■ The sequence number field is protected and invisible and the right margin
is ignored. This allows you to enter data in a wrap mode. This means that
if you reach the right margin while entering data, the cursor automatically
skips over the invisible sequence number field, allowing continuous data
entry. (Without TEXTENTR, the right margin marks the end of a word. If
you reach the margin in the middle of a word, the cursor is positioned to
the next line. The characters appearing at the end of the previous line are
treated as one word. The characters at the beginning of the new line are
treated as another word.)
■ The current column boundaries are recognized when the data are
formatted after you press the Enter key. As illustrated in the following
example, this allows you to establish a left and right margin for your data
and then use the entire screen to enter that data.
Any formatting that you do when entering the data are also remembered.
For example, to begin a new paragraph, move the cursor to the next line
and enter one or more spaces, then move the cursor to the next line and
resume typing. The blank line separating the paragraphs is remembered
when your data are formatted.
AWS: INPUT With TEXTENTR Operand
SET BOUNDS 1 5 & INPUT TEXTENTR

>
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ========================== T O P ================
1 THIS IS A SAMPLE.
...... ======================= B O T T O M =============
>

> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+
1 THIS IS A SAMPLE.
_

18.1 Entering Data
>

> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+
1 THIS IS A SAMPLE.
This sample shows how you can enter data in a wra
p mode and have it formatted for you when you dep
>

> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+
...... ========================== T O P ================
1 THIS IS A SAMPLE.
2 This sample shows how you can enter data
21 in a wrap mode and have it formatted for

You can use line commands:
I or IB To insert one or more empty lines in the active AWS for data entry.
TE To allow for power typing techniques.
18.1.2.1 Opening the Execution Area
You can use the I and IB line commands to insert one or more empty lines in
the active AWS. Use:
I To insert one or more lines after the line containing the command.
IB To insert one or more lines before the line containing the command.
To insert one line, enter I or IB in the appropriate sequence number field.
To insert multiple lines, enter Iv or IBv in the appropriate sequence number

field, where v is the number of lines to be inserted. You can request any
number of blank lines to be inserted. If you request more than can be
displayed, the resulting screen contains the maximum number of displayable
lines.
The following example illustrates how you would insert one line after line
1900 and three lines before line 2300.
Inserting Lines Using I and IB Line Commands
>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
I19 5 FILLER PIC X(7).
2 5 PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X(26).
21 5 INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC S9(5).
IB33 PROCEDURE DIVISION.
18-6 User Guide

18.1 Entering Data
>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... _
......
......
......
23 PROCEDURE DIVISION
When you press the Enter key after entering your data, the Execution Area is
examined. If there are any unused lines, they are removed. Lines containing
data are retained and assigned line numbers incremented by one.
18.1.2.2 Using SET AUTOINSERT
You can use the SET AUTOINSERT command to activate an automatic line
insertion facility. When this facility is active, one or more data entry lines are
inserted after you have used all of the lines provided by an I or IB line
command. (If the facility is not active, the insert operation terminates.) The
following examples show how to activate the facility with a default line
insertion value of 1. Once activated, new lines are provided as long as you
continue to enter data.
AWS: Automatic Data Entry Line Insertion
SET AUTOINSERT ON_

>
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
I19 5 FILLER PIC X(7).
>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... _
>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
191 5 filler pic X(1)._

18.1 Entering Data
>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... _
18.1.2.3 Using Power Typing Techniques
As with the TEXTENTR operand of the INPUT command, the TE line

command causes:
■ The sequence number field to be protected and invisible and the right
margin to be ignored. This allows you to enter data in a wrap mode. This
means that if you reach the right margin while entering data, the cursor
automatically skips over the invisible sequence number field, allowing
continuous data entry.
■ The current column boundaries are recognized when the data are
formatted after you press the Enter key.
>

> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+
...... ========================== T O P ================
TE1 THIS IS A SAMPLE.
...... ======================= B O T T O M =============
>

> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+
...... ========================== T O P ================
1 THIS IS A SAMPLE.
_
>

> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+
...... ========================== T O P ================
1 THIS IS A SAMPLE.
This sample shows how you can enter data in a wra
p mode and have it formatted for you when you dep
AWS: TE Line Command

>
> ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+
...... ========================== T O P ================
1 THIS IS A SAMPLE.
2 This sample shows how you can enter data
21 in a wrap mode and have it formatted for
18-8 User Guide

18.1 Entering Data
18.1.3 Using a Mask

The MASK line command allows you to define a character string mask that
can be inserted anywhere in the active AWS using the IM line command.
18.1.3.1 Defining a Mask
To define a mask,
■ Enter the command MASK in the sequence number field of any line in the
active AWS.
■ Then, enter the mask in the data portion of the same line. The mask must
be the only data on the line. Ensure that this is the case by overlaying
any other data on the line with spaces, or by using the DELETE or ERASE
EOF keys to delete the remaining data.
■ Finally, press the Enter key to establish the mask.
After the MASK command has been executed, the original contents of the line
are redisplayed.
Once the mask is defined, it remains in effect until you: 1) replace it with a
new mask definition, or 2) eliminate it.
To eliminate a mask, enter the command MASK in the sequence number field
of any line in the active AWS and press the Enter key.
18.1.3.2 Inserting a Mask
You can insert your data mask in the active AWS by using the:
■ IM (Insert Mask) line command
To insert one copy of the mask, position the cursor to the sequence
number field of the line after which you want the line inserted. Type IM in
the sequence number field and press the Enter key. A new line containing
the mask is inserted immediately after the line that contained the IM
command.
To insert multiple copies of the mask, include the appropriate numeric
value with the command, as illustrated in the following figure.
The first screen in the following examples shows the mask being defined
on line 3200. (Notice that only the mask appears on that line. The original
contents are restored when the command is executed.) The second screen
shows how multiple copies of the mask can be inserted. The third screen
shows the resulting display.

18.1 Entering Data
AWS: MASK and IM Line Commands to Define and Insert a Mask
>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
MASK 5 FILLER PIC X(3).
33 1 INVENTORY-REPORT.
>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
IM2 5 PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X(26).
32 5 PART-NUMBER-OUT PIC X(6).
>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
32 5 FILLER PIX X(3).
■ OM (Overlay Mask) line command.

To overlay one line, position the cursor to the sequence number field of the
appropriate line. Type OM and press the Enter key. The mask overlays the
corresponding blank characters in this line. (Only blank characters are
overlaid. If the line contains alphanumeric characters within the area
defined by the mask, those characters are not overlaid.)
To overlay multiple lines with the mask, include a numeric value with the
command. For example, if you enter OM3 on line 3400, the mask overlays
the corresponding blank characters on line 3400 and the next two lines.
You can also use the OMT and OMB commands to overlay multiple lines.
OMT overlays all of the lines from the first line of the active AWS through the
line containing the command. OMB overlays all of the lines from the line
containing the command through the end of this AWS.
18-10 User Guide

18.1 Entering Data
The following example illustrates how you can overlay lines with a mask. (It is
assumed the mask defined in the previous figure is still in effect.)
AWS: Overlay Line Commands to Insert a Mask
>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
OM3 5 FILLER
35 5 OUT-MONTH
36
>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
35 5 OUT-MONTH PIC X(3).
18.1.4 Using a PF Key

As distributed, PF12 and PF24 are assigned the INPUT function. If your site is
using this assignment, you can use either key to insert data into the active
AWS. To do so,
■ Position the cursor to the line after which the insertion is to be made.
■ Press the appropriate PF key.
The screen is opened for data entry immediately after the line at which the
cursor was positioned. Note that the column position of the cursor has no
affect on this operation.
To insert data at the top or bottom of the active AWS, position the cursor
before the first line, or after the last line, of that AWS and again press the
appropriate PF key.
18.1.5 Using the Command Area

If you only want to insert a few lines of data, you may find it convenient to
add the data from the Command Area. To do this:
1. Type the line number in the form =number, where number is the sequence
number to be assigned to the inserted line.
2. Leave at least one space, then type the data to be associated with that
sequence number.
3. Press the Enter key.

18.1 Entering Data
If the number you specify already exists within the active AWS, your line
replaces the existing line. If it does not, your line is added to the active AWS.
Using the following examples to illustrate, when the Enter key is pressed, the
previous contents of line 3100 are replaced with the information appearing in
the Command Area, while line 3101 is added to this AWS.
AWS: Inserting Data From Command Area
=31 5 PART-NUMBER PIC X(9).

=311 5 PART-TOTAL-IN PIC X(3).
>
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
31 5 PART-NUMBER PIC X(9).
311 5 PART-TOTAL-IN PIC X(3).
All of the lines comprising the Command Area can be used to enter data in
this manner. You can also use the command delimiter to enter more than one
line of data per Command Area line.
18-12 User Guide

18.2 Formatting Inserted Data

This section describes how you can format the data in the active AWS using:
■ An automatic indentation facility when you are inserting data using the I
or IB line command.
■ A software tab facility with data that is being entered into the active AWS
or already within the active AWS.
18.2.1 Using Automatic Indentation

You can activate the automatic indentation facility by issuing the command:
SET AUTOINDENT ON
When this facility is active, the cursor is automatically positioned under the
first data character when you insert data using the INPUT primary command,
I or IB line command or a PF key to which the INPUT function is assigned.
The following example illustrates how the cursor is positioned when you use
the I line command.
AWS: Using SET AUTOINDENT Command
>

> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+...
...... ============================= T O P ============
I1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
>

> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+...
...... ============================= T O P ============
...... _

18.2.2 Using the Software Tab Facility

The software tab facility allows you to define one to eight tab positions within
a line and then position data to those positions.
18.2.2.1 Setting Tabs and Defining a Tab Character
To define tab positions, use the TAB command. You can define a maximum of
eight different tab positions. For example:
TAB 12 16 2 32
sets tab positions at columns 12, 16, 20 and 32.
The default tab character (the special character you include with your data) is
the logical not sign (¬). To change this character, use the TAB command again.
For example, to establish the percent sign (%) as the tab character, you would
enter:
TAB %
As illustrated in the following example, the tab character and tab positions
must be defined in separate executions of the TAB command. When tab
positions are in effect, the tab character is used to indicate those positions on
the Scale Line.
AWS: Using TAB Command
TAB %

TAB 12 16 2 32
>
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+...
...... ============================= T O P ============
>

> <...+....1.%..+%...%....+....3.%:
...... ============================= T O P ============
18-14 User Guide

18.2.2.2 Using Tabs
When the tab character and tab positions are set, you can format your data by
including the tab character with your data. You can do this when you are:
■ Initially entering data in the active AWS, or
■ Formatting data that is already in the active AWS.
To shift the contents of a line to the appropriate location, enter one or more tab
characters. As illustrated in the following example, entering one tab positions
the data following it to the next defined tab position (for example, entering a
single tab character at the beginning of line 3800 shifts the line to begin in
column 12). To skip one or more tab positions (as illustrated in line 3400),
enter contiguous tab characters (that is, not separated by spaces).
AWS: Formatting Data With the Software Tab
>

> ...1.%..+%...2....+....3....+....%....+....5....+..
34 %%RECORD CONTAINS 133 CHARACTERS
35 %%LABEL RECORDS ARE OMITTED
36 %%DATA RECORD IS INVENTORY-REPORT-LINE.
38 %5 CARRIAGE-CONTROL%PIC X.
39 %5 FILLER%PIC X(9).
4 %5 PART-NUMBER-OUT%PIC X(1).
>

> ...1.%..+%...2....+....3....+....%....+....5....+..
34 RECORD CONTAINS 133 CHARACTERS
36 DATA RECORD IS INVENTORY-REPORT-LINE.
4 5 PART-NUMBER-OUT PIC X(1).
Note: The tab character is treated as a data character if either of the following
conditions occur:
■ The data includes the tab character but no tab positions have been defined.
■ The data includes more tab characters than the number of defined tab
positions (for example, four tab positions are defined and the data includes
five tab characters.)

18-16 User Guide
Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS
The commands described in this chapter can be used to format data or text
that is in the active AWS. These commands allow you to:
■ Center text lines
■ Control the capitalization of alphabetic characters within the data
■ Reformat text lines
■ Shift one or more lines to the left or right
■ Split and join text lines
Note: The software tab facility (described in Chapter 18, “AWS: Entering and
Formatting Data in an AWS”) can also be used to position data within
the active AWS.
Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS 19-1

19.1 Centering Text
19.1 Centering Text

You can center text on a line using either the TXTCENT primary command or
the TC line command.

You can use the TXTCENT command to center the text on one or more lines.
By default, the text is centered between the default or current left and right
column boundaries. For example, if the default column boundaries are in effect
and you enter:
TXTCENT 1
The contents of line 100 will be centered between 1 and 80.
You can override the default or current column boundaries by including the
BOUNDS operand with the command. The following example shows how you
can center the text on multiple lines between columns 9 and 45.
AWS: TXTCENT Command to Center Multiple Lines
TXTCENT 2 5 BOUNDS 9 45

>
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
1 ------------------------------------------------
2 THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED
3 SHIPPING COST REPORT. RATES
4 DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF ORDER AND
5 DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED.
6 ------------------------------------------------
>
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
1 ------------------------------------------------
6 ------------------------------------------------
19-2 User Guide

19.1 Centering Text

You can use line commands to center the text on one or more lines. The text is
centered between the default or current left and right column boundaries.
■ To center a single line:
Enter TC in the sequence number field of the appropriate line.
■ To center a block of lines:
Enter TCC in the sequence number fields of the first and last lines to be
centered.
■ To center a range of lines:
– Enter TCv in the sequence number field of the first line to be centered,
where v represents the number of lines to be centered (for example,
TC5).
– Enter TCB or TCT in the appropriate sequence number field. With
TCB, every line from the line containing the command through the end
of the active AWS will be centered. With TCT, every line from the
first line of the active AWS through the line containing the command
will be centered.
The text is centered between the default or current column boundaries. To

change the column boundaries, use the SET BOUNDS primary command or
the BOUNDS in line command.
In the following example, the BOUNDS line command is used to change the
column boundaries. The TCC line commands then center the text in the
designated block of lines between the boundaries.
AWS: TCC Line Command to Center Multiple Lines
>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
BOUNDS -<----------------------------------->----------
TCC2 THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED
TCC5 DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED.
6 ------------------------------------------------

19.1 Centering Text
The following example shows the results of these commands.
AWS: TCC Line Command Results
>

> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....>....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
1 ------------------------------------------------
6 ------------------------------------------------
19-4 User Guide

19.2 Controlling Capitalization

At most sites, data that you enter or edit in an AWS is automatically translated
to its corresponding uppercase characters (for example, if you enter the word
division, it is translated to DIVISION). You can control how data that you
enter and edit is to be recognized and treated. See Chapter 3, “Controlling
Character Recognition” for additional information.
There may be occasions when you want to retranslate one or more lines within
the active AWS. While you can do this by changing the current translation
mode setting and then modifying the appropriate lines, you can also use the
primary and line commands shown in the following table.
Action Primary Command Line

Translate uppercase characters to LOWCASE LC, LCC, LCB,
their corresponding lowercase LCT
characters.
Translate lowercase characters to UPCASE UC, UCC, UCB,
their corresponding uppercase UCT
characters.
None of these commands, however, are text sensitive. When dealing with lines
containing text, you should use the TXTLCASE primary command or TLC line
command to control capitalization.

You can use the TXTLCASE command to lowercase the characters in one or
more lines while ensuring that the first word of each sentence begins with a
capital letter.
For example, to lowercase the characters within the current or default column
boundaries of line 100 through 500, you would enter:
TXTLCASE 1 5
You can use the optional BOUNDS operand to override the default or current
column boundaries. For example, to lowercase the characters between columns
9 and 45 of lines 700 through 1200, you would enter:
TXTLCASE 7 12 BOUNDS 9 45

19.2.2 Using a Line Command

You can use the TLC command to control the capitalization of the lines
comprising a paragraph. It lowercases the characters encountered while
ensuring that the first letter of each sentence is in uppercase.
To use this command, enter TLC in the sequence number field of the
appropriate line. When the Enter key is pressed, all of the characters on the
line containing the command through the end of the current paragraph are
translated to their corresponding lowercase characters. The end of a paragraph
is indicated by:
■ A blank line
■ A change in indentation
■ The end of the active AWS
Note: Only the characters found within the default or current column
boundaries are translated. To change the column boundaries, you can
use the SET BOUNDS primary command or the BOUNDS line
command.
19-6 User Guide

19.3 Reformatting Text Lines

At any point, the TXTFLOW primary command or TF line command can be
used to reformat the text within the active AWS.

You can use the TXTFLOW command to reformat the text appearing on one or
more lines of the active AWS. For example, to reformat the text comprising
lines 2 through 7, you would enter:
TXTFLOW 2 7
The resulting display shows the reformatting text comprising those lines. Each
reformatted line:
■ Begins at the default or current left column boundary. (In these examples,
that is column 9.)
EXCEPTION:
If the text within the designated lines begins inside the left column
boundary, the reformatted lines begin at the column that contained the
left-most character comprising those lines. For example, if the left
column boundary is set to 9 and all of the text lines begin in column
15, the reformatted lines begin in column 15.
■ Ends at the default or current right column boundary or right display

margin, whichever is less. For example, assume that the terminal screen
displays a line 72 characters in length. If the right column boundary is set
at:
– Column 50 - The reformatted text stops at column 50.
– Column 80 - The reformatted text stops at column 72.
You can override the right column boundary for the execution of a command
by specifying the COLS operand. In the following example, lines 2 through 7
will be reformatted and the reformatted lines will not extend beyond column
30.

AWS: TXTFLOW Command to Reformat Text Lines
TXTFLOW 2 7 COLS 3

>
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
1 ------------------------------------------------
3 SHIPPING COST REPORT. SHIPPING RATES
5 DEPEND ON WEIGHT OR ORDER AND
7 DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED
9 ------------------------------------------------
>

> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
1 ------------------------------------------------
2 THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN
3 ESTIMATED SHIPPING
4 COST REPORT. SHIPPING
5 RATES DEPEND ON WEIGHT
6 OF ORDER AND DISTRICT
7 TO WHICH ORDER
8 SHIPPED.
9 ------------------------------------------------
19.3.2 Using a Line Command

You can use the TF line command to reformat the paragraph you are working
with. A paragraph extends from the line containing the command to:
■ The first blank line
■ A change in indentation
■ The end of the active AWS
AWS: TF Line Command to Reformat Text Lines
>

> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....>
...... ============================= T O P =============
TF1 THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED
>

> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....>
...... ============================= T O P =============
1 THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED SHIPPING COST
2 REPORT. SHIPPING RATES DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF
3 ORDER AND DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED.
19-8 User Guide

As illustrated in the previous example, reformatted lines:

■ Begin at the default or current left column boundary. (See page 19-7 about
the TXTFLOW primary command for an exception to this rule.)
■ End at the default or current right column boundary or right display
margin, whichever is less.
By specifying a numeric value with the command, you can override the right
column boundary. The following example illustrates how you would reformat
the lines within a paragraph so that the text does not extend beyond column
35.
AWS: TF Line Command to Reformat Text Line
>

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....>
...... ============================= T O P =============
TF351 THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED SHIPPING COST
2 REPORT. SHIPPING RATES DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF
3 ORDER AND DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED.
>

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....>
...... ============================= T O P =============
1 THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN
2 ESTIMATED SHIPPING COST
3 REPORT. SHIPPING RATES
4 DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF ORDER
5 AND DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER
6 SHIPPED.

19.4 Shifting Data
19.4 Shifting Data

You can shift all or part of the contents of one or more lines to the left or right
using either primary or line commands.

You can use the RSHIFT and LSHIFT command to move the contents of one or
more lines in the active AWS to the right or left, respectively. For example, to
shift the entire contents of the active AWS five positions to the right, you
would enter:
RSHIFT 5
To limit the operation to specific lines, you can include the appropriate line
numbers with the command, as in:
LSHIFT 2 1 5
where only the contents of lines 100 through 500 are shifted two positions to
the left.
By default, the data within the default (or current) column boundaries is
shifted. You can use the SET BOUNDS command to change the column
boundaries for your session. To change the boundaries for a single execution of
the command, use the BOUNDS operand, as in:
RSHIFT 5 BOUNDS 8 2
where only the data within columns 8 through 20 are shifted five positions to
the right.
Note: SET BOUNDS is described in Chapter 4, “Defining Column
Boundaries.”
If you shift the contents of a line beyond right or left column boundary, the
data are lost. This may be useful if you want to clear a field. For example, if
you enter:
LSHIFT 7
RSHIFT 7
the first seven positions within the default (or current) column boundary of
each active AWS line is blank-filled.
19-10 User Guide

19.4 Shifting Data
To prevent data from being lost by such an operation, include the TEXTSTOP
operand with the command. For example, if you enter:
LSHIFT 3 TEXTSTOP
every line in the active AWS is shifted 30 positions to the left. However, if any
line contains data that would be shifted beyond the left margin, the operation
is stopped for that line when the left margin is reached.

The following table lists the line commands you can use to shift the contents of
one or more lines to the left or right. As with the primary commands, you can
shift one or more lines to the left or right, where:
■ Using the commands beginning with ( or ), the line is shifted the
designated number of positions, regardless of the current column
boundary setting (that is, data may be lost).
■ Using the commands beginning with < or >, the line is shifted the
designated number of positions or until the appropriate column boundary
is reached (that is, data are not lost).
To change the column boundaries that are currently in effect, you can use the
SET BOUNDS primary command or BOUNDS line command. See Chapter 4,
“Defining Column Boundaries” for additional information.
Shift Shift Meaning

Line Until
Data
) [v] > [v] Shift right 1 or v spaces.
)) [v] >> [v] Shift block of lines right 1 or v spaces. Enter on first
and last line of block.
)B [v] >B [v] Shift right 1 or v spaces from line containing
command through end of active AWS.
)T [v] >T [v] Shift right 1 or v spaces from first line through line
containing command.
( [v] < [v] Shift left 1 or v spaces.
(( [v] << [v] Shift block of lines left 1 or v spaces. Enter << on first
and last line of block.
(B [v] <B [v] Shift left 1 or v spaces from line containing command
through end of active AWS.
(T [v] <T [v] Shifts left 1 or v spaces from first line through line
containing command.

19.4 Shifting Data
The following example illustrates how you can use these line commands to
format data. The upper screen contains the unformatted data and appropriate
line commands; the lower screen shows the correctly formatted data (how the
data will look after the line commands are executed).
Using Line Commands to Shift Data
>

> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.
...... ================================ T O P ============
>41 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.
<42 PROGRAM-ID. INVLIST.
>>43 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.
>>4 CONFIGURATION SECTION.
>

>
<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.
...... ================================ T O P ============
19-12 User Guide

19.5 Splitting and Joining Text Lines

You can split one line into two or join two lines together using either primary
or line commands.
19.5.1.1 Splitting Lines
You can split one line into two using the TXTSPLIT primary or TS line
command. You can use the TXTSPLIT command to split a line at a specific
location. The following example shows line 300 being split at column 31 (top
screen). Everything from that position to the right column boundary is moved
to the next line. The text will begin at the left column boundary of that line. In
this case, it means that the word RATES is moved to line 301 and begins in
position 9, which is the current left boundary (bottom screen).
AWS: TXTSPLIT Command to Split One Line
TXTSPLIT 3 COLS 31

>
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
1 ------------------------------------------------
6 ------------------------------------------------
>

> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
1 ------------------------------------------------
3 SHIPPING COST REPORT.
31 RATES
6 ------------------------------------------------

A variation of the example shown in the previous figure uses the CURSOR
operand. For example, you could have split the line by positioning the cursor
to column 31 on line 300 and entering:
TXTSPLIT CURSOR TXTSPLIT
This form of TXTSPLIT is especially useful when it is assigned to a PF key.

Then, you only need to position the cursor to the appropriate column within
the appropriate line and press the PF key. The following example shows how
you can use TXTSPLIT to split multiple lines. In this case, lines 400 and 500
are split at column 27. Everything from that position through column 45 is
moved to the appropriate next line, beginning in column 12.
TXTSPLIT Command to Split Multiple Lines
TXTSPLIT 4 5 COLS 27 BOUNDS 12 45

>
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
1 ------------------------------------------------
31 RATES
6 ------------------------------------------------
>

> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
1 ------------------------------------------------
4 RATES
5 DEPEND ON WEIGHT
6 OF ORDER AND
7 DISTRICT TO WHICH
8 ORDER SHIPPED.
9 ------------------------------------------------
19.5.1.2 Joining Lines
You can use the TXTJOIN command to rejoin two lines. In the following
example, the modified contents of line 4 are being rejoined to line 3. Since no
column number is specified, the contents of line 4 begins one space after the
current last word on line 3.
19-14 User Guide

AWS: TXTJOIN Command to Rejoin Two Lines
TXTJOIN 3

>
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
1 ------------------------------------------------
4 SHIPPING RATES
5 DEPEND ON WEIGHT
6 OR ORDER AND
7 DISTRICT TO WHICH
8 ORDER SHIPPED.
9 ------------------------------------------------
>

> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
1 ------------------------------------------------
5 DEPEND ON WEIGHT
6 OR ORDER AND
7 DISTRICT TO WHICH
8 ORDER SHIPPED.
9 ------------------------------------------------
The following example shows how you can rejoin multiple lines (lines 5
through 8, in this case). The example also shows how you can have the joined
lines begin in a specific location. When a column number is specified with the
command, the joined text begins one space after the designated column (in the
example, the joined text begins one space after column 26).
AWS: TXTJOIN Command to Rejoin Multiple Lines
TXTJOIN 5 8 COLS 26

>
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
1 ------------------------------------------------
5 DEPEND ON WEIGHT
6 OR ORDER AND
7 DISTRICT TO WHICH
8 ORDER SHIPPED.
9 ------------------------------------------------

>
> .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
1 ------------------------------------------------
9 ------------------------------------------------
19.5.2.1 Splitting Lines
To split a text line into two lines:

1. Type the TS line command in the sequence number field of the appropriate
line, and
2. Position the cursor to the desired location within the data portion of that
line.
You can also insert lines for data entry when you split a line. In the following
example, TS2 is typed in the sequence number field of line 200 and the cursor
is positioned to column 31. When the Enter key is pressed, everything from the
cursor position to the right column boundary is moved to begin at the left
column boundary of the new next line. Since a numeric value was specified
with the command, the appropriate number of data entry lines is inserted
between the split.
AWS: TS Line Command to Split a Line
>

> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
TS22 SHIPPING COST REPORT. RATES
-
>
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
......
......
21 RATES
19-16 User Guide

If anything is typed on the inserted lines (like text or a space), the lines are
retained when the next operation is performed. If nothing is entered, the lines
are removed.
19.5.2.2 Joining Lines
You can use the TJ line command to rejoin two lines. When this command is
executed, the joined line begins one space after the last word on the preceding
line.
The following example shows how you can rejoin the modified contents of line
201 to line 200. Since nothing was entered on the inserted lines, they are
removed when the operation is performed.
AWS: TJ Line Command to Join Two Lines
>

> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
TJ2 SHIPPING COST REPORT.
......
......
21 SHIPPING RATES
>
> ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
To have the joined line begin in a specific location, include a numeric value
with the command, where the value represents the column after which the text
from the following line is to be placed. For example, entering TJ35 causes the
following line to begin one space after column 35 of the line containing the
command.

19-18 User Guide
Chapter 20. AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS

■ Display specific occurrences of a character string using the FIRST, NEXT,
LAST and PREV primary and line commands.
■ Display all lines containing (or not containing) a specific character string
using the INCL and EXCL primary or line command. (This display is
modifiable. To produce a non-modifiable display, use the SEARCH or
OMIT command.)
■ Customize the operation by: 1) qualifying the search string, and 2)
designating the resulting screen positioning.
While the examples in this chapter show strings that are in character format,
you can also locate and display data that is in hexadecimal representation. See
20.3, “Customizing the Operation” for details.
Chapter 20. AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS 20-1

20.1 Finding Specific Occurrences of a String

In addition to the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV primary and line commands,
you can use the ATTACH command to position data to the first line
containing a specific character string. For example, you might want to copy a
library member into the active AWS and then begin the resulting display with
the first line containing a specific string, as in:
FETCH INVLIST
ATTACH /DATA/
The resulting display begins with the first line containing the string DATA.

You can use the following commands to locate and display specific
occurrences of a string:
FIRST Locates and displays first occurrence of a string.
NEXT Locates and displays the next occurrence of a string.
LAST Locates and displays the last occurrence of a string.
PREV Locates and displays the previous occurrence of a string.
For example, to locate and position the display to the first line containing the
string TEST-DATA, enter:
FIRST TEST-DATA
To locate and display the next occurrence of the same string, all you need
enter is:
NEXT
Once specified, the string is remembered until you specify a different one. It is
used with any subsequent EXCL, FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV primary
or line command that does not include a string. (The string specified with the
ATTACH command is also remembered and used with any subsequent EXCL,
FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV primary or line command that does not
include a string.)
By default, the entire AWS is searched for the string (every column of every
line). You can limit the extent of the operation to specific columns or lines. For
example, to locate the last occurrence of TEST-DATA and to limit the search to
columns 10 through 50, you would enter:
LAST 1 5 TEST-DATA
where the column numbers are specified before the string. To limit the search
to a specific number of lines, specific the appropriate value after the string. For
example, to search the previous 200 lines for the first occurrence of
TEST-DATA, enter:
20-2 User Guide

PREV TEST-DATA 2
Boundaries” for information about changing boundaries for the
terminal session.
Finally, you can combine a column range and line limit within a command, as
in:
FIRST 1 5 TEST-DATA 2

You can use line commands to locate specific occurrences of a string. The line
commands are FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV.
To locate a string, enter the appropriate line command in the sequence number
field and the delimited search string in the data portion of the same line. The
following example shows how to find the last occurrence of the string
PRINT-FILE.
AWS: LAST Line Command
>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
LAST /PRINT-FILE/TEST-DATA ASSIGN TO S-SYSIN.
-
37 SELECT PRINT-FILE ASSIGN TO S-SYSPRINT.
38 DATA DIVISION.
39 FILE SECTION.
4 FD TEST-DATA
42 DATA RECORD IS TEST-RECORD.
43 1 TEST RECORD PIC X(8).
44 FD PRINT-FILE


If the string was specified with a previously executed ATTACH, EXCL, FIRST,
INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV primary or line command, you need not respecify
it. Once a character string is specified, it is remembered and available for use
until you change it.
By default, the entire line is searched. To limit the search to specific columns,
you can use the modifiable STATUS DISPLAY screen, the SET BOUNDS
primary command or the BOUNDS line command. See Chapter 4, “Defining
Column Boundaries” for additional information.
20-4 User Guide

20.2 Including/Excluding Lines Containing a String

You can locate all lines containing a specific string by using the INCL primary
or line command. The resulting display is modifiable. To produce a
non-modifiable display, use the SEARCH primary command.
To locate all lines not containing a specific string, use the EXCL primary or
line command. Again, the resulting display is modifiable. To produce a
non-modifiable display, use the OMIT primary command.
20.2.1.1 INCL and EXCL
The INCL and EXCL primary commands display all lines including or
excluding a specific character string. For example, to display all lines that do
not contain the string TEST-DATA, specify:
EXCL TEST-DATA
To then display all of the lines that contain the same string, all you need enter
is:
INCL
When you do not specify a string, the string specified with the previous
ATTACH, EXCL, FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV primary or line
command is assumed.
To limit the search to specific columns or numbers of lines, specify the column
numbers before the string and the number of lines after the string. For
example,
EXCL 12 4 DATA 4
limits the search for DATA to columns 12 through 40 of the next 400 lines.
remainder of the terminal session.
The following example illustrates the type of display resulting from the
execution of an INCL or EXCL command.

AWS: INCL Command Display
> AWS7: LINES 3 THRU BOTTOM SEARCHED WITH 5 MATCHES

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ======================= INCL/EXCL DISPLAY ===========
36 SELECT TEST-DATA ASSIGN TO S-SYSIN.
4 FD TEST-DATA
143 OPEN INPUT TEST-DATA.
147 READ TEST-DATA INTO HOLDING-AREA.
27 CLOSE TEST-DATA.
If the number of lines containing (or not containing) the string exceeds the size
of your terminal screen, you can:
1. Press one of the PF keys to which a scroll function is assigned. The
direction of the scan depends on the value of the PF key that is pressed, or
2. Enter the INCL or EXCL line command, with no operand, in the sequence
number field of a line and press Enter. The scan begins with that line and
continues towards the end of the data.
To see the data that follows a particular line, you can:

■ Type an asterisk (*) in the sequence number field of that line.
■ Type the line number in the sequence number field of any line.
■ Alter the sequence number field of the line (for example, by deleting a
leading zero).
After pressing the Enter key, the resulting display begins with the designated
line.
Note: While the INCL/EXCL display shows only the appropriate lines within
the active AWS, all of the lines may be affected by the action of a
primary or line command. If, for example, you delete a range of lines
(using either a primary or line command), all of the displayed and
non-displayed lines within that range are deleted.
20.2.1.2 SEARCH and OMIT
Use the SEARCH command to produce a non-modifiable display of all

occurrences of a specific string within the active AWS.
Use the OMIT command to produce a non-modifiable display of all lines not
containing a specific string.
When using these commands, the string must be delimited, as in:

SEARCH 'INVENTORY-BALANCE'
20-6 User Guide

As illustrated in the following example, the resulting display contains the

number and contents of each line containing the string.
AWS: SEARCH Command Display
_

>
>
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6
46 5 INVENTORY-BALANCE-OUT PIC ZZ,ZZ9.
75 MOVE INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN
76 TO INVENTORY-BALANCE-OUT.
With both commands, you can limit the operation to: 1) a specific range of
columns and 2) a specific range of lines. For example,
OMIT 2 5 'PIC' 15 9
displays all lines that do not contain the string PIC in columns 20 through 50
of lines 150 through 900.

The INCL and EXCL line commands are similar to the INCL and EXCL
primary commands. To use the line commands, enter the appropriate
command in the sequence number field of the first line to be searched. Then,
enter the character string (bound by delimiters) in the data portion of the same
line.
The following example shows the display that might result after executing an
INCL line command.
AWS: Using INCL Line Command
>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....
...... ============================= T O P ============
INCL /WS-END-OF-FILE-SWITCH./
> AWS7: LINES 51 THRU BOTTOM SEARCHED WITH 3 MATCHES

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....
...... ======================= INCL/EXCL DISPLAY ======
51 5 WS-END-OF-FILE-SWITCH PIC X(3).
69 MOVE 'NO ' TO WS-END-OF-FILE-SWITCH.
82 AT END MOVE 'NO ' TO WS-END-OF-FILE-SWITCH.

If INCL or EXCL retrieve more lines than can be displayed on the screen at
one time, you can reposition the display by:
1. Entering the INCL or EXCL line command, with no operand, in the
sequence number field of a line and pressing Enter. The scan begins with
that line and continues towards the end of the data, or
2. Pressing one of the PF keys to which a scroll function is assigned. The
direction of the scan depends on the value of the PF key that is pressed.
To see the data that follows a particular line, you can:

■ Type an asterisk (*) in the sequence number field of that line.
■ Type the line number in the sequence number field of any line.
■ Alter the sequence number field of the line (by deleting a leading zero).
After pressing the Enter key, the resulting display begins with the designated
line.
Note: While the INCL/EXCL display shows only the appropriate lines within
the active AWS, all of the lines may be affected by the action of a
primary or line command. If, for example, you delete a range of lines
(using either a primary or line command), all of the displayed and
non-displayed lines within that range are deleted.
20-8 User Guide

20.3 Customizing the Operation

This section describes how you can qualify the search operation.
20.3.1 Translating the Search String

The current setting of the SET MODE command determines how the character
string specified with the command is to be treated. If SET MODE BASIC is in
effect and you enter the string division, it is treated as though you entered it in
uppercase (DIVISION). If SET MODE XTENDED is in effect, the string is not
translated to uppercase. See Chapter 3, “Controlling Character Recognition”
for additional information.
20.3.2 Delimiting the Search String

In all of the examples using primary commands, the search string has not been
delimited. With these primary commands, you only need to delimit the string
when it:
■ Includes a space (FIRST /TEST DATA/)
■ Is a numeric (LAST /519/)
■ Is the same as a keyword operand (or its abbreviation) of the (INCL
/JOB/)
When using a line command, the string must be delimited.
20.3.3 Qualifying the Search String

By default, the search is for any string of characters that match the specified
string. To limit the search operation, you can include one of the qualifier
operands. These operands are WORD, PREFIX, BEGIN, EMBED, END and
SUFFIX
For example, assume the active AWS contains the line:

'THE OTHER BROTHER ATE THEIR APPLE DURING THE CONTEST'
and you want to search for the string THE. Without qualification, the words
THE, OTHER, BROTHER and THEIR match the search string. By including a
qualifier, you can designate the type of string match that is to occur, as in:
THE WORD Qualifies THE as a word, only THE matches.
THE PREFIX Qualifies THE as beginning a word, only THEIR matches.

THE BEGIN Qualifies THE as beginning or being a word - THE and

THEIR match.
THE EMBED Qualifies THE as contained within a word - OTHER and
BROTHER match.
TEST END Qualifies TEST as ending or being a word - only CONTEST
matches.
TEST SUFFIX Qualifies TEST as ending a word - only CONTEST matches.
20.3.4 Specifying the String in Hexadecimal

To designate the hexadecimal representation of a string, use the format:
X'string'
where the string is bound by apostrophes and contains an even number of

characters, as in:
FIRST X'C1'
When using:
■ The primary commands FIRST, LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL or EXCL, you
do not need to delimit the hexadecimal string.
When using the comparable line commands, as illustrated in the following
example, the string must be bound by delimiters.
■ For primary commands SEARCH or OMIT, the string must be bound by
delimiters. (Note that the resulting display is not modifiable and shows
only the character format of matching lines.)
The search string itself can be specified in either uppercase or lowercase

characters. For the search operation, it is translated to uppercase. You have the
same result if you specify:
FIRST X'C1'
or
first x'c1'
20-10 User Guide

AWS: Using a Hexadecimal String With a Line Command
>

> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5...
...... ============================= T O P =================
LAST /X'C1'/ THOMAS W
4CDECDC4444444ECDDCE4444E44444444444444444444444444
866194386412613
-----------------------------------------------------
2 SMITHSOM SALLY S
4EDCECEDD44444ECDDE44444E44444444444444444444444444
2493826521338221
-----------------------------------------------------
3 WALTERS JOHN
4ECDECDE444444DDCD444444444444444444444444444444444
6133592168513
-----------------------------------------------------
To locate a character string that could be interpreted as being in hexadecimal

representation, either:
■ Use the LITERAL operand with the primary commands, as in:
FIRST X'C1' LITERAL
■ Specify the string so that it does not conform to hexadecimal notation. This
method can be used with both primary and line commands. For example,
to find the character string X'C1' you might specify:
/X'C1/
or
/X'C1' / 2
20.3.5 Positioning the Resulting Display

By default, the first line containing (or not containing) the specified search
string begins the resulting display. You can change this default for your
session using the SET SEARCH command.
By specifying a screen positioning operand with the FIRST, NEXT, LAST,

PREV, INCL or EXCL primary command, you can also control how the
resulting display is to be positioned. The screen positioning operands are:
CJUSTIFIED The display margins are to be altered if the entire matching
string does not fall within the current margin. (This is the
default positioning.)
JUSTIFIED The display margins are always to be altered so that the first
character of the string begins in the left-most position of the
line.
CENTERED The display margins are to be altered to center the matching
string on the line. If centering would cause an invalid left
margin (less than 1), the display is not altered.

LOCKED The display margins are not to be altered even if the matching
string occurs to the left or right of the current margins.
These operands are specified after the string, as in:

FIRST /WIDGET/ JUSTIFIED
If the string is not found, the display is repositioned to: 1) the end of the active
AWS or given range if FIRST or NEXT are specified, or 2) the beginning of the
active AWS or given range if LAST or PREV are specified.
20-12 User Guide

Chapter 21. AWS: Moving Data Within an AWS
This chapter describes how you can use primary and line commands to move
one or more lines within the active AWS.
Note that a move operation (unlike a copy operation) is destructive (the lines
being moved are deleted from their original location after being inserted in
their new location).
Chapter 21. AWS: Moving Data Within an AWS 21-1

21.1 Using a Primary Command
21.1 Using a Primary Command

When moving data, you must identify the line(s) to be moved and the
destination of the operation.
■ To move a single line: enter the MOVE command followed by the number
of the line to be moved and the destination line number, as in:
MOVE 295 36
In this example, the contents of line 2950 is to be moved at or after line
3600. (If the destination line number exists, the data are inserted after it. If
the line number does not exist, the data are placed at that line number.)
■ To move a range of lines: enter the MOVE command with the number of
the first and last line to be moved plus the destination line number. For
example, to move lines 2500 through 2700 at, or after, line 1500, you would
enter:
MOVE 25 27 15
In addition to a line number, the destination can also be indicated through the
keyword operands:
For example, to move lines 1200 through 2800 to the bottom of the active
AWS, you would enter:
MOVE 12 28 B
21-2 User Guide


As with the primary commands, you must indicate the line(s) to be moved and
the destination of that operation. (The destination line commands are shown in
the following table.
■ To move a single line:
Type M in the sequence number field of the line to be moved. (Also
include a destination line command in the sequence number field of the
appropriate line.)
■ To copy a block of lines:
Type MM in the sequence number field of the first and last lines to be
moved. (Also include a destination line command in the appropriate
sequence number field.)
Note: The lines involved in the operation need not appear on the same
screen. You can scroll the display forward or backward while the
command is pending (for example, waiting for a matching move or
destination line command).
In addition to the appropriate destination line command, type one of the
following line commands in the appropriate sequence number field:
Mv To move v number of lines (for example, entering M5 causes
the line containing the command plus the next four lines to be
moved).
MB To move all lines from the line containing the command
through the last line of the active AWS.
MT To move all lines from the first line in the active AWS through
the line containing the command.

A Destination After this line.
Only
B Before this line.
BB After the last line in this AWS.
TT Before the first line in this AWS.
O [v] Overlay At Overlay one or v number of lines.
Destination
OB Overlay all lines from the line containing
the command thru the end of this AWS.
Chapter 21. AWS: Moving Data Within an AWS 21-3


OO Overlay a block of lines where OO
appears in the first and last line of the
range of lines to be overlaid.
OT Overlay all lines from the first AWS line
through the line containing the command.
21.2.1.1 Using Overlay Destination Line Commands
The following example illustrates how you can use overlay destination line
commands. Notice that only the blank characters in the target lines are
overlaid with corresponding data from the source lines.
AWS: Move Line Commands Using Overlay Destination
>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
M 8 SAMPLE PIC X( ).
O2 9 PART-DESCRIPTION-IN
1 INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN
>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
8 SAMPLE PIC X( ).
9 PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X( ).
1 INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC X( ).
The number of lines to be overlaid must be equal to or greater than the

number of lines being moved. For example, the upper screen in the previous
figure shows that one line is to be moved (line 800) and that two lines are to
be overlaid with that data (lines 900 and 1000). The lower screen in the
previous figure shows the result, where PIC X( ) has overlaid the
corresponding blank positions in the designated lines. (SAMPLE has been
ignored since its corresponding positions contain data.)
21-4 User Guide

Chapter 22. AWS: Renumbering Data in the AWS
Advantage CA-Roscoe stores data in the form of variable length records not
exceeding 255 characters in length. (There is one record for each line in an
AWS). To keep these records in their proper order, a six-digit sequence
number is assigned to each line. These sequence numbers are maintained by
Advantage CA-Roscoe and are stored externally to the data records
themselves.
When you begin entering data in the active AWS, default sequence numbering
begins with 100 and is incremented by 100. If you copy, move or insert lines
within the existing data, the new lines are incremented by one (for example, if
you insert three lines between lines 200 and 300, the new lines are numbered
201, 202 and 203). If you add lines to the end of the AWS, the current line
number increment value is used. If you then delete any lines, a gap is left in
the sequence numbers.
22.1.1 Renumbering Lines

You can renumber the contents of the active AWS at any time during your
session by issuing the RENUMBER command. For example,
RENUMBER
renumbers the entire contents of the AWS from 100 by 100. You can change
the starting and increment values, as in:
RENUMBER 5 1
which renumbers the data in the active AWS from 50 by 10.
You can also renumber a range of lines within the AWS. For example,
RENUMBER FROM 9 TO 251 START 9 BY 1
renumbers only lines 900 through 2501, where the starting line number is 900
and the increment value is 10.
Finally, you can also renumber data when you bring it into the AWS using the
FETCH command. For example if you enter:
FETCH INVLIST START 5 BY 5
Chapter 22. AWS: Renumbering Data in the AWS 22-1

the contents of the library member named INVLIST are placed in the active
AWS and that data are then renumbered beginning with 50 and incremented
by 50.
22.1.2 Display Sequence Numbers

By default, the data are displayed with the Advantage CA-Roscoe-generated
sequence numbers. You can use the SET DISPLAY command to define a
display format that includes or excludes sequence numbers. See Chapter 5,
“Defining the Display Format” for a detailed description of the SET DISPLAY
command.
22.1.3 Include Sequence Numbers in the Data

You can add the Advantage CA-Roscoe-generated sequence numbers to the
data in the active AWS using either the RENUMBER or SEQ command. For
example, entering:
RENUMBER START 1 BY 5 IN 1 6
renumbers the AWS from 100 by 50 and places the new line numbers within
columns 1 through 6 of the data. To place the current line numbers in the data
(without renumbering), use the SEQ command, as in:
SEQ IN 73 8
which places the current sequence numbers in the data beginning in column 73
and extending for eight positions.
If you add sequence numbers to the AWS and data exists in the designated
columns, the data are overlaid by the sequence numbers.
22.1.4 Set AWS Sequence Number Attribute

The SEQ command can also be used to set the AWS sequence number
attribute. This attribute designates whether the Advantage
CA-Roscoe-generated sequence numbers are to be included when you PRINT,
SAVE or SUBMIT data that is in the active AWS. For example, if you enter:
SEQ COBOL
the sequence number attribute is set so that line numbers are placed in
columns 1 through 6 when this AWS data are PRINTed or SUBMITted. (If data
appears in the designated sequence number field, the number is omitted; data
are not overlaid.)
To prevent sequence numbers from being included, you can change the
attribute by issuing the command:
NOSEQ
22-2 User Guide

Once established, this attribute remains in effect until: 1) you specifically
change it by issuing another SEQ/NOSEQ command, or 2) it is overridden by
the sequence number attribute of a library member that is FETCHed or
SAVEd.

PRINT/SUBMIT
The AWS sequence number attribute controls whether the Advantage
CA-Roscoe generated sequence numbers are to be included when the data are
printed or submitted. You can override the current attribute on a per execution
basis.
■ When printing data, use the NUM or NONUM operand of the PRINT
command to override the AWS sequence number attribute. See Chapter 7,
“Printing Data” for details.
■ When submitting data, use the SET SUBMIT command to override the
attribute if the attribute is SEQ. (If the attribute is NOSEQ, it cannot be
overridden and no sequence numbers will be included.) See 28.1, “Check
Syntax” for details.
Chapter 22. AWS: Renumbering Data in the AWS 22-3

22-4 User Guide
Chapter 23. AWS: Saving and Updating a Library
Member

■ Save the contents of the active AWS as a member in the Advantage
CA-Roscoe library.
■ Replace an existing member with the contents of the active AWS.
An AWS is a temporary work area. Data that is within the active AWS may be
saved at any time as a member in the Advantage CA-Roscoe library. To
modify that member, you must bring a copy of it back into the active AWS.
Once there, you can use any of the primary or line commands to change the
data. The contents of the library member remains intact until you specifically
replace it.
Chapter 23. AWS: Saving and Updating a Library Member 23-1

23.1 Creating a Library Member

Use the SAVE command to create a library member and store the contents of
the active AWS in that member. To do so, enter the command and the name
you want to assign to the new member, as in:
SAVE INVLIST
where the entire contents of the active AWS is saved in a member named
INVLIST. (The following figure lists the Advantage CA-Roscoe member
naming conventions.)
23.1.1 An Advantage CA-Roscoe library member name MUST:

1. Be unique (it must not already exist in your library).
2. Begin with an alphabetic or national character. (When U.S. English is in
effect, the national characters are #, $, and @.) The remainder of the name
can be any combination of alphanumeric and/or national characters.
3. Be one to eight characters in length.
If you do not want to save the entire AWS, you can include line numbers with
the command. Only the data within the designated range of lines will be saved
as the member. For example, if you enter:
SAVE INVLIST 1 12
only lines 100 through 1200 of the active AWS are saved in the member named
INVLIST.
23.1.2 Member Name Considerations

The keyword operands (or operand abbreviations) of commands should not
be used as library member names. While this restriction specifically includes
the following keywords and their abbreviations:
AWS A
DSN D
JOB J
LIB L
it applies to all keyword operands and their abbreviaions. For example, NOW
is a keyword operand of the SEND command. If you name a library NOW and
then attempt to send the contents of that member to another user by issuing
SEND NOW, Advantage CA-Roscoe treats NOW as an operand, not as a
member name.
23-2 User Guide

If you do use keyword operands as library member names, you must specify
your prefix when referencing these members. For example, if your prefix is
AAA, you would enter:
ATTACH AAA.JOB
COPY AAA.DSN
SEND AAA.NOW
It is also recommended that you do not use member names beginning with:
ZZZZZ or SAVAWS. Members created with these characters can be
deleted when the Advantage CA-Roscoe site administrator runs Advantage
CA-Roscoe library maintenance.
23.1.3 Assigning a Description and/or Attributes

When you create a library member, you have the option of assigning:
■ a member description,
■ a sequence number attribute,and/or
■ an access attribute.
For example, you could enter:

SAVE INVLIST 'Inventory List Program' SEQ COBOL RESTRICTED
The following table summarizes the various options you can specify.
DESCRIPTION One to 30 characters bound by a special character not

found within the description itself. If omitted, the
member has no description.
SEQUENCE SEQ Numbers to be included (beginning in
NUMBER column 73) when data submitted for
ATTRIBUTE background execution.
SEQ COBOL Numbers to be included in columns 1
through 6.
SEQ s 1 Numbers to be included, starting in
column s for length of 1.
NOSEQ Numbers are not to be included.
If omitted, the default is the current attribute of the
active AWS.

ACCESS SHARED Others allowed to access and/or

ATTRIBUTE execute your member.
EXECONLY Others only allowed to execute your
member. Meant for members
containing RPF programs.
RESTRICTED Others are not allowed to access or
execute your member.
If omitted, the current default is used. (The distributed
default is SHARED. Site management can set a different
default. You can establish your own default through the
SET SAVEATTR command.)
23-4 User Guide

23.2 Updating a Member

You can update (replace) the entire contents of a library member with the
contents of the active AWS at any time. To do so, issue the UPDATE command
and the name of the member to be changed, as in:
UPDATE INVLIST
To update the contents of a member with specific lines from the active AWS,
include the appropriate line numbers with the command, as in:
UPDATE INVLIST 7 49
In this example, the entire contents of the member INVLIST is replaced with
lines 700 through 4900 of the active AWS.
If you want to update the last member that you FETCHed, SAVEd or
UPDATEd, you can use an asterisk (*) in place of a library member name, as
in:
FETCH INVLIST
RENUMBER
UPDATE
At the same time you are updating the contents of a member, you can also
change its description, sequence number attribute and/or access attribute, as
in:
UPDATE INVLIST 'New Inventory List' SHARED
In this example, the member description and access attribute are changed;
since no sequence number attribute is specified, that attribute is not changed.
(See 23.1.3, “Assigning a Description and/or Attributes” for additional
information about member descriptions and attributes.)

23-6 User Guide

Part III. Data Sets (Browsing and Maintaining Data
Sets)
Chapter 24. Data Sets: Introducing the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . 24-1
24.1 Attaching the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2
Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-7
CA-Librarian, PDS or Volume Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-8
24.2 Using Data Set Facility Function Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-9
24.3 Using Data Set Facility Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-11
Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal . 25-1
25.1 Attaching an AllFusion CA-Librarian Selection List . . . . . . . . . 25-2
25.2 Attaching a Catalog Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-7
25.3 Attaching a Generation Data Group Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-13
25.4 Attaching a PDS Member/AllFusion CA-Librarian Module . . . . . 25-15
25.5 Attaching a PDS Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-18
25.6 Attaching a Sequential Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-25
25.7 Attaching a Volume Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-27
25.8 Attaching a VTOC Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-32
Chapter 26. Data Sets: Browsing Data Set Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1

26.1 Detaching Data Set Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-2
26.2 Locating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-3
26.2.2 Including/Excluding List Containing a String . . . . . . . . . . 26-4
26.3.2 Positioning to Name Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-8
26.4 Reattaching a Data Set Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-10
Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks . . . . . 27-1

27.1 Allocating a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-2
27.2 Cataloging a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-9
27.3 Copying a Data Set Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-11
27.4 Compressing a Partitioned Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-18
27.5 Define Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-19
27.6 Define GDG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-22
27.7 Delete Data Set/Member/Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-25
27.7.4 Delete Confirmation Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-30
27.8 Inquiring About a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-32
27.9 Inquiring About a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-36
27.10 Printing a Data Set Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-40
27.11 Releasing Allocated Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-47
27.12 Renaming Data Sets/Members/Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-48
27.13 Uncataloging a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-53
User Guide
27.14 Writing to a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27-54
User Guide
Chapter 24. Data Sets: Introducing the Data Set
Facility
When working with OS data sets or AllFusion CA-Librarian master files, you
can use primary commands or the Data Set Facility to:
■ Directly access data that is in a:
– Sequential data set
– Partitioned Data Set (PDS) member or AllFusion CA-Librarian module
– Generation Data Group (GDG) data set
■ Produce Selection Lists that contain information about:
– All or selected volumes
– All or selected data sets on a specific volume (for example, the VTOC
information)
– All or selected entries on a VSAM, ICF, or OS CVOL catalog
– All or selected members/modules on a PDS (like the PDS directory) or
AllFusion CA-Librarian master file (like the master file index)
■ Browse through the attached data or Selection List. While browsing, you
can locate and note the occurrences of specific character strings. You can
also browse other types of attached data (like an AWS) and then return to
the data you were browsing.
■ Perform a variety of data management functions which include:
– Copying all or part of a data set object into an AWS
– Printing all or part of a data set object at a 328x-type printer or a
system printer.
Note: A data set object can be a sequential data set, PDS member or
AllFusion CA-Librarian module. In the form of a Selection List, it
can also be a PDS directory, AllFusion CA-Librarian index, list of
catalog entries, volume table of contents or list of volumes.
■ Allocating, deleting, renaming, cataloging, and so on.
You can perform all of these operations using the Data Set Facility or
primary commands. Many can also be performed using Selection Lists that
are provided through the Data Set Facility.
Chapter 24. Data Sets: Introducing the Data Set Facility 24-1
24.1 Attaching the Data Set Facility

You can attach the Data Set Facility menu (see “Data Set: Data Set Facility
Menu”) by issuing the command:
ATTACH DSN
or
ATTACH VOLUME
If you enter either of these commands with no operand, the menu is displayed.
You can include a function code and data set name with the DSN command.
If you include a function code and that function has a panel associated with it,
you can bypass the Data Set Facility menu and display the function panel. For
example, if you enter:
DSN AL TEST.NEW
the Allocate Function Panel is displayed with TEST.NEW in the DATA SET
field.
If no panel is associated with the function, the Data Set Facility menu is
displayed along with any information that you provided with the command.
For example, if you enter:
DSN CT TEST.NEW VOL STOR1
the Data Set Facility menu will show CT in the FUNCTION field, TEST.NEW
in the DATA SET field and STOR01 in the VOLUMES field. To perform this
function, press the Enter key. (The Data Set Facility menu will be redisplayed,
allowing you to perform other functions.)
If you are currently viewing a data set object, you can redisplay the menu by
entering:
SELECT MENU
When the menu is displayed, you can use the command:

SELECT ALT
to bounce the display between the last available specific and generic data set
name.
24-2 User Guide

Data Set: Data Set Facility Menu

>
> DSN() SCRL FULL COLS 1 72
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ==>
DATA SET ==>

VOLUMES ==>
UNIT NAMES ==>
VOLUME TYPES ==>
ARCHIVE LEVEL ==> PASSWORD ==>
PGMR NAME ==> MCD CODE ==>
MODULE TYPE ==> LANGUAGE ==>
DISPLAY FORMAT ==> (Q,S,L,H) CONFIRM DELETE ==> DSN: Y MEM: Y
A - ATTACH DSN CT - CATALOG DSN P - PRINT DSN

AL - ALLOCATE DSN D - DELETE DSN R - RENAME DSN
AM - SMS MANAGED ALLOC DA - DEFINE ALIAS RL - RELEASE SPACE
C - COPY DSN DG - DEFINE GDG UC - UNCATALOG DSN
CM - COMPRESS DSN I - DATA SET INFO X - TERMINATE DSF

The fields comprising this menu include:
FUNCTION Enter the appropriate code to perform the desired
action. The codes and their related actions are shown at
the bottom of the menu.
DATA SET Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of
the data set to be involved in the designated function.
The name may be composed of one or more wildcard
characters. (Wildcards are described later in this
section.)
If the name does not include wildcards, it may be
qualified with:
dsnmem A one- to eight-character PDS member or
AllFusion CA-Librarian module to be
attached. (This name may be composed of
one or more wildcard characters.)
v Relative generation number of the GDG
data set to be attached, specified as 0
(most current), a minus number (like -1) or
a positive number (like +1).
VOLUMES Enter a one- to six-character volume serial number.

If DATA SET contains a specific data set name, one to
six serial numbers can be specified. Only one volume
can be specified if a generic data set name is specified.
VOLUMES is required if the data set is not cataloged.
Note: To display a VTOC Selection List, include the
appropriate serial number and, optionally, a
data set name containing wildcards.
To display a Volume Selection List, the serial
number must include one or more wildcards
cards. If no volume ID is specified, then UNIT
NAMES and/or VOLUME TYPES is required.
Do not include a data set name.
UNIT NAMES Enter a one- to eight-character unit name associated
with a device type. It can be either an IBM-defined
generic name (like 3350) or a site-defined esoteric name
(like SYSDA).
UNIT NAMES is required if the data set is not
cataloged and resides on a mass storage device. It is
also required by some functions (like CATALOG) if the
specified volume(s) are not mounted.
Note: To display a Volume Selection List, the unit type
can be specified alone or with VOLUMES or
VOLUME TYPES.
VOLUME TYPES Enter any combination of the following:
PRIVATE Include private volumes. (Abbreviate as
PRV.)
PUBLIC Include public volumes. (Abbreviate as
PUB.)
STORAGE Include storage volumes. (Abbreviate as
STG.)
Note: VOLUME TYPES is valid only when displaying
a Volume Selection List. It can be used with
VOLUMES and UNIT NAMES. If it is omitted,
all types are included in the Selection List.
24-4 User Guide

ARCHIVE LEVEL Enter the archive level of the AllFusion CA-Librarian

master file module to be involved in the operation.
(The module must be in ARCHIE format.) If omitted,
the most current level of the module is assumed. The
level can be specified in one of the following forms:
Lx Absolute level number (between 0 and
65535) as reported on the AllFusion
CA-Librarian Update Report.
-y Relative level number between 0 and 255.
The current level is -0; -1 is one level older
than the current.
yymmddhhmmss
Date and time when the desired archive
level was current. An even number of digits
(starting from the right) can be omitted.
They are assumed to have the highest values
consistent with the values of the specified
digits.
PASSWORD Enter one or two passwords (established by your site).
If one password is specified, it is treated as the data set
or AllFusion CA-Librarian master file module
password.
If two passwords are specified, the first is treated as the
data set password and the second is treated as the
AllFusion CA-Librarian password.
If omitted and a password is required, access is denied.
PGMR NAME Enter the one- to 15-character programmer name to be
used when selecting modules for inclusion in an
AllFusion CA-Librarian Selection List. Only those
modules marked as owned by the specified
programmer are included in the Selection List. If
omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by the
other fields) are included.
MCD CODE Enter the Management code of the AllFusion
CA-Librarian master file. MCD is only required when
the master file contains PROD2 modules.
MODULE TYPE Enter one of the following to designate the type of

modules to be included in an AllFusion CA-Librarian
Selection List:
PROD0 Includes only those modules with PROD0
security status
security status
security status
TEST Includes only those modules with TEST
security status
If omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by
LANGUAGE Enter the language code designating the programming
language type of the modules that are to be included in
an AllFusion CA-Librarian Selection List. If omitted, all
appropriate modules (as qualified by other fields) are
included.
DISPLAY FORMAT Enter one of the following to designate the extent of
information that is to be included in a Selection List:
HIST Only history records for the specified
AllFusion CA-Librarian master file module
are to be displayed.
QUICK, SHORT, or LONG
The amount of information to be included in
the initial Selection List display.
Note: HIST, QUICK, SHORT and LONG are mutually
exclusive. (Abbreviate as H, Q, S and L
respectively.) Whichever setting you select is
remembered at sign off and is reinstated when
you sign back on.
Note: QUICK is ignored if you request a qualified
AllFusion CA-Librarian Selection List.
CONFIRM DELETE Designates whether delete operations are to be
confirmed prior to execution.
DSN Specify YES or NO to control confirmation at
the data set level. (Abbreviate as Y or N.)
MEM Specify YES or NO to control confirmation at
the member/module level. (Abbreviate as Y
or N.)
24-6 User Guide

With YES, a confirmation panel is displayed to allow

verification that the designated item(s) are to be
deleted.
The settings in effect when you sign off are
remembered and reinstated when you sign back on.

Selection List
The following table identifies the wildcard characters that can be used with
data set names.
Character Meaning and Examples

+ Any number of trailing characters within a level or any number
of subsequent levels.
Example: Possible Matches:
TEST1.ABC.+ TEST1.ABC.ALPHA
TEST1.ABC.BETA.SOURCE
TEST2.ABC+ TEST2.ABC.ALPHA
TEST2.ABCR.NEXT.LOAD
** Any number of index levels (including none).
TEST3.** TEST3.AAA.SOURCE
TEST3.BBB
TEST4.**.SOURCE TEST4.BBB.SOURCE
TEST4.BBB.NEXT.SOURCE
* Any single index level.
TEST5.A.* TEST5.A.BASE
TEST5.A.SAMPLE
TEST6.*.SAMPLE TEST6.A.SAMPLE
TEST6.BBCCDD.SAMPLE
Any number of leading characters within a level.
TEST7.*AB TEST7.CAB
TEST7.XYZAB
Any number of trailing characters within a level.
TEST8.AB* TEST8.ABC
TEST8.ABXYZ
Any number of embedded characters within a level.
TEST9.A*C.SOURCE TEST9.AAC.SOURCE
TEST9.ABEFGC.SOURCE

CA-Librarian, PDS or Volume Selection
While the examples of the wildcards in the following table use
member/module names, these same wildcards can be used with a volume
serial number.

? Any single character.
TEST.SOURCE(RO?) ROE
ROS
ROW
* None, one or more characters.
TEST.SOURCE(*JCL*) AJCL
JCL
JCLEND
XJCLX
+ None, one or more trailing characters.
TEST.SOURCE(RO+) RO
ROE
ROSCOE
24-8 User Guide

24.2 Using Data Set Facility Function Panels

You can use the Data Set Facility to perform a variety of functions. Each
function is identified by a specific code. The codes, shown in in the following
table, can be specified with the DSN command or through the Data Set Facility
menu.
Code Function Action

A Attach a data set object. Performed
AL Allocate a data set. Panel displayed.
AM Allocate an SMS-managed data set. Panel displayed
C Copy a data set object. Panel displayed
CM Compress a partitioned data set. Performed
CT Catalog a data set. Performed
D Delete a data set, member or module. Panel displayed
DA Define an alias. Panel displayed
DG Define a GDG. Panel displayed
I Inquire about a data set or volume. Performed
P Print a data set object. Panel displayed
R Rename a data set, member or Panel displayed
module.
RL Release unused DASD space. Performed
UC Uncatalog a data set. Performed
X Terminate the Data Set Facility. Performed
The field ACTION in the previous figure indicates whether the function is
performed directly or requires additional information. For example, the
information you provide through the menu is sufficient to catalog a data set
(function code CT) but insufficient to allocate a data set (function code AL).
When additional information is needed, a function-related panel is displayed.

When such a panel is displayed, you can move from it to another panel or to
the menu by entering in the first panel field:
=[code.code]
■ If you enter only the equal sign (=), you are returned to the menu.
■ If you specify =X, the Data Set Facility is terminated.
■ If you specify any other code (like =AL), the appropriate function-related
panel is displayed. If you include a subfunction code, the appropriate
function-related panel is displayed and its OPTION field will contain the
subfunction code.
If the function-related panel is displayed while the screens are split, you can
use PF keys to scroll the panel.
Information about attaching a data set object is described in the next chapter.
The remaining Data Set Facility functions are described in Chapter 27, “Data
Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks.”
24-10 User Guide

24.3 Using Data Set Facility Selection Lists

You can use the Data Set Facility or a primary command to create and attach:
■ A PDS directory or AllFusion CA-Librarian master file index
■ The entries in a catalog
■ A volume table of contents (VTOC)
■ Volume information
The information is displayed as a Selection List in the Execution Area of the

screen. This allows you to issue primary commands in the Command Area at
any time during your session.
The first line of each Selection List contains a top marker (==TOP==). If the
bottom marker (==BOTTOM==) is not displayed, the number of entries in the
list exceeds the screen size. You can use PF keys to scroll within the list.
The amount of information available with each Selection List exceeds the
width of 80-column screens. The information is, therefore, divided into
alternate display formats. To view the different formats sequentially, enter the
command:
SELECT ALT
To view a specific format, enter the number of that format with the command,
as in:
SELECT ALT 2
See Chapter 25, “Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal” for
information about displaying each type of Selection List. The information
includes a description of the fields comprising each list. The alternate display
numbers shown with the description are for 80-column screens. Additional
formats (containing variations of the information) are available at terminals
supporting wider screen sizes.
24.3.1 Entering Function Codes

You can use Selection Lists to perform a variety of functions. Each function is
identified by a specific code. You can enter one or more codes per Selection
List. As illustrated in “Data Set: Selection List Function Hierarchy Example,”
the function codes are entered in the area shown at the left of the display.
If you specify the same function code multiple times, they are processed
sequentially. If you specify different function codes, the codes are processed
sequentially within the following function hierarchy:
X Terminate Data Set Facility
D Delete data set, member or module*
DX Delete the members of a PDS without deleting the data set itself*
UC Uncatalog a data set
R Rename data set, member or module*
DA Define an alias for a PDS member or non-VSAM data set or
ICF/VSAM user catalog
DG Define a generation data group
RL Release unused DASD space
CM Compress a partitioned data set
P Print a data set, member or module
CT Catalog a data set
I Inquire about data set*
G Get attributes
C Copy a data set, member, or module
AL Allocate a new data set
AM Allocate an SMS-managed data set
H Attach AllFusion CA-Librarian module history
A Attach data set, member or module*
Note: * This function cannot be performed through a Selection List if the data
set is password protected. Use the Data Set Facility menu or
appropriate primary command instead.
The following example illustrates how you can enter multiple functions codes
on a Selection List. To qualify a function, specify information in the STATUS
field. (See Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” for
information about each of the functions you can perform through a Selection
List.)
Data Set: Selection List Function Hierarchy Example
24-12 User Guide


>
> DSN() SCRL FULL COLS 1 72 LINE 1
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
VOLSER UNIT DSNS DSCBS CONTG--CYL--AVAIL CONTG--TRK--AVAIL
STOR1 673 288 117 2 2 116 2
DATA SET NAME STATUS ORG RFM BLKSZ LRECL
ABC.TEST.ASM
A ABC.TEST.LOAD PO U 12288 1
I ABC.TEST.OBJECT PO FB 8
ABC.TEST1.LOAD
D BASE.TEST.TESTLOAD PO U 133
R DATA.TEST.LOAD PO U 12288 1

The functions in “Data Set: Selection List Function Hierarchy Example” are
processed in the following order:
1. The data set BASE.TEST.TESTLOAD will be deleted. (A delete
confirmation panel may be displayed.)
2. A rename panel is automatically displayed so that you can change the
name of DATA.TEST.LOAD.
3. An information panel for ABC.TEST.OBJECT is presented and any
remaining unexecuted functions are placed in a pending state. After
viewing the information, you can:
■ Resume function code execution by entering the command SELECT
NEXT. The next function (like attach ABC.TEST.LOAD) is performed.
■ Terminate execution by entering SELECT PREV (to return to the
Selection List) or SELECT MENU (to return to the Data Set Facility
menu). In either case, any unexecuted functions are ignored.
4. Finally, the data set ABC.TEST.LOAD is displayed.
Note that all function codes are evaluated before any one is executed. If an
invalid or incomplete function is specified, the PG functions are placed in a
pending state and a message is displayed. To resume execution, you must
either:
1. Correct the invalid/incomplete function, or
2. Remove it by typing a space over it.
If multiple function codes are specified and one of them is X, all of the other
function codes are ignored -- the Data Set Facility is immediately terminated.
24.3.2 Refreshing a Selection List

After a function is performed, the STATUS field will contain the appropriate
completion message. (If the Selection List was using the QUICK or SHORT
display format option, information about the affected data set, member or
module is also displayed.)
The following example illustrates how the Selection List might appear after
performing the actions noted in “Data Set: Selection List Function Hierarchy
Example.”
Data Set: Selection List Before REFRESHing

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
STOR1 673 288 117 2 2 116 2
ABC.TEST.LOAD ATTACH PO U 12288 1
ABC.TEST.OBJECT INFO PO FB 8
ABC.TEST1.LOAD
BASE.TEST.TESTLOAD DELETE PO U 133
DATA.TEST.LOAD RENAME PO U 12288 1
EDU.TEST.OBJECT

The more functions you perform through the same Selection List, the more
completion messages and information will be displayed. At any point, you can
redisplay the Selection List with the most current information (for example, the
deleted entries removed and renamed entries shown with their new names).
To do this, enter the command:
REFRESH
If you include the QUICK, SHORT or LONG operand with the REFRESH
command, you can designate the amount of information you want displayed.
For example, to redisplay an updated version of the Selection List shown in
the previous figure without any of the data set information, you would enter:
REFRESH QUICK
24-14 User Guide

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object
at the Terminal
This chapter describes how you can display:

■ Data directly. This includes a:
– Sequential data set
– PDS member or AllFusion CA-Librarian module or
– Specific generation of a Generation Data Group (GDG)
■ One of the following Selection Lists:
– Volume Selection List containing information about all or specific
volumes.
– VTOC Selection List containing information about all or specific data
sets on a volume.
– Catalog Selection List containing all or specific catalog entries.
– AllFusion CA-Librarian Selection List containing all or specific index
entries.
– PDS Selection List containing all or specific directory entries.
To be attached, the data set must:

| ■ Reside on an online DASD volume or a mass storage volume capable of
| being staged. Tape volumes and offline DASD volumes cannot be accessed
| by Advantage CA-Roscoe.
| ■ Be archived to a recall volume by a recognized archival product such as
| CA-Disk, HSM, and so forth.
■ Not be under exclusive control by another executing task or allocated with
DISP=OLD in the Advantage CA-Roscoe JCL.
■ Not use the track overflow feature.
■ Not have a variable spanned record format.
■ Not have its access prevented by site specifications made by the system
programmer.
Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25-1
25.1 Attaching an AllFusion CA-Librarian Selection List

You can use a primary command, the Data Set Facility menu or a Catalog or
VTOC Selection List to display a Selection List containing an AllFusion
CA-Librarian master file index.
Depending on the data set object you are currently viewing, you can also
display an AllFusion CA-Librarian Selection List by entering the command:
SELECT DIR

Using the ATTACH DSN command, you can display an AllFusion
CA-Librarian Selection List by entering the command and the appropriate data
set name, as in:
ATTACH DSN LIBR.SOURCE
If the data set is not cataloged or is password-protected, you must include the
appropriate volume serial number and password, as in:
ATTACH DSN LIBR.SOURCE VOL STOR2 PSWD MYPASS
You can also qualify the display to include only those entries that are
associated with a specific programmer, module type or language code. For
example, to attach a Selection List containing only the names of the modules
associated with the programmer named JONES, you would enter:
ATTACH DSN LIBR.TEST PGMR JONES
Finally, you can use wildcard characters to create a Selection List containing
only those modules that meet specific criteria. For example, if you enter:
ATTACH DSN LIBR.SOURCE(RO+)
the resulting Selection List will contain only those modules whose names begin
with RO. (The following table identifies the wildcard characters that can be
used with module names.)

LIBR.SOURCE(RO?) ROE
ROS
ROW
25-2 User Guide


LIBR.SOURCE(*JCL*) AJCL
JCL
JCLEND
XJCLX
LIBR.SOURCE(RO+) RO
ROE
ROSCOE
25.1.2 Using the Data Set Facility

To display an AllFusion CA-Librarian Selection List from the Data Set Facility
menu, enter the code A in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate name in
the DATA SET field. The data set name can include a module name which
contains one or more of the wildcard characters shown in the previous table.
If the data set is not cataloged or is password protected, you must enter the
appropriate information in the VOLUMES and PASSWORD fields, as
illustrated in the following example.
Data Set: Attaching AllFusion CA-Librarian Selection List

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> A
DATA SET ===> LIBR.NEWDATA

VOLUMES ===> STOR1
UNIT NAMES ===>
ARCHIVE LEVEL ===> PASSWORD ===> SECRET
25.1.3 Selection List Description

The following example illustrates the type of information displayed when you
request information about the contents of an AllFusion CA-Librarian master
file.
Data Set: AllFusion CA-Librarian Selection List
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
=================================== T O P ===================
DATA SET NAME VOLSER MEMS ORG RECFM BLKSZ LRECL
TEST.LIBR.SOURCE STOR1 24 PS F 4276
MEMBER STATUS PSWD LAST-MODIFIED DESCRIPTION CREATED
AMODULE 82121112338 FIRST MODULE 12/
BMODULE 84128454 SECOND MODULE 8/
CMODULE 864221218 THIRD MODULE 7/
DMODULE 85512335 1/
You can use this Selection List to perform one or more of the following
functions:
A - Attach a module
C - Copy a module
D - Delete a module
G - Get module attributes
H - Attach module history
P - Print a module
R - Rename a module
X - Terminate Data Set Facility
* - Position Selection List
To perform one or more of these functions, type the appropriate code(s) in the
first area shown in “Data Set: AllFusion CA-Librarian Selection List.” With
Copy, Print and Rename, you must provide additional information in the
STATUS field. (See the appropriate section in Chapter 27, “Data Sets:
Performing Data Management Tasks” for details.) After performing the
function, the STATUS field will indicate the result of each operation.
25.1.3.1 Selecting Alternate Displays
The amount of information provided through the Selection List exceeds the
alternate displays. You can change the display to view the different
information by entering:
SELECT ALT [v]
number, you will proceed sequentially through all of the different displays.
25-4 User Guide

The ALT field in the following table contains the number of the alternate
display in which each field appears on an 80-column screen. If you are using a
terminal supporting a wider screen, additional displays (containing variations
of the same information) are available.
25.1.3.2 Display Format
The extent of information shown when the Selection List is initially displayed
depends on whether you requested a QUICK, SHORT or LONG display
format. The following table lists all of the information that can be provided
and identifies the display format with which it is associated (Q for QUICK, S
for SHORT and L for LONG).
If the list is produced with the QUICK or SHORT display format, you can use
the G (Get Attributes) code to fill-in the fields for one or more modules.
25.1.3.3 Field Descriptions
The first two lines in the Execution Area (following the TOP marker) remain
constant as you scroll through the list and provide the following information:
DATA SET NAME Name of the AllFusion CA-Librarian master file about
which information was requested.
VOLSER Serial number of the volume on which the data set
resides.
MEMS Number of modules in the master file.
ORG Data set organization.
RECFM Record format.
BLKSZ Block size of the file.
LRECL Logical record length.
The remaining fields identify the modules comprising an AllFusion

CA-Librarian master file and include the information shown in the following
table.
Field Name Description ALT Q S L

MODULE Name of the module ALL * * *
PSWD Non-displayed ALL
password
LAST-MODIFIED Data and time ALL * *
(yymmddhhmmss) the
module was last
changed

DESCRIPTION Description of the 1 * *
module contents, if
available
CREATED Date the module was 1 * *
created
PROGRAMMER Name of the 2 * *
programmer associated
with the module
LANG Code identifying the 2 * *
language contents of
the module
SSTAT Security status of the 2 * *
module
BLKS Number of blocks 2 * *
allocated to the
module
RECS Number of records in 2 * *
the module
25-6 User Guide

25.2 Attaching a Catalog Selection List

You can use a primary command or the Data Set Facility menu to display a
Selection List containing the names of all entries on a VSAM catalog, ICF
catalog or OS CVOL that begin with a specific qualifier.
Depending on the current data set object, you can display a Catalog Selection
List by entering the command:
SELECT CAT
SELECT CAT cannot be used if you are currently viewing an AllFusion

CA-Librarian or PDS Selection List for which a Catalog Selection List was not
previously requested.

Use the wildcard characters shown in the following table to define the
selection criteria that is to be used to determine which data sets are to be
included in the Selection List. For example, if you specified a data set name
as:
ATTACH DSN TEST.AB+
the resulting Selection List might include such entries as:

TEST.ACB.BASE
TEST.AXYZB.PREV.SOURCE

TEST3.BBB

TEST5.A.* TEST5.A.BASE
TEST5.A.SAMPLE
TEST6.*.SAMPLE TEST6.A.SAMPLE
TEST6.BBCCDD.SAMPLE
TEST7.*AB TEST7.CAB
TEST7.XYZAB
TEST8.AB* TEST8.ABC
TEST8.ABXYZ
TEST9.A*C.SOURCE TEST9.AAC.SOURCE
TEST9.ABEFGC.SOURCE

When using the Data Set Facility, type the code A in the FUNCTION field. As
with the primary command, you can use the wildcard characters shown in the
previous table with the name you specify in the DATA SET field, as shown in
the following example.
Data Set: Attaching a Catalog

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> A
DATA SET ===> TEST.AB.+

VOLUMES ===>
25-8 User Guide


The following example illustrates the format of a Catalog Selection List.
Data Set: Catalog Selection List
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
=================================== T O P ===================
SEARCH ARGUMENT MATCHES CATALOG NAME TYPE
TEST..MACLIB 6 CATALOG.UMUROS1 ICF
DATA SET NAME STATUS TYPE VOLUME DEVICE
TEST.AA.MACLIB NONVSAM STOR2 33
TEST.BA.MACLIB ALIAS
TEST.CC.MACLIB SQ=1 ROOG4 34
TEST.DDD.MACLIB NONVSAM STOR2 33
You can use this Selection List to perform the following functions:
A Attach a data set
AL Allocate a data set
C Copy a data set
CM Compress a PDS
D Delete a data set
DA Define an alias
DG Define a GDG
DX Delete members of PDS; keep the data set
G Get data set attributes
I Display data set information
P Print a data set
R Rename a data set
RL Release space
* Position Selection List
first area shown in the previous example. With Copy and Print, you must
provide additional information in the STATUS field. (See the appropriate
section in Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” for
details.) After performing the function, the STATUS field indicates the result
of each operation.
alternate displays. You can change the display to view different information by
entering:
SELECT ALT [v]
depends on whether you requested a QUICK, SHORT, or LONG display
for SHORT, and L for LONG).
If the list was produced with the QUICK or SHORT display format, you can
use the G (Get Attributes) code to fill-in the fields for one or more partitioned
data sets.
constant as you scroll through the list and show:
SEARCH ARGUMENT
Name of the data set you specified through the ATTACH DSN
command or the Data Set Facility menu.
MATCHES
Number of data set names that matched the specified data set
criteria.
CATALOG NAME
Name of the catalog(s) where the data sets are cataloged. (This
field contains *MULTIPLE CATALOGS* if the data sets in the List
are cataloged in more than one catalog.)
TYPE The type of catalog(s) searched. The types are:
CVOL Control volume
ICF Integrated catalog facility
VSAM VSAM user catalog
25-10 User Guide

N/A More than one catalog and they are different types.
The remaining fields identify the data sets comprising the catalog and include
the information shown in below.

DATA SET Name of data set matching All * * *
NAME the selection criteria
TYPE Type of data set, shown as: 1 * * *
AIX Alternate index
ALIAS Alias name
CLUSTER VSAM cluster
DATA Data
component
GDGBASE GDG data set
base
INDEX Index
component
MASTCAT Master Catalog
NONVSAM
Non-VSAM
data set
PAGESPC Page space
data set
PATH Path
USERCAT User catalog
VOLUME VSAM volume
data set
VOLUME Serial number of volume on 1 * *
which the data set resides
DEVICE Device type on which the 1 * *
data set resides
ORG Data set organization 2 *
RFM For non-VSAM data sets, 2 *
block size
For VSAM data sets, record
organization, shown as:
ESDS, KSDS, LSDS or RRDS

BLKSZ For non-VSAM data sets, 2 *
block size
For VSAM data sets,
maximum record length
LRECL For non-VSAM data sets, 2 *
logical record length. For
VSAM data sets, average
record length
CREDT Data set creation date 3 *
REFDT Date last referenced 3 *
EXPDT Data set expiration date 3 *
TRKS Number of tracks allocated 4 *
to the data set
IN-USE Number of allocated tracks 4 *
currently in use
%USED Percentage of allocated 4 *
tracks currently being used
EXT Number of extents allocated 4 *
to the data set
STORCLAS SMS storage class 5 * *
DATACLAS SMS data class 5 * *
MGMTCLAS SMS management class 5 * *
DTYP SMS data type 5 * *
Notes:
■ The STATUS field is not displayed when the CREDT, REFDT and EXTDT
are displayed.
■ The fields STORCLAS, DATACLAS, MGMTCLAS, and DTYP are
displayed only when the IBM DFSMS is installed at the site.
25-12 User Guide

25.3 Attaching a Generation Data Group Data Set

If you are working with Generation Data Groups (GDGs), you can attach a
specific generation by including the relative generation number with the data
set name. For example, to attach the second most current version of the data
set TEST.GENSET, you could enter the ATTACH DSN primary command as:
ATTACH DSN TEST.GENSET(-1)
or, use the Data Set Facility menu, as illustrated in the example below.
Data Set: Attaching a GDG Data Set
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> A
DATA SET ===> TEST.GENSET(-1)

VOLUMES ===>
When GDG is attached, the data are presented in a format similar to the one
shown in the following example.
Data Set: Sample ATTACHed Data Display

>
> TEST.GENSET(G1V)
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
The System Information Line begins with DSN(). Immediately below is the
name of the attached data set. (As illustrated in the preceding example, when
a PDS member or AllFusion CA-Librarian module is attached, its name is
included with the data set name.)
The right side of the System Information Line shows the number of the first
line in the current display. This is to assist you in keeping track of where you
are as you scroll forward and backward through the data.
The attached data are delimited by a top (==TOP==) and bottom

(==BOTTOM==) marker. You can position the display by using primary
commands or one of the PF keys to which scrolling functions are assigned.
25-14 User Guide

25.4 Attaching a PDS Member/AllFusion CA-Librarian Module
25.4 Attaching a PDS Member/AllFusion CA-Librarian

Module
You can attach a PDS member or AllFusion CA-Librarian module using the
ATTACH DSN command, the Data Set Facility menu or a PDS or AllFusion
CA-Librarian Selection List.
When an AllFusion CA-Librarian module is attached, you can bounce the

display between the source code and module history records by entering:
SELECT ALT

Using the ATTACH DSN command, specify the name of the member/module
in parentheses following the data set name, as in:
ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT)
If the member/module is on a data set that is not cataloged, you must specify
the serial number of the volume on which the data set resides, as in:
ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT) VOL SHR7
If you are working with AllFusion CA-Librarian master files, you can qualify
the information that is to be displayed. For example, you can specify which
archive level of the module you want attached, as in:
ATTACH DSN TEST.LIBR(MOD1) ARC -3
If you do not specify an archive level, the most current level of the module is
attached.
By default, the display begins with the first line in the member/module. You
can use the LINE operand to begin the display with a specific line, as in:
ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT) LINE 12
25.4.2 Using the Data Set Facility Menu

To attach a PDS member or AllFusion CA-Librarian module through the
menu, specify the code A in the FUNCTION field and the member/module
name in parentheses following the data set name in the DATA SET field.
As illustrated in the following example, if the data set containing the

member/module is not cataloged, you must also include the serial number of
the volume on which the data set resides in the VOLUMES field.
Data Set: Attaching a PDS Member through the Menu
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> A
DATA SET ===> TEST.MASTER(INVREPT)

VOLUMES ===> SHR7
As with the primary command, you can qualify the information you want
displayed. The following example illustrates how you can display the third
archive level of the AllFusion CA-Librarian module MOD1 on TEST.LIBR.
Data Set: Attaching an AllFusion CA-Librarian Module through the Menu
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> A
DATA SET ===> TEST.LIBR(MOD1)

VOLUMES ===>
UNIT NAMES ===>
ARCHIVE LEVEL ===> -3 PGMR NAME ===>
If you do not specify an archive level, the most current level of the module is
attached.
25.4.3 Using a Selection List

While the format of AllFusion CA-Librarian and PDS Selection Lists varies
based on the information displayed, the way you use them to attach data are
the same. The following example illustrates how you would attach the
member INVREPT from a PDS Selection List.
Data Set: Attaching a Member/Module through a Selection List
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
=================================== T O P ===================
TEST.SOURCE STOR1 4 PO FB 16 8
MEMBER STATUS VV.MM CREATED LAST-MODIFIED SIZE INIT MOD
INVIN 1. 4/29/85 4/29/85 14:41 36 36
A INVREPT
PAY52
TEST1 1. 11/5/84 11/5/84 11:42 2 2
25-16 User Guide

25.4.4 Attached Data Description

The following example illustrates the format of an attached PDS member or
AllFusion CA-Librarian module.
>

> TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT)
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
name of the attached data set and member/module name.

commands or the PF keys to which scrolling functions are assigned.
25.5 Attaching a PDS Selection List

You can use a primary command, the Data Set Facility menu or a Catalog or
VTOC Selection List to display a Selection List containing a PDS directory.
Depending on the data set object you are currently viewing, you can also
display a PDS Selection List by entering the command:
SELECT DIR

Using the ATTACH DSN command, you can display a PDS Selection List by
entering the command and the appropriate data set name, as in:
ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE
If the data set is not cataloged or is password-protected, you must include the
appropriate volume serial number and password, as in:
ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE VOL STOR2 PSWD MYPASS
You can also use wildcard characters to create a Selection List containing only
those members that meet specific criteria. For example, if you enter:
ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE(RO+)
the resulting Selection List will contain only those members whose names
begin with RO. (The following table identifies the wildcard characters that can
be used with member names.)

TEST.SOURCE(RO?) ROE
ROS
ROW
TEST.SOURCE(*JCL*) AJCL
JCL
JCLEND
XJCLX
TEST.SOURCE(RO+) RO
ROE
ROSCOE
25-18 User Guide


To display a PDS Selection List from the Data Set Facility menu, enter the code
A in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate name in the DATA SET field.
The data set name can include a member name that contains one or more of
the wildcard characters shown in the previous table.
If the data set is not cataloged or is password protected, you must enter the
appropriate information in the VOLUMES and/or PASSWORD fields, as
illustrated below.
Data Set: Attaching PDS Selection List
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> A
DATA SET ===> TEST.NEWDATA

VOLUMES ===> STOR1
UNIT NAMES ===>
ARCHIVE LEVEL ===> PASSWORD ===> SECRET

This section provides information about PDS Selection Lists for both load
libraries and non-load libraries.
25.5.3.1 Load Library Selection List
The following example illustrates the type of Selection List displayed when
you request information about a data set that contains a load library.
Data Set: Load Library Selection List
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
=================================== T O P ===================
TEST.LOAD STOR5 14 PO U 12288 12288
MEMBER STATUS --------------- ATTRIBUTES --------------
DOIT1 RENT REUS
DOIT2 RENT REUS
DOIT3 RENT REUS REFR AM=31 RM
DOIT4 RENT REUS REFR AC=1
functions:
A Attach a member
C Copy a member
D Delete a member
DA Define an alias
G Get attributes
P Print a member
R Rename a member
first area shown in the previous example. With Copy, Print and Rename, you
must provide additional information in the STATUS field. (See the appropriate
details.) After performing the function, the STATUS field will indicate the
result of each operation.
entering:
SELECT ALT [v]
The display format setting (QUICK, SHORT or LONG) is ignored when a PDS
Selection List is displayed. The Selection List contains all available information.
constant as you scroll through the directory. The information includes:
DATA SET NAME Name of the data set about which information was
requested.
VOLSER Serial number of the volume on which the first resides.
MEMS Number of members comprising the data set.
ORG Data set organization of the file.
25-20 User Guide

RECFM Record format of the file.

LRECL Logical record length of the file.
The remaining fields identify the members comprising the data set and include
the information shown in the following table.

MEMBER Name of the load module All * * *
or alias.
ATTRIBUTES Attributes assigned to the 1 * * *
load module by the linkage
editor. The possible
attributes and their
meanings are:
RENT Reentrant
REUS Reusable
REFR Refreshable
OVLY Overlay
Format
TEST Test symbols
present
NEXC Not
executable
LOAD Only loadable
SCTR Scatter Format
AC=N Authorization
Code
AM=amode Addressing
mode
RM=rmode Residency
mode
SIZE Number of bytes of storage 2 * * *
needed to load the module.
EP Offset from the beginning 2 * * *
of the load module to the
entry point.
TTR Relative track address at 2 * * *
which the load module or
alias begins.
ALIAS-OF Name of the load module 2 * * *
which this name is an alias.

LAST- Date (mm/dd/yy) and 2 * * *
MODIFIED time (hh:ss) the module
was last link-edited.
(Available only when site
has applied a
system/release dependent
IBM user mod.)
SSI-DATA System status information 2 * * *
25.5.3.5 Non-Load Selection List
The following example illustrates the type of Selection List displayed when
you specify a data set which contains a source, macro, procedure or object
library.
Data Set: PDS Directory Selection List (Non-Load Library)
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
=================================== T O P ===================
TEST.SOURCE STOR1 12 PO FB 16 8
MEMBER STATUS VV.MM CREATED LAST-MODIFIED SIZE INIT MOD
INVIN 1. 4/29/85 4/29/85 14:41 36 36
INVREPT
TEST1 1. 11/5/84 11/5/84 11:42 2 2
TEST2 1.13 1/9/85 1/23/85 16:28 5 4
WORK
WORK1 1.1 2/2/85 5/1/85 7:38 51 51
WORK2 1. 2/2/85 2/2/85 8:45 41 41
functions:
A Attach a member
C Copy a member
D Delete a member
DA Define an alias
| E Edit a member
G Get attributes
P Print a member
R Rename a member
| SU Submit a member
25-22 User Guide

details.) After performing the function, the STATUS field indicates the result
of each operation.
entering:
SELECT ALT [v]
number, you proceed sequentially through all of the different displays.
displays in which each field appears on an 80-column screen. If you are using
a terminal supporting a wider screen, additional displays (containing
variations of the same information) are available.
The display format setting (QUICK, SHORT or LONG) is ignored when a PDS
Selection List is displayed. The Selection List contains all available information.
constant as you scroll through the directory and show:
DATA SET NAME Name of the data set about which information was
requested.
VOLSER Serial number of the volume on which the file resides.
MEMS Number of members comprising the data set.
ORG Data set organization of the file.
RECFM Record format of the file.
LRECL Logical record length of the file.
The remaining fields identify the members comprising the data set and include
the information shown in the following table.

MEMBER Name of the member. 1/2 * * *
VV.MM Version and modification 1/2 * * *
number of the member,
if available.
CREATED Date (mm/dd/yy) the 1/2 * * *
member was created, if
available.
LAST- MODIFIED Date (mm/dd/yy) and 1/2 * * *
time (hh:ss) the member
was last changed, if
available.
SIZE Number of records 1/2 * * *
currently in the member,
if available.
INIT Number of records in the 1/2 * * *
member when it was
created, if available.
TTR Relative track address at 1 * * *
which the member
begins, if available.
MOD Number of records in the 2 * * *
member that have been
modified, if available.
USER Advantage CA-Roscoe 1/2 * * *
key or TSO user ID of
the individual that
created the member or
last changed it, if
available.
25-24 User Guide

25.6 Attaching a Sequential Data Set

You can use the ATTACH DSN primary command, the Data Set Facility menu
or a Catalog or VTOC Selection List to view a data set.

To browse the contents of a sequential data set, enter the ATTACH DSN
command and the appropriate data set name, as in:
ATTACH DSN TEST.MASTER
If the data set is not cataloged, you must specify the serial number of the
volume on which it resides. For example, if TEST.MASTER is not cataloged
and resides on volume SHR07, you could attach it by entering:
ATTACH DSN TEST.MASTER VOLUME SHR7
By default, the display begins with the first line of the data set. You can use
the LINE operand to begin the display with a specific line, as in:
ATTACH DSN TEST.MASTER LINE 2
25.6.2 Using the Data Set Facility Menu

To attach data from the Data Set Facility menu, specify A in the FUNCTION
field and the appropriate name in the DATA SET field. As illustrated in the
following example if the data set is not cataloged, you must enter the serial
number of the volume on which it resides in the VOLUMES field.
Data Set: Attaching a Data Set Through the Menu
>

> DSN() SCRL FULL COLS 1.72
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> A
DATA SET ===> TEST.MASTER

VOLUMES ===> SHR7

To attach a data set through a Selection List, specify the A (for Attach)
function code to the left of the data set name.
Note: You cannot attach password-protected data sets from a Selection List.
To do so, use the primary command or return to the Data Set Facility
menu.
The following example illustrates how you would attach the data set
ABC.TEST.LOAD.
>

> DSN() SCRL FULL COLS 1.72 LINE 1
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
==================================== T O P ===================
STOR1. 673 288 117 2 2 116 2
ABC.TEST.ASM PO FB 8 8
A ABC.TEST.LOAD PO U 12288 12288
ABC.TEST.OBJECT PO FB 8 8
25.6.4 Attached Data Description

When a sequential data set is attached, the data are presented in a format
similar to the one shown in the following example.
>
> TEST.SOURCE
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
name of the attached data set. The right side of the System Information Line
shows the number of the first line in the current display. This is to assist you
in keeping track of where you are as you scroll forward and backward
through the data.

commands or the PF keys to which scrolling functions are assigned.
25-26 User Guide

25.7 Attaching a Volume Selection List

Selection List containing information about all or selected volumes.
If you are currently viewing a data set object, you can display a previously
created Volume Selection List by entering the command:
SELECT VOL

With the ATTACH VOLUME command, you can qualify the type of
information you want included in the Selection List by:
■ Using wildcard characters shown in the following table as part of the
volume serial number, as in:
ATTACH VOL STOR+
The resulting Selection List contains only those volume serial numbers
beginning with STOR.
■ Specifying a unit type, as in:
ATTACH VOL UNIT 338
The resulting list contains only those volumes that reside on 3380s.
■ Indicating the type of volumes that are to be included, as in:
ATTACH VOL TYPE PRIVATE
The resulting display includes only those volumes defined as private. (The
other valid volume types are PUBLIC and STORAGE. With no
qualification, all types are included.)
You can also combine these qualifiers within a single execution. For example,
to produce a Selection List containing all volumes beginning with STOR that
reside on 3380s and are defined as private or public, you would enter:
ATTACH VOL STOR+ UNIT 338 TYPE PRIVATE PUBLIC
Ccharacter Meaning and Examples

??ROS1 ADROS1
MUROS1
Ccharacter Meaning and Examples

MU*S* MUAS
MURDS1
MUROS1
MUR+ MUR
MUROS1

To display a Volume Selection List from the Data Set Facility menu, enter the
code A in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate information in the
VOLUMES, UNIT NAME, and VOLUME TYPES fields.
The following example shows how you can use the wildcard characters shown
in previous table to request information about all volumes beginning with
STOR that reside on 3380s and are defined as private.
Data Set: Attaching Volume Selection List
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> A
DATA SET ===>

VOLUMES ===> STOR+
UNIT NAMES ===> 338
VOLUME TYPES ===> PRIVATE

The following example illustrates the format of a Volume Selection List.
Data Set: Volume Selection List
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
VOLUME UNIT TYPE MATCHES
STOR+ 338 ALL 2
VOLUME STATUS UNIT DEVTYPE INDEX SMS DEVSTAT VOLSTAT
STOR1 41 338 ACTIVE NO A PRIV/R
STOR2 4 338 ACTIVE NO A PRIV/R
25-28 User Guide

functions:
A Attach volume's VTOC
C Copy VTOC of volume
G Get volume information
I Display volume information
P Print VTOC of volume
To perform one or more of these functions, type the appropriate code in the
first area shown in the previous example. With Copy and Print, you must
provide additional information in the STATUS field. (See the appropriate
entering:
SELECT ALT [v]
depends on whether you requested a QUICK, SHORT or LONG display
format. The following table lists all of the information that can be provided,
for SHORT and L for LONG).
use the G (Get Information) code to fill-in the fields for one or more volumes.
constant as you scroll through the display and show:
VOLUME Search string (including wildcard characters) used to build the
Selection List.
UNIT Unit type used to build the Selection List.
TYPE Device type used to build the Selection List, shown as ALL or
PRIVATE, PUBLIC and STORAGE.
MATCHES Number of volume matching the selection criteria.
The remaining fields identify the data sets on the volume and include the
information shown below.

VOLUME Volume serial number. ALL * * *
UNIT Channel and unit address ALL * * *
of device.
DEVTYPE Physical device type. 1/2 * * *
INDEX Code showing if device 1 * *
has indexed VTOC and, if
one exists, its status.
SMS SMS status of the device. 1 * *
DEVSTAT Device status when 1 * * *
information requested.
VOLSTAT Volume status when 1 * * *
information requested.
CYL (CONTG) Number of free 2 *
contiguous cylinders in
largest contiguous extent.
CYL (AVAIL) Number of free cylinders. 2 *
TRK (CONTG) Number of free tracks in 2 *
largest contiguous extent.
TRK (AVAIL) Number of free tracks on 2 *
device.
AV-XT Number of extents not in 2 *
use.
#DSNS Number of data sets 3 *
defined on device.
25-30 User Guide


USED-XT Number of extents 3 *
allocated to the data set.
VTOC-TRKS Size of device VTOC in 3 * *
tracks.
DSCBS Number of data set 3 *
(TOTAL) control blocks in VTOC.
DSCBS (FREE) Number not in use. 3 *
%USED Amount of space used in 3 *
VTOC rounded to nearest
integer.
TRKS (TOTAL) Number of data tracks on 4 * *
device.
TRKS (USED) Number of tracks in use. 4 *
%USED Amount of space used on 4 *
the device rounded to
nearest integer.
MAXBLK Largest valid block size 4 * * *
for this device.
TRKSIZE Physical size of device 4 * * *
track.
TRK/CYL Number of tracks per 4 * * *
device cylinder.
25.8 Attaching a VTOC Selection List

Selection List containing the names and attributes of the data sets on a specific
volume.
If you are currently viewing a data set object, you can display a previously
created VTOC Selection List by entering the command:
SELECT VTOC

To obtain information for a specific volume, include the serial number of that
volume with the ATTACH command, as in:
ATTACH VOLUME STOR1
Using the wildcard characters shown in the following table, you can qualify
the displayed information. For example, to create a Selection List containing
only those data sets starting with TEST and ending with SOURCE on STOR02,
you would enter:
ATTACH DSN TEST..SOURCE VOLUME STOR2

TEST3.BBB
25-32 User Guide


TEST5.A.*
TEST5.A.BASE
TEST5.A.SAMPLE
TEST6.*.SAMPLE
TEST6.A.SAMPLE
TEST6.BBCCDD.SAMPLE
TEST7.*AB TEST7.CAB
TEST7.XYZAB
TEST8.AB* TEST8.ABC
TEST8.ABXYZ
TEST9.A*C.SOURCE
TEST9.AAC.SOURCE
TEST9.ABEFGC.SOURCE

To display a VTOC Selection List from the Data Set Facility menu, enter the
code A in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate serial number in the
VOLUMES field. Optionally, you can specify a data set name with wildcard
characters to produce a qualified Selection List.
The following example illustrates how you might request information about
the data sets on STOR01.
Data Set: Attaching a VTOC
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> A
DATA SET ===>

VOLUMES ===> STOR1

The following example illustrates the format of a VTOC Selection List.
Data Set: VTOC Selection List
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
==================================== T O P ===================
STOR1 673 288 117 2 2 116 2
ABC.TEST.ASM PO FB 8
ABC.TEST.LOAD PO U 12288 1
BASE.TEST.TESTLOAD PO U 133
DATA.TEST.LOAD PO U 12288 1
functions:
A Attach a data set
AL Allocate a new data set
C Copy a data set
CM Compress a PDS
D Delete a data set
DA Define an alias
DX Delete member of PDS; keep the data set
G Get attributes
I Display data set information
P Print a data set
R Rename a data set
RL Release space
To perform one or more of these functions, type the appropriate code in the
25-34 User Guide

entering:
SELECT ALT [v]
depends on whether you requested a QUICK, SHORT, or LONG display
for SHORT, and L for LONG).
use the G (Get Attributes) code to fill-in the fields for one or more partitioned
data sets.
constant as you scroll through the display and show:
VOLSER Serial number of the volume.
UNIT Unit address associated with the device on which the volume is
mounted.
DSNS Number of data sets on the volume.
DSCBS Number of available DSCBs on the volume.
CYL Total number of contiguous free (available) cylinders and the
total number of free cylinders.
TRK Total number of free (available) tracks and maximum number of
contiguous free tracks.
MATCHES Number of data sets on the designated volume.
The remaining fields identify the data sets on the volume and include the
information shown in the following table.

DATA SET Name of the data set. ALL * * *
NAME
ORG Data set organization. 1 * * *
RFM For non-VSAM data sets, 1 * * *
record format.
For VSAM data sets,
record organization,
shown as: ESDS, KSDS,
LSDS or RRDS.
BLKSZ For non-VSAM data sets, 1 * * *
block size.
For VSAM data sets,
maximum record length.
LRECL For non-VSAM data sets, 1 * * *
logical record length.
For VSAM data sets,
average record length.
CREDT Creation date. 2 * * *
REFDT Date last referenced. 2 * * *
EXPDT Expiration date. 2 * * *
TRKS Number of tracks 3 *
IN-USE Number of tracks 3 *
currently in use.
%USED Percentage of allocated 3 *
tracks currently in use.
EXT Number of extents 3 *
The STATUS field is not displayed when the fields CREDT, REFDT, and
EXTDT are displayed.
25-36 User Guide

25.9 Selecting the Display

You can use the SELECT command to reposition the display between or within
a data set object.
SELECT ALT To position to the next sequential alternate display format.
If the data set object has multiple formats, you can specify a
number with the command to reposition the display that
specific format, as in:
SELECT ALT 3
Entering SELECT ALT with no number positions you to the
next sequential format. If there is no alternate format, the
display is unchanged.
SELECT CAT To redisplay a previously displayed Catalog Selection List.
SELECT DIR To display a PDS or AllFusion CA-Librarian Selection List.
Depending on the current display, it will be either:
1. The previously displayed PDS or AllFusion
CA-Librarian Selection List, or
2. The PDS or AllFusion CA-Librarian Selection List
associated with the member/module you are currently
viewing.
SELECT MENU To display the Data Set Facility menu.
SELECT NEXT To perform the next function specified on the last displayed
Selection List. For example, assume you indicate on a
Catalog Selection List that you want to attach three different
data sets. When you press the Enter key, the first data set is
attached. After browsing that data set, you can view the
next one by entering SELECT NEXT.
SELECT PREV To display the previous level in the data set processing
hierarchy. For example, assume you attach a Catalog
Selection List and from it attach a data set that results in a
PDS Selection List and from this list you attached a specific
member. If you enter SELECT PREV while viewing the
member, the PDS Selection List is redisplayed. If you enter
SELECT PREV again, the Catalog Selection List is
redisplayed.
SELECT string The resulting display depends on the string you specify. If
the string contains:
■ A period (like TEST.ABC), it is treated as a data set
name. If the data set appeared on a previously
displayed Catalog or VTOC Selection List, the
appropriate list is displayed. If it did not appear in any
previous Selection List and a:
1. Catalog Selection List was previously displayed, the
catalog is searched for the data set, or
2. VTOC Selection List was previously displayed, the
VTOC is searched for the data set.
■ More than six characters, it is treated as a PDS member
or AllFusion CA-Librarian module name. If the
member/module did not appear in a previous Selection
List, the current PDS/AllFusion CA-Librarian master
file is searched for the designated member/module.
■ Six or less characters, the name is treated as:
1. A member/module if a PDS or AllFusion
CA-Librarian Selection List was previously
displayed.
2. A volume serial number if a PDS or AllFusion
CA-Librarian Selection List was not previously
displayed.
The appropriate Selection List is then displayed.
SELECT VOL To redisplay a previously displayed Volume Selection List.
SELECT VTOC To display a VTOC Selection List.
Depending on the current display, it will either be the
previously displayed Selection List or the Selection List
representing the contents of the volume on which the data
set you are currently viewing resides.
25-38 User Guide

Chapter 26. Data Sets: Browsing Data Set Objects

■ Detach a data set object.
■ Locate specific occurrences of a string with the attached data set object.
■ Position the display to a specific line or to a line to which you have
assigned a name.
■ Reattach a data set object after viewing other forms of attached data (like
an AWS).
Chapter 26. Data Sets: Browsing Data Set Objects 26-1

26.1 Detaching Data Set Objects
26.1 Detaching Data Set Objects

You can explicitly detach the Data Set Facility by entering the command:
DETACH DSN
The Data Set Facility is also detached by entering the function code X on the
menu, any function panel or any selection list. This function code is
comparable to the DETACH DSN command. (If you enter X on a Selection List
that includes other function codes, those functions will be ignored.)
ATTACHing another data set object causes the current data set object to be
implicitly detached. If you are detaching a sequential data set, PDS member or
AllFusion CA-Librarian module and you have assigned NOTE names, those
names are deleted when the data are detached.
If you execute a command that causes output to the Execution Area (like
ATTACHing an AWS) or if you press the CLEAR key, the Data Set Facility is
placed in a pending state and can be reattached at any time.
26-2 User Guide

26.2 Locating Data
26.2 Locating Data

This sections describes how you can use a variety of commands to scan a data
set object for all or specific occurrences of a character string.
While this description assumes you are locating strings that are in character
format, you can also locate the hexadecimal representation of a string. See
26.2.3, “Customizing the Operation” on page 26-5 for details.
26.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences

You can use the following commands to find and display specific occurrences
of a string.
FIRST Locate the first occurrence of a string.
NEXT Locate the next occurrence of a string.
LAST Locate the last occurrence of a string.
PREV Locate the previous occurrence of a string.

ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE(INVLIST)
FIRST DIVISION
The first occurrence of the string DIVISION in the member/module INVLIST

will be the first line of the resulting display.
To find the last occurrence of the same string, all you need enter is:
LAST
Once you have specified a search string, it is remembered and used with any
subsequent EXCL, FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV command that does not
include a string.
By default, the full line length is searched for your string. You can include
column numbers with the command to qualify the search for a single
operation. For example:
NEXT 1 3 SAMPLE
examines columns 10 through 30 for the next occurrence of SAMPLE. After the
command executes, the defaults are reestablished. To change the column
boundaries for the remainder of your session, use the SET BOUNDS command.
(See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additional information.)

26.2 Locating Data
Also, by default, every line in the data set object is searched until it finds the
string or reaches the site-defined maximum. You can limit the search to a
specific number of lines by specifying the number after the string. For
example, to find the last occurrence of SAMPLE within the last 200 lines of
currently displayed data set object, you would enter:
LAST SAMPLE 2
After the command executes, the site-defined value is reestablished. If you

want to continue searching 200 lines at a time, you can either:
■ Press PF6 or PF18 to reexecute the last command.
■ Use the SET DSNCNT command to alter the line limit for the rest of your
session or until you change it with another SET DSNCNT command. (See
the description of SET DSNCNT in the Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive
Environment Command Reference Guide.)
26.2.2 Including/Excluding List Containing a String

You can use the INCL command to display every occurrence of a particular
character string within a given number of lines. For example, to find every
occurrence of the string TEST-DATA in the next 100 lines of the currently
displayed data set object, you would enter:
INCL TEST-DATA 1
If you do not specify a number, a site-defined maximum number of lines are

searched. (You can use the SET DSNCNT command to establish your own
search limits. See the Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive Environment Command
Reference Guide for details.)
You can also limit the search for the character string to particular columns. For
example, if you want to display every line that does not contain the string
TEST-DATA in columns 30 through 80, you would enter:
EXCL 3 8 TEST-DATA
terminal session.
If the number of lines to be displayed exceeds the size of your terminal screen,
press one of the PF keys to which a scrolling function is assigned. The INCL or
EXCL operation will resume scanning for the previously specified string (like
TEST-DATA). The direction of the scan depends on the value assigned to the
PF key. (The search string is remembered for subsequent use; column number
limits and line number limits apply only to the command with which they are
specified.)
26-4 User Guide

26.2 Locating Data
If you determine that you want to see the data that follows a particular line,
use:
■ The cursor positioning keys to move the cursor to the appropriate line and
then press the Enter key, or
■ The POINT command. For example, if an EXCL display includes line 150
and you want to display the lines following it, you would enter:
POINT LINE 15
The resulting display begins with line 150.
Doing either of these actions or entering any primary command terminates the
INCL/EXCL operation.
Note: When you create an INCL/EXCL display from a Selection List, you can
enter any function code(s). If a function results in another display (like
attaching an entry in the list), the INCL/EXCL operation is terminated.
26.2.3 Customizing the Operation

This section describes how you can qualify a search operation.
26.2.3.1 Translating the Search String
The current setting of the SET MODE command determines how the string
specified with FIRST, NEXT, LAST, PREV, INCL or EXCL is to be treated. See
Chapter 3, “Controlling Character Recognition” for additional information.
26.2.3.2 Delimiting the Search String
In all of the examples used thus far, the search string has not been delimited.
With these commands, you only need to delimit the string when it:
■ Includes a space (like FIRST /TEST DATA/)
■ Is a numeric (like NEXT /519/)
■ Is the same as a keyword operand or operand abbreviation of the
command (like INCL /JOB/)
26.2.3.3 Qualifying the Search String
By default, the search is for any string of characters that match the search
string. To limit the search operation, you can include the qualifier operands.
These operands are WORD, PREFIX, BEGIN, EMBED, END and SUFFIX.
For example, assume the attached data set object contains the line:
THE, BROTHER and THEIR match the search string. By including a qualifier,
you can designate the type of string match that is to occur, as in:

26.2 Locating Data
THE WORD Qualifies the string as a word; only THE matches.

THE PREFIX Qualifies the string as beginning a word; only THEIR matches.
THE BEGIN Qualifies the string as beginning or being a word; THE and
THEIR match.
THE EMBED Qualifies the string as contained within a word; OTHER and
BROTHER match.
TEST END Qualifies the string as ending or being a word; only
CONTEST matches.
TEST SUFFIX Qualifies the string as ending a word; only CONTEST
matches.
26.2.3.4 Specifying the Hexadecimal Representation of a String

X'string'

characters, as in:
FIRST X'C1'
When using the primary commands FIRST, LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL or
EXCL, you do not need to delimit the hexadecimal string.

■ Use the LITERAL operand with the FIRST, LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL or
EXCL primary commands, as in:
FIRST X'C1' LITERAL
/X'C1/ or /X'C1' /
26.2.3.5 Screen Positioning
If a line containing (or not containing) the search string is found, it becomes
the first displayed line of the resulting display. By specifying a screen
positioning operand with the command, you can control how the display is
positioned. The screen positioning operands are:
26-6 User Guide

26.2 Locating Data
line.
margin (for example, less than 1), the display is not altered.


■ Reposition the currently attached data set object.
■ Assign names to specific lines within a sequential data set, PDS member or
AllFusion CA-Librarian module and then later reposition the display to
those named locations.

If the data set object that you are viewing exceeds the number of lines in your
terminal screen, you can reposition the display by:
■ Using the POINT command with the LINE operand. For example, to
reposition the display to begin with line 2500, you would enter:
POINT LINE 25
POINT LINE T or
POINT LINE B
When browsing a Selection List, entering an * (asterisk) in the first unprotected

field for a specific entry repositions the display to begin with that entry.
26.3.2 Positioning to Name Lines

When you are browsing data (like a sequential data set, PDS member or
AllFusion CA-Librarian module), you can assign a one- to six-character name
to the line containing the string; thus enabling you to return to that line later.
For example, to assign the name LOC1 to the first displayed line, you would
enter:
NOTE LOC1 or
NOTE LOC1
The asterisk (*) is optional. If omitted or specified without qualification, it

represents the first displayed line.
26-8 User Guide

To assign a name to a line that is not the first displayed line, qualify the
asterisk. For example, to assign the name LOC2 to the line that is five lines
after the first displayed line, you would enter:
NOTE +5 LOC2
Once you have assigned a name to a specific line, you can return to that line at
any time by using the POINT command. To return to the line noted as LOC1,
you would enter:
POINT LOC1
If you issue the command:

STATUS NOTES
a list of all the names that you have assigned is displayed.
If you determine that you no longer need to note a specific line, you can
eliminate the NOTE name with the DROP command, as in:
DROP LOC2
Any outstanding NOTE names are automatically deleted when you detach the
data, attach another data set or go to a higher level (for example, if you
display a PDS Selection List after viewing a member of that PDS).

26.4 Reattaching a Data Set Object

While you are working with a data set object, you can attach an AWS, a
library member or a job, browse that data and then return to your data set
object. The following example illustrates how you can ATTACH the active
AWS, browse it and then reATTACH the data set object you have been
viewing.
ATTACH_

>
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================== T O P ============
ATTACH DSN

> D PENDING
> AWS (PRI.INVREPT) SCRL FULL COLS 7 72
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....
...... ======================== T O P =================
>

> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+
...... ============================= T O P =============
The center screen in previous example shows D PENDING. This note is

provided to remind you that the Data Set Facility can be reattached at any
time.
When you reattach the Data Set Facility, the display begins with the first line
of the previous display. To reattach at a different location within the same data
set object, you can:
■ Use the LINE operand of ATTACH to specify the desired line number, as
in:
ATTACH DSN LINE 5
■ Use the POINT command to begin the display with the line assigned a
NOTE name, as in:
POINT DSN NAME1
26-10 User Guide

■ Use the DSN operand with the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV commands
to begin the display with the line containing a specific string, as in:
FIRST DSN /DD/
■ Use the DSN operand with the INCL or EXCL command to begin the
as in:
INCL DSN /DD/

26-12 User Guide
Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data
Management Tasks
This chapter describes how you can perform the following functions at any
time during your terminal session:
■ Allocating a data set
■ Cataloging a data set
■ Compressing a partitioned data set
■ Copying a data set object into an AWS
■ Defining an alias for:
1. a non-VSAM data set or ICF/VSAM user catalog
2. member of a partitioned data set
■ Defining a Generation Data Group.
■ Deleting a data set, PDS member or AllFusion CA-Librarian module
■ Inquiring about a specific data set or volume
■ Printing a data set object
■ Renaming a data set, PDS member or AllFusion CA-Librarian module
■ Uncataloging a data set
■ Writing to a data set
These functions can be performed using primary commands, the Data Set
Facility menu or the appropriate Selection List.
Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-1

27.1 Allocating a Data Set

You can use the ALLOCATE primary command or one of two Allocate
Function Panels to allocate space for a data set.
When allocating a data set, note that:

■ Data sets can be created only on DASD volumes that are mounted and
online or on mass storage volumes that can be staged.
■ VSAM data sets can be allocated only on systems that have IBM DFSMS
installed. At sites where DFSMS is not installed, use the IBM Access
Method Services DEFINE command to create VSAM data sets.

You can issue the ALLOCATE DSN command at any time during a terminal
session to allocate space for a data set, as in
ALLOCATE DSN TEST.NEW VOLUME STOR2
INCR TRK PRIMARY 16 SECONDARY 1 DIR 5
DSORG PO RECFM FB LRECL 8 BLKSIZE 352
Note: Advantage CA-Roscoe commands must be complete within a line

(commands cannot be continued.). While the ALLOCATE command
example violates this rule, it is provided to illustrate the type of
information you can specify with the command.
If the attributes, space requirements, or device location for your new data set
are similar to those of an existing data set, you can use the LIKE operand to
establish the existing data set as a model for the new one. For example:
ALLOCATE DSN TEST.NEW VOLUME STOR2 LIKE TEST.OLD
uses the attributes, space parameters and device location of the existing data
(TEST.LOAD) as the model in allocating the new data set (TEST.NEW).
If DFSMS is installed at your site:

■ You can use DFSMS-related operands to further control the allocation of
your data set. For example, to allocate a data set with the attributes
contained in the DFSMS data class DATAF on one of the volumes referred
to by the DFSMS storage class STCLMAIN, you might issue the command:
ALLOCATE DSN TEST.SMSNEW DATACLAS DATAF STORCLAS STCLMAIN ...
27-2 User Guide

■ You can also allocate certain types of VSAM data sets if the proper
modeling information is established in the DFSMS data classes. For
example, assume that the DFSMS data class CLUSTER contains the
required information to allocate a more commonly used type of VSAM
key-sequenced data set. You can allocate such a cluster with:
ALLOCATE DSN VSAM.CLUSTER DATACLAS CLUSTER KEYOFF 64 ...
Note that in this example, the KEYOFF operand is used to either override
information in the data class definition or to provide information that is
not present in it.
27.1.2 Using a Function Panel

From the Data Set Facility menu, a Catalog or VTOC Selection List, or through
the DSN command, you can display either:
■ The standard Allocate Function Panel by issuing the function code AL
■ The Allocate SMS Function Panel by issuing the function code AM. This
panel, which is available only at sites where DFSMS is installed, can be
used to allocate VSAM data sets or specify SMS class construct
information.
If the name you specify when requesting either panel is:

■ New, that name is shown in the DATA SET field. All other fields in the
panel are set to blanks.
■ Existing, that name and all of its allocation information is displayed.
You can then verify the data set name and add or change the appropriate
information. When you press the Enter key, the data set is allocated using the
values displayed.
The following example assumes you entered the AL function code and that
you want to allocate a new data set with the same attributes as an existing
data set named TEST.OLD. Once the information is displayed, you can change
the data set name and make any other necessary attribute changes. When you
press the Enter key, the allocation is performed.
27.1.2.1 Allocate Function Panel
The following example illustrates the panel displayed when you use the AL
function code.
Data Set: Allocating Through a Function Panel

>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
ALLOCATE NEW DATA SET
DATA SET ===> TEST.OLD

VOLUMES ===> STOR2
UNIT NAMES ===>
UNITS ===> TRK (BLK, TRK, or CYL)

PRIMARY ===> 16 (NUMBER OF ABOVE UNITS)
SECONDARY ===> 1 (NUMBER OF ABOVE UNITS)
DIRECTORY ===> 6 (VALID FOR PDS DATA SETS ONLY)
DSORG ===> PO
RECFM ===> FB
LRECL ===> 8
BLKSIZE ===> 352
KEYLEN ===>
EXPDT ===> (MM/DD/YY)
CATALOG ===> YES (Y,N)

The fields comprising this panel include:
DATA SET Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of the data
set to be allocated. The name may be further qualified with:
+v Relative generation number of GDG data set to be
allocated, specified as a value between 1 and 255.
VOLUMES Enter the one- to six-character serial number of the volume on
which the data set is to be allocated. One to six serial
numbers can be specified.
■ If both VOLUMES and UNIT NAMES are specified and
the volume is mounted, UNIT NAMES is ignored. If the
volume is not mounted and the unit name refers to a mass
storage device, an MSS mount is attempted.
■ If UNIT NAMES is specified and VOLUMES is omitted,
only those volumes within the designated generic or
esoteric group that have a Use attribute of STORAGE are
eligible for allocation.
Use the DISPLAY DEVICES command to determine which
volumes have a Use attribute. The Status field of the
resulting display will contain STR if the volume's Use
attribute is STORAGE.
■ If both VOLUMES and UNIT NAMES are omitted, an
allocation to the unit name specified in the ETSO PSCB
control block is attempted. If ETSO is not active, an
allocation is attempted using the unit name SYSALLDA.
UNIT NAMES Enter the one- to eight-character unit name associated with the
device type(s) on which the data set is to be allocated. It can
be either an IBM-defined generic name (like 3350) or a
site-defined esoteric name (like SYSDA).
27-4 User Guide

UNITS Enter the type of allocation units as BLK, CYL or TRK.

PRIMARY Enter the number of units to be used for the primary
allocation. If omitted, the default is 0.
If zero (0) is specified and there is no secondary allocation, no
space is allocated on the designated volume or unit, however
a format-1 DSCB is created in the VTOC.
SECONDARY Enter the number of units to be used for the secondary space
DIRECTORY Enter the number of PDS directory blocks for which space is
to be reserved. Valid only when allocating a PDS (like
DSORG=PO or DSORG=POU). If omitted, the default is 0.
DSORG Enter the data set organization, specified as DA, DAU, PO,
POU, PS or PSU. If omitted, the data set organization is
undefined.
RECFM Enter any valid data set record format. If omitted, the record
format is undefined.
LRECL Enter the data set logical record length as a value between 0
and 32760. If omitted, the default is 0.
BLKSIZE Enter the data set block size as a value between 0 and 32760.
If omitted, the default is 0.
■ If UNITS BLK is specified, BLKSIZE is required and the
value may not exceed 65535.
KEYLEN Enter the data set key length as a value between 0 and 255. If
omitted, the default is 0.
EXPDT Enter the data set expiration date in the form consistent with
the format displayed on the panel. (This format is established
by the SET DATEFORM command.)
If the year is specified with two digits, it is assumed to
represent a year in the twentieth century. Years beyond 1999
can only be specified at sites with MVS/XA SP2.2.0 or higher.
At such sites, the year must not exceed 2155.
If omitted, the data set has no expiration date.
CATALOG Designates whether the data set is to be cataloged by entering
either:
YES Catalog the data set.
If the data set cannot be cataloged (that is, it is
already cataloged or you have insufficient access
authority for the catalog), the command is rejected.
Reexecute the command, specifying NO.
NO Do not catalog the data set.

If omitted, the data set is cataloged.
27.1.2.2 Allocate SMS Function Panel
The following example illustrates the panel displayed when you use the AM
function code.
Data Set: Allocating SMS Through a Function Panel
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
ALLOCATE NEW SMS-MANAGED DATA SET
DATA SET ==> ROSCOE.CREATE.PDSE

MGMTCLAS ==> SMS (BLANK FOR DEFAULT MANAGEMENT CLAS
STORCLAS ==> SMS (BLANK FOR DEFAULT STORAGE CLASS)
VOLUMES ==> SMS1
UNITS ==> TRK (BLK, TRK, CYL, KB, OR MB)
PRIMARY ==> 1 (NUMBER OF ABOVE UNITS)
SECONDARY ==> 1 (NUMBER OF ABOVE UNITS)
DIRECTORY ==> (VALID FOR PDS DATA SETS ONLY)
DATACLAS ==> (BLANK FOR DEFAULT DATA CLASS)

DSORG ==> PO RECORG ==>
RECFM ==> FB KEYLEN ==>
LRECL ==> 8 KEYOFF ==>
BLKSIZE ==> 8 EXPDT ==> MM/DD/YYYY
SECMODEL ==> TEST.SMS.OLD1 GENERIC ==>

DSNTYPE ==> LIB

DATA SET Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of the
data set to be allocated. The name may be further
qualified with:
+v Relative generation number of GDG data set to be
allocated, specified as a value between 1 and 255.
MGMTCLAS Enter the one- to eight- character DFSMS management
class to be assigned to the data set.
STORCLAS Enter the one- to eight-character DFSMS storage class to
be assigned to the data set.
VOLUMES Enter the one- to six-character serial number of volume
on which the data set is to be allocated. One to six serial
numbers can be specified.
■ If both VOLUMES and UNIT NAMES are specified
and the volume is mounted, UNIT NAMES is
ignored. If the volume is not mounted and the unit
name refers to a mass storage device, an MSS mount
is attempted.
27-6 User Guide

■ If UNIT NAMES is specified and VOLUMES is

omitted, only those volumes within the designated
generic or esoteric group that have a Use attribute of
STORAGE are eligible for allocation.
Use the DISPLAY DEVICES command to determine
which volumes have a Use attribute. The Status field
of the resulting display will contain STR if the
volume's Use attribute is STORAGE.
■ If both VOLUMES and UNIT NAMES are omitted,
an allocation to the unit name specified in the ETSO
PSCB control block is attempted. If ETSO is not
active, an allocation is attempted using the unit
name SYSALLDA.
UNITS Enter the type of allocation units as BLK, CYL, TRK, KB
or MB.
With BLK, CYL and TRK, the primary and secondary
quantities are to be used as specified.
With KB, the primary and secondary quantities are to be
multiplied by 1024.
With MB, the primary and secondary quantities are to be
multiplied by 1024576.
PRIMARY Enter the number of units to be used for the primary
If 0 is specified and there is no secondary allocation, no
space is allocated on the designated volume or unit,
however a format-1 DSCB is created in the VTOC.
SECONDARY Enter the number of units to be used for the secondary
space allocation. If omitted, the default is 0.
DIRECTORY Enter the number of PDS directory blocks for which
space is to be reserved. Valid only when allocating a
PDS (like DSORG=PO or DSORG=POU). If omitted, the
default is 0.
DATACLAS Enter the one- to eight-character DFSMS data class to be
assigned to the data set.

DSORG Enter the data set organization, specified as DA, DAU,

PO, POU, PS or PSU. If omitted, the data set
organization is undefined.
RECFM Enter any valid data set record format. If omitted, the
record format is undefined.
LRECL Enter the data set logical record length as a value
between 0 and 32760. If omitted, the default is 0.
BLKSIZE Enter the data set block size as a value between 0 and
32760. If omitted, the default is 0.
■ BLKSIZE is required if UNITS BLK is specified, and
the value cannot exceed 65535.
RECORG Enter the VSAM data set record organization, specified
as:
ES VSAM entry-sequenced data set
KS VSAM key-sequenced data set
LS VSAM linear space data set
RR VSAM relative record data set
If omitted, a non-VSAM data set is assumed.
KEYLEN Enter the data set key length as a value between 0 and
255. If omitted, the default is 0.
KEYOFF Enter the VSAM key-sequenced data set key offset as a
value between 0 and 32760. If omitted, the default is 0.
EXPDT Enter the data set expiration date in the form consistent
with the format displayed on the panel. (This format is
established by the SET DATEFORM command.)
If the year is specified with two digits, it is assumed to
represent a year in the twentieth century. Years beyond
1999 can only be specified at sites with MVS/XA SP2.2.0
or higher. At such sites, the year must not exceed 2155.
If omitted, the data set has no expiration date.
SECMODEL Enter the name of a RACF discrete or generic profile that
is to be used in creating a discrete RACF profile for the
data set.
DSNTYPE Designate whether the data set to be allocated will be a
PDSE by entering the value LIB When other data set
types are defined (non-PDSE), this field is blank.
GENERIC Designate whether the RACF profile identified in the
SECMODEL field is a generic profile by entering either:
Y The profile is generic.
N The profile is not generic.
If omitted, the profile is assumed to not be generic.
27-8 User Guide

27.2 Cataloging a Data Set

You can catalog a data set using the CATALOG primary command. For
example, to add a catalog entry for the data set TEST.NEW on STOR01, you
would enter:
CATALOG DSN TEST.NEW VOL STOR1
You can also enter the CT function code, data set name and volume serial
number on the Data Set Facility menu, as in the following example.
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> CT
DATA SET ===> TEST.NEW

VOLUMES ===> STOR1
UNIT NAMES ===>
Or enter CT before the appropriate name on a VTOC Selection List, as in the

following example.
Data Set: Cataloging Through a Selection List

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
STOR1 673 288 117 2 2 116 2
TEST.ASM PO FB 8 8
TEST.LOAD PO U 12288 12288
CT TEST.NEW PO FB 8 8
When using the CATALOG primary command or the Data Set Facility menu,
you can catalog a data set that resides on a maximum of six volumes, as in:
CATALOG DSN TEST.NEW VOL STOR1 STOR2 STOR3
You cannot, however, catalog an SMS-managed data set using this facility.
Note: If the first (or only) volume specified is available for inspection,
Advantage CA-Roscoe verifies that the designated data set exists. If the
data set does not exist, the request is rejected. No check is made for
any other volumes specified.
If the first (or only) volume specified is not available for inspection, no
check is made for the data set's existence; the request is honored. (This

permits catalog entries to be created for tape and DASD data sets
residing on volumes that are only accessible from another system.)
27-10 User Guide

27.3 Copying a Data Set Object

You can use primary commands, the Copy Function Panel (from the Data Set
Facility menu) or a Selection List to copy all or part of a data set object into an
AWS.

You can use a variety of primary commands to copy all or selected portions of
a data set object into an AWS.
One of these commands is COPY DSN, which allows you to copy all or
selected lines of the currently attached data or Selection List into the active or
a specific AWS. The following example illustrates how you can copy all of the
attached data set object to the top of the active AWS.
Data Set: Copying Attached Data
COPY DSN T_

>
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
...... ============================= T O P =================
You must indicate the appropriate AWS destination by specifying one of the
following:
v Copy at or after the line specified by v.
T Copy to the top of the AWS.
B Copy to the bottom of the AWS.
* Copy after the line at which the AWS pointer is currently positioned.
R Replace the contents of the AWS with the copied data.
Other primary commands allow you to copy:

■ Lines Containing/Not Containing a Specific String:
COPYS copies line(s) containing a specified character string from a data set
object into an AWS.
COPYX copies line(s) not containing the specified character string from a
data set object into an AWS.

For example, to copy every line from the currently attached data set object
that contains the string SAMPLE to the bottom of the active AWS, you
would enter:
COPYX DSN /SAMPLE/ B
■ Between Split Screens:
XCOPY copies all or part of a data set object from one split screen into the
active AWS of the screen containing the command.
XCOPYS and XCOPYX copy selected lines from the data set object
attached in one split screen into the active AWS of the screen containing
the command.
All of these commands allow you to limit the number of lines to be copied, as
in:
COPYS DSN /DATE-FIELD/ 9 18 1
which copies every line containing the string DATE-FIELD within lines 900
through 1800 of the currently attached data set object at or after line 100 in the
active AWS.
27.3.1.1 Copying a Selection List
When a Selection List is displayed, you can:

■ Copy a specific range of lines. Treat the Selection List as though it is
numbered from 1 by 1, as in:
COPY DSN 1 5 T
■ Exclude the header portion of the list. By default, the header lines are
included in a copy operation. To exclude these lines, use the NOHDR
operand, as in:
COPY DSN T NOHDR
■ Include all available information. By default, only the information available
through the current display format is included in the operation. To include
all available information, use the FULL operand, as in:
COPY DSN 1 5 T FULL
For additional information about using these commands, see Chapter 15,
“AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS.”
27-12 User Guide

27.3.1.2 Copying Unattached Data
The IMPORT command can be used to copy all or part of a specific data set
into the active AWS or a designated library member, without accessing the
data set first.
Note: When IMPORTing into the active AWS, the current AWS contents is
overlaid by the IMPORTed data.
You can use IMPORT to:

■ Copy a sequential data set: enter IMPORT DSN= followed by the data set
name, as in:
IMPORT DSN=TEST.MASTER
If the data set is not cataloged, use the VOL= operand to identify the serial
number of the volume on which it resides, as in:
IMPORT DSN=TEST.MASTER,VOL=SHAR7
■ Copy a PDS member or AllFusion CA-Librarian module: specify the
appropriate name in parentheses following the file name, as in:
IMPORT DSN=TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT)
■ Copy selected lines to the active AWS or a library member: Use the
RECORDS= operand to specify the range of lines that is to be copied, as in:
IMPORT DSN=TEST.MASTER RECORDS=(1,7)
To copy those same lines into a specific library member, use the TO=
operand with the appropriate library member name, as in:
IMPORT DSN=TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT) RECORDS=(1,7) TO=WORKCOPY
■ Copy a formatted PDS directory or AllFusion CA-Librarian master file
index into the active AWS:
IMPORT DSN=TEST.LOAD() : PDS or CA-LIBRARIAN.
IMPORT DSN=TEST.LOAD LIBRARIAN-I : CA-LIBRARIAN only.
■ Copy a particular archived version of an AllFusion CA-Librarian master
file module. Specify the ARC= operand, as in:
IMPORT DSN=TEST.LIBRMSTR(INVREPT), ARC=-3
where the module archived three levels back is copied. (If ARC= is
omitted, the most current version is copied.)
■ Copy history records for a module. Use the LIBRARIAN-H operand, as in:
IMPORT DSN=TEST.LIBRMSTR(READSMR),LIBRARIAN-H


The Copy Function Panel is displayed when you specify the C function code
on the Data Set Facility menu or with the DSN command.
The following example illustrates how you can use this panel to place one
copy of lines 1200 through 2500 of the data set TEST.SOURCE after line 500 of
the active AWS.
Data Set: Copying Through the Menu

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
COPY DATA SET
OPTION ===> C
DATA SET ===> TEST.SOURCE

VOLUMES ===>
UNIT NAMES ===>
ARCHIVE LEVEL ===> PASSWORD ===>
PGMR NAME ===> MCD CODE ===>
MODULE TYPE ===> LANGUAGE ===>
1ST LINE ===> 12 LAST LINE ===> 25
AWS TARGET ===> 5 AWS COPY COUNT ===> 1

LIST HEADERS ===> YES
M-DISPLAY MEMBER LIST C-COPY DATASET/INDEX S-COPY SINGLE MEMBER

OPTION Enter the code that is appropriate for the action you
want to perform. The codes are:
C Copy a sequential data set or PDS/AllFusion
S Copy a single member/module.
M Display a Selection List of members/modules.
(Use the PGMR NAME, MODULE TYPE and
LANGUAGE fields to produce a qualified
AllFusion CA-Librarian Selection List.)
27-14 User Guide

DATA SETS Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of

the data set to be copied. The name may be further
qualified with:
dsnmem One- to eight-character PDS member or
AllFusion CA-Librarian module name.
v Relative generation number of the GDG data
set to be copied, specified as 0 (most recent)
or a minus number (as in -1).
VOLUMES Enter the one- to six-character serial number of the
volume where the data set resides. One to six volumes
can be specified. This field is required if the data set is
not cataloged.
UNIT NAMES Enter the one- to eight-character unit name associated
with the device type(s) where the data set resides. It
may be either an IBM-defined generic name (like 3350)
or a site-defined esoteric name (like SYSDA). This field
is required if the data set is not cataloged and resides
on a mass storage device.
master file module to be copied. (The module must be
in ARCHIE format.) If omitted, the most current level
of the module is copied. Specify the level using one of
the following forms:
Lx Absolute level number (between 0 and
65535) as reported on the AllFusion
CA-Librarian Update Report.
-y Relative level number between 0 and 255.
The current level is -0; -1 is one level older
than the current.
yymmddhhmmss 0
Date and time the desired archive level was
current. An even number of digits (starting
from the right) can be omitted. They are
assumed to have the highest values
consistent with the values of specified digits.
PASSWORD Enter one or two passwords (established by the site).
If one password is specified, it is treated as the data set
or AllFusion CA-Librarian master file module
password.

PGMR NAME Enter a one- to 15-character programmer name. Only

those modules marked as owned by the specified
program are included in the resulting AllFusion
CA-Librarian Selection List. If omitted, all appropriate
modules (as qualified by the other fields) are included.
MCD CODE Enter the Management code of the AllFusion
CA-Librarian master file. MCD is only required when
the master file contains PROD2 modules.
Selection List:
PROD0 Includes modules with PROD0 security
status.
status.
status.
TEST Includes modules with TEST security status.
If omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by
language type of the modules that are to be included in
an AllFusion CA-Librarian Selection List. If omitted, all
included.
1ST LINE Enter the number of the first line to be copied. If
omitted, the operation begins with the first line.
LAST LINE Enter the number of the last line to be copied. If
omitted, the operation ends with the last line.
AWS TARGET Enter the destination of the operation by specifying:
v Number of the line at or after which the data are
to be copied within the active AWS.
* After the line at which the AWS pointer is
currently positioned.
B After the last line in the active AWS.
R Replace the contents of active the AWS with the
copied data.
If omitted, the default is R.
AWS COPY COUNT Enter the number of copies of the attached data that are
to be placed in the AWS. If omitted, the default is 1.
27-16 User Guide

LIST HEADERS Enter YES or NO to designate whether Selection List

header lines are to be included in the copy operation.

If the Selection List is produced Through the Copy Function panel, the only
operation you can perform is a copy. To do this, type a C before the name of
each entry to be copied. If you do not specify a destination in the STATUS
field, the data replaces the current contents of the active AWS.
If any other form of Selection List is displayed, you can perform any of the
functions that are valid with that Selection List. When performing a copy
operation, type a C before the name of each entry in the list to be copied.
Then, tab to the STATUS field and enter a destination code. The destination
codes are:
B Copy to the bottom of the active AWS.
R Replace the contents of the active AWS with the copied data.
T Copy to the top of the active AWS.
The following example illustrates how you can copy multiple data sets from a
Selection List.
Data Set: Copying Through a Selection List

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
STOR1 673 288 117 2 2 116 2
C TEST.NEW PO FB 8
C TEST.NEW1 T PO U 12288 1
C TEST.NEW2 B PO FB 8
Note: Password-protected data sets cannot be copied from a Selection List.

Use the Copy Function panel or the COPY primary command.

27.4 Compressing a Partitioned Data Set
27.4 Compressing a Partitioned Data Set

You can compress a partitioned data set using the COMPRESS command. If
the PDS is not cataloged, include the serial number of the volume containing
the PDS, as in:
COMPRESS DSN TEST.SAMPLE VOL STOR2
or, by entering the CM function code, data set name and volume containing it
on the Data Set Facility menu, as in the following example.
Data Set: Compressing Through the Menu

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> CM
DATA SET ===> TEST.SAMPLE

VOLUMES ===>
UNIT NAMES ===>
or, by entering the CM code on a Catalog or VTOC Selection List, as in the

following example.
Data Set: Compressing Through a Selection List

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
STOR2 673 288 117 2 2 116 2
TEST.ALPHA PO FB 8 8
TEST.BETA PO U 122 88 12288
CM TEST.SAMPLE PO FB 8 8
Your site management has the option of designating the utility program that is
to perform the compression processing. (As distributed, the IBM utility
IEBCOPY is used.) The designated data set must be eligible for compression
processing by that utility program. (See the description of the COMPRESS
command in the Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive Environment Command Reference
Guide for a list of requirements.)
When the data set is compressed, messages are directed to a library member
named ZZZZZCMP. You can use the SET DSNCMLST command to designate
the type of messages you want written to that member.
27-18 User Guide

27.5 Define Alias
27.5 Define Alias

You can use a primary command or function panel to define an alias for a:
■ Non-VSAM data set, ICF user catalog or VSAM user catalog, where:
– If an alias is being defined for a non-VSAM data set, the data set must
be cataloged in an ICF or VSAM catalog accessible to Advantage
CA-Roscoe.
– The catalog entry created for the alias must be in the same catalog as
the entry for the related non-VSAM data set, ICF user catalog or
VSAM user catalog. Attempts to define an alias with a name that
causes an entry to be created in a different catalog are rejected.
■ PDS member, where:
– If the alias is being defined for a non-load module (or is an alias in a
load module), the PDS directory record for the alias is created by
copying all information from the related member's directory record
and setting the alias flag in the new directory record.
– If the related member is a load module, the related member's CESD
(Composite External Symbol Directory) records are read to determine
if the requested alias name is defined as a symbolic name in the load
module.
If it is not defined as a symbolic name, the PDS directory record for
the alias is created by copying all information from the related
member's directory record and setting the alias flag in the new
directory record.
If the requested alias name is defined as a symbolic name in the load
module, the request is rejected if it is not one of the following types:
Control Section Definition
Entry Label Reference
Common Control Section
Resolved External Reference
Resolved Weak External Reference
Additionally, if the load module is in overlay format, the symbol must
refer to a location in the root segment (like segment 1) of the load
module.

27.5 Define Alias
– If the requested alias name is an eligible symbolic name in the load

module, the PDS directory record for the alias is created by first
copying all information from the related member's directory record,
then overlaying the following fields based on the information found in
the ESD (External Symbol Dictionary) data for the symbol:
Entry Point Offset
Addressing Mode
Overlay Control Information
Scatter Load Information

You can use the DEFINE ALIAS command to:
■ Assign an alias to a PDS member. For example, to assign the alias XYZ to
the member ABCDEFGH on the cataloged partitioned data set
TEST.ALPHA, you would enter:
DEFINE ALIAS XYZ RELATE TEST.ALPHA(ABCDEFGH)
■ Assign a data set or catalog alias. For example, to establish TEST as the
alias for the catalog named CATALOG.TEST, you would enter:
DEFINE ALIAS TEST RELATE CATALOG.TEST

To display the Define Data Set Alias Function panel, specify the DA function
code on the Data Set Facility menu, a Catalog Selection List, PDS Selection List
or VTOC Selection List or with the DSN command.
The following example illustrates how you might establish SAMPLE as the
alias for the user catalog named CATALOG.TEST.

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DEFINE DATA SET ALIAS
DATA SET ===> CATALOG.TEST

VOLUME ===>
UNIT NAME ===>
PASSWORD ===>
ALIAS NAME ===> SAMPLE
27-20 User Guide

27.5 Define Alias

DATA SET Enter the: 1) fully qualified name of the PDS where the alias is
to be created plus the one- to eight-character name of the
member for which the alias is to be created; or 2) name of the
non-VSAM data set, ICF user catalog or VSAM user catalog
for which the alias is to be created.
VOLUME Enter the one- to six-character serial number of the volume
where the PDS resides. (VOLUME is required if the data set is
not cataloged.)
UNIT NAME Specify the one- to eight-character unit name associated with
the device where the PDS resides.
■ UNIT NAME is required if the data set resides on a mass
storage volume and is not cataloged.
PASSWORD Enter the site-defined OS password for the PDS.
ALIAS Enter either the: 1) one- to eight-character name of the alias to
be created for the PDS member, or 2) one- to 44-character alias
for the non-VSAM data set, ICF user catalog or VSAM user
catalog.

27.6 Define GDG
27.6 Define GDG

You can define a generation data base (for ICF and VSAM catalogs) or a
generation data set index (for CVOL catalogs) using the DEFINE GDG
command or the Define Generation Date Group Function panel.
Notes:
■ The GDG must be cataloged in a catalog that is accessible to Advantage
CA-Roscoe.
■ Both the primary command and the function panel allow you to specify a
retention period. The retention period may be any date up to the 365th day
of the year 2155 at sites with MVS/XA SP2.2.0 or higher. At other sites, the
maximum retention period is the 365th day of the year 1999.

You can use the DEFINE GDG command to create a GDG. By including the
LIKE operand, it can be modeled on the characteristics of an existing base or
index. For example, assume you want to create a new GDG named
TEST.GDG.NEW and model it on the existing GDG named TEST.GDG.OLD.
The command you would enter might look like:
DEFINE GDG TEST.GDG.NEW LIKE TEST.GDG.OLD
If you omit LIKE, other operands of this command can be used to define all of
the appropriate characteristics. These operands can also be used to override
specific characteristics of the model you have specified through LIKE. For
example, if you want to use all of the characteristics of TEST.GDG.OLD except
for the number of generation data sets that may be associated with the new
GDG, you might enter:
DEFINE GDG TEST.GDG.NEW LIKE TEST.GDG.OLD LIMIT 1

You can display the Define Generation Data Group Function panel by
specifying the DG function code on the Data Set Facility menu or a Catalog
Selection List or with the DSN command.
If you specify the name of an existing GDG when you request the panel, the
panel will contain that name and the characteristics associated with that GDG
(as illustrated in the following example). You can then change the GDG name
and make any other necessary changes. When you press the Enter key, the
GDG is defined.
27-22 User Guide

27.6 Define GDG
Data Set: Defining a GDG

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
DEFINE GENERATION DATA GROUP
GDG NAME ===> TEST.GDG.OLD
LIMIT ===> 15 (1-255)

EMPTY ===> NO (Y,N)
SCRATCH ===> NO (Y,N)
OWNER ===>
FOR ===> (1-9999)
TO ===> (MM/DD/YYYY)

GDG NAME Enter the one- to 35-character name of the generation data
group to be created.
LIMIT Enter the maximum number of generation data sets that can
be associated with the GDG. The value must be between 1
and 255.
EMPTY Designates the action that is to be taken when the maximum
number of generation data sets have been reached for the
GDG and another generation data set is to be cataloged. The
action can be specified as:
YES Uncatalogs all generation data sets.
NO Uncatalogs only the oldest generation data set
when the limit is reached.
Note: The disposition of the data set's format-1
DSCB in the VTOC is controlled through
SCRATCH.
SCRATCH Designates whether the generation data set's format-1 DSCB in
the VTOC is to be deleted when the data set is uncataloged
(either implicitly through EMPTY or explicitly through a
delete or uncatalog request). The action can be specified as:
YES Deletes the generation data set's format-1 DSCB
from the VTOC when the data set is uncataloged.
(This allows the space assigned to the data set to be
made available to other users.)
NO Prevents the data set's format-1 DSCB from being
deleted, causing the space to remain allocated to
the data set.
OWNER Enter the one- to eight-character owner identifier that is to be
placed in the GDG's catalog entry. OWNER is ignored if the
GDG is to be cataloged in a CVOL catalog.

27.6 Define GDG
FOR Enter the number of days for which the GDG is to be kept. It
must be a value between 0 and 9999.
TO Enter the date through which the GDG is to be kept.
■ FOR and TO are mutually exclusive.
They are ignored if a GDG is to be cataloged in a CVOL.
If an SMS-managed data set is to be created in an ICF
catalog, FOR or TO can be overridden by the
specifications in the data set's SMS management class.
The date can resolve to any date up to the 365th day of
the year 2155 at sites with MVS/XA SP2.2.0 or higher. At
other sites, the maximum retention period is the 365th day
of the year 1999.
27-24 User Guide

27.7 Delete Data Set/Member/Module

You can use a primary command, the Delete Function Panel (from the Data Set
Facility menu) or a Selection List to delete:
■ One or more PDS members or AllFusion CA-Librarian modules.
■ All of the members comprising a partitioned data set while retaining the
data set itself.
■ An entire data set or AllFusion CA-Librarian master file.
You can also delete the following types of VSAM objects: ALIAS, AIX,
CLUSTER, GDGBASE, PAGESPACE and PATH.
Notes:
■ When deleting a data set or member/module through the Delete Function
Panel or a Selection List, you have the option of requesting that a Delete
Confirmation panel be displayed. You can control this option using the
ATTACH DSN command or the Data Set Facility menu.
– When CONFIRM DELETE is in effect, a Delete Confirmation panel is
displayed. This panel contains the name of each data set or
member/module you marked for deletion. You must confirm this
operation before it is performed.
– When CONFIRM DELETE is not in effect, the designated data set(s) or
member(s)/module(s) are deleted when you press the Enter key.
Note: CONFIRM DELETE is always in effect when you attempt to delete
all of the members comprising a PDS.
See 27.7.4, “Delete Confirmation Panels” on page 27-30 for
■ When deleting a data set, an uncatalog operation is:
– Always performed for an SMS-managed data set.
– Performed for a non-SMS-managed data set if the data set to be
deleted is cataloged and the volumes on which it resides match those
specified in the catalog.
■ When deleting from a Selection List, data sets, members, or modules
having unconventional names (for example, member names containing
lowercase or non-displayable characters,) are deleted.


You can use the DELETE DSN command to delete:
■ A data set or AllFusion CA-Librarian master file, as in:
DELETE DSN TEST.OLD
The next example shows how you can delete a data set regardless of its
expiration or retention date:
DELETE DSN TEST.OLD1 PURGE
where, if PURGE is omitted, the data set is deleted only if the expiration
date has passed.
■ A PDS member or AllFusion CA-Librarian module. For example, to delete
the member/module MYMEMBER from the password-protected data set
TEST.OLD2, enter:
DELETE DSN TEST.OLD2(MYMEMBER) PSWD MYPASS
If you omit the password, a message is displayed. You must specify the
appropriate password to delete a data set or a member/module from that
data set.
■ All of the members comprising a PDS while retaining the data set itself, as
in:
DELETE DSN TEST.OLD3()

When you specify the D function code on the Data Set Facility menu or with
the DSN command, the Delete Function panel is displayed.
The following example illustrates how you can use this panel to delete a
password-protected data set named TEST.OLD that has an expiration or
retention date.
Data Set: Deleting Through a Function Panel
27-26 User Guide


>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
DELETE DATA SET
OPTION ===> D
DATA SET ===> TEST.OLD

VOLUME(S) ===>
UNIT NAME(S) ===>
OVERRIDE RETPD ===> YES PASSWORD ===> MYPASS
D - DELETE ENTIRE DATA SET S - DELETE SINGLE MEMBER

M - DISPLAY MEMBER LIST X - DELETE ALL MEMBERS

OPTION Enter the code that is appropriate for the action you want to
perform. The codes are:
D Delete and uncatalog, if appropriate, the designated
data set.
S Delete the designated member/module.
X Delete all of the members comprising the designated
PDS. (The data set itself is not deleted.)
M Display a Selection List of members/modules. (Use the
field PGMR NAME, MODULE TYPE and LANGUAGE
to produce a qualified AllFusion CA-Librarian Selection
List.)
DATA SETS Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of the data
set to be deleted. The name can be further qualified with:
dsnmem One- to eight-character PDS member or AllFusion
CA-Librarian module name.
v Relative generation number of the GDG data set to
be deleted, specified as 0 (most recent) or a minus
number (like -1).

DATA SETS
(cont.)
* Deletes all members of the PDS; the data set itself
is retained and a compress operation is performed.
VOLUMES Enter the one- to six-character serial number of the volume on
which the data set resides. One to six volumes can be
specified. This field is required if the data set is not cataloged.
UNIT NAMES Enter the one- to eight-character unit name associated with the
device type(s) on which the data set resides. It can be either
an IBM-defined generic name (like 3350) or a site-defined
esoteric name (like SYSDA). This field is required if the data
set is not cataloged and resides on a mass storage device.
ARCHIVE LEVEL
Enter the archive level of the AllFusion CA-Librarian master
file module to be copied. (The module must be in ARCHIE
format.) If omitted, the most current level of the module is
copied. The level can be specified as:
Lx Absolute level number (between 0 and 65535) as
reported on the AllFusion CA-Librarian Update
Report.
-y Relative level number between 0 and 255. The
current level is -0; -1 is one level older than the
current.
yymmddhhmmss 0
Date and time when the desired archive level was
current. An even number of digits (starting from
the right) can be omitted. Omitted digits are
assumed to have the highest values that are
consistent with the values of those digits that are
specified.
OVERRIDE RETPD
Designates whether the data set's retention or expiration date
is to be overridden by entering either:
YES Delete data set, regardless of its retention or
expiration date.
NO Delete data set only if the retention or expiration
date is passed.
Note: If omitted, the default is NO.
27-28 User Guide


If one password is specified, it is treated as the data set or
AllFusion CA-Librarian master file module password.
If two passwords are specified, the first is treated as the data
set password and the second is treated as the AllFusion
CA-Librarian password.
MCD CODE Enter the management code of the AllFusion CA-Librarian
master file. MCD is only required when the master file
contains PROD2 modules.
The following fields only have meaning when you specify the M option to
display a list of AllFusion CA-Librarian module names.
used when selecting modules for inclusion in an AllFusion
CA-Librarian Selection List. Only those modules marked as
owned by the specified programmer are included in the
Selection List. If omitted, all modules are included.
MODULE TYPE Enter the type of modules to be included in a AllFusion
CA-Librarian Selection List by specifying one of the
following:
security status.
security status.
security status.
TEST Includes only those modules with TEST security
status.
LANGUAGE Enter the AllFusion CA-Librarian language code
designating the programming language type of the
modules that are to be included in an AllFusion

If the Selection List is produced through the Delete Function panel, the only
operation you can perform is a delete. Do this by typing a D or DX before the
name of each entry to be deleted.
If a Catalog, AllFusion CA-Librarian, PDS or VTOC Selection List is displayed,

you can perform any of the functions that are valid with that Selection List.

The following example illustrates how you can delete multiple data sets from a
Selection List.
Data Set: Deleting Through a Selection List

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
=================================== T O P ===================
STOR1 673 288 117 2 2 116 2
D TEST.NEW PO FB 8 8
TEST.NEW1 PO U 12288 12288
D TEST.NEW2 PO FB 8 8
Note: You cannot delete a password protected data set through a Selection
List. To delete such a data set, use the Data Set Facility menu or the
DELETE DSN command.
27.7.4 Delete Confirmation Panels

You can use the ATTACH DSN command or the Data Set Facility menu to
designate whether delete confirmation is required at the data set or
member/module level. (Note that a delete confirmation panel is always
displayed when you attempt to delete the members comprising a PDS without
deleting the data set itself.)
When CONFIRM DELETE is in effect, a confirmation panel is displayed

whenever you attempt to delete a data set or member/module using a
function panel or Selection List. (A confirmation panel is not displayed when
you use the DELETE DSN command.)
The following example illustrates the type of confirmation panel displayed

when you attempt to delete a data set.
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
CONFIRM ==> ENTER (Y)ES TO CONFIRM DELETE
DATASET NAME CREATED VOLSER
TEST.NEW 12/19/85 STOR1
TEST.NEXT 1/3/84 STOR2
TEST.LAST 11/12/86 STOR1
The following example illustrates the type of confirmation panel displayed

when you attempt to delete the members comprising a PDS (without deleting
the data set itself).
27-30 User Guide


>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
CONFIRM ==> ENTER (Y)ES TO CONFIRM DELETE OF PDS DIRECTO
DSN: TEST.PDS.SAMPLE
CREATED: 11/1/88
VOLSER: STOR2
MEMBERS: 1
Finally, the following example illustrates the type of panel displayed when you
attempt to delete one or more PDS members or AllFusion CA-Librarian
modules.

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
TEST.CURRENT CREATED: 9/29/1986 VOLSER: STOR1
MEMBER LAST MODIFIED
BADJCL 4/5/88 9:12
WIDGET 7/2/86 16:4
To delete the entries, enter either YES or Y in the CONFIRM field. Entering
any other value in this field terminates the operation. (You will be returned to
the Delete Function panel or the previous Selection List. The STATUS field of
that Selection List will contain *DENYDEL.)
If you enter a primary command when a delete confirmation panel is

displayed, the operation is either terminated or paused. If the command is:
■ Data set related (like SELECT MENU), the operation is terminated and the
action is performed.
■ Not data set related (like ATTACH LIB), the operation is paused. The
panel is redisplayed when the Data Set Facility is reattached, allowing you
to complete the operation.

27.8 Inquiring About a Data Set

You can obtain detailed information about a data set that resides on one or
more volumes by issuing the INFO command, as in:
INFO DSN TEST.SAMPLE2.SOURCE
or, specifying the I function code and data set name on the Data Set Facility
menu, as in the following example.
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> I
DATA SET ===> TEST.SAMPLE2.SOURCE

VOLUMES ===>
or, specifying the I function code on a Catalog or VTOC Selection List, as in

the following example:
Data Set: Inquiring Through a Selection List

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
=================================== T O P ===================
SEARCH ARGUMENT MATCHES CATALOG NAME TYPE
TEST..SOURCE 6 CATALOG.UMUROS1 ICF
DATA SET NAME STATUS TYPE VOLUME DEVICE
TEST.SAMPLE1.SOURCE NONVSAM STOR1 338
I TEST.SAMPLE2.SOURCE NONVSAM STOR1 338
TEST.SAMPLE3.SOURCE ALIAS
================================ B O T T O M ================

27-32 User Guide

The following example illustrates the type of information displayed. This

example assumes you are using a terminal that displays more than 24 lines. If
you are using split screens or your terminal displays only 24 lines, or if the
data set has more extents than fit within the screen, you may scroll to see the
rest of the information.
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET INFORMATION
DATA SET ===> ROSCOE.CREATE.PDSE
ENTRY TYPE ===> NONVSAM
MGMTCLAS ===> SMS
STORCLAS ===> SMS
VOLUMES ===> SMS1
DEVTYPE ===> 338
SEQ NO ===>
DATACLAS ===>
DSNTYPE ===> LIB
ALLOCATED TRACKS ===> 156 DSORG ===> PO

USED TRACKS ===> 15 RECFM ===> FB
ALLOCATED EXTENTS ===> 5 LRECL ===> 8
USED EXTENTS ===> 5 BLKSIZE ===> 8
ALLOCATED DIR BLKS ===> 25 KEYLEN ===>
USED DIR BLKS ===> 22 KEY OFF ===>
NUMBER OF MEMBERS ===> 127 SECURITY ===> NONE
UNITS ===> TRK CREATED ===> 11/4/85
1ST EXTENT ===> 18 ACCESSED ===> 3/2/86
SECONDARY EXTENTS ===> 12 EXPIRATION ===>
EXTENT NO. 1ST TRACK (CCHH) LAST TRACK (CCHH) TRACKS

---------- ---------------- ----------------- ------
1 7425 (1EF) 7532 (1F62) 18
2 12755 (3525) 12766 (3531) 12
3 12767 (3532) 12778 (353D) 12
4 12779 (353E) 1279 (354A) 12
5 12791 (354B) 1282 (3557) 12
================================= B O T T O M ==============

The information is divided into two parts. The first describes the data set itself;
the second provides specific information about each extent.
The data set information includes:

DATA SET Name of the data set about which information is
desired.
ENTRY TYPE Catalog entry type. (For cataloged data sets only.)
MGMTCLAS SMS management class.
STORCLAS SMS storage class.

VOLUMES Serial number of the volume(s) where the data set

resides. A maximum of six volumes can be shown.
DEVTYPE Name of the unit on which the data set resides. A
maximum of six units can be shown.
SEQ NO Sequence number of the data set on tape volume.
DATACLAS SMS data class.
DSNTYPE SMS data set type. This field will be LIB when the
data set is a PDSE, and is blank when another data set
type (non-PDSE) has been defined.
ALLOCATED TRACKS
Total number of tracks allocated on the first (or only)
volume.
USED TRACKS Number of tracks used on the first (or only) volume.
ALLOCATED EXTENTS
Total number of extents allocated on the first (or only)
volume.
USED EXTENTS Number of extents used on the first (or only) volume.
ALLOCATED DIR BLOCKS
Number of directory blocks allocated.
USED DIR BLOCKS Number of directory blocks used.
NUMBER OF MEMBERS
Number of members in the PDS or modules in a
AllFusion CA-Librarian master file.
DSORG Data set organization.
RECFM Record format or record organization (if a VSAM data
set).
LRECL Logical record length or average record length (if a
VSAM data set).
BLKSIZE Block size or maximum record length (if a VSAM data
set).
KEYLEN Key length.
KEYOFF Key offset.
SECURITY Security status of the data set, shown as:
nnnn Name of the site security package (like
RACF, ACF2, TOP SECRET).
PWWR Password required for WRITE access.
PWRD Password required for READ access.
27-34 User Guide

UNITS Allocation unit type, shown as: ABS, BLK, BYT, CYL,
KB, MB or TRK.
1ST EXTENT Number of allocation units in the first extent.
SECONDARY EXTENT
Number of allocation units for each subsequent extent.
CREATED Creation date.
ACCESSED Date last referenced (for example, data set opened).
EXPIRATION Expiration date.
The information about the extents includes:

EXTENT NO. Extent number or SUL.
SUL appears if the data set has standard user labels.
When present, the fields ALLOCATED TRACKS,
USED TRACKS, ALLOCATED EXTENTS and USED
EXTENTS will not include the space allocated to the
user label extent.
1ST TRACK (CCHH) Starting CCHH address of the extent (in hexadecimal)
and the relative number on the volume (in EBCDIC).
LAST TRACK CCHH) Ending CCHH address of the extent (in hexadecimal)
and the relative number on the volume (in EBCDIC).
TRACKS Number of tracks allocated.

27.9 Inquiring About a Volume

You can use the INFO command to obtain detailed information about a
volume, as in:
INFO VOL STOR1
or, specifying the I function code and volume serial number on the Data Set
Facility menu, as in the following example.
Data Set: Inquiring About Volumes Through a Menu

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> I
DATA SET ===>

VOLUMES ===> STOR1
Or specifying the I function code on a Volume Selection List, as in the

following example.

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
=================================== T O P ===================
VOLUME UNIT TYPE MATCHES
STOR+ 338 PRIVATE 2
VOLUME STATUS UNIT DEVTYPE CONTG--CYL--AVAIL CONTG--TRK
I STOR1 41 338 1 1 15
STOR2 4 338 2 13 31
================================ B O T T O M ================

27-36 User Guide

The following example illustrates the type of information displayed. If you

have split the screen so that all of the information is not displayed, you can
scroll the display.
Data Set: Volume Information Display

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
VOLUME INFORMATION
VOLUME ==> STOR1 ADDRESS ==> 4 DEVTYPE ==> 338
DEVICE STATUS => A VTOC INDEX => ACTIV

VOLUME STATUS => PRIV SMS CONTROL => NO
TOTAL TRACKS ON VOLUME => 2655 MAXIMUM BLOCK SIZE => 3276
TOTAL TRAKS USED => 26239 TRACK SIZE => 47968
PERCENT OF VOLUME USED => 96 TRACKS PER CYLINDER => 15
CONTIG. FREE CYLINDERS => 8 DATA SETS => 647

TOTAL FREE CYLINDERS => 49 VTOC TRACKS => 15
CONTIG. FREE TRACKS => 127 TOTAL DSCBS => 795
TOTAL FREE TRACKS => 1311 FREE DSCBS => 117
FREE EXTENTS => 172 PERCENT OF VTOC USED=> 85

The volume information includes:
VOLUME Serial number of the device.
ADDRESS Channel and unit address of the device.
DEVTYPE Physical device type.
DEVICE STATUS Status of the device at the time the information is
requested, shown in the form:
──┬───┬──┬──────┬──┬────┬────────────────────
└─x─┘ └─-yyy─┘ └─-z─┘
where one or all of the following information may be

displayed.
x is shown as:
A = Allocated
C = Console
F = Offline
O = Online
S = System Residence Volume

yyy is shown as:

BOX
= Hardware error
BSY = Busy
MTP
= Mount pending
NRD
= Not ready
PND
= Offline pending
PUL = Unload pending
RAL
= Restricted to allocation
SPD
= Suspended due to ASM use
SYS = Allocated to system
z is shown as:
M = Multi-system assignment
P = Reserve pending
R = Reserved/shared/exclusive control
VOLUME STATUS Status of the volume at the time the information is
requested, shown in the form:
ttt/uuuuu
where ttt is shown as:
PRIV = Volume mounted PRIVATE
PUB = Volume mounted PUBLIC
STRG
= Volume mounted STORAGE.
uuuuu is shown as:
RSDT = Volume is resident
RSERV = Volume is reserved
REMOV = Volume is removable
TOTAL TRACKS ON VOLUME
Maximum number of data tracks on the device.
TOTAL TRACKS USED
Number of tracks in use on the device.
PERCENT OF VOLUME USED
Amount of space used on the device rounded to the
nearest integer.
CONTIG. FREE CYLINDERS
Number of free cylinders in the largest contiguous
extent.
27-38 User Guide

TOTAL FREE CYLINDERS

Total number of free cylinders on the device.
CONTIG. FREE TRACKS
Number of free tracks in the largest contiguous
extent.
TOTAL FREE TRACKS
Total number of free tracks on the device.
FREE EXTENTS Number of extents not in use.
VTOC INDEX Code indicating whether the device has an indexed
VTOC and the current status if one exists. The code is
shown as:
NONE = Device has no indexed VTOC.
ACTIVE = Device has an indexed VTOC that is
in use.
DISABLED = Device has an indexed VTOC that is
inactive.
CREATED = Device has an indexed VTOC that is
never used.
SMS CONTROL SMS status of the device shown as:
NO = Not SMS managed.
INIT = SMS managed in initial status.
YES = Volume is managed by SMS.
MAXIMUM BLOCK SIZE
Largest valid block size for this device.
TRACK SIZE Number of bytes per device track.
TRACKS PER CYLINDER
Number of tracks per device cylinder.
DATA SETS Number of data sets defined on the device.
VTOC TRACKS Size of the device VTOC in tracks.
TOTAL DSCBS Maximum number of Data Set Control Blocks in the
VTOC.
FREE DSCBS Number of Data Set Control Blocks not used in the
VTOC.
PERCENT OF VTOC USED
Amount of space used in the VTOC rounded to the
nearest integer.

27.10 Printing a Data Set Object

You can use a primary command, the Print Function panel (from the Data Set
Facility menu) or a Selection List to print all or part of a data set object at a
328x-type printer or system printer.
When the data are scheduled for printing, a message is displayed. It contains
the printing location, tag (if specified) and print request number assigned by
Advantage CA-Roscoe. Once scheduled, all references to a specific print
request must be by its tag or number.

You can use the PRINT DSN command to print all or part of the currently
attached data set object. For example, to print the entire contents of the
currently attached and displayed data, all you need enter is:
PRINT DSN
All of the operands of the PRINT command can be used when printing
attached data. For example, to print only lines 5 through 25 of the currently
attached data, you would enter:
PRINT DSN 5 25
Note: See Chapter 7, “Printing Data” for additional information about the
PRINT command, and how requests can be monitored and controlled.
27.10.1.1 Printing a Selection List
When a Selection List is displayed, you can:

■ Print a specific range of lines by treating the Selection List as though it is
numbered from 1 by 1, as in:
PRINT DSN 1 5
■ Exclude the header portion of the list. By default, the header lines are
included in the operation. To exclude these lines, use the NOHDR
operand, as in:
PRINT DSN NOHDR
■ Include all available information. By default, only the information available
through the current display format is printed. To include all available
information, use the FULL operand, as in:
PRINT DSN 1 5 FULL
27-40 User Guide


The Print Function panel is displayed when you specify the P function code on
the Data Set Facility menu or with the DSN command.
The following example illustrates how you can use this panel to print a copy
of TEST.SAMPLE.SOURCE.
Data Set: Printing a Data Set Object

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6...
PRINT DATA SET
OPTION ===> P
DATA SET ===> TEST.SAMPLE.SOURCE

VOLUMES ===> MUROS1
UNIT NAMES ===>
ARCHIVE LEVEL ===> PASSWORD ===>
1ST LINE ===> 1 LAST LINE ===> 999999 NOTIFY ===>
TAG NAME ===> SEPARATOR ===> YES FORCEALIGN ===> NO
DEST ===> PR17 COPIES ===> 1 CLASS ===>
PAGE WIDTH ===> PAGE LEN ===> SEQ NUMBRS ===> YES
TYPE/FORMAT ===> DEF TOP MARGIN ===> BOT MARGIN ===>
1ST COL ===> 1 LAST COL ===> 32767
M-DISPLAY MEMBER LIST P-PRINT DATESET/INDEX S-PRINT SINGLE MEMBER

OPTION Enter the code that is appropriate for the action you want
to perform. The codes are:
P Print a sequential data set, PDS/AllFusion
S Print a single member/module.
M Display a Selection List of members/modules.
DATA SETS Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of the
data set to be printed. The name can be further qualified
with:
v Relative generation number of the GDG data set
to be printed, specified as 0 (most recent) or a
minus number (as in -1).

VOLUMES Enter the one- to six-character serial number of the volume

on which the data set resides. One to six volumes can be
specified. This field is required if the data set is not
cataloged.
UNIT NAMES Enter the one- to eight-character unit name associated with
the device type(s) on which the data set resides. It can be
either an IBM-defined generic name (as in 3350) or a
site-defined esoteric name (as in SYSDA). This field is
required if the data set is not cataloged and resides on a
mass storage device.
master file module to be printed. (The module must be in
ARCHIE format.) If omitted, the most current level of the
module is printed. The level can be specified as:
Report.
current.
yymmddhhmmss
Date and time when the desired archive level
was current. An even number of digits (starting
from the right) can be omitted. Omitted digits
are assumed to have the highest values that are
consistent with the values of those digits that
are specified.
If one password is specified, it is treated as the data set or
used when selecting modules for inclusion in a AllFusion
Selection List. If omitted, all appropriate modules (as
qualified by the other fields) are included.
MCD CODE Enter the Management code of the AllFusion CA-Librarian
27-42 User Guide


Selection List:
security status.
security status.
security status.
status.
If omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by other
fields) are included.
language type of the modules that are to be included in an
AllFusion CA-Librarian Selection List. If omitted, all
included.
You can use the following fields to customize the print operation.
1ST LINE Enter the number of the line at which the print operation is
to begin. If omitted, the first line is assumed.
LAST LINE Enter the number of the last line to be included in the print
operation. If omitted, the end of the data set object is
assumed.
While Selection Lists do not contain line numbers, treat
them as though they are numbered from 1 by 1.
NOTIFY Designate whether you want an RPS notification message
displayed when this data are printed by specifying either:
YES Display notification message.
NO Do not display message.
If omitted, the site defined value is used. Site management
has the option of prohibiting the use of NOTIFY.
TAG NAME Enter the name to be assigned to the print request. The
name cannot exceed eight characters, must start with an
alphabetic character and be bound by apostrophes (').
SEPARATOR Designate whether separators are required by specifying
either:
YES Separators are required.
NO Separators are not required.
The default is site-defined.

FORCEALIGN Designate whether physical page alignment is required by

specifying either:
YES Physical page alignment is to be forced (for example,
there is to be a page eject for each separator and
body page).
NO Physical page alignment is not required.
If omitted, the site-defined value is used.
DEST Enter the name of the printing location where the request
is to print. Use this operand to override the current
printing location for this execution.
COPIES Enter the number of copies of the request to be printed.
The maximum number is a site-defined value between 1
and 255. The default is 1 copy.
CLASS Enter the print class to be used at the location where the
request is to be printed. (Site management will tell you
which classes are valid for 328x-type printers and which
are valid for system printers.)
PAGE WIDTH Enter the width of the paper in printing columns as a
numeric value between 0 and 255. The default is
site-defined.
PAGE LEN Enter the length of the paper in number of print lines as a
numeric value between 0 and 99. On printers with the
hardware capability to set page length, the number must
be the same length as specified to the printer. The default
is site-defined.
SEQ NUMBRS Designate whether sequence number are to be printed by
specifying either:
YES Designates that sequence numbers are to be printed.
NO Designates that sequence numbers are not to be
printed.
If omitted, the default is YES.
TYPE/FORMAT Designate the format of the output by specifying either:
DEF (Default.) A top and bottom margin may be set.
ANS
ANSI print control characters are recognized.
MCC
Machine printer control characters are recognized.
DUMP
Format each line with offsets, hexadecimal data and
EBCDIC data to the right of the line.
27-44 User Guide

CHEX
Format each line with offsets and hexadecimal data to
the right of the line.
VHEX
Format each line in character data with hexadecimal
data shown vertically below.
TOP MARGIN v (Recognized only with TYPE DEF.) Enter the number of
blank lines to be skipped from the top of the page before
printing begins. v can be 0 through 99. The default is
site-defined.
BOT MARGIN v (Recognized only with TYPE DEF.) Enter the number of
blank lines to be skipped at the bottom of the page. v can
be 0 through 99. The default is site-defined.
1ST COL Number of the column where the print operation is to
start. The value must be between 1 and the maximum
length of the line. If omitted, the default is 1.
LAST COL Number of the column where the print operation is to
stop. The value must be greater than the starting column
and not exceed the maximum line length. If omitted, the
maximum line length is assumed. (The maximum line
length of data set objects is 32,767.)

If the Selection List is produced through the Print Function panel, you can
only perform a print operation.
If a Catalog, AllFusion CA-Librarian, PDS, Volume or VTOC Selection List is

displayed, you can perform any of the functions that are valid with that
Selection List.
To print one or more entries, type a P before the name of each entry. By
default, the request will print at the printing location assigned for the terminal
you are using. To print at a different location, tab to the STATUS field and
enter the appropriate destination name.
The following example illustrates how you can print multiple entries from a
Selection List.
Printing Through a Selection List


>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
STOR1 673 288 117 2 2 116 2
P TEST.NEW PO FB 8
TEST.NEW1 PO U 12288 1
P TEST.NEW2 PR99 PO FB 8
In the preceding example, the data set TEST.NEW will print at the terminal's
default printing location. The data set TEST.NEW2 will print at the location
identified (in the STATUS field) as PR99.
27-46 User Guide

27.11 Releasing Allocated Space
27.11 Releasing Allocated Space

You can release DASD space allocated to one of your data sets using the
RELEASE primary command, as in:
RELEASE DSN ABC.TEST.ASM
or, by entering the RL function code and data set name on the Data Set Facility
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET SELECTION MENU
FUNCTION ===> RL
DATA SET ===> ABC.TEST.ASM

VOLUMES ===>
or, by entering the RL function code on a Catalog or VTOC Selection List, as in

the following example.
Data Set: Release Space Through a Selection List

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
STOR1 673 288 117 2 2 116 2
RL ABC.TEST.ASM PO FB 8 8
ABC.TEST.OBJECT PO FB 8 8

27.12 Renaming Data Sets/Members/Modules

You can use a primary command, the Data Set Facility menu or a Selection
List to rename a:
■ Data set (sequential or PDS) or AllFusion CA-Librarian master file
■ PDS member or AllFusion CA-Librarian module
You can also rename the following types of VSAM objects: AIX, CLUSTER,
DATA, INDEX, PAGESPACE, and PATH.
Notes:
■ The volumes where the data set resides must be mounted and online.
■ A recatalog operation is:
– Always performed for an SMS-managed data set.
– Performed for a non-SMS-managed data set if the data set to be
renamed is cataloged and the volumes on which the rename is
performed match those specified in the catalog.

Use the RENAME command to change the name of a:
■ Data set or AllFusion CA-Librarian master file, as in:
RENAME DSN TEST.OLD NEWNAME TEST.NEW
■ PDS member or AllFusion CA-Librarian module, as in:
RENAME DSN TEST.OLD1(MEMOLD) NEWNAME MEMNEW
If the designated data set is password-protected, you must include the

password with the command, as in
RENAME DSN TEST.OLDNAME NEWNAME TEST.NEWNAME PSWD MYPSS
If the password is omitted, a message is displayed.

If you specify an R function code on the Data Set Facility menu or with the
DSN command, the Rename Function panel is displayed.
The following example illustrates how you might use this panel to rename a
member of a password-protected data set.
Data Set: Renaming Through the Menu
27-48 User Guide


>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
RENAME DATA SET
OPTION ===> S
DATA SET ===> TEST.OLD1(MEMOLD)

VOLUME(S) ===>
UNIT NAME(S) ===>
PASSWORD ===> MYPASS
NEW DATA SET ===> MEMNEW
M - DISPLAY MEMBER LIST S - RENAME SINGLE MEMBER

R - RENAME ENTIRE DATA SET

OPTION Enter the code that is appropriate to perform the desired
action. The codes are:
R Rename a data set.
S Rename a single member/module.
M Display a Selection List of members/modules. (Use
the field PGMR NAME, MODULE TYPE and
LANGUAGE to produce a qualified AllFusion
CA-Librarian Selection List.)
DATA SET Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of the
data set to be renamed. The name may be qualified with:
DATA SET
(cont.)
v Relative generation number of the GDG data set
to be renamed, specified as 0 (most current) or a
minus number (like -1).
VOLUMES Enter the one- to six-character serial number of the volume
on which the data set resides. One to six volumes can be
specified. VOLUMES is required if the data set is not
cataloged.
UNIT NAMES Enter the one- to eight-character unit name associated with
the device type(s) on which the data set is to be allocated.
It can be either an IBM-defined generic name (like 3350) or

a site-defined esoteric name (like SYSDA) This field is

required if the data set is not cataloged and resides on a
mass storage volume.
master file module to be renamed. (The module must be in
ARCHIE format.) If omitted, the most current level of the
module is renamed. The level can be specified as:
Report.
current.
yymmddhhmmss
Date and time when the desired archive level
was current. An even number of digits (starting
from the right) can be omitted. Omitted digits
are assumed to have the highest values that are
consistent with the values of those digits that
are specified.
PASSWORD Enter one or two passwords (established by the site). If
one password is specified, it is treated as the data set or
MCD CODE Enter the management code of the AllFusion CA-Librarian
The next three fields only have meaning when you specify the M option to
display a list of member/module names.
PGMR NAME Enter the one- to 15-character programmer name to be used
when selecting modules for inclusion in an AllFusion
Selection List. If omitted, all modules are included.
MODULE TYPE
Enter the type of modules to be included in a AllFusion
CA-Librarian Selection List by specifying one of the following:
PROD0 Includes only those modules with PROD0 security
status.
27-50 User Guide


status.
status.
status.
LANGUAGE Enter the AllFusion CA-Librarian language code designating
the programming language type of the modules that are to be
included in an AllFusion CA-Librarian Selection List.
NEW DATA SET
Enter the new data set or member/module name specified as
either:
dsn One- to 44-character fully qualified new name for
the data set.
dsnmem One- to eight-character new member/module
name.
+v Relative generation number to be assigned to GDG
(Generation Data Group) data set, specified as a
value between 1 and 255.

If the Selection List is produced through the Rename Function panel, the only
operation you can perform is a rename.
If a Catalog, AllFusion CA-Librarian, PDS or VTOC Selection List is displayed,

you can perform any of the functions that are valid with that Selection List.
27.12.3.1 Renaming Members/Modules
As illustrated in the following example to rename one or more

members/modules use the R function code and type the member name in the
STATUS field. (When the Selection List is redisplayed, the STATUS field will
contain *RENAMED, confirming that the operation performed successfully.)
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
TEST.OLD1 STOR1 3 PO U 12288 12288
MEMBER STATUS --------------- ATTRIBUTES --------------
R JUNK1 NEW1 RENT REUS

JUNK2 RENT REUS REFR AM=31
R JUNK3 NEW2 RENT REUS REFR AC=1

27.12.3.2 Renaming Data Sets
To rename one or more data sets, use the R function code. Since the STATUS
field is not large enough to hold a 44-character data set name, all of the data
sets that you marked will be presented to you through a subordinate panel
(such as the one illustrated in the following example). To rename a data set,
overtype the second occurrence of the old name with the new name.
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
ENTER NEW DATASET NAME ON LINE FOLLOWING OLD DATA SET NAME
DATASET NAME CREATED VOLSER
TEST.OLD 12/11/84 STOR2
TEST.NEW
TEST.OLD1 1/3/86 STOR1
TEST.NEW1
TEST.OLD2 11/15/85 STOR1
TEST.NEW2
You cannot rename a password-protected data set from a Selection List. To

rename a data set, use the Data Set Facility menu or the RENAME DSN
command.
27-52 User Guide

27.13 Uncataloging a Data Set
27.13 Uncataloging a Data Set

You can uncatalog non-VSAM data sets or one of the following types of VSAM
objects: ALIAS and GDGBASE. To do this, you can issue the UNCATLG
primary command, as in:
UNCATLG DSN TEST.NEW
or, specify the UC function code and data set name on the Data Set Facility
menu, as shown in the following example.

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DATA SET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> UC
DATA SET ===> TEST.NEW

VOLUMES ===>
UNIT NAMES ===>
You can also specify the UC code on a VTOC Selection List, as in the following
example.
Data Set: Uncataloging Through a Selection List

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
STOR1 673 288 117 2 2 116 2
ABC.TEST.ASM PO FB 8 8
UC ABC.TEST.NEW PO FB 8 8

27.14 Writing to a Data Set

You can update the contents of a data set using:
■ the EXPORT command, or
■ the EDSN command and related commands.
Using EXPORT: Use the EXPORT command to write data to an existing data
set. If the data are in:
■ The active AWS, you need only specify the name of the data set that is to
receive the data, as in:
EXPORT DSN=TEST.STAT
where the contents of the active AWS will replace the data in the
sequential data set named TEST.STAT.
The following example displays the type of confirmation message you
would receive after issuing this command, assuming that SET MSGLEVEL
INFO is in effect.

>
>
>....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6
EXP6 25 RECORDS WRITTEN TO DATA SET
TEST.STAT
ON VOLUME STOR3
EXP69 SUCCESSFUL EXECUTION OF EXPORT
■ A Library Member, use the INPUT= operand to name the desired member,
as in:
EXPORT DSN=TEST.STAT INPUT=INDATA
where the contents of TEST.STAT are replaced by the contents of the
member INDATA.
■ The active AWS and one or more library members, use the INPUT=
operand and the *, as in:
EXPORT DSN=TEST.STAT INPUT=INDATA//ABC.MORE
The asterisk (*) indicates where contents from the active AWS are to be
placed in the input. A maximum of ten different input sources can be
specified and can be any combination of the AWS contents and library
members. Note that if any of the members belong to another user, that
individual's prefix must be specified.
Other operands of the EXPORT command allow you to:

■ Write to a PDS member by specifying the member name in parentheses
after the data set names, as in:
EXPORT DSN=TEST.SOURCE(PROG5) INPUT=MYPROG5
27-54 User Guide

You can use the SET STATS command to control the SPF directory
information that is placed in the directory entry whenever a member is
added or updated.
■ Write to an uncataloged data set by including the serial number with the
VOL= operand, as in:
EXPORT DSN=TEST.SOURCE(PROG5) VOL=SHAR1
■ Add to the end of an existing data set by specifying MOD with the DISP
operand, as in:
EXPORT DSN=TEST.PROJ,DISP=MOD
where the contents of the active AWS is added to the end of the original
contents of the data set.
You can also use the EXPORT command to write data to an existing AllFusion
CA-Librarian master file or to an existing AllFusion CA-Panvalet member. For
more information about EXPORTing, see the Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive
Environment Command Reference Guide.
Using EDSN: Use the EDSN command to edit a data set by establishing a data
set editing session.
■ If you do not specify any operands, as in:
EDSN
the Edit Data Set Facility, as shown in the following example, is displayed.
Edit Data Set Facility Display
<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+..
EDIT DATASET FACILITY
FUNCTION ===>
DATA SET ===>

VOLUME ===> PASSWORD ===>
UNIT ===> ARCHIVE LEVEL ===>
E - EDIT DATASET X - TERMINATE EDIT DATASET
You can only perform two functions from this panel: Edit or Terminate. To
edit a data set, specify E in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate data
set name in the DATA SET field. If a volume, unit, password, or archive
level are required, you will be prompted accordingly. Edit (E) will begin
the data set editing session, and the specified data set will be attached in a
modifiable AWS.
■ If you specify a data set name with the command, as in:
EDSN TEST.STAT
the data set will be displayed in your AWS.

Once the data set is displayed, you can edit it using Advantage CA-Roscoe
editing conventions. (See Chapter 14, “AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS”
for information about editing and manipulating data within an AWS.)
If there is data in the AWS before the EDSN command is invoked, it is

temporarily replaced by the data set. That is, the AWS that the data set is
placed in becomes active, and your other AWS(s) is (are) placed in the
background. (Use the STATUS AWS command to display information about all
AWSs in use. See Chapter 17, “AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS
Information” for details.)
Executing a command that causes output to the Execution Area (for example,
ATTACH LIB) or pressing the CLEAR key places the Data Set Editing Facility
in a 'pending' state. The data set can be edited again at any time by issuing:
EDSN
When you have completed editing the data set, save the data by entering:
SDSN
The data set will be saved (or updated if it already exists) and the editing
session will be discontinued. If you do not want to save the data set, enter:
CDSN
The Data Set Edit Facility remains active until explicitly deactivated using the
SDSN or CDSN commands, selecting X from the Edit Data Set Facility panel,
or until the Advantage CA-Roscoe session is ended. For complete information
about the EDSN, CDSN, and SDSN commands, see the Advantage CA-Roscoe
Interactive Environment Command Reference Guide.
27-56 User Guide

Part IV. Jobs (Submitting and Managing Jobs)
Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1

28.1 Check Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2
28.1.1 JCL Syntax Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-2
28.2 Submitting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-4
28.2.1 Controlling Notification Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-4
28.2.2 Controlling Sequence Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-5
28.2.3 Expanding +INC Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-7
28.2.4 Expanding -INC Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-8
28.3 Using the Job Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-9
28.3.1 Wildcard Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-11
28.3.2 Using Job Facility Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-11
28.4 Using Job Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-13
28.4.1 Job Facility Operator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28-15
Chapter 29. Jobs: Displaying Job-Related Information . . . . . . . . . 29-1

29.1 Displaying Job Execution Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-2
29.2 Displaying Class/Destination Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-4
29.3 Displaying Initiator Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-5
29.4 Displaying Job Queue Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-6
29.5 Displaying Job-Specific Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29-7
Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1

30.1 Attaching Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-2
30.2 Browsing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-7
30.2.1 Detaching Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-7
30.2.2 Locating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-8
30.2.3 Positioning the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-12
30.2.4 Reattaching Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-14
30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-16
30.3.1 Altering File Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-16
30.3.2 Copying Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-19
30.3.3 Displaying File Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-22
30.3.4 Printing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-25
30.3.5 Canceling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-28
User Guide
Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities
Advantage CA-Roscoe provides facilities that allow you to:

■ Syntax check your jobs before submitting them.
■ Submit the contents of the active AWS and one or more library members
for execution.
■ Use a menu and selection lists to manipulate jobs and job output.
■ Display information about jobs in execution, job queues and initiators.
■ View jobs at the terminal. Once attached, you can browse the output and
perform such tasks as copying or printing individual files.

■ Syntax check the data you are about to submit for execution.
■ Control the submission of that data.
■ Use the Job Facility to monitor and process jobs.
Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities 28-1

28.1 Check Syntax
28.1 Check Syntax

Advantage CA-Roscoe provides commands that allow you to syntax check
JCL.
28.1.1 JCL Syntax Checking

The job control language syntax checker is invoked by the JCK command. It
can be used to check JCL statements in the active AWS or a library member.
To check JCL that is in the active AWS, enter:

JCK
JCL in a library member can be syntax-checked by including the RUN

command. With RUN, you can define input from a source other than that
normally used with a command. For example, to syntax check JCL statements
in the library member ARJOB, enter:
RUN JCK ARJOB
The following example assumes the JCL to be checked is in the active AWS.
The resulting display shows the error messages provided after the JCK
Jobs: Syntax Checking a Jobstream
JCK

>
> AWS( ) SCRL FULL COLS 1 72
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.
...... ================================ T O P ============
1 //STARTJCL JOB 25,ROBERTS,CLASS=X
2 // MSGCLASS=A
3 //COB EXEC PGM=IKFCBL
4 //SYSLIN DD DSN=&&LOADSET,DISP=(,PASS),
5 // UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(TRK,(5,5))
6 //SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=A
7 //SYSUT1 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,4,4)
8 //SYSUT2 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(4,4))
11 //SYSIN DD
============================= B O T T O M ========

28-2 User Guide

28.1 Check Syntax
>

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
// MSGCLASS=A
CAY66S VERB 'MSGCL' IS UNKNOWN
//SYSLIN DD DSN=&&LOADSET,DISP=(,PASS),
UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(TRK,(5,5))
CAY687W BLKSIZE NO SPECIFIED FOR NEW OR DUMMY DATA SET -
POTENTIAL S13 IN EXECUTION
//SYSUT1 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,4,4)
CAY648E '4' IS ILLEGAL OPERAND FOR 'RLSE' PARAMETER OF
'SPACE'
CAY6 3 STATEMENTS FLAGGED IN JOB 'STARTJCL'. MAXIMUM

SEVERITY IS 12

| By default the messages are normally written to the screen. However, the
| messages can be routed to the active AWS as shown following:
| JCK-A
| or
| RUN JCK-A member
| Note: Original JCL must be saved prior to the use of JCK-A and Run JCK-A
| member as it will destroy the current copy.
| To display the JCLOPTS enter:

| JCK-D

28.2 Submitting Data

You can submit the contents of the active AWS or one or more library
members to the operating system at any time during the terminal session.
■ To submit the contents of the active AWS:
Enter the command SUBMIT with no operands, as in:
SUBMIT
■ To submit one or more Advantage CA-Roscoe library members:
Enter the command SUBMIT followed by the name(s) of the member(s) to
be submitted. You can submit a maximum of 21 members in a single
execution of the command. For example, to submit the library members
COBJCL, INVLIST and DATA1, you would enter:
SUBMIT COBJCL INVLIST DATA1
Based on the names of these members, they probably constitute a
continuous jobstream. It is valid to submit multiple members where each
member represents a separate job.
■ To submit a mixed jobstream consisting of one or more library members
and the contents of the active AWS:
Use the keyword AWS to indicate where the contents of the active AWS is
to be inserted in the jobstream. For example, assume the member COBJCL
contains the JCL statements needed to execute a COBOL program, the
active AWS contains the COBOL program, and the member DATA1
contains the test data to be used by that program. The job submission
would look like:
SUBMIT COBJCL AWS DATA1
28.2.1 Controlling Notification Messages

When you submit a job, a message is displayed on the Response Line. It
contains the job name (taken from the JOB statement), job number (assigned by
the system) and time the job was submitted. If you do not want to receive this
informational message, you can suppress it by modifying the STATUS
SESSION display or issuing the command:
SET MSGLEVEL ERROR
By site option, you can receive JES2 or JES3 messages at your terminal when
your job completes execution. If your site permits this notification, your site
management will tell you what change needs to be made to the JOB statement
in your JCL.
28-4 User Guide

28.2.2 Controlling Sequence Numbers

If the data you are submitting has the sequence number attribute NOSEQ, no
sequence numbers are included in the data.
If the data has the attribute SEQ, you can use the SET SUBMIT command to
control whether sequence numbers are included, where:
■ SET SUBMIT NOSEQ excludes sequence numbers.
■ SET SUBMIT SEQ places sequence numbers in the location defined by the
data's sequence number attribute.
If you submit data without specifying the SET SUBMIT command and the data
are in:
■ The active AWS; the AWS sequence attribute controls whether sequence
numbers are to be included.
Use the SEQ or NOSEQ command to change the sequence attribute of the
active AWS. NOSEQ suppresses the insertion of sequence numbers, while
SEQ specifies that sequence numbers are to be included and designates the
location of those sequence numbers.
■ A library member; the member's sequence attribute controls whether
sequence numbers are to be included.
The following table summarizes how you can control sequence numbers in
submitted jobs.

Data Source Attribute Command Override Action

AWS NOSEQ no command Numbers excluded.
SET SUBMIT No affect
NOSEQ
SET SUBMIT SEQ No affect
NOSEQ No affect
SEQ Numbers included at
location designated by
command.
SEQ no command Numbers included at
atrribute.
SET SUBMIT Numbers excluded.
NOSEQ
SET SUBMIT SEQ Numbers included at
atrribute.
NOSEQ Numbers excluded.
SEQ Numbers included at
command.
Library NOSEQ no command Numbers excluded.
Member(s) SET SUBMIT No affect.
NOSEQ No affect.
SET SUBMIT SEQ
SEQ no command Numbers included at
attribute.
SET SUBMIT Numbers excluded.
NOSEQ
SET SUBMIT SEQ Numbers included at
attribute.
28-6 User Guide

28.2.3 Expanding +INC Statements

You can include one or more +INC statements in the data you submit for
execution. This special Advantage CA-Roscoe statement identifies where to
include the contents of the active AWS or a library member within the
jobstream.
■ Defining +INC Statements:
+INC statements must begin in the first position of the line and be the
only data on that line. The format of this statement is:
──+INC──┬─AWS───────────┬─────────────────────────────────
└──┬──────┬─mem─┘
└─pfx.─┘
where:
AWS Includes the contents of the active AWS.
mem Name of the library member whose contents is to be included.
If the member belongs to another user, that individual's prefix
must be included.
The data being submitted (like the active AWS and library members) can
contain any number of +INC statements. It can even contain only +INC
statements, as in:
+INC LEADJCL
+INC MYPROG
+INC ENDJCL
The included data can contain +INC statements. You are allowed 64 levels
of +INC nesting.
■ Enabling Expansion:
The SET SUBMIT command controls whether +INC statements are to be
expanded when the job is submitted.
To have +INC statements expanded (for example, to include the library
member or active AWS contents), specify the INCLUDE operand with SET
SUBMIT before issuing the SUBMIT command, as in:
SET SUBMIT INCLUDE
SUBMIT
Once you have enabled expansion, it remains in effect until you disable it
or terminate your session.
You can disable +INC expansion by specifying:
SET SUBMIT NOINCLUDE

28.2.4 Expanding -INC Statements

You can include one or more AllFusion CA-Librarian -INC statements in the
data you submit for execution.
The SET MASTER command controls whether these statements are to be

expanded when the job is submitted. For example, you might enter:
SET MASTER ROSCOE.LIBR
: Activate and name master file
SUBMIT TEST1 : -INCs in member TEST1 expanded
SET MASTER OFF : Deactivate -INC expansion
SUBMIT TEST2 : -INCs in TEST2 not expanded
SET MASTER ON : Reactivate with same master file
Once you identify the AllFusion CA-Librarian master file to be used, it remains
in effect until you:
■ Specify another master file
■ Disable expansion
■ Terminate your session
28-8 User Guide

28.3 Using the Job Facility

The Advantage CA-Roscoe AJOB command invokes a panel-driven RPF
system, similar to the DSN and LIB facilities. It is referred to as the Job
Facility. The Job Facility can be used to:
■ Attach jobs
■ Display a job's execution status
■ Display job-related information
■ Alter file attributes
■ Copy jobs
■ Print jobs
■ Cancel jobs
It can also be used to execute operator commands and check the system
console.
You can display the Job Facility by issuing the command:

AJOB
If you enter this command with no operands, the Job Facility primary menu is
displayed.
You can include a job name and job number with the AJOB command to
qualify the job display.
If a specified job can be found, it is attached and AJOB terminates. If the

specified job cannot be found, or if the job name uses a wildcard specification,
then a Job Selection list is presented based on the JOB/GRP NAME value.
When you are viewing job output, you can redisplay the primary menu at any
time by entering:
SELECT MENU
on the command line.
PA keys will take you back one level.
To end AJOB processing, select the function X (TERMINATE) from the main
menu.
The CLEAR key will discontinue AJOB processing from any Job Facility panel
or display from which it is pressed (with the exception of a CONSOLE display
caused by a command from the OPERATOR COMMAND panel). It leaves the
most recent job attached that had been selected for viewing.
When CLEAR is pressed during a CONSOLE display, it causes the CONSOLE

display to be cleared and redisplays the OPERATOR COMMAND panel.

Jobs: Job Facility Menu

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
JOB FACILITY
FUNCTION ===>
JOB/GRP NAME ===>

JOB NUMBER ===> DEST/CLASS ===>
FILE NUMBER ===> ACTIVE JOB TYPE ===> (ALL,JES,STC,TSO)
PAGE NUMBER ===> CONTROL CHARS ===> NO (Y,N)
LINE NUMBER ===> CONFIRM CANCEL ===> YES (Y,N)
A - ATTACH JOB C - COPY JOB I - INFO JOB OP - OPER CONTROL

AI - ATTACH INITIATORS CN - CANCEL JOB L - SYSTEM LOG P - PRINT JOB
AT - ALTER JOB X - TERMINATE

FUNCTION The job function to be performed. Specify one of the
codes listed on the bottom of the menu. (See 28.3.2,
“Using Job Facility Functions” on page 28-11 for a
complete description of each function.)
JOB/GRP NAME The specific name or prefix (wildcard) of job(s) to be
included in the selected function.
JOB NUMBER Number of the job. Must be numeric or left blank.
FILE NUMBER Number of the file to qualify the selected display. Must
be numeric or Last; if no value is specified, a value of 1
is used.
PAGE NUMBER Number of the page to qualify the selected display.
Must be numeric or Last; if no value is specified, a value
of 1 is used.
LINE NUMBER Line number of job data to qualify the selected display.
Must be numeric or Last; if no value is specified, a value
of 1 is used.
DEST/CLASS The printer destination used in the PRINT JOB function,
or class of jobs displayed by the ATTACH JOB function.
28-10 User Guide

ACTIVE JOB TYPE The qualification to show active TSO jobs (TSO), active
tasks submitted through JES (JES), active started tasks
(STC), or all active jobs (ALL) displayed for the
ATTACH JOB function. A value here causes the
JOB/GRP NAME value to be ignored.
CONTROL CHARS Specifies whether control characters are included when a
job is attached, copied, or printed. A default of NO is
used when the AJOB facility is initially invoked.
CONFIRM CANCEL
Specifies whether a confirmation panel is displayed for
any jobs selected for cancel. A default of YES is used
when the AJOB facility is initially invoked.
28.3.1 Wildcard Characters

The following table contains the wildcard characters that may be used to create
the criteria for an entry's inclusion in a Job Selection list. The job name used
to create a selection list may use the asterisk (*), plus sign (+), or wildcard
characters, but not both in the same wildcard.
Code Meaning and Examples

ROS*JCL* ROSAJCL
ROSJCL
ROSJCLEND
ROSXJCLX
DROS+ DROS
DROSCOE
DROSTSO
28.3.2 Using Job Facility Functions

You can use the Job Facility to perform a variety of job functions. (Each
function is listed on the bottom of the AJOB menu. See “Jobs: Job Facility
Menu” on page 28-10) Some functions are performed explicitly. Many
functions display a corresponding panel on which you must enter information
specific to that function.
The following table lists each function code and its corresponding description
and action.


A Attach a job. Performed, if job found. If
job not found, displays
selection list.
AI Request active initiator Panel displayed.
information.
AT Alter a job. Panel displayed.
C Copy a job. Panel displayed.
CN Cancel a job. Confirmation panel
displayed if CONFIRM
CANCEL is YES; or cancel
the job with no confirmation
if CONFIRM CANCEL is
NO.
I Inquire about job information. Panel displayed
L Attach the System log. Panel displayed
OP Send OPERATOR commands. Panel displayed
P Print a job. Panel displayed
X Terminate AJOB processing. Performed
28-12 User Guide

28.4 Using Job Selection Lists

When a job name (with or without wildcards) is specified with the AJOB
command and no job number accompanies it, a Job Selection list is displayed.
The following example shows the selection list for all jobs beginning with the
letters SAMP:
Jobs: Job Facility Selection List
FUNCTION ===> (M - MENU; F - FORWARD; B - BACK; X - EXIT) 14.36.8

JOB NAME ===> SAMP FILE ===> PAGE ===> LINE ===>
LINE 1 OF 13 HELD/
JOBNO JOBNAME STATUS C PTY SID ORIGIN STEP/LINES CPU TIME
----- -------- ------------------- - --- ---- --------- ---------- --------
__ 284 SAMPCSTT AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
__ 283 SAMPDSTT AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
__ 411 SAMPSTR1 AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
__ 6843 SAMPLOGP AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
__ 2993 SAMPDSTT AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
__ 7158 SAMPETC EXECUTING 24:42:53 3 11 XAD1 LOCAL SAMPETC 298.45
__ 716 SAMPCICS EXECUTING 24:42:48 3 11 XAD1 LOCAL SAMPCICS 63.13
__ 4596 SAMPCCCS EXECUTING 8:4:5 3 11 XAD1 SYSTEMC SAMPCCCS 18.79
__ 5477 SAMPDSTT EXECUTING 5:39:45 3 11 XAD1 LOCAL MUF8 8.45
__ 7667 SAMPCSTT EXECUTING 3:24:35 3 11 XAD1 LOCAL CICS 36.23
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
A - ATTACH C - COPY L - LAST FILE S - STATUS
AT - ALTER CN - CANCEL P - PRINT NN - NTH FILE
PF1/13: MENU PF3/15: EXIT PF7/19: BACK

The fields comprising the job selection list can be used to change or further
qualify the display, and include:
FUNCTION requires M, F, B, or X; M invokes the Primary Menu; X will
discontinue AJOB processing (exits to Advantage
CA-Roscoe); F will cause a scroll forward for a large display;
B will cause a scroll backward for a large display; F and B
are retained in this slot for subsequent scrolling by hitting
the Enter key; Any other value redisplays the screen with
new information (beginning with the first job).
The PF key numbers listed at the bottom of the display will
achieve the same result as the functions.
JOB NAME The name or prefix of jobs shown in the display. It can
include a wildcard character. Users can change this value to
show jobs with a different job name or job prefix. (This slot
shows no value and is unmodifiable if the ATTACH
INITIATORS selections was made from the Primary Menu.)
FILE Number of the file within the job to qualify the function
request. Must be numeric or Last; if no value is specified, a
value of 1 is used.

PAGE Number of the page within the job to qualify the function
request. Must be numeric or Last; if no value is specified, a
value of 1 is used.
LINE Line number within the job to qualify the function request.
Must be numeric or Last; if no value is specified, a value of 1
is used.
You can manipulate the jobs in the selection list by using the line commands
displayed at the bottom. Specify the following codes in the field to the left of
a job to invoke the corresponding service (multiple selections may be made):
A ATTACH this job using the FILE, PAGE, or LINE values appearing in
their respective locations.
AT Present the ALTER JOB panel for the corresponding job.
C Present the COPY JOB panel for the corresponding job.
CN Present the CANCEL JOB confirmation panel for the corresponding job
if CONFIRM CANCEL is YES on the Primary Menu; or cancel the job
with no confirmation if CONFIRM CANCEL is NO on the Primary
Menu.
L ATTACH JOB LAST FILE for this job using PAGE, or LINE values
appearing in their respective locations. The value appearing in the FILE
===> slot is ignored, and is reset to LAST for subsequent displays of
this panel.
P Present the PRINT JOB panel for the corresponding job.
S ATTACH the corresponding job using the STATUS JOB display.
NN ATTACH JOB FILE NN for the corresponding job using PAGE or LINE
values appearing in their respective locations; The value appearing in
the FILE field is ignored, and is reset to this value for subsequent
displays of this panel.
Notes:
When you issue selections A, L, S, and NN, the AJOB facility is placed in a
suspended display state (you will see PGM(xx.AJOB) appearing on the
Advantage CA-Roscoe status line) and the following is true:
■ The job is attached and Advantage CA-Roscoe commands can be issued on
the command line to do any job or non-job processing.
■ RPFs are NOT SUPPORTED while AJOB is in this state.
■ The SCREEN command is NOT SUPPORTED while AJOB is in this state.
■ PF keys set to SPLIT, SWAP, and END will not be recognized, however,
issuing the corresponding :S or :W commands on the command line and
pressing PF12 will cause the SPLIT and SWAP functions to take place.
28-14 User Guide

■ Any PA key or any of the following commands cause a suspended AJOB

to continue:
AJOB
SELect MENU
SELect NEXT
SELect PREV
Next Job
PREV Job
FIRST Job
LAST Job
DETach Job (job is detached first)
28.4.1 Job Facility Operator Control

The Job Facility contains an option that enables you to issue operator
commands and check the system console from a panel environment. If you
have user privileges which enable you to execute system and operator
commands, you can use the Operator Control function on the Job Facility
primary menu.
To invoke the Operator Control display from the Job Facility menu, enter the
code OP in the FUNCTION field. The following example illustrates this.
Jobs: Job Facility Menu

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
JOB FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> OP
JOB/GRP NAME ===>



When you select the OPER CONTROL function, the Operator Control panel
will be displayed. From this panel, you can:
■ Execute CONSOLE commands using the CMD and CMM subcommands.

■ Execute CONSOLE commands you may have in an Advantage CA-Roscoe

library member.
■ Display the MVS Master Trace Table using the CONSOLE MTT command.
■ Display the UCB address of defined consoles currently active in the
system.
■ Display messages written to a designated console.
This panel consists of four fields, as shown in the following example.
Jobs: Operator Control Display

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
OPERATOR CONTROL
OPTION ===> (CMD, CMM, LIB, MTT, STA, UCB, X - EXIT)
COMMAND ===>
- OR -
LIB MEMBER ===>
UCB ADDRESS ===>
Fill in the fields with the following information:

OPTION requires CMD, CMM, LIB, MTT, STA, UCB, or X.
X returns to Job Facility Primary Menu; CMD causes a
CONSOLE CMD command to be issued using the command
in the COMMAND slot; CMM causes a CONSOLE CMM
command to be issued using the command in the
COMMAND slot; LIB causes a RUN CONSOLE command to
be issued using the library member named in LIB MEMBER
slot; MTT causes a CONSOLE MTT command to be issued;
STA causes a CONSOLE STATUS command to be issued;
UCB causes a CONSOLE UCB command to be issued using
the UCB address specified in UCB ADDRESS slot; Any other
value is diagnosed as an error.
COMMAND An operator command to be issued. Required with option
CMD or CMM.
LIB MEMBER An Advantage CA-Roscoe member containing operator
command to be issued. Required with option LIB.
UCB ADDRESS A UCB address of a console to be displayed. Required with
option UCB.
Note: CONSOLE is a Monitor command. For more information about the

CONSOLE command and the CMD and CMM subcommands, see the
Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive Environment System Commands Guide.
28-16 User Guide

Chapter 29. Jobs: Displaying Job-Related
Information
This chapter describes how to monitor the status of a job using the AJOB
command or the DISPLAY command.
■ AJOB enables you to display a job menu or selection list. From these
displays you can select functions to determine the status of a job and
obtain information regarding it.
■ DISPLAY can be used to directly monitor the status of a job.
AJOB and DISPLAY allow you to determine the following:

■ Job's execution status (awaiting execution executing, awaiting print, and so
on)
■ Job's position in the job queue
■ What initiators are assigned to each job class
■ How many jobs are associated with a specific job class or remote
destination
| Note: Advantage CA-Roscoe supports the six-digit job number support added
| with z/OS JES2/JES3 1.2.
Chapter 29. Jobs: Displaying Job-Related Information 29-1

29.1 Displaying Job Execution Status

You can determine job execution status for:
■ All jobs with the same job name. For example, entering:
DISPLAY COMPILE
might result in the display shown below.

>
>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+...
JOBNO JOBNAME STATUS C PRTY SID ORIGIN STEP/LINE HELD CPUTIME
----- ------- ------------ - ---- ---- ------ --------- ---- -------
285 COMPILE AWAIT PRT(H) 1 SYSH R1
4678 COMPILE EXEC ::2 X 6 SYSH R1 LINKMOD 1.44
5232 COMPILE AWAIT EXEC X 6 SYSH R1 QPOS(18) YES
The information displayed above can be displayed using the Job Facility. Enter:
AJOB COMPILE
The following example is displayed.
Jobs: AJOB Execution Status

JOB NAME ===> COMPILE FILE ===> PAGE ===> LINE ===>
LINE 1 OF 13 HELD/
----- -------- ------------------- - --- ---- --------- ---------- --------
__ 285 COMPILE AWAITING PRINT(H) 1 SYSH R1
__ 4678 COMPILE EXECUTING ::2 X 6 SYSH R1 LINKMOD 1.44
__ 5232 COMPILE AWAITING EXECUTION X 6 SYSH R1 QPOS(18) YES
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

29-2 User Guide

■ All jobs containing your prefix in the site-designated location of the job
name. Enter:
DISPLAY or AJOB
If your site requires your Advantage CA-Roscoe prefix to be part of the job
name, the resulting display shows the status of all jobs that contain your
prefix in the designated location.
■ All jobs beginning with specific characters. For example,
DISPLAY ROS+ or AJOB ROS+
displays status information about all job names beginning with ROS. (The
plus sign (+) indicates that additional characters may follow those
specified.
■ All jobs that contain specific characters in a specific location. For example,
entering:
DISPLAY MASK=R*SC*E or AJOB R*SC*E
might display the status of jobs named ROSCOE or RASCAE. (The
asterisk (*) represents any character that is valid in a job name. See 28.3.1,
“Wildcard Characters” on page 28-11 for information on using wildcard
characters in job names.)
■ Any job whose name matches a DISPLAY subcommand, as in:
DISPLAY JOB=QUEUE

29.2 Displaying Class/Destination Status
29.2 Displaying Class/Destination Status

Use the NAME subcommand to display the names of jobs directed to a specific
job class or destination. For example, to display the names and status of each
job in class 0, enter:
DISPLAY NAME
29-4 User Guide

29.3 Displaying Initiator Status
29.3 Displaying Initiator Status

Use the INIT subcommand, as in:
DISPLAY INIT
to display information about all initiators used by the operating system and
the names and number of executing jobs.
You can also specify: AJOB INIT and receive the same result.

29.4 Displaying Job Queue Status
29.4 Displaying Job Queue Status

Use the QUEUE subcommand to display the number of jobs waiting to execute
in a particular job class. For example, to display the number of jobs waiting to
execute in class X, enter:
DISPLAY QUEUE X
29-6 User Guide

29.5 Displaying Job-Specific Information

Use the Job Facility Job Information panel to display accurate updates of data
related to a specific job. Specify the AJOB command to invoke the Job Facility.
From the main menu, specify I in the FUNCTION field, and the name of the
job to be referenced, as shown in the following example.
<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....

JOB FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> I
JOB/GRP NAME ===> COMPILE


Information about the specified job is displayed in the format shown in the
following example.
Jobs: Information Display (Job Facility)

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+....
JOB INFORMATION
OPTION ===> I (I - INFO; R - AUTOREFRESH; X - EXIT)
JOB NAME ===> COMPILE

JOB NUMBER ===> 1234
REFRESH INTERVAL ===> 4 (1 - 6)
JOB STATUS : EXECUTING 27:49:5 STEP/LINES : CICS

JOB CLASS : 3 CPU TIME : 1.56
PRIORITY : 11 HELD :
SYSID : XXX1 ORIGIN : SYSTEMX
The first four fields of the Job Information panel are variable. They contain the
name and number of the job you entered on the primary menu. If you want to
display a different job, you must change the following job information:

OPTION requires I, R, or X; X returns to Primary Menu; I indicates to

show current information for this job; R indicates to begin
autorefresh mode; Any other value redisplays the Job
Information screen.
JOB NAME The name of the job for which information is required.
JOB NUMBER The job number corresponding to the job name specified.
REFRESH INTERVAL
The number of seconds to wait during autorefresh mode
before showing updated information. Must be a number
from 1 to 60; the default is 4.
The remaining fields display information specific to the job you have indicated.
The screen will be automatically refreshed according to the value you specify
in the REFRESH INTERVAL field.
To exit this panel, select the option X (EXIT). You will be returned to the Job
Facility main menu.
29-8 User Guide

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output

■ Attach a job at your terminal.
■ Browse the job output to:
– Locate and note the specific occurrences of a string.
– Position the display to a specific line or to a line to which you have
assigned a name.
– Reattach the job after viewing an AWS, data set object or library
member.
– Finally, detach the job.
■ Perform such tasks as copying all or part of a file into an AWS, changing
file attributes, controlling the printing of the files comprising the job, and
cancelling a job.
Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output 30-1

30.1 Attaching Job Output

You can use a primary command, the Job Facility menu, or a job selection list
to attach job output.

Use the ATTACH JOB command to view the files comprising a job at your
terminal.
To attach the job named SAMPLE, enter:

ATTACH JOB SAMPLE
If there are multiple jobs with the same name, include the number of the job
you want to examine, as in:
ATTACH JOB SAMPLE 285
| Note: Advantage CA-Roscoe supports the six-digit job number support added
| with z/OS JES2/JES3 1.2.
If you do not include a job number, the first available job is selected and
attached.
You can also attach a job by specifying just its job number, as in:
ATTACH JOB 285
When a job is attached, the display begins with the first line of the first file.
The files are presented to you in a format that is similar to a hard-copy listing.
For example, assume that the job SAMPLE compiles, link-edits and executes a
COBOL program in an MVS/JES2 environment. Its output is divided into the
following files:
File 1 JES2 job log.
File 2 Listing of JCL statements.
File 3 Allocation and condition code messages.
File 4 Listing produced by the COBOL compiler.
File 5 Listing produced by the linkage editor.
File 6 Output produced by the COBOL program.
You can begin the display at any location within the job by including the
number of the appropriate file, page or line with the ATTACH JOB command.
For example, to begin the display of the job SAMPLE with the tenth line on
the second page of the third file, enter:
ATTACH JOB SAMPLE FILE 3 PAGE 2 LINE 1
30-2 User Guide

30.1.1.1 Using the Job Facility
To attach a job from the Job Facility menu, enter the code A in the function
field and the appropriate job name in the JOB/GRP NAME field. The
following example illustrates this.
Jobs: Attaching Through the Job Facility

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
JOB FACILITY
FUNCTION ===>A
JOB/GRP NAME ===> SAMPLE



30.1.1.2 Using a Job Selection List
To attach a job from a job selection list, enter the code A in the command field
on the far left, next to the job to be attached. The following example illustrates
this.
Jobs: Attaching Through a Job Selection List


JOB NAME ===> SAMPLE FILE ===> PAGE ===> LINE ===>
LINE 1 OF 13 HELD/
----- -------- ------------------- - --- ---- --------- ---------- --------
A_ 284 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
__ 283 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
__ 541 SAMPLE EXECUTING 27:38:11 3 11 XAD1 SYSTEMC $$$$$$@ 1.53
__ 7158 SAMPLE EXECUTING 24:42:53 3 11 XAD1 LOCAL SAMPLE 298.45
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

30.1.1.3 When Can a Job be Viewed?
If your site is:

JES2 The output files of your job can be attached at any time. (If an output
file's attributes are to be modified, you must submit the job with a
special site-defined SYSOUT class.) If your job is:
AWAITING EXECUTION: The JCL and all SYSIN data can be
viewed. (This is the only time this information is displayed.)
EXECUTING: The JCL and that much of the job log and SMB that is
currently written to the spool can be viewed, plus all available files.
(If a file is open and empty, only the end of file message is presented
when that file is displayed.)
AWAITING PRINT: All SYSOUT files that have not been printed or
purged can be viewed.
JES3 If an output file exists, you can examine it at any time. You can only
modify attributes of files routed to a SYSOUT class held for an
external writer (when ETSO is not active) or TSO (when ETSO is
active). (A special site-defined SYSOUT class designates that the
output is to be held.)
30.1.1.4 What is the SYSOUT class?
Your site management will tell you what special SYSOUT class(es) they have
established.
The following example assumes the site has defined T and H as special
SYSOUT classes. As illustrated, you can specify one of the special SYSOUT
classes with the individual DD statements or with the MSGCLASS= operand
30-4 User Guide

on the JOB statement. (DD statements containing SYSOUT=* use the SYSOUT
class specified with MSGCLASS=.) Notice that two of the SYSPRINT files are
directed to class T while the third is directed to class H.
Jobs: Sample Jobstream Using MSGCLASS Parameter:
>

>....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6
==================================== T O P =================
//SAMPLE JOB (account-info),CLASS=X,PRTY=6,MSGCLASS=T
//COB EXEC PGM=IKFCBL

...
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=H
//SYSIN DD
COBOL program inserted here
//LKED EXEC PGM=LINKEDIT
...
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=
//GO EXEC PGM=.LKED.SYSLMOD,...
//SYSOUT DD SYSOUT=A
//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=
//SYSIN DD
test data

30.1.1.5 What Is the Current Status of the Submitted Job?
To determine your job's status, you can:

1. Receive notification at your terminal when your job completes execution.
(If you can use this facility, your site management will tell you what
change needs to be made to your JCL to receive the JES2/JES3 messages.)
2. Use the DISPLAY command. For example, to determine the status of a job
named SAMPLE, you would enter:
DISPLAY SAMPLE
30.1.1.6 Who Can Attach a Job?
Unless restricted by site management, any user can attach any job.
Also, the same job can be attached by multiple users.

■ If you are the first person to attach the job, you have control over the:
– File Disposition: You can use the modifiable STATUS display or the
ALTER command to change the attributes of the files comprising the
job.

– Job Disposition: If you issue the DETACH JOB command, the job is
released. Other users will be notified the next time they press the Enter
key or use a PF key to scroll.
■ If you are not the first person to attach the job, you cannot change the
disposition of the job's files or release the job.
If you attempt to change the disposition of a file, you will receive a
message indicating the user who has control. If the message does not
identify a specific user and you detach and then attach the job, you may
get control of the job.
30-6 User Guide

30.2 Browsing Job Output

This section describes how, while browsing a job, you can:
■ Detach the job.
■ Locate the specific occurrences of a string in a file.
■ Position the display to a specific line or to a line to which you have
assigned a name.
■ Reattach the job after browsing an AWS, data set object or library member.
30.2.1 Detaching Job Output
You can explicitly detach a job by entering the command:

DETACH JOB
With this form of the command, all files from the hold queue are released and
all user-assigned NOTE names are deleted. Each file is disposed of according
to its PRINT/NOPRINT status. (Files marked PRINT are routed to the
appropriate printer; files marked NOPRINT are deleted.)
Other forms of this command include:

■ DETACH JOB HOLD
Releases the job and deletes all files marked NOPRINT. (Those files
marked PRINT are kept on the hold queue and can be viewed again at a
later time. NOTE names associated with these files are retained.)
■ DETACH JOB NOACT
Releases a job without deleting any files. (In addition to retaining the files
on the hold queue for later viewing, all associated NOTE names are
retained.)
If you are the first person to attach the job and you release it, the job is
released. Other users are notified the next time they press the Enter key or use
a PF key to scroll.
ATTACHing an AWS) or if you press the CLEAR key, the attached job is

If you are using the Job Facility, you can detach a job from the Alter Job/File
Attributes panel. Select the function AT from either the Job Facility menu, or
from a job selection list. This will display the Alter Job/File Attribute panel.
Note: See 30.3.1.2, “Using the Job Facility” on page 30-17 for more
information about the Alter Job panel.
From the Alter Job display, you can select the options DETACH (DJ) or
DETACH HOLD (DH). Enter the appropriate code in the OPTION field and
the corresponding job name in the JOB NAME field and press ENTER. The
request will then be issued.
The DETACH commands can also be issued while the Job Facility is in a
suspended state.
30.2.2 Locating Data

This section describes how you can use a variety of commands to scan a job
for all or specific occurrences of a string.
format, you can also locate the hexadecimal representation of a string. See the
section, 30.2.2.3, “Customizing the Operation” on page 30-10 for details.
30.2.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences
You can use the following commands to find and display specific occurrences
of a string within the currently attached file.

FIRST DIVISION
The first occurrence of the string DIVISION in the currently attached file will
be the first line of the resulting display.
To find the last occurrence of the same string, all you need enter is:
LAST
include a string.
30-8 User Guide

By default, the entire file (for example, the full length of every line) is searched
for your string. You can include column and line numbers with the command
to qualify the search for a single operation. For example:
NEXT 1 3 SAMPLE
examines columns 10 through 30 for the next occurrence of SAMPLE. After the
command executes, the defaults are reestablished. To change the column
boundaries for the remainder of your session, use the SET BOUNDS command.
(See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additional information.)
By including a value after the string, you can limit the search to a specific
number of lines. For example, to find the last occurrence of SAMPLE within
the last 200 lines of currently displayed data, you would enter:
LAST SAMPLE 2
30.2.2.2 Including/Excluding Lists Containing a String
string within a given number of lines. For example, to find every occurrence of
the string TEST-DATA in the next 100 lines of the currently displayed data,
you would enter:
INCL TEST-DATA 1
If you do not specify a number, the site-defined number of lines are searched.
(You can use the SET JOBCNT command to establish your own search limit.
See the Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive Environment Command Reference Guide
for details.)
You can also also limit the search for the character string to particular
columns. For example, if you want to display every line that does not contain
the string TEST-DATA in columns 30 through 80, you would enter:
EXCL 3 8 TEST-DATA
EXCL operation resumes scanning for the previously specified string (for
example, TEST-DATA). The direction of the scan depends on the value
assigned to the PF key. (The search string is remembered for subsequent use;
column number limits and line number limits apply only to the command with
which they are specified.)
terminal session.
use:

POINT LINE 15
The resulting display will begin with line 150.
30.2.2.3 Customizing the Operation
Translating the String
Delimiting the Search String
With these commands, delimit the string only when it:
■ Includes a space (like FIRST /TEST DATA/),
■ Is a numeric (like NEXT /519/), or
command (like INCL /JOB/).
Qualifying the Search String
By default, Advantage CA-Roscoe searches for any set of characters and/or

spaces that exactly match the specified string. To limit the search operation,
you can include the qualifier operands. These operands are WORD, PREFIX,
BEGIN, EMBED, END and SUFFIX. For example, assume the attached file
contains the line:
THE, BROTHER and THEIR match the search string.
By including a qualifier, you can designate the type of string match that is to
occur, as in:
THEIR match.
30-10 User Guide

BROTHER match.
CONTEST matches.
matches.

X'string'

characters, as in:
FIRST X'C1'

FIRST X'C1' LITERAL
/X'C1/ or /X'C1' / or /X'C1'/
line.

30.2.3 Positioning the Display

■ Position between the files comprising a job.
■ Position to a specific line within a file.
■ Assign names to specific lines within a file and then later reposition the
display to begin with a named location.
30.2.3.1 Positioning Between Multiple Files
The files comprising your job are presented to you individually. For example,
assume you are currently viewing a file and now want to view the next
sequential file, you can do this by entering:
NEXT FILE
Note: You can display a list of the files in your job by issuing the STATUS
JOB command.
When using these commands to locate a string, once you have specified the
object of your search (like FILE in this case), it is remembered. To return to the
previous file, you only need enter:
PREV
To view the last file, you would enter:

LAST
To then return to the first file, you would enter:

FIRST
You can also use the POINT command to position to a specific file. For
example, to view the fifth file in your job, enter:
POINT FILE 5
If you want to begin the display with the second page of the fifth file, you
would enter:
POINT FILE 5 PAGE 2
Caution:
The number of the currently displayed file and page are shown above the
Scale Line to assist you in keeping track of your location within your job
output.
30-12 User Guide

30.2.3.2 Positioning Within a File
If the contents of the file you are viewing exceeds the number of lines in your
terminal screen, you can position the display within the file by:
■ Using the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV commands with the PAGE or
LINE keyword operand. For example, to position the display to begin with
the last page of the currently displayed file, you would enter:
LAST PAGE
While to position to the first line of that file, you would enter:
FIRST LINE
■ Using the POINT command with the PAGE or LINE operands. For
example, to position the display to begin with line 500 of the currently
attached file, you would enter:
POINT LINE 5
To position to the first or last line, you would enter:
POINT LINE T or
POINT LINE B
30.2.3.3 Positioning to Named Lines
When you are browsing a file, you can assign a one- to six-character name to
the line containing the string; thus enabling you to return to that line later. For
example, to assign the name LOC1 to the first displayed line, you would enter:
NOTE LOC1 or
NOTE LOC1

NOTE +5 LOC2
you would enter:
POINT LOC1


STATUS NOTES
the resulting display shows each assigned name and the file, page and line to
which it is assigned.
DROP LOC2
member, attach another member or return to the menu.
30.2.4 Reattaching Job Output

Using Primary Commands: While you are working with job output, you can
attach an AWS, a data set object or a library member/list, browse that data
and then return to your data. The following example illustrates how you can
ATTACH the active AWS, browse it and then reATTACH the data you have
been viewing using the ATTACH JOB command.
Jobs: Reattaching Job Output
ATTACH_

>
> JOB(INVREPT,5283) SCRL FULL COLS 1 73 F 4 P 1
> <....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+...
============================== T O P ============
ATTACH JOB

> J PENDING
> AWS(PRI.INVREPT) SCRL FULL COLS 7 72
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....
...... ======================== T O P =================
>
> JOB(INVREPT,5283) SCRL FULL COLS 1 73 F 4 P 1
> <....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+...
============================= T O P =============
30-14 User Guide

The center screen in the previous examples shows J PENDING. This note is
provided to remind you that the job may be reattached at any time.
When you reattach the job, the display begins with the first line of the prior
display. To reattach at a different location within the same data, you can:
■ Use the FILE, PAGE, and LINE operands of ATTACH to specify the
desired starting location, as in:
ATTACH JOB FILE 3
ATTACH JOB FILE 3 LINE 12
ATTACH LIB FILE 3 PAGE 2
■ Use the POINT command to begin the display with a specific location, as
in:
POINT JOB FILE 4
POINT JOB FILE 4 LINE 12
POINT JOB FILE 4 PAGE 2
or with the line assigned a NOTE name, as in:
POINT LIB NAME1
■ Use the JOB operand with the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV commands
to begin the display the the line containing a specific string, as in:
FIRST JOB /DD/
■ Use the JOB operand with the INCL or EXCL command to begin the
as in:
INCL JOB /DD/
If you are working with jobs using AJOB and the Job Facility, you can also
attach an AWS, a data set object or a library member/list, browse that data
and then return to job output. AJOB will be suspended while you process
other data. You can issue any of the following commands to return to the job
data and continue AJOB processing:
AJOB PREV Job

ELect MENU FIRST Job
SELect NEXT LAST Job
SELect PREV DETach Job
Next Job
Note: You can enter the commands shown above as listed, or you can use
their abbreviations which are shown in uppercase (for example, SEL
MENU).

30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks

This section describes how you can perform such tasks as:
■ Altering the attributes of one or more files comprising a job
■ Copying all or part of a file into an AWS,
■ Display information about the files comprising the currently attached job
■ Printing the currently displayed file
■ Canceling a job
These tasks can be performed using primary commands, the Job Facility menu,
or a job selection list.
30.3.1 Altering File Attributes
Multiple users can attach the same job. If you are not the first person to attach
the job, you cannot change the attributes of its files.
If you are the first person to attach the job, you can change the attributes of its
files by using:
■ The modifiable STATUS JOB display.
The display produced by STATUS job can be used to control the printing
of a file at a system or 328x-type printer. (See section, 30.3.3, “Displaying
File Attributes” on page 30-22 for additional information.)
■ The ALTER command.
Use ALTER to change the system printer attributes associated with one or
more files, as in:
ALTER JOB PRINT CLASS A
which changes the SYSOUT class for the currently displayed job to A. If
the file is not currently displayed, you must identify it, as in:
ALTER JOB FILE 3 NOPRINT
which prevents the third file in the job from being printed.
To mark all files to be printed, use the ALL operand. (Use of this operand
may be restricted by site management.) For example, to mark all files to
be printed in Class V, enter:
ALTER JOB ALL PRINT CLASS V
Other operands permit you to change the printer ID (DEST), the number of
copies to be printed (COPIES), and the output form number (FORM).
30-16 User Guide

To alter file attributes from the Job Facility menu, enter the code AT in the
FUNCTION field and the appropriate job name in the JOB/GRP NAME field.
The following example shows how to alter a job from the Job Facility menu.
Jobs: Alter Job Through the Job Facility

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
JOB FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> AT



When you select the ALTER JOB function, the Alter Job panel will be
displayed. It will contain the name of the job which was entered on the
primary menu, as shown in the following example.
Jobs: Alter Job Panel Display

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
ALTER JOB/FILE ATTRIBUTES
OPTION ===> (AT - ALTER; DJ - DETACH; DH - DETACH HOLD; X - EXIT)
JOB NAME ===> SAMPLE

FILE NUMBER ===> (NN, ALL)
PRINT STATUS ===> (P, NOP) CLASS ===>
DESTINATION ===> FORM ===>
COPIES ===>
Select one of the four OPTIONs listed on the screen and fill in all appropriate
fields, which consist of the following:
OPTION Requires AT, DJ, DH, or X; X returns to invoking Primary
Menu or Job Selection display; AT issues an ALTER JOB
request; DJ issues the DETACH JOB request; DH issues the

DETACH JOB HOLD request; Any other value redisplays

the Alter Job screen.
JOB NAME The specific job name to be altered.
JOB NUMBER The specific job number to be altered.
FILE NUMBER File to be altered; must be numeric or ALL.
PRINT STATUS Must be P for PRINT or NOP for NOPRINT. Required
only if changing the print status is desired.
DESTINATION The printer destination used in the PRINT JOB function, or
class of jobs displayed by the ATTACH JOB function.
COPIES Must be numeric or left blank. Required only if altering the
number of copies desired.
CLASS Print class to be assigned to a job file.
FORM Form to be assigned to a job file.
To alter file attributes from a job selection list, enter the code AT in the
command field to the left of the appropriate job(s). More than one job may be
selected. The following example shows how to alter a job from a job selection
list.
Jobs: Alter Job Through Selection List

LINE 1 OF 13 HELD/
----- -------- ------------------- - --- ---- --------- ---------- --------
AT 283 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
AT 411 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
__ 4596 SAMPLE EXECUTING 8:4:5 3 11 XAD1 SYSTEMC SAMPLECS 18.79
__ 5477 SAMPLE EXECUTING 5:39:45 3 11 XAD1 LOCAL MUF8 8.45
__ 7667 SAMPLE EXECUTING 3:24:35 3 11 XAD1 LOCAL CICS 36.23
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

When you select the ALTER function, the Alter Job/File Attributes panel is
displayed. It contains the name of the first job which was selected from the
selection list. See the Alter Job panel and its description in “Jobs: Alter Job
Panel Display” on page 30-17.
30-18 User Guide

30.3.2 Copying Job Output
You can use a variety of commands to copy all or part of the currently
attached job output file into the AWS. These commands include:
COPY JOB Copies all or part of a file into an AWS, as in:
COPY JOB T [TO SAMPLE]
which copies all of the currently attached job to the top of the
AWS named SAMPLE. (If an AWS name is not included, the
data are copied to the active AWS.)
COPYS JOB Copies one or more lines containing the specified string from
the attached file into an AWS, as in:
COPY JOB /DD/ 28 53 1
which copies every line containing the string DD between line
2800 and 5300 to (or after) line 100 in the active AWS.
COPYX JOB Copies one or more lines not containing the specified string
from the attached file into an AWS.
XCOPY JOB Copies all or part of the attached file from one split screen
into the active AWS of the screen containing the command.
XCOPYS JOB Copies one or more lines containing the specified string from
the attached file in one split screen into the active AWS of the
screen containing the command.
XCOPYX JOB Copies one or more lines not containing the specified string
from the attached file in one split screen into the active AWS
of the screen containing the command.
For additional information about these commands and how they may be used,
see Chapter 15, “AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS.”
You can use the Job Facility menu to copy all or part of a job into the AWS.
Enter the code C in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate job name in the
JOB/GRP NAME field. The following example shows how to copy a job from
the primary menu.

Jobs: Copy Job Through Job Facility Menu

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
JOB FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> C



When you select the COPY JOB function, the Copy Job panel is displayed. It
contains the name of the job that was entered on the primary menu and its
corresponding job number, as shown in the following example.
Jobs: Copy Job Display

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
COPY JOB
OPTION ===> C (C - COPY; X - EXIT)

FILE NUMBER ===>
FIRST LINE ===> AWS TARGET ===>
LAST LINE ===> AWS NAME ===>
COPIES ===> CONTROL CHARS ===> NO (Y, N)
Select the Copy option and fill in all appropriate fields, as listed below:
OPTION requires C or X; X returns to invoking Primary Menu or

Job Selection display; C indicates to issue a COPY JOB
request; Any other value redisplays the Copy Job
screen.
JOB NAME The specific job name to be copied.
30-20 User Guide

JOB NUMBER The specific job number to be copied.

FILE NUMBER File to be copied; Must be numeric.
FIRST LINE First line of file to be copied. Must be numeric or left
blank.
LAST LINE Last line of file to be copied. Must be numeric or left
blank.
COPIES Number of times to copy file to AWS. Defaults to 1.
AWS TARGET Location in the AWS to which the file is copied. Must
be a line number, T (Top), B (Bottom), or R (Replace).
AWS NAME Name of AWS to receive the copied file. It must be the
name of an existing AWS.
CONTROL CHARS Specifies whether control characters are included when
the file is copied. Value is initially set to that specified
on the Primary Menu.
To copy a job from a job selection list, enter the code C in the command field
to the left of the appropriate job(s). More than one job may be selected. The
following example shows how to copy a job from a selection list.
Jobs: Copy Job Through Selection List

LINE 1 OF 13 HELD/
----- -------- ------------------- - --- ---- --------- ---------- --------
C_ 283 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
C_ 411 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

When you select the COPY function, the Copy Job panel is displayed. It
contains the name of the first job that was selected from the selection list. See
the Copy Job panel and its description in “Jobs: Copy Job Display” on
page 30-20.

30.3.3 Displaying File Attributes
30.3.3.1 Using a Primary Command
You can display information about the currently attached job by entering:
STATUS
If your job is attached but not currently displayed, you can display the same
information by including the JOB keyword, as in:
STATUS JOB
The following example shows the type of information that is displayed using
either method.
Jobs: STATUS JOB Display
>

> STA(SAMPLE,285) SCRL FULL COLS 1 72 JOB PENDING
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+
ROSCOE ALTER/STATUS PROCESSOR
JOB NAME NO FILE LINE PAGE/ LINE FIND LIMIT I/O COUNT
SAMPLE 285 1 1 1 1 2 1
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

A FILE STA C DEST LINES FORM CPY NOTES
1 NOP T R1 5 STD.
2 NOP T R1 36 STD.
3 NOP T R1 14 STD.
4 NOP T R1 263 STD.
5 NOP T R1 18 STD.
6 NOP T R1 6 STD.
===================== END OF OUTPUT FILES ======================

The status information includes:
JOB NAME Name of the job currently attached.
NO Number of the job currently attached.
FILE Number of the file currently pointed to.
LINE Number of the line within the file currently pointed to.
PAGE/ Number of the page currently pointed to.
LINE Number of the line within the page currently pointed to.
30-22 User Guide

FIND LIMIT Current search limit (the number of lines to be searched).

This value is used when an EXCL, FIRST, INCL, LAST,
NEXT or PREV command is entered with no search
limit. It is either the site default or the number you
specified with the SET JOBCNT command.
I/O COUNT Current number of blocks read from the system spool.
(This field is meaningless at JES3 sites.)
A (Modifiable) Use this field to:
1. Redisplay the job beginning with a specific file by
entering, before the appropriate file.
A or S Attach file.
2. Alter the printing status of a file by entering:
P Print file at system or 328x-type printer.
D or N Do not print the file.
FILE Advantage CA-Roscoe assigned file number.
STA Printing status (disposition) of each file. (The disposition
can be modified as noted with A.)
C (Modifiable) Use this field to change the SYSOUT class of a file by
overtyping the character with any class valid for the
designated system or 328x-type printer.
DEST (Modifiable) Use this field to change the printing destination of a file
by overtyping with:
1. A system printer ID.
2. A 328x-type printer destination.
To use the default destination associated with your
terminal, enter an R. (Erase any other characters
appearing in the field.)
If there is a name conflict between a 328x-type printer
and a system printer, the system printer is assumed. To
force the 328x-type printer to be used, precede the name
with an R. For example, if LOCAL is the name of both a
system and 328x-type printer, enter R LOCAL to direct
the file to the 328x-type printer.
LINES Number of print lines in each file or N/A if the number
is unavailable.
FORM (Modifiable) Use this field to indicate the FORMAT or TYPE status of
a file by entering ANS, MCC, DUMP, CHEX or VHEX.
For a file directed to a system printer, this field can be
used to change the output form number.

CPY (Modifiable) Use this field to change the number of copies of a file to
be printed.
NOTE Advantage CA-Roscoe-assigned file description.
If you change one or more of the modifiable fields and then decide that these
changes should not be applied, you can:
1. Overtype the appropriate field(s), or
2. Press PA1 or the CLEAR key to refresh the display.
30.3.3.2 Using the Job Selection List
To display the status of a job from a job selection list, enter the code S in the
command field to the left of the appropriate job(s). More than one job may be
selected. The following example shows how to display status information
from a job selection list.
Jobs: Job Status Through Job Selection List

LINE 1 OF 13 HELD/
----- -------- ------------------- - --- ---- --------- ---------- --------
S_ 283 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
S_ 411 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

When you select the STATUS function, the first job selected is ATTACHed to
the STATUS JOB display. See the STATUS Job display and its description in
“Jobs: STATUS JOB Display” on page 30-22.
30-24 User Guide

30.3.4 Printing Job Output
There are a variety of commands you can use to request that one or more files
be printed at a system or 328x-type printer.
■ Use the PRINT command to direct all or the currently attached file to a
system or 328x-type printer. For example, if you enter:
PRINT JOB
All of the currently attached file is printed at the 328x-type printer
associated with your terminal.
For a detailed description of the PRINT command and how requests can
be monitored and controlled, see Chapter 7, “Printing Data.”
Use the ALTER command to change a file's print status and alter its
system printer destination. When the job is released, the file will be
printed.
■ Use the modifiable STATUS JOB display or a Job List 'A' panel to
designate whether a file is to print at a system or 328x-type printer.
■ Use the CK function of the Job List Facility. The job is terminated, and a
listing of the job output is produced.
You can use the Job Facility menu to print a job. Enter the code P in the
The following example shows how to print a job from the primary menu.

Jobs: Print Job Through Job Facility Menu

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
JOB FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> P



When you select the PRINT JOB function, the Print Job panel is displayed. It
contains the name of the job that was entered on the primary menu, as shown
in the following example.
Jobs: Print Job Display

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
PRINT JOB
OPTION ===> P (P - PRINT; X - EXIT)

FILE NUMBER ===>
DESTINATION ===> TAG ===> COPIES ===>

CLASS ===> OUTPUT TYPE ===> NOTIFY ===> (Y, N
FIRST LINE ===> TOP MARGIN ===> SEPARATOR ===> (Y, N
LAST LINE ===> BOT MARGIN ===> ALIGN ===> (Y, N
FIRST COLUMN ===> PAGE LENGTH ===> SEQ NUMS ===> (Y, N
LAST COLUMN ===> PAGE WIDTH ===>

30-26 User Guide

Select the PRINT option and fill in all appropriate fields, which consist of the
following:
OPTION requires P or X; X returns to invoking Primary Menu or
Job Selection display; P indicates to issue a PRINT JOB
request; Any other value redisplays the Print Job
screen.
JOB NAME The specific job name to be printed.
JOB NUMBER The specific job number name to be printed.
FILE NUMBER File to be printed; Must be numeric.
DESTINATION The printer destination used to print the job file.
CLASS Print class to be assigned to the job file.
FIRST LINE First line of file to be printed. Must be numeric or left
blank.
LAST LINE Last line of file to be printed. Must be numeric or left
blank.
FIRST COLUMN First column of file to be printed. Must be numeric or
left blank.
LAST COLUMN Last column of file to be printed. Must be numeric or
left blank.
TAG Name to be assigned to print request. Defaults to
user's Advantage CA-Roscoe ID.
OUTPUT TYPE Specification of print format. Must be DEF, ANS, or
MCC, or left blank (defaults to DEF).
TOP MARGIN Number of blank lines to be skipped from the top of
the page before printing begins. Must be numeric or
left blank. (Applicable only when OUTPUT TYPE is
specified DEF).
BOTTOM MARGIN Number of blank lines to be skipped at bottom of page.
Must be numeric or left blank. (Applicable only when
OUTPUT TYPE is specified DEF).
PAGE LENGTH Length of paper in number of print lines. Must be
numeric or left blank. (Applicable only when OUTPUT
TYPE is specified DEF).
PAGE WIDTH Width of paper in printing columns. Must be numeric
or left blank.
COPIES Number of times to print file. Defaults to 1.
NOTIFY Specifies whether a notification message is displayed
when the request is printed. Must be YES, NO, or left
blank.

SEPARATOR Specifies whether separator pages are included. Must

be YES, NO, or left blank.
ALIGN Specifies whether a physical page alignment is forced.
Must be YES, NO, or left blank.
SEQ NUMS Specifies whether sequence numbers are included when
the data are printed. Must be YES, NO, or left blank.
To print a job from a job selection list, enter the code P in the command field
to the left of the appropriate job(s). More than one job may be selected. The
following example shows how to print a job from a job selection list.
Jobs: Print Job Through Selection List

LINE 1 OF 13 HELD/
----- -------- ------------------- - --- ---- --------- ---------- --------
P_ 283 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
P_ 411 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

When you select the PRINT function, the Print Job panel is displayed. Fill in
the appropriate fields there to print the job. See the Print Job display and its
description in “Jobs: Print Job Display” on page 30-26.
30.3.5 Canceling a Job
30-28 User Guide

The PURGE monitor command can be used to cancel a job from the system
queue.
Note: Sites have the option of restricting the use of this command; check with
your site system programmer for more information about using
PURGE.
For example, to cancel the job named SAMPLE, enter:
PURGE SAMPLE
If there are multiple jobs with the same name, you must specify the number of
the job, as in:
PURGE SAMPLE 1234
You can use the Job Facility menu to cancel a job. Enter the code CN in the
Check the value displayed in the CONFIRM CANCEL field to see whether a
confirmation panel will be presented. The default, YES, presents the Cancel Job
Confirmation panel from which you can confirm the job information. If you
do not want to confirm job cancellations, overtype this value with NO. The
following example illustrates how to cancel a job from the Job Facility menu.
Jobs: Cancel Job Through Job Facility Menu

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
JOB FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> CN



When you select the CANCEL JOB function, and the CONFIRM CANCEL
value is YES, the Cancel Job Confirmation panel is displayed:

Jobs: Confirm Job Cancel

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+...
CANCEL JOB CONFIRMATION
CONFIRM CANCEL ===> N (Y - YES, N - NO)
JOB INFORMATION:
1234 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 15 ANY LOCAL
From this screen, select Y (YES) to cancel the job listed under JOB
INFORMATION. If you do not want to cancel the job, select N (NO) and you
will be returned to the job menu.
To cancel a job from a job selection list, enter the code CN in the command
field to the left of the appropriate job(s). More than one job may be selected.
The following example shows how to cancel a job from a job selection list.
Jobs: Cancel Job Through Selection List

LINE 1 OF 13 HELD/
----- -------- ------------------- - --- ---- --------- ---------- --------
CN 283 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
CN 411 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) 1 ANY LOCAL
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

When you select the CANCEL function, the Cancel Job Confirmation panel is
displayed. Select YES to cancel the job. See the confirmation display and its
description in “Jobs: Confirm Job Cancel.”
30-30 User Guide

Part V. The Library System (Browsing and Managing
Local Data)
Chapter 31. Library: Introducing the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . 31-1

31.1 Notes About the Library System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-2
31.2 Attaching the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-3
31.3 Using Library Facility Function Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-6
31.4 Using the Library Facility Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-7
Chapter 32. Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal . . . . . 32-1

32.1 Attaching a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-2
32.1.2 Using the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-4
32.1.3 Format of Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-5
32.1.4 Reordering the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-7
32.2 Attaching a Member Directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-9
32.2.2 Using the Library Facility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-9
32.2.4 Format of Member Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-10
Chapter 33. Library: Browsing Attached Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-1

33.1 Detaching the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-2
33.2 Locating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-3
33.2.2 Including/Excluding Lists Containing a String . . . . . . . . . . 33-4
33.3.2 Positioning to Named Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-8
33.4 Reattaching the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-10
Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks . . . . . 34-1

34.1 Altering Member Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-2
34.2 Copying a Member/Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-5
34.3 Delete a Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-10
34.3.4 Delete Confirmation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-11
34.4 Inquiring About a Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-13
34.5 Printing a Library Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-15
34.6 Renaming Library Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-20
User Guide
Chapter 31. Library: Introducing the Library Facility
The Advantage CA-Roscoe library system provides a permanent storage area

for data that is in an AWS. The data are stored in a library member that you
create through the SAVE command. This chapter describes how you can:
■ Attach a library member or Selection List of members.
■ Browse through the attached member or Selection List. While browsing,
you can locate and note the occurrences of specific character strings. You
can also browse other types of attached data (like an AWS) and then
return to the data you were browsing.
■ Perform a variety of library management functions which include:
– Copying all or part of a library member or Selection List into an AWS.
– Printing all or part of a library member or Selection List at a system or
328x-type printer.
– Renaming or deleting a library member.
– Changing library member attributes.
You can perform all of these operations using the Library Facility or primary
commands. Many of these operations can also be performed using the
Selection List provided through the Library Facility.
Note: See Chapter 23, “AWS: Saving and Updating a Library Member” for
Chapter 31. Library: Introducing the Library Facility 31-1

31.1 Notes About the Library System
31.1 Notes About the Library System

■ When you attach a library member, the contents of that member is not
modifiable. To modify it, you must first bring a copy of it into an AWS.
When you have finished modifying the copy in that AWS, you must
explicitly update the member to alter its contents.
■ You need not attach a member to:
– Submit the contents of one or more members to the operating system
for execution.
– Write the content of one or more members to a data set.
– Copy one or more members into an AWS.
– Print one or more members.
■ When you create a library member, your Advantage CA-Roscoe prefix is
associated with it. It is this prefix that guarantees your library member
name is unique. For example, if you and another user each create a
member named TESTJCL, the names are unique because of the addition of
your unique prefixes.
You do not need to specify your prefix when working with your library
members. When working with members belonging to another user, you
must include that person's prefix, as in:
ATTACH TESTJCL : attach your own member
ATTACH ABC.TESTJCL : attach another user's member
■ Advantage CA-Roscoe provides a multi-level security system that allows:
– you to assign an access attribute to your members. For example, if you
assign the access attribute EXECONLY to a member containing an RPF
program, other users can execute your member but cannot access it in
any other way.
– site management to assign you to a security group. These security
groups define the type of access people have to members that you
have defined as shareable.
This system ensures the integrity of your library members from deletion or
modification by unauthorized users.
31-2 User Guide

31.2 Attaching the Library Facility

You can attach the Library Facility menu by issuing the command:
ATTACH LIB or
LIBRARY
You can include a function code and library name with this command.
If you include a function code and that function has a panel associated with it,
you can bypass the Library Facility menu and display the function panel. For
example, if you enter:
LIBRARY C COBTEST
the Copy Function Panel is displayed with COBTEST in the MEMBER field.
If you are currently using the Library Facility, you can redisplay the menu by
entering:
SELECT MENU
The variable information shown on the menu is determined by the format of

the menu. To change the format, you can use the command:
SELECT ALT [v]
If you omit the number v, you proceed sequentially through the different
formats. If you specify a number, it can be:
1 To show the last specific member name.
2 To show the last executed RPF program name.
3 To show the last generic member name.
4 To show the last prefix or key.
Library: Library Facility Menu

>

> LIB() SCRL FULL COLS 1 79
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7
LIBRARY FACILITY
FUNCTION ==>
PREFIX ==> LIB ALTER ===> EXPLICIT

MEMBER ==>
SIGNON KEY ==>
FORMAL KEY ==>
SEARCH ==> (SHR,RES,EXE,NOD)
CONFIRM DELETE ==>
A - ATTACH LIBRARY D - DELETE MEMBERS P - PRINT MEMBER

C - COPY MEMBERS I - INFO MEMBERS R - RENAME MEMBERS
X - TERMINATE LIB

FUNCTION Enter the appropriate code to perform the desired
action. The codes and their related actions are shown at
the bottom of the menu.
PREFIX Enter the two- or three-character prefix associated with
the individual whose members are to be involved in the
operation.
MEMBER Enter the one- to eight-character name of the member to
be involved in the operation. (This name may be
composed of one or more wildcard characters.)
SIGNON KEY Enter the sign-on key associated with the individual
whose members are to be involved in the operation.
FORMAL KEY Protected field containing the formal key associated
with the individual identified through the PREFIX or
SIGNON KEY field.
SEARCH Enter one or more of the following codes to qualify the
search operation. If omitted, all members are included
in the operation. The codes are:
SHR Members with a shared access attribute.
RES Members with a restricted access attribute.
EXE Members with an execute-only access attribute.
NOD Members that have no description.
CONFIRM DELETE Designate whether delete operations are to be
confirmed prior to execution by specifying:
31-4 User Guide

YES Operation should be confirmed. (Can be

abbreviated as Y.)
NO Operation should not be confirmed. (Can be
abbreviated as N.)
The first time you use the Library Facility, this field is
set to YES. The setting in effect when you sign-off is
remembered and reinstated when you sign back on.
LIB ALTER Designate whether altering the DESCRIPTION,
ATtRibute, or sequence number(SEQNO) fields of the
Library Selection List is to be done explicitly. Specify:
EXPLICIT Changes are made on the Selection List,
using the AT line command and
overtyping the data to be altered.
IMPLICIT Changes are made on the Selection List by
directly overtyping the data to be altered.

31.3 Using Library Facility Function Panels
31.3 Using Library Facility Function Panels

You can use the Library Facility to perform a variety of functions. Each
function is identified by a specific code. The codes can be specified with the
LIBRARY command or through the Library Facility menu.

A Attach a member or Selection Performed
List.
C Copy a member or Selection Panel displayed
List.
D Delete a member. Panel displayed
I Inquire about a member. Performed
P Print a member or Selection List. Panel displayed
R Rename a member. Panel displayed
X Terminate the Library Facility. Performed
The field ACTION in indicates whether the function is performed directly or

requires additional information. For example, the information you provide
through the menu is sufficient to attach a member (function code A) but is
insufficient to rename a member (function code R).
When additional information is needed, a function-related panel is displayed.

When such a panel is displayed, you can move from it to another panel or to
the menu by entering in the first panel field:
=[code.code]
■ If you enter only the equal sign (=), you are returned to the menu.
■ If you specify =X, the Data Set Facility is terminated.
■ If you specify any other code (like =C), the appropriate function-related
panel is displayed.
If the function-related panel is displayed while the screens are split, you can
use PF keys to scroll the panel.
All of the Library Facility functions are described in detail in Chapter 34,
“Library: Performing Library Management Tasks.”
31-6 User Guide

31.4 Using the Library Facility Selection List

You can use the Library Facility or a primary command to create and attach:
■ A list of all or selected members that you own.
■ A list of all or selected members belonging to another user.
The information is displayed as a Selection List in the Execution Area of the

screen. This allows you to issue primary commands in the Command Area
while working with the Selection List.
The first line of a Selection List contains a top marker (==TOP==). If the
bottom marker (==BOTTOM==) is not displayed, the number of members in
the list exceeds the screen size. You can use PF keys to scroll within the List.
The information displayed in the Selection List is separated into specific fields.
Some fields contain Library information and remain constant as you scroll
through the Selection List (for example, the SIGNON KEY and MEM fields.)
There are also fields which contain member-specific information. By default,
these fields are displayed alphabetically by member name, or by the order
designated by the SET LIB ORDER command.
To designate a specific Selection List order, enter the field and order criteria, as
in:
SET LIB ORDER LINES ASC
See the Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive Environment Command Reference Guide

for more information about using the SET LIB ORDER command.
The amount of information available with each Selection List exceeds the
alternate display formats. To view the different formats sequentially, enter the
command:
SELECT ALT
To view a specific format, enter the number of that format with the command,
as in:
SELECT ALT 2
See Chapter 32, “Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal,” for
information about displaying each type of Selection List. The information
includes a description of the fields comprising each list. The alternate display
numbers shown with the description are for 80-column screens. Additional
formats (containing variations of the information) are available at terminals
supporting wider screen sizes.

31.4.1 Entering Function Codes

You can use the Selection List to perform a variety of functions. Each function
is identified by a specific code. You can enter one or more codes per Selection
List. As illustrated in the following figure the function codes are entered in the
shaded area shown at the left of the display.
If you specify the same function code multiple times, they are processed
sequentially.
If you specify different function codes, the codes are processed sequentially
within the following function hierarchy:
X Terminate Library Facility
D Delete member
R Rename member
AT Alter member attributes/description
P Print a member
I Inquire about member
C Copy a member
A Attach member
| E Edit a member
| SU Submit a member
The following example illustrates how you can enter multiple functions codes
on a Selection List. You can further qualify any function by specifying
information in the STATUS field (the second shaded area). (See Chapter 34,
“Library: Performing Library Management Tasks” for information about each
of the functions you can perform through a Selection List.)
Library: Selection List Function Hierarchy Example
>

> LIB() SCRL FULL COLS 1 72 LINE 1
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
SIGNON KEY MEM EXCL BLOCKS M-LINES LINES
SMITH 82 223 2 1171
MEMBER STATUS DESCRIPTION LINES ATR SEQNO
XYZ.ABLE 1 SHR N
A XYZ.BEGINJCL JCL: Link-Edit 1
I XYZ.COBTEST1 Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR
XYZ.COBTEST2 43 SHR
D XYZ.JUNK 87 SHR N
R XYZ.MYRPF DOJCL RPF: Builds JCL 519
31-8 User Guide

Using the example in “Library: Selection List Function Hierarchy Example” on

page 31-8, the functions are processed in the following order:
1. The member JUNK will be deleted. (A delete confirmation panel may be
displayed.)
2. The member MYRPF will then be renamed using the name specified in the
STATUS field (for example, DOJCL).
3. An information panel for COBTEST1 is then presented and any remaining
unexecuted functions are placed in a pending state. After viewing the
information, you can:
■ Resume function code execution by entering the command SELECT
NEXT. The next function (for example, attach BEGINJCL) will be
performed.
■ Terminate execution by entering SELECT PREV (to return to the
Selection List) or SELECT MENU (to return to the Library Facility
menu). In either case, any unexecuted functions are ignored.
4. Finally, the member BEGINJCL is displayed.
Notes:
■ All function codes are evaluated before any one is executed. If an invalid
or incomplete function is specified, the functions are placed in a pending
state and a message is displayed. To resume execution, you must either:
1. Correct the invalid/incomplete function, or
2. Remove it by typing a space over.
■ If multiple function codes are specified and one of them is X, all of the
other function codes are ignored. The Library Facility is immediately
terminated.
31.4.2 Refreshing a Selection List

After a function is performed, the STATUS field contains the appropriate
completion message. The following example illustrates how the Selection List
might appear after performing the actions noted in the previous figure.
Library: Selection List Before REFRESHing

>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
SMITH 82 223 2 1171
XYZ.ABLE 1 SHR NOSEQ

XYZ.BEGINJCL ATTACH JCL: Link-Edit 1 SHR 73,8
XYZ.COBTEST1 INFO Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR 1,6
XYZ.COBTEST2 43 SHR 1,6
XYZ.JUNK DELETE 87 SHR NOSEQ
XYZ.MYRPF RENAME RPF: Build JCL 519 SHR NOSEQ

The more functions you perform through the same Selection List, the more
completion messages will be displayed. At any point, you can redisplay the
Selection List with the most current information (for example, the deleted
members removed and renamed members shown with their new names). To
do this, enter the command:
REFRESH
31-10 User Guide

Chapter 32. Library: Attaching Library Data at the
Terminal
This chapter describes how you can display the following:

■ Library Member Selection List
■ Library member directly
Chapter 32. Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal 32-1

32.1 Attaching a Selection List

You can use a primary command or the Library Facility menu to display a
Selection List containing information about all or selected members that either
belong to you or to another Advantage CA-Roscoe user.

You can use the ATTACH LIB command to produce a Selection List containing
information about:
■ All Members:
To display a list of all of your own members, enter:
ATTACH LIB +
To display a list of all members associated with another individual, enter:
ATTACH [LIB] KEY SMITH
where SMITH is the sign-on key assigned to the individual whose
members are to be listed, or
ATTACH [LIB] XYZ.
where XYZ is the prefix assigned to the individual whose members are to
be listed. (When specifying a prefix, you must include the terminating
period.)
■ Selected Members:
You can use wildcard characters to produce a qualified Selection List
containing specific information about members that belong to you or
another user. For example, to display a Selection List containing only those
names that include the characters JCL, you would enter:
ATTACH LIB JCL or ATTACH LIB XYZ.JCL
or
ATTACH LIB XYZ.JCL
The following table shows the wildcard characters that you can specify
through the primary command or the Library Facility menu.
Code Meaning and Examoles

Example: Matches:
RO? ROE
ROS
ROW
32-2 User Guide

Code Meaning and Examoles

*JCL* AJCL
JCL
JCLEND
XJCLX
RO+ RO
ROE
ROSCOE
These wildcards can be used in the same search string, as in:

ATTACH [LIB] S?AJCL+
where the member names STARTJCL1 would match. Note that consecutive
asterisks (**) or an asterisk and plus sign (*+) are invalid.
You can further qualify the list by using:
– Access attributes (like SHARED, EXECONLY and RESTRICTED) to
limit the Selection List to members assigned specific access attributes.
For example, to limit the List to only those members with an
EXECONLY access attribute, enter:
ATTACH LIB + EXECONLY or
ATTACH [LIB] XYZ. EXECONLY
(Site management can limit the amount of information you receive
about another user's members.)
– NODESC to limit the display to those members that have no
descriptions, as in:
ATTACH LIB + NODESC or
ATTACH [LIB] XYZ. NODESC
– The ORDER operand to sort the display by specific criterion. You can
sort a Library Selection List by fields or parts of fields (prefixes,
suffixes, or parts of dates) in ascending or descending order. For
example, to attach a Library Selection List and order it by member
name suffixes in descending order, and by their attributes, enter:
ATTACH LIB + ORDERED BY MEMBER COL 7 9 DESCENDING AND ATR or
ATTACH [LIB] XYZ. ORDERED BY MEM COL 7 9 DES AND ATR
Finally, you can combine several qualifiers, as in:
ATTACH LIB JCL SHARED EXECONLY NODESC or
ATTACH [LIB] XYZ.JCL SHARED EXECONLY NODESC
where only these members whose names contain the characters JCL are
initially selected. This group is then further qualified so that only those

matching members with a shared or execute-only access attribute or no

description are included in the resulting Selection List.
Using the LIB Operand:
As illustrated in the preceding examples, LIB is required only when the
selection criteria begins with a wildcard character.
32.1.2 Using the Library Facility

To attach a Selection List containing all members that you or another user
own, type the code A in the FUNCTION field. Then, enter the appropriate
prefix or sign-on key, as illustrated in below.
Library: Attaching a Selection List (All Members)
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
LIBRARY FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> A
PREFIX ===> XYZ

MEMBER ===>
SIGNON KEY ===>
To create a qualified Selection List, type an A in the FUNCTION field and the
appropriate prefix in the PREFIX field. Then use wildcard characters with the
name typed in the MEMBER field.
As illustrated in the following example, you can use the SEARCH field to
further limit the members that are to be included in the List.
Library: Attaching a Qualified Selection List
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
LIBRARY FACILITY
FUNCTION ==> A
PREFIX ==> XYZ

MEMBER ==> RO+
SIGNON KEY ==>
FORMAL KEY ==>
SEARCH ==> SHR (SHR,RES,EXE,NOD)
32-4 User Guide

32.1.3 Format of Selection List

The following example illustrates the format of the Library Facility Selection
List.
Library: Selection List Description
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
SMITH 82 223 2 1171
XYZ.ABLE 1 SHR NO
XYZ.BEGINJCL JCL: Link-Edit 1 SHR 7
XYZ.COBTEST1 Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR
XYZ.COBTEST2 43 SHR
XYZ.JUNK 87 SHR NO
XYZ.MYRPF RPF: Builds JCL 519 SHR NO

function:
A Attach a member
AT Alter attributes
C Copy a member
D Delete a member
I Display member information
P Print a member
R Rename a member
X Terminate Library Facility
Type the appropriate code(s) in the first shaded area shown in the previous
figure.
With Alter, Copy, Print and Rename, you must provide additional information
in the STATUS field. (See the appropriate sections for details.) After
performing a function, the STATUS field will indicate the result of the
operation.
Screens that do not contain STATUS fields are not modifiable.

entering:
SELECT ALT [v]
number, you proceed sequentially through all of the different displays.
constant as you scroll through the Selection List and show:
SIGNON KEY Sign-on key associated with the individual whose members
are included in the display.
MATCH Optional field included only when selection criteria was used
to produce the List.
MEM Number of library members included in the Selection List.
EXCL Number of library members that site management excluded
from the display.
BLOCKS Number of library blocks used by the members included in
the List.
M-LINES Maximum number of lines the owner of these members may
save in the library or N/A if the owner has no limit.
LINES Number of lines contained within all of the members included
in the display.
The remaining fields identify the individual members comprising the List, and
include the information shown in the following table.
32-6 User Guide

Field Name Description Alt Attrib.

MEMBER Name of the member matching the All Asc
selection criteria
DESCRIPTION Description of the member, if ALL Asc
available
LINES Number of lines the member 1 Des
contains
ATR Member's access attribute 1 Asc
SEQNO Member's sequence number 1 Asc
attribute
CREATED Date the member was created 1 Des
UPDATED Date the last member was updated 2/3 Des
ACCESS Date the member was last accessed 3 Des
If your terminal screen displays more than 80 characters, you can issue
SELECT ALT 4 to view all of the preceding information. At all terminals, you
can place all of this information into an AWS by using the FULL operand of
the COPY (LIB) command.
An additional field is provided when you view or copy all of the library
information. The field is named CRT and indicates how the member was
created. It contains:
■ Blanks, if the member was created online.
■ BCH, if the member was created by a batch program.
■ MON, if the member was created by a Monitor command.
■ POS, if the member was created by an obsolete post-processor.
32.1.4 Reordering the Display

The fields listed in the previous table can be used to qualify the Library
Selection List display. Each field has a default sorting attribute (ascending or
descending). By default, a Selection List is sorted by member names, in
ascending order. Use the ORDER command to change the display and order it
by any one (or more) of the fields. For example, to reorder a Selection List by
the number of lines in members, in descending order (default), enter:
ORDER LIB LINES
The 'LIB' operand is required if the Library Facility is not active. For example,
to sort a displayed Selection List by year of member creation date, in
ascending order, enter:
ORDER CREATED COL 7 8 ASC

Notice that the CREATED field is on the second alternate screen. The list will
be reordered even if the CREATED field is not displayed. Use the SELECT
ALT command to display the CREATED field.
You can also reorder more than one field at a time. For example, to reorder a
Selection List by sequence attributes and ascending line count, enter:
ORDER LIB SEQNO LINES ASC
Sorting is done in order of the operands specified. So, in the last example, the
Selection List is reordered by sequence attributes, and then by line counts.
Note: A maximum of six order criteria are permitted.
You can set the default order of a Library Selection List to a specific field.
Every time you attach a Library Selection List, it will be sorted by that
criterion. Use the SET LIB ORDER command, as in:
SET LIB ORDER LINES
Any subsequent order commands will override this setting. To reset the
Library Selection List display to the site default, specify:
SET LIB ORDER DEFAULT
32-8 User Guide

32.2 Attaching a Member Directly

You can use the ATTACH primary command, the Library Facility menu or the
Selection List to view a library member.

You can attach a library member by entering the ATTACH command and the
appropriate library member name, as in:
ATTACH TESTJCL
To browse a member that belongs to another user, you must include that
user's prefix. For example, to attach the member COBPROG that belongs to the
individual assigned the prefix ABC, you would enter:
ATTACH ABC.COBPROG
Operands of this command allow you to control the display. For example, you
can:
■ Begin the display with a specific line, as in:
ATTACH TESTJCL LINE 12
■ Begin the display with the first line containing a specific string, as in:
ATTACH TESTJCL /SYSOUT=/
Additional operands allow you to qualify the string. For example, to begin the
display with the first line containing a word that begins with SYS, you would
enter:
ATTACH TESTJCL /SYS/ PREFIX
All of these operands can be used together, as in:

ATTACH TESTJCL /SYS/ PREFIX LINE 12
which will start at line 1200 of the member TESTJCL to search for the first
word beginning with the prefix SYS.
32.2.2 Using the Library Facility Menu

As illustrated in the following example, to attach a member from the Library
Facility menu, type an A in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate name in
the MEMBER field. (If the member belongs to another individual, that
person's prefix must be specified in the PREFIX field.)

>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
LIBRARY FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> A
PREFIX ===> ABC

MEMBER ===> COBPROG
SIGNON KEY ===>

To attach a member through a Selection List, specify the A (for Attach)
function code to the left of the member name, as illustrated below.
Library: Attaching a Member Through a Selection List
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
SMITH 352 971 2 1171

XYZ.BEGINJCL JCL: Link-Edit 1 SHR 73,8
A XYZ.COBTEST1 Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR 1,6
32.2.4 Format of Member Display

The following example illustrates the display format used when a library
member is attached.

>
> LIB(XYZ.COBTEST1) SCRL FULL COLS 1 73 LINE 1
> <....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
============================= T O P ================
2 PROGRAM-ID. COBTEST.
The System Information Line begins with LIB and is followed by the prefixed
name of the currently attached library member.
32-10 User Guide

The attached data itself is delimited by a top (==TOP==) and bottom

commands and/or the PF keys to which scrolling functions are assigned.


When you are viewing either attached data or a Selection List, you can use the
SELECT command to reposition the display between various levels of the
Library Facility. You can enter:
SELECT MENU To display the Library Facility menu.
SELECT DIR To display the Library Selection List.
SELECT mem To display a specific library member. The name must have
appeared in a previously displayed Library Selection List.
SELECT PREV To display the previous level in the processing hierarchy.
SELECT NEXT To perform the next function specified on the Selection
List. For example, suppose you indicated on the Selection
List that you wanted to attach three members. If you are
now browsing one of those members, you can see the next
one by entering SELECT NEXT.
When you are browsing a Selection List, you can use the SELECT command to
change the display by entering:
SELECT ALT To position to the next sequential alternate display format. To
position to a specific alternate format, specify a number with
the command, as in:
SELECT ALT 3
32-12 User Guide

Chapter 33. Library: Browsing Attached Data
This chapter describes how, while browsing the contents of a library member
or Selection List, you can:
■ Detach the Library Facility
■ Locate the specific occurrences of a string within the attached member or
Selection List
■ Position the display to a specific line, or to a line to which you have
assigned a name
■ Reattach the library member or Selection List after browsing an AWS, a
data set object or job output file
Chapter 33. Library: Browsing Attached Data 33-1

33.1 Detaching the Library Facility
33.1 Detaching the Library Facility

You can explicitly detach the Library Facility by entering the command:
DETACH LIB
The Library Facility is also detached by entering the function code X on the
menu, any function panel or the Selection List. (If you enter X on the Selection
List with other function codes, those functions will be ignored.)
ATTACHing another library member implicitly detaches the currently attached

member. If you have assigned NOTE names to the member, those names are
deleted when the member is detached.
ATTACHing an AWS) or if you press the CLEAR key, the Library Facility is
33-2 User Guide

33.2 Locating Data
33.2 Locating Data

This section describes how you can use a variety of commands to scan a
member or Selection List for all or specific occurrences of a string.
format, you can also locate the hexadecimal representation of a string. See
33.2.3, “Customizing the Operation” on page 33-5 for details.
33.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences

When you initially attach a library member, you can cause the display to begin
with the first line containing a specific string by including that string with the
command, as in:
ATTACH COBTEST1 /PROCEDURE/
In this example, the first line containing the string PROCEDURE in the
member COBTEST1 will be the first displayed line.
Once attached, you can use the following commands to find and display
specific occurrences of a string.

FIRST DIVISION
The first occurrence of the string DIVISION in the currently attached member
is the first line of the resulting display.
To find the last occurrence of the same string, all you need to enter is:
LAST
include a string.
By default, the entire member (for example, the full length of every line) is
searched for your string. You can include column and line numbers with the
command to qualify the search for a single operation. For example:
NEXT 1 3 SAMPLE
examines columns 10 through 30 for the next occurrence of SAMPLE.

33.2 Locating Data
After the command executes, the defaults are reestablished. To change the
column boundaries for the remainder of your session, use the SET BOUNDS
command. (See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additional
information.)
By including a value after the string, you can limit the search to a specific
number of lines. For example, to find the last occurrence of SAMPLE within
the last 200 lines of currently displayed data, you would enter:
LAST SAMPLE 2
33.2.2 Including/Excluding Lists Containing a String

character string within a given number of lines. For example, to find every
occurrence of the string TEST-DATA in the next 100 lines of the currently
displayed data, you would enter:
INCL TEST-DATA 1
If you do not specify a number, every line is searched. You can also limit the
search for the character string to particular columns.
terminal session.
For example, if you want to display every line that does not contain the string
TEST-DATA in columns 30 through 80, you would enter:
EXCL 3 8 TEST-DATA
EXCL operation will resume scanning for the previously specified string (like
TEST-DATA).
The direction of the scan depends on the value assigned to the PF key. (The
search string is remembered for subsequent use; column number limits and
line number limits apply only to the command with which they are specified.)
use:
POINT LINE 15
The resulting display begins with line 150.
33-4 User Guide

33.2 Locating Data
Note: When you create an INCL/EXCL display from a Selection List, you can
enter any function code(s). If a function results in another display (that
is, attaching an entry in the list), the INCL/EXCL operation is
terminated.
33.2.3 Customizing the Operation

This section describes how you can qualify a search operation.
33.2.3.1 Translating the Search String
33.2.3.2 Delimiting the Search String
With these commands, you only need to delimit the string when it:
■ Includes a space (like FIRST /TEST DATA/),
■ Is a numeric (like NEXT /519/), or
command (like INCL /JOB/).
33.2.3.3 Qualifying the Search String
By default, Advantage CA-Roscoe searches for any set of characters or spaces

that exactly match the specified string. To limit the search operation, you can
include the qualifier operands. These operands are WORD, PREFIX, BEGIN,
EMBED, END and SUFFIX
For example, assume the attached member contains the line:

THE, BROTHER and THEIR match the search string. By including a qualifier,
you can designate the type of string match that is to occur, as in:
THEIR match.
BROTHER match.

33.2 Locating Data

CONTEST matches.
matches.

X'string'

characters, as in:
FIRST X'C1'

FIRST X'C1' LITERAL
■ Specify the string so that it does not conform to hex notation. This method
can be used with both primary and line commands. For example, to find
the character string X'C1' you might specify:
/X'C1/
or
/X'C1' /
line.
33-6 User Guide

33.2 Locating Data


■ Position to a specific line within a library member.
■ Assign names to specific lines within a library member and then later
reposition the display to begin with a named location.

If the contents of the member or Selection List you are viewing exceeds the
number of lines in your terminal screen, you can position the display by:
■ Using the POINT command. For example to position the display to being
with line 500 of the currently attached data, you would enter:
POINT LINE 5
POINT LINE T or POINT LINE B
When browsing the Selection List, entering an * (asterisk) in the first

unprotected field for a specific entry repositions the display to begin with that
entry.
33.3.2 Positioning to Named Lines

When you are browsing a member, you can assign a one- to six-character
name to the line containing the string; thus enabling you to return to that line
later. For example, to assign the name LOC1 to the first displayed line, you
would enter:
NOTE LOC1 or NOTE LOC1
or
NOTE LOC1

NOTE +5 LOC2
you would enter:
POINT LOC1
33-8 User Guide


STATUS NOTES
a list of all the names that you have assigned is displayed.
DROP LOC2
member, attach another member or return to the menu.

33.4 Reattaching the Library Facility

While you are working with a member or Selection List, you can attach an
AWS, data set object or a job, browse that data and then return to your data.
The following example illustrates how you can ATTACH the active AWS,
browse it and then reATTACH the data you have been viewing:
ATTACH_

>
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....
============================== T O P ============
ATTACH LIB

> L PENDING
> AWS(PRI.INVREPT) SCRL FULL COLS 7 72
> ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....
...... ======================== T O P =================
>

> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....
============================= T O P =============
The center screen above shows L PENDING. This note is provided to remind
you that the Library Facility may be reattached at any time.
When you reattach the Library Facility, the display begins with the first line of
the prior display. To reattach at a different location within the same data, you
can:
■ Use the LINE operand of ATTACH to specify the desired line number, as
in:
ATTACH LIB LINE 5
■ Use the POINT command to begin the display with the line assigned a
NOTE name, as in:
POINT LIB NAME1
33-10 User Guide

■ Use the LIB operand with the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV commands
to begin the display the line containing a specific string, as in:
FIRST LIB /DD/
■ Use the LIB operand with the INCL or EXCL command to begin the
as in:
INCL LIB /DD/

33-12 User Guide
Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library
Management Tasks
This chapter describes how you can perform any of the following functions
during your terminal session:
■ Alter a member's access attribute, sequence number attribute or
description.
■ Copy all or part of the attached member or Selection List.
■ Delete one or more library members.
■ Inquire about a member.
■ Print all or part of the attached member or Selection List.
■ Rename one or more members.
These functions can be performed using primary commands, the Library

Facility menu or the appropriate Selection List.
You cannot modify the contents of a library member. To change a member's

contents, you must place a copy of it in an AWS. When you have finished
making your changes, you must use the UPDATE command to update the
original member contents with the contents of the active AWS. For example, to
renumber the contents of the member SAMPLE, you might enter:
FETCH SAMPLE
RENUMBER
UPDATE
Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks 34-1

34.1 Altering Member Attributes

You can change the attributes and description of a library member through a
primary command, the INFO panel or the Selection List.

You can use the ALTER command to change the description, sequence number
attribute and/or access attribute of a library member, as in:
ALTER COBTEST2 /Test COBOL Prog./ NOSEQ
ALTER does not affect any attributes that are not specified with the command.
The following table summarizes the values you can specify with this
command. These values can also be used when using a primary command to
rename a library member.
DESCRIPTION 1 to 30 characters bound by a special character not found

within the description itself.
SEQUENCE SEQ Include sequence number in columns 73
NUMBER through 80 when the data are
ATTRIBUTE submitted.
SEQ COBOL Include sequence numbers in columns 1
through 6.
SEQ s l Include sequence numbers, starting in
column s for a length of l.
NOSEQ Do not include sequence numbers.
ACCESS SHARED Allow anyone to access and/or execute
ATTRIBUTE your member.
EXECONLY Allow anyone to execute your member.
(Meant for members containing RPF
programs.)
RESTRICTED Prevent anyone from accessing or
executing your member.
34-2 User Guide


You can use the Library Member Information panel to change a member's
description or attributes. To do so, overtype the currently displayed values of
the fields with a value listed below.
ATTRIBUTE The access attribute can be set to: SHR (for SHARED), EXE
(for EXECONLY) or RES (for RESTRICTED).
SEQUENCE The sequence number attribute can be set to: NOSEQ (to
omit sequence numbers) or s,l (to include sequence numbers
in the designated location), where:
s One to three digits indicating the starting position of
the field. (Leading zeros may be omitted).
l One digit between 1 and 8 indicating the length of the
field.
DESCRIPTION The description can be one to 30 characters in length.

You can use a Library Selection List to change a member's description or
attributes. The LIB ALTER field of the Library Facility Main Menu determines
how list members are to be altered. As illustrated in the following example, it
will contain either EXPLICIT or IMPLICIT.
EXPLICIT Changes are made on the Selection List using the AT line
command and overtyping the field to be altered.
IMPLICIT Changes are made on the Selection List by directly overtyping.
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7
LIBRARY FACILITY
FUNCTION ==>
PREFIX ==> LIB ALTER ===> EXPLICIT

MEMBER ==>
SIGNON KEY ==>
FORMAL KEY ==>
SEARCH ==> (SHR,RES,EXE,NOD)

The following example illustrates how you can use the Selection List to change
the description and attributes of a member EXPLICITly.
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
SMITH 82 223 2 1171
XYZ.COBTEST1 Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR 1,6
AT XYZ.COBTEST2 test cobol prog._ 43 SHR
After typing an AT before the name of the appropriate member, tab to the
DESCRIPTION, ATR or SEQNO field and overtype the current values. (You
can use the values described in the table in the first subsection of 34.1,
“Altering Member Attributes” on page 34-2.
34-4 User Guide

34.2 Copying a Member/Selection List

You can use primary commands, the Copy Function panel or a Selection List
to copy all or part of a member or Selection List into an AWS.

You can use a variety of primary commands to copy all or portions of the
currently attached data into an AWS. The following example illustrates how
the COPY LIB command can be used to copy lines 1 through 200 to the top of
the active AWS.
Note: See Chapter 15, “AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS” for
additional information about these commands.
Library: Copying Attached Data
COPY LIB 1 2 T

>
> LIB(XYZ.COBTEST) SCRL FULL COLS 1 73 LINE 1
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5..
============================= T O P ================
2 PROGRAM-ID. COBTEST.
If no line numbers are included, all of the attached data are copied to the
designated destination within the active AWS.
You must indicate the appropriate AWS destination by specifying one of the
following:
T Copy to the top of the AWS.
B Copy to the bottom of the AWS.
R Replace the contents of the AWS with the copied data.
Other primary commands that you can use include:

COPYS Copies line(s) that contain a specified character string from a
member or Selection List into the active or a specific AWS.
COPYX Copies line(s) not containing the specified character string
from library data into the active or a specific AWS.
XCOPY Copies all or part of attached library data from one split
screen into the active AWS of the screen containing the
command.

XCOPYS and XCOPYX

Copies selected lines from attached data in one split screen
into the active AWS of the screen containing the command.
Each of these commands allows you to limit the number of lines to be copied,
as in:
COPYS LIB /DATE-FIELD/ 9 18 1
which causes every line containing the string DATE-FIELD within lines 900
through 1800 of the currently attached data to be copied at or after line 100 in
the AWS.
When copying from a Selection List, you can designate whether you want the
header portion of the list included with the data. (By default, the header is
included.) For example, if a Selection List is displayed:
COPYX LIB /JCL/ T NOHDR
copies every line not containing the string JCL within the currently attached
Selection List to the top of the AWS. No header information is included in the
copied data.
34.2.1.1 Copying Unattached Data
You can also use these same commands to copy a library member that is not
currently attached into an AWS. To do so, specify the member name with the
command, as in:
COPY COBTEST1 ... or
COPYS COBTEST1 /DATE-FIELD/ ...
Other commands that you can use to bring one or more library members into
the active AWS include:
FETCH Brings all or part of a library member into the active AWS, as in:
FETCH INVLIST or
FETCH INVLIST 5 27
where all (or lines 500 through 2700) of the member named
INVLIST are copied into the active AWS. If the active AWS
contained data, that data are overlaid by the contents of the
member.
To bring in data from a library member owned by another
individual, include the person's Advantage CA-Roscoe prefix with
the member name, as in:
FETCH RLM.LISTSEQS
Optionally, you can renumber the data that you bring into the
AWS, as in:
FETCH INVLIST START 1 BY 5
34-6 User Guide

where the data, after being placed in the AWS, is renumbered

starting with 100 and incremented by 50.
CHAIN Brings one or more members into the active AWS in the order
specified in the command, as in:
CHAIN MEM1 MEM2 MEM3
MERGE Brings one or more members into the active AWS and merges the
contents of those members by their line numbers.
A library member's access attribute determines the extent of access (like

ATTACH, COPY, and so on) other Advantage CA-Roscoe users have to that
member. If a member has an EXECONLY or RESTRICTED access attribute,
only the owner of that member can access it. While site management has the
option of changing the extent of access their users have to SHARED members,
the default is that any Advantage CA-Roscoe user can access members with
this attribute.

The Copy Function panel is displayed when you specify the C function code
on the Library Facility menu or with the LIBRARY command.
The following example illustrates how you might use this panel to place one
copy of lines 900 through 1800 of the member COBTEST1 at the top of the
active AWS.
Library: Copying Through the Menu

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
COPY LIBRARY MEMBER
OPTION ===> S
PREFIX ===> XYZ

MEMBER ===> COBTEST1
1ST LINE ===> 9 LAST LINE ===> 18

AWS TARGET ===> T AWS COPY COUNT ===> 1
LIST HEADERS ===> NO
M-DISPLAY MEMBER LIST S-COPY SINGLE MEMBER


OPTION Enter the code that is appropriate for the action you
want to perform. The codes are:
S Copy a single member.
M Display a Selection List. (If only a prefix is
specified, the Selection List will contain all
members associated with that prefix. If the
MEMBER field contains a name that includes
wildcard characters, a qualified Selection List is
displayed.)
PREFIX Enter the two- or three-character prefix assigned to the
individual whose member is to be copied. (Required
only if the displayed prefix is inappropriate.)
MEMBER Enter the name of the member to be copied. (Required
only if the displayed member name is inappropriate.)
1ST LINE Enter the number of the first line to be copied. If
omitted, the operation begins with the first line.
LAST LINE Enter the number of the last line to be copied. If
omitted, the operation ends with the last line.
AWS TARGET Enter the destination of the operation by specifying:
v Number of the line at or after which the data are
to be copied within the active AWS.
* After the line at which the AWS pointer is
currently positioned.
B After the last line in the active AWS.
R Replace the contents of the active AWS with the
copied data.
Unless changed, the default is R.
AWS COPY COUNT Enter the number of copies of the attached data are to
be placed in the active AWS. If omitted, the default is 1.
LIST HEADERS Enter YES or NO to designate whether Selection List
header lines are to be included in the copy operation.

If the Selection List is produced through the Copy Function panel, the only
operation you can perform is a copy.
If the Selection List is not provided through the Copy Function panel, you can
perform any of the functions that are valid with the Selection List.
34-8 User Guide

To copy members, place a C before the name of each appropriate member.

Then, tab to the STATUS field and enter a destination code. (If the Selection
List is produced through the Copy Function Panel and you omit a destination
code, the member replaces the current contents of the active AWS.)
The destination codes are:

B Copy to the bottom of the active AWS.
R Replace the contents of the active AWS with the copied data.
T Copy to the top of the active AWS.
The following example illustrates how you can copy multiple library members
from a Selection List.
Library: Copying Through a Selection List
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
SMITH 82 223 2 1171
XYZ.A 1 SHR NOSEQ

C XYZ.BEGINJCL B JCL: Link-Edit 1 SHR
C XYZ.COBTEST1 T Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR
XYZ.COBTEST2 43 SHR
XYZ.JUNK 87 SHR N
C XYZ.MYRPF T RPF: Builds JCL 519 SHR N


34.3 Delete a Member

You can use a primary command, the Delete Function panel (from the Library
Facility menu) or the Selection List to delete a member.
Notes:
■ If you delete a member and then determine that you need it, contact your
site management. As long as the member has been saved on a library
system backup, it can be restored.
■ When deleting a member through the Delete Function panel or the
Selection List, you have the option of requesting that a Delete
Confirmation panel be displayed. You can control this option using the
ATTACH LIB command or the Library Facility menu.
– When CONFIRM DELETE is in effect, a Delete Confirmation panel is
displayed. This panel contains the name of each member you marked
for deletion. You must confirm this operation before it is performed.
– When CONFIRM DELETE is not in effect, the designated data
members are deleted when you press the Enter key.
See 34.3.4, “Delete Confirmation Panel” on page 34-11 for additional
information.

You can use the DELETE command to delete a member, as in:
DELETE JUNK

Type the D function code on the Library Facility menu or with the LIBRARY
command to display the Delete Function panel.
The following example illustrates how you might use this panel to delete the
member named JUNK.
Library: Deleting Through the Menu

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
DELETE LIBRARY MEMBER
OPTION ===> S
PREFIX ===> XYZ

MEMBER ===> JUNK
34-10 User Guide


OPTION Enter the code that is appropriate for the action you want to
perform. The codes are:
S Delete the designated member.
M Display a Selection List. (If only a prefix is specified, the
Selection List will contain all members associated with that
prefix. If the MEMBER field contains a name that includes
wildcard characters, a qualified Selection List is displayed.)
PREFIX Enter the two- or three-character prefix assigned to the individual
who owns the member. (Required only if the displayed prefix is
inappropriate.)
MEMBER Enter the name of the member to be deleted. (Required only if
the displayed name is inappropriate.)

If the Selection List is produced through the Delete Function panel, the only
operation you can perform is a delete. If the Selection List is not produced
through the Delete Function panel, you can perform any of the functions that
are valid with that Selection List.
As illustrated in the following example, you can delete one or more members
by typing a D before each appropriate member name.
Library: Deleting through a Selection List
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
SMITH 82 223 2 1171
D XYZ.COBTEST1 Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR 1,6

D XYZ.JUNK 87 SHR NOSEQ
34.3.4 Delete Confirmation Panel

You can use the ATTACH LIB command or the Library Facility menu to
designate whether delete confirmation is required.
The following example illustrates the confirmation panel that might be

displayed when CONFIRM DELETE is in effect and you attempt to delete one
or more members through a Selection List.

>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
MEMBER CREATED UPDATED ACCESS DESCRIPTION
COBTEST1 6/4/87 11/9/88 11/9/88 Sample COBOL Prog.
JUNK 12/1/85 6/6/86 6/6/86
To delete the entries, enter either YES or Y in the CONFIRM field. Entering
any other value in this field terminates the operation. (You will be returned to
the Delete Function panel or the previous Selection List. The STATUS field of
that Selection List will contain *DENYDEL.)
If you enter a primary command when a delete confirmation panel is

displayed, the operation is either terminated or paused. If the command is:
■ Related to the Library Facility (for example, SELECT MENU): the
operation is terminated and the action is performed.
■ Not related to the Library Facility (for example, ATTACH DSN): the
operation is paused. The panel is redisplayed when the Library Facility is
reattached, allowing you to complete the operation.
34-12 User Guide

34.4 Inquiring About a Member

You can obtain detailed information about a library member by issuing the
INFO command, as in:
INFO LIB COBTEST1
or, specifying the I function code and member name on the Library Facility
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
LIBRARY FACILITY
FUNCTION ===> I
PREFIX ===> XYZ

or, specifying the I function code on the Selection List, as in the following
example.
Library: Inquiring Through a Selection List

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
SMITH 82 223 2 1171
XYZ.A 1 SHR NOSEQ
I XYZ.COBTEST1 Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR 1,6
The following example illustrates the type of information displayed.
Library: Member Information Display


>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
LIBRARY MEMBER INFORMATION
PREFIX ===> XYZ

LAST ACCESS ===> 11/4/88

LAST UPDATE ===> 5/29/87
CREATION ===> 5/23/86
RECORD COUNT ===> 193
BLOCK COUNT ===> 3
ATTRIBUTE ===> SHR
SEQUENCE ===> 1,6
DESCRIPTION ===> Sample COBOL Prog.

The member information includes:
PREFIX Prefix assigned to the individual who owns the member.
NAME Name of the library member.
LAST ACCESS Date the member was last accessed.
LAST UPDATE Data the member was last updated.
CREATION Date the member was created.
RECORD COUNT Number of lines in the member.
BLOCK COUNT Number of library blocks used by the member.
ATTRIBUTE Member's access attribute.
SEQUENCE Member's sequence number attribute.
DESCRIPTION Member's description, if available.
The last three fields are unprotected. See 34.1, “Altering Member Attributes”
on page 34-2 for information about changing these fields.
34-14 User Guide

34.5 Printing a Library Member

You can use a primary command, the Print Function panel (from the Library
Facility menu) or the Selection List to print all or part of a member or Selection
List at a system or 328x-type printer.
When the data are scheduled for printing, a message is displayed. It contains
the printing location, tag (if specified) and print request number assigned by
Advantage CA-Roscoe. Once scheduled, all references to a specific print
request must be by its tag or number.

To print all of the currently attached member or Selection List, enter:
PRINT LIB
All of the operands of the PRINT command can be used when printing
attached data. For example, to print only lines 500 through 2500 of the
currently attached data, you would enter:
PRINT LIB 5 25
While Selection Lists do not include line numbers, you can treat them as
though they are numbered from 1 by 1.
Note: See Chapter 7, “Printing Data” for additional information about the
PRINT command and how requests can be monitored and controlled.

When you specify the P function code on the Library Facility menu or with the
LIBRARY command, the Print Function panel is displayed.
The following example illustrates how you might use this panel to print a copy
of the member named MYPROG.
Library: Printing a Member

>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6...
PRINT LIBRARY MEMBER
OPTION ===> S
PREFIX ===> XYZ

MEMBER ===> MYPROG
1ST LINE ===> 1 LAST LINE ===> 999999 NOTIFY ===>

TAG NAME ===> SEPARATOR ===> YES FORCEALIGN ===> NO
DEST ===> PR17 COPIES ===> 1 CLASS ===>
PAGE WIDTH ===> PAGE LEN ===> SEQ NUMBRS ===> YES
TYPE/FORMAT ===> DEF TOP MARGIN ===> BOT MARGIN ===>
1ST COL ===> 1 LAST COL ===> 32767
M-DISPLAY MEMBER LIST S-PRINT SINGLE MEMBER

OPTION Enter the code that is appropriate for the action you want
to perform. The codes are:
S Print a single member.
M Display a Selection List. (If only a prefix is specified,
the Selection List will contain all members
associated with that prefix. If the MEMBER field
contains a name that includes wildcard characters, a
qualified Selection List is displayed.)
individual who owns the member. (Required only if the
displayed prefix is inappropriate.)
MEMBER Enter the member name. (Required only if the displayed
name is inappropriate.)
You can use the following fields to customize the print operation.
1ST LINE Enter the number of the line at which the print operation is
to begin. If omitted, the first line is assumed.
LAST LINE Enter the number of the last line to be included in the print
operation. If omitted, the end of the member/Selection List
is assumed.
While Selection Lists do not contain line numbers, treat
them as though they are numbered from 1 by 1.
NOTIFY Designate whether you want an RPS notification message
displayed when this data are printed by specifying either:
34-16 User Guide

YES Display notification message.

NO Do not display message.
If omitted, the site-defined value is used. Site management
has the option of prohibiting the use of NOTIFY.
TAG NAME Enter the name to be assigned to the print request. The
name cannot exceed eight characters, must start with an
alphabetic character and be bound by apostrophes (').
SEPARATOR Designate whether separators are required by specifying
either:
YES Separators are required.
NO Separators are not required.
The default is site-defined.
FORCEALIGN Designate whether physical page alignment is required by
specifying either:
YES Physical page alignment is to be forced (for
example, there is to be a page eject for each
separator and body page).
NO Physical page alignment is not required.
If omitted, the site-defined value is used.
DEST Enter the name of the printing location where the request
is to print. Use this operand to override the current
printing location for this execution.
COPIES Enter the number of copies of the request to be printed.
The maximum number is a site-defined value between 1
and 255. The default is 1 copy.
CLASS Enter the print class to be used at the location where the
request is to print. (Site management will tell you which
classes are valid for 328x-type printers and which are valid
for system printers.)
PAGE WIDTH Enter the width of the paper in printing columns as a
numeric value between 0 and 255. The default is
site-defined.
PAGE LEN Enter the length of the paper in number of print lines as a
numeric value between 0 and 99. On printers with the
hardware capability to set page length, the number must
be the same length as specified to the printer. The default
is site-defined.
SEQ NUMBRS Designate whether sequence numbers are to be printed by
specifying either:
YES Designates that sequence numbers are to be
printed.

NO Designates that sequence numbers are not to be

printed.
If omitted, the default is YES.
TYPE/FORMAT Designate the format of the output by specifying either:
DEF (Default.) A top and bottom margin may be
set.
ANS ANSI print control characters are recognized.
MCC Machine printer control characters are
recognized.
DUMP Format each line with offsets, hexadecimal data
and EBCDIC data to the right of the line.
CHEX Format each line with offsets and hexadecimal
data to the right of the line.
VHEX Format each line in character data with
hexadecimal data shown vertically below.
TOP MARGIN v (Recognized only with TYPE DEF.) Enter the number of
blank lines to be skipped from the top of the page before
printing begins. v can be 0 through 99. The default is
site-defined.
BOT MARGIN v (Recognized only with TYPE DEF.) Enter the number of
blank lines to be skipped at the bottom of the page. v may
be 0 through 99. The default is site-defined.
1ST COL Number of the column where the print operation is to
start. The value must be between 1 and the maximum
length of the line. If omitted, the default is 1.
LAST COL Number of the column where the print operation is to
stop. The value must be greater than the starting column
and not exceed the maximum line length. If omitted, the
maximum line length is assumed. (The maximum line
length of a library member is 255.)

If the Selection List is produced through the Print Function panel, you can
only perform a print operation. Otherwise, you can perform any of the
functions that are valid with that Selection List.
To print one or more members, type a P before the name of each member. By
default, the request prints at the printing location assigned for the terminal
you are using. To print at a different location, tab to the STATUS field and
enter the appropriate destination name.
34-18 User Guide

The following example illustrates how you can print multiple entries from the
Selection List.
>

....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
SMITH 82 223 2 1171
P XYZ.BEGINJCL JCL: Link-Edit 1 SHR

P XYZ.COBTEST2 PR99 43 SHR
In this example, the member BEGINJCL prints at the terminal's default

printing location. The member COBTEST2 will print at the location identified
as PR99.

34.6 Renaming Library Members

To change the names of one or more library members, you can use a primary
command, the Library Facility menu or the Selection List.

You can use the RENAME command to change the name of a library member.
For example, to change the member name from TESTJCL to PRODJCL, you
would enter:
RENAME TESTJCL PRODJCL
Optionally, you can also change the description or attributes of the member, as
in:
RENAME TESTJCL PRODJCL /Production JCL/ SHARED SEQ
See 34.1, “Altering Member Attributes” on page 34-2 for additional

information.

Function Panel If you specify an R function code on the Library Facility menu
or with the LIBRARY command, the Rename Function panel is displayed.
Library: Renaming Through a Function Panel

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....
RENAME LIBRARY MEMBER
OPTION ===> S
PREFIX ===> ABC

NAME ===> TESTJCL
NEW PREFIX ===> ABC

NEW MEMBER ===> PRODJCL
M - DISPLAY MEMBER LIST S - RENAME SINGLE MEMBER

This example illustrates how you can use this panel to change a member name
from TESTJCL to PRODJCL.
34-20 User Guide

The fields comprising the panel include:

OPTION Enter the code that is appropriate to perform the desired
action. The codes are:
S Rename a single member.
M Display a Selection List. (If only a prefix is specified,
the Selection List will contain all members associated
with that prefix. If the MEMBER field contains a name
that includes wildcard characters, a qualified Selection
List is displayed.)
individual who owns the member. (Required only if the
displayed prefix is inappropriate.)
MEMBER Enter the member's current name. (Required only if the
displayed name is inappropriate.)
NEW PREFIX Enter the two- or three-character prefix assigned to the
individual who owns the member. (Site management may
allow users to rename members belonging other users.)
NEW NAME Enter the new member name. The name must comply with the
Advantage CA-Roscoe member naming conventions and must
not currently exist in your library.

If the Selection List is produced through the Rename Function Panel, the only
operation you can perform is a rename. If the Selection List is not produced
through the Rename Function panel, you can perform any of the functions that
are valid with the Selection List.
To rename one or more members, use the R function code and type the
member name in the STATUS field. (When the Selection List is redisplayed,
the STATUS field will contain *RENAMED - confirming the operation
performed successfully.)
Library: Renaming Through a Selection List


>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6..
==================================== T O P ===================
SIGNON KEY MEM EXCL BLOCKS LINES
SMITH 352 971 5984
XYZ.A 1 SHR N
XYZ.BEGINJCL JCL: Link-Edit 1 SHR
R XYZ.COBTEST2 INVREPT 43 SHR
XYZ.JUNK 87 SHR N
XYZ.MYRPF RPF: Builds JCL 519 SHR N
34-22 User Guide

Part VI. Additional Facilities
Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1

35.1 Beginning a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2
35.1.1 What Can You Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-2
35.2 Message Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-4
35.3 Viewing a Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-6
35.3.1 Viewing a Thread Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-7
35.4 Create a Thread or Thread Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-9
35.5 BulletinBoard Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-12
35.5.1 The Utility Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-12
35.5.2 Setting BulletinBoard Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-13
35.5.3 View News Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-14
35.5.4 Prune a BBS Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-15
| 35.5.5 Deleting an Unwanted Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-15
35.5.6 Print a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-15
35.5.7 Print a Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-17
35.6 Advantage CA-Roscoe User Dialog Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . 35-19
35.6.1 Send a Message to Another Advantage CA-Roscoe User . . . . 35-19
35.6.2 The ZMsg Mode and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-19
35.6.3 ZMsg Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-20
35.6.4 Viewing Messages on ZMsg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-22
35.6.5 Sending a Message to an Advantage CA-Roscoe User . . . . . 35-22
35.6.6 Set ZMsg Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-24
CA-SysView Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-25
Chapter 36. Advantage CA-Roscoe and DB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-1
Chapter 37. DMF - Dialog Management Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-1
Chapter 38. ETSO - Application Execution System . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-1

38.1 Determining Executable Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-2
38.2 Executing Applications Under ETSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-3
38.2.1 Allocating Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-4
38.2.2 Querying and Freeing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-6
38.2.3 Initiating Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-7
38.3 Executing Distributed Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-9
38.4 Executing TSO Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-10
Chapter 39. RPF - Roscoe Programming Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-1
Chapter 40. SKETCH - CICS/IMS Panel Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-1

User Guide
Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System
The BulletinBoard System is an online message system, established to support

the interchange of technical information between Advantage CA-Roscoe users.
The facilities provided with BulletinBoard System can be used by all

Advantage CA-Roscoe users, and can be performed in conjunction with other
Advantage CA-Roscoe activities.
You can use the BulletinBoard System to:

■ View general news announcements that are broadcast by your site
■ View posted message threads and any thread entries they contain
■ Create new threads
■ Add entries(replys) to existing threads
■ Send messages to other Advantage CA-Roscoe users
The BulletinBoard System follows CUA standards. It is a mode dependent

system, so you must move from one mode to another to perform each task. All
tasks associated with a BulletinBoard component are PF-key functions, and are
listed on the bottom of each screen.
Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System 35-1

35.1 Beginning a Session

To begin a BulletinBoard System session, enter: pfx.BBSX.
where:
pfx is the prefix of the profile containing the panels and programs
comprising this facility. The default is RBX.
This is the distributed RPF program that invokes the BulletinBoard System.
At initial sign-on, the BBS (BulletinBoard System) News Announcement screen

is presented. After you view this screen, it is not presented again unless you
specifically request it (using PF2/14 for NEWS or through UTILITY.) If any
new announcements are posted, this screen is presented automatically at your
next sign-on.
35.1.1 What Can You Do?

After viewing the announcements, press ENTER, and you will be placed into
the Message Selection List. This screen contains all existing message threads.
From here, you can view any message, create a new message thread, or send
another Advantage CA-Roscoe user a message.
Note: Sending another Advantage CA-Roscoe user a message makes use of
the Advantage CA-Roscoe SEND command. The message goes only to
the specified user (or ID) and does not get posted on the BulletinBoard
system.
All tasks available in each mode are PF-key functions and are displayed at the
bottom of each screen. To send a message or perform any function, use the
corresponding PF-key. Some screens have functions which are specific to one
task only. Many screens have the same PF-key options. This means that a
particular PF-key number may have several different functions, changing from
screen to screen, according to the mode level. If a PF-key is blank, it has no
function.
The following PF-keys have the same function on every screen (or are
disabled):
PF7/19 Backward Scrolls the display backward, toward the top of the
member.
PF8/20 Forward Scrolls the display forward, toward the bottom of the
member.
PF10/22 Top Makes the base entry for the thread the first line of the
screen.
PF11/23 Bottom Displays the bottom of the message text.
35-2 User Guide

And on every screen except the one that is used to create a thread title,
PF3/15 Exit Returns to the previous mode level. (On the "create a thread
title" screen, PF3/15 CANCEL cancels the thread that was just
created.)

35.2 Message Selection List

The Message Selection List is the first screen you will see once you have
signed on and viewed the BBS News Announcement screen.
Message Selection list

-- BBS -----------------------------------------------------------------------
Thread Titles
New Message Thread Entry-2 ZZB New Message Thread Entry-1 ZZC
No Threads-- ------------- ZZD
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PF1 Utility 2 Ignore! 3 Exit 4 Lastread 5 Firstnew 6 Addmsg
7 Backward 8 Forward 9 Refresh 1 Top 11 Bottom 12 Zmsg

The top line, containing hyphens, is the Error/Status line. It contains the
current processing RPF ID. In this case, it will be BBS, for BulletinBoard
System. Any messages returned from BBS will appear on this line.
The portion of the screen just below the Error/Status line contains the titles of
all message threads. A thread is a series of one or more related messages.
The threads, as listed here, are the initial message topics. All related responses
are threaded to this message entry.
Each thread can contain 999 messages. All threads have prefix codes,
beginning with ZZZ, through AAA. Each new thread is given a corresponding
code. This can be used as a quick reference, to associate the thread by code
instead of its title. This code will be the prefix of all of the thread's entries.
35-4 User Guide

By default, the threads that have not been viewed will be in high intensity. If
you have already viewed the thread and all of its corresponding messages, the
thread will be in low intensity.
Note: The threads are highlighted following Advantage CA-Roscoe standard
panel attribute coding. The Utility function (PF1/13) allows the
changing of these thread attributes. By default, unread threads and
messages are unprotected and high intensity (UH), and the threads and
messages that have been read are unprotected and low (normal)
intensity (UL).
All of the possible tasks a user can perform from the Message Selection list are
listed at the bottom of the screen as PF-key functions. The PF-keys that are
specific to this screen are:
PF1/13 Utility Brings up the BulletinBoard Utility menu from which
options may be set, messages and threads can be printed,
the News can be viewed, or the user profile can be
condensed.
PF2/14 Ignore! Marks a selected thread in low (normal) intensity, as if it
was read. If there are any new entries added, they will not
be marked by high intensity. No entries will be highlighted,
so the entire thread can be "ignored."
If Ignore! is already active, PF2 will deactivate Ignore!
PF4/16 Lastread Brings up the last message you read.
PF5/17 Firstnew Brings up the first new message you have not read. (NEW
denotes not yet viewed).
PF6/18 Addmsg Adds a thread or a message to a thread, using the AddMsg
panel.
PF9/21 Refresh Refreshes the screen with any new information.
PF12/24 Zmsg Sends another Advantage CA-Roscoe user a message, using
the Zmsg panel.
Many of these functions are duplicated throughout BBS.

35.3 Viewing a Thread

To view any of the threads listed on the Message Selection list, place the
cursor in the field containing the thread title and press ENTER. This is the
same as using the function PF5 FIRSTNEW, if you have not previously viewed a
message in that thread. This will take you to the screen containing all
messages composing the thread. The Message Thread Selection List is shown
below.
Message Thread Selection list
-- BBS -----------------------------------------------------------------------

New Message Thread Entry-1 Prefix:
New Message Thread Entry-1 This will be entry #1 =>ZZC 1
This will be entry #2 =>ZZC 2 This will be entry #3 =>ZZC 3
This will be entry #8 =>ZZC 8
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PF1 Utility 2 Ignore! 3 Exit 4 Prevnew 5 Nextnew 6 Addmsg
7 Backward 8 Forward 9 Refresh 1 Top 11 Bottom 12 Zmsg

The first line following the error/status line is the title of the thread you
selected from the previous screen. The prefix of that thread is on the far right
of the same line.
The title is also the first thread of the list, and has the code 000. Each
subsequent entry is given a code incremented by one. This code is added to
the prefix to create a member name for the thread entry. Each thread entry can
be associated by its member name, and its title.
This screen also has PF-key functions listed on the bottom. The PF-keys
specific to this screen are:
PF4/16 Prevnew Displays the first new message that precedes the thread you
are currently displaying. (NEW is the same as not yet
viewed.)
35-6 User Guide

PF5/17 Nextnew Displays the next new message that follows the thread you
are currently displaying.
Note: If there are no new (unviewed) messages within that
thread, Prevnew and Nextnew do not execute. You
should receive a message on the Error/Staus line
that tells you there are "no new messages that way,"
(where that way is either before the message - Prev,
or following the message- Next). Use Enter to view
the message.
35.3.1 Viewing a Thread Entry

To view one of the listed thread entries, place your cursor on the desired entry
and press ENTER. The following panel displays the text of the selected thread.
A Message Thread Entry
-- BBS -----------------------------------------------------------------------

Title: This will be entry #7 =>ZZC LAST Name: ZZC7 Date&co
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
From: RO, ROSCOE.CONTROL
Date: Tuesday August 6, 1991 Time: 16.2.27
This will be message number 7
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PF1 Utility 2 Ignore! 3 Exit 4 Prevmsg 5 Nextmsg 6 Addmsg
7 Backward 8 Forward 9 1 Top 11 Bottom 12 Zmsg

The fields of this panel are:
Error/Status line This is the line of hyphens at the top. It contains
the mode BBS on the left. Any messages issued
by BBS are displayed on the right.
Title This is the thread title that appeared on the
previous screen.

Conditional data field

The field to the right of the title contains conditional data.
This data can be FIRST, LAST, or ONLY. If the thread
entry you are viewing is the first, last, or only thread entry,
the corresponding word is displayed. If the entry is not
one of the above items, this field is blank. Note that on the
screen above, the word LAST is in this field. This thread
entry is the last entry under the thread ZZC.
Name field This field contains the member name of the thread entry
you are viewing, made up of the prefix and thread code.
You can associate each thread entry by name.
Date This is the date the member was created.
Entry Text The thread entry text follows the second line of hyphens.
The text consists of:
■ the ID and key that created the message, listed in the
From field,
■ the date and time the message was created, and
■ the message.
The PF-key functions specific to this screen are the same as the previous
screen, except for PF4, PF5, and PF9:
PF4/16 Prevmsg Displays the thread entry that precedes the currently
displayed entry.
PF5/17 Nextmsg Continues to the next sequential message.
PF9/21 Is not used.
35-8 User Guide

35.4 Create a Thread or Thread Entry

Note: Only users having Library Administration privileges may create or
update threads.
You can add a new thread to the Message Selection List or a new thread entry
to an existing thread from any screen that has PF6/18 Addmsg.
With the cursor on any thread or entry, press PF6/18. You are placed in the
Reply mode; the error/status line has Reply in the left corner.
Create a New Thread -- Insert Mode
-- Reply ---------------------------------------------------------------------

New Message Thread Entry-2
Date: Tuesday August 6, 1991 Time: 16..4
This will be a new message number 2
Insert Mode 7 lines

Seq . ----+----¬----+¬---2----+----3----+----4----¬----5----+----6----+----7-¬
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PF1 Help 2 CopyMem 3 Exit 4 Bwd (Top) 5 Fwd (Top) 6
7 Backward 8 Forward 9 1 Top 11 Bottom 12 ZMsg

As shown in the above panel, Reply is a split screen mode. The top half of
the screen displays the thread or entry your cursor was on (when you press
PF6/18). This part of the screen is protected. It contains:
■ Original thread or message title
■ Advantage CA-Roscoe ID and key the message was sent from
■ Date the original thread or message was created
■ Time the original thread or message was created
■ Original thread or message text
The bottom half of the screen is in the Insert mode, and is open for entering
text. There is a sequence line number at the top of the insert area. It is much
like the sequence line number in your Advantage CA-Roscoe Edit session. All
of the parameters you have set for Advantage CA-Roscoe editing are
propagated in the BBS Editor session (that is, tab settings and the tab
character).

The line just above the sequence line number displays the Insert Mode, and the
number of lines that are available for entering data. To the left of the insert
area is the sequence number field and a one character command area. This
single character field contains asterisks when you are in the insert mode. Once
you press Enter or a PF-key, you are in the Edit mode, and this field contains
a period that is Unprotected Low-intensity.
Enter the text of the message you want to create. You can then edit the
message either by typing over the existing text of the message, or by issuing
line commands in the single character command area. There are two edit
commands that can be used in this field:
d Deletes any line it is placed next to.
i Opens the lower portion of the screen to the insert mode, just after the
line on which it was entered.
Create a New Thread -- Edit Mode
-- Reply ---------------------------------------------------------------------

New Message Thread Entry-2
Seq . ----+----¬----+¬---2----+----3----+----4----¬----5----+----6----+----7-¬
1 . This is the message text.
2 . It can be any message.
3 . It can be as long as you want.
4 . End of message.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PF1 Help 2 CopyMem 3 Exit 4 Bwd (Top) 5 Fwd (Top) 6

After you have completed entering the text, you can select one of the
commands listed at the bottom of the Reply screen. The functions specific to
this screen are:
PF1/13 Help Invokes the Help facility.
PF2/14 CopyMem Copies a member you specify into the message text.
PF4/16 Bwd (Top) Scrolls the top half of the screen backward one screen.
PF5/17 Fwd (Top) Scrolls the top half of the screen forward one screen.
35-10 User Guide

If you do not want to use any of the functions, and the thread or message text
is complete, Exit from the Reply panel using PF3/15. This takes you to a
screen that has only one open field. This is the thread title panel of the BBS.
Enter the title of your thread or message. The title field accepts up to 30
characters.
Create a Thread Title

-- BBS -----------------------------------------------------------------------
Thread Prefix: ZZB - title: New Message Thread Entry-2

Message title: New Message Thread Entry-2
Your message title: <
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PF1 2 NewThread 3 Cancel 4 5 6 EditAgain
7 8 9 1 11 12

There are only four functions you can perform from this screen.
1. If you created a new thread, use PF2/14 NewThread. This adds your
thread to the Message Selection list, under the title you issue on this
screen.
2. If you do not want to add a thread or message at this time, you can use
PF3/15 Cancel, and cancel the entire message. You return to the panel you
were on before using PF6/18 Addmsg.
3. If you want to go back to the message text and edit it, use PF6/18
EditAgain. You will return to the Reply panel, and are in Edit Mode.
4. If you want to create the thread or message that will be added to an
existing thread, press Enter. This adds your thread or message, and you
will return to the panel you were at when you selected PF6/18 Addmsg.

35.5 BulletinBoard Utilities

The BulletinBoard System includes a Utilities panel that provides access to
basic BulletinBoard functions, such as:
■ Setting session specific options
■ Redisplaying the BBS News Announcements
■ Printing an entire thread (thread and all entries)
■ Printing a single message entry
■ Pruning (or condensing) your profile
Each utility is described further on the following pages.
35.5.1 The Utility Screen

The BulletinBoard utilities are listed in a menu format. To display this menu,
press PF1/13 UTILITY from any BBS mode screen. To select a Utility, place the
cursor on that utility and press Enter.
The Utility Menu

-- BBS ----------------------------------------------------- Press PF3 to exit
Current message: ZZB - New Message Thread Entry
Place the cursor on the desired utility and press ENTER.
Set Options Show News Prune Profile Print Message

Print Thread
Note: The BBS index data are NOT refreshed after any of these functions.

The Utility display has several fields:
Error/Status As seen previously, this is the line of hyphens at the top. It
will contain any messages issued by Utility.
Current message: This is the thread entry you were viewing or pointing to
when you entered the Utility panel. The display will contain
the member name of the message (thread prefix + code),
and the message title.
35-12 User Guide

Utilities The five BBS utilities:

1. Set Options
2. Show News
3. Prune Profile
4. Print Message
5. Print Thread
35.5.2 Setting BulletinBoard Options

To set up BulletinBoard parameters that will be specific to your session, select
the first Utility option: Set Options. This will place you in the BBSOpt
mode. The BBSOpt panel ( shown below) contains seven BBS options. The
default values are initially listed. As noted on the panel, entering a null field
will restore the default values.
The parameter values you set are saved from one BulletinBoard session to the
next. They remain in effect until you change them again.
BBS Options Panel

-- BBSOpt -------------------------------------------------- Press PF3 to exit
Save AWS on entry (Y/N)? Y
Saved AWS name prefix: BBSAWS Panel member name prefix: ZZZZZP
Unread messages attribute: UH Read messages attribute: UL
ROSCOE printer name: DEFAULT. Message editor: BBM.REX.....
Note: Enter a null field to restore the default values.

The BBSOpt fields are:
■ Save AWS on entry(Y/N)?
Before entering the BBS, the AWS can be saved so that you can resume
processing when you exit. This is important if you do not want to lose the
data in your active AWS. The default is set to 'Y', to save the AWS.
■ Saved AWS name prefix:

This is a prefix you can give to the saved AWS that was saved on entry to
the BBS. You can give the AWS a six-character prefix so you will know it
was created by BBS. The default prefix is BBSAWS.
■ Unread messages attribute:
All threads and thread entries you have not read will have a high intensity
setting. This allows you to easily select those entries you have not seen.
The default attribute for unread messages is UH. This makes all unread
messages Unprotected and Highlighted.
■ Read message attribute:
All threads and thread entries that you have read are highlighted
according to this setting. This helps you to identify the messages you have
already viewed. The default attribute for read messages is UL. This makes
all messages you have read Unprotected and Low (normal) Intensity.
Note: The attributes follow Advantage CA-Roscoe standard panel
attribute coding. BBSOpts accepts the following attributes:
UH Unprotected, High Intensity
UL Unprotected, Low (normal) Intensity
SH Skip protected, High Intensity
SL Skip protected, Low Intensity
BBS accepts the same attribute for both read and unread messages.
■ Advantage CA-Roscoe printer name:
Specify the name of the printer that you want to print all requested
threads and entries. The default is set by your site.
35.5.3 View News Announcements

The BBS News Announcement screen allows a site to broadcast news and
information to all BulletinBoard System users. It can contain whatever data
your site chooses to be relevant to BBS users.
The BBS News panel is displayed to you the very first time you sign onto the
BulletinBoard System. You are not presented with the announcements again
unless you specifically request it or new announcements are posted. When
this information is updated, you are presented with the BBS News screen
when you sign-on BBS.
There may be times when you need to refer to this information again. The
Show News utility allows you to specifically request to view the
announcements.
You can redisplay the BBS News Announcement panel from the Utility Option
menu. The field Show News places you in the ZAnn mode. This is the
Announcement mode. The screen contains all current BBS news and
information that is posted by your site. Shown below is a sample of the
information that a site can 'Broadcast.'
35-14 User Guide

BBS News Announcements -- Show News

-- ZAnn ----------------------------------------------------------------------
more =>
Current BBS News
============== S T A R T O F A N N O U N C E M E N T S =============
91/6/27 - This BulletinBoard System System has been established

to support interchange of technical information within
the L1 Technical Group.
You may view messages on the bulletin board, add messages

to existing threads, and create new threads.
===> You will not be presented with this 'news' again unless
you request it or it changes.
Now, PRESS PF3 to Exit this 'news' and enter the Bulletin
Board System.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PF1 Help 2 3 Exit 4 5 6

35.5.4 Prune a BBS Profile

A BBS session can accumulate too much data and it may be necessary to clean
up a profile. All information stored in your BBS profile is revised to include
only the last thread viewed and the date of the last News Announcement. The
Utility to do this is Prune Profile. No user input is required; just select Prune
Profile, and you receive the message:
PRUNING IN PROGRESS
on the Error/Status line, on the right side. After BBS has finished the Pruning
function, you remain in the initial BBS Utility menu panel.
| Note: Pruning deletes all but the last viewed thread entry.
|35.5.5 Deleting an Unwanted Thread

To delete specific unwanted threads, you must manually delete the thread
numbers from the BBS library.
35.5.6 Print a Message

To print one of the message entries listed on the BBS, select the Print Message
Utility. The message entry your cursor was on when you pressed PF1/13 UTILITY
is the Current message. The Current message field must contain the member
name and title of the message you want to print. If this member is incorrect,
EXIT the Utility screen and select the correct message entry.

The Print Message Utility puts you in DoPrint mode, and displays the screen
shown in the panel below.
Print a Thread Entry

-- DoPrint -------------------------------------------------------------------
Destination: DEFAULT. PRINT Tag: ZZB..
------------------------------------------------------------------ Line 1 of 9
=================================== T O P ====================================
--------------------------------------------- New Message Thread Entry-2

================================ B O T T O M =================================
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PF1 Help 2 3 Exit 4 Print 5 6

The Print Message screen contains the following fields:
Error/Status As seen previously, this is the line of hyphens at the top. The
mode on the left is DoPrint. The right side of the line displays
any messages issued by DoPrint.
Destination: The destination output is sent to. If this is blank, the default set
with the Set Options utility are used.
PRINT Tag The name that identifies the printed output.
Message text The text of the message you want to print is displayed in the
bottom portion of this screen. The first line of the message
contains its title.
To print the message, fill in the two fields listed on the top of the screen, and
press PF4/16 PRINT. You receive a response on right side of the Error/Status
line that tells you if the print request was successful.
35-16 User Guide

35.5.7 Print a Thread

You can print an entire thread; this includes the thread and all of its entries.
To do this, invoke the last utility on the menu, Print Thread. The thread your
cursor was on when you pressed PF1/13 UTILITY is selected. Or, if you are
viewing only a message entry, the thread that the entry is listed under is
selected for printing.
The Print Thread Utility will put you in DoPrint mode, shown in the following
panel.
Print Entire Thread

-- DoPrint -------------------------------------------------------------------
more =>
Destination: DEFAULT. PRINT Tag: ZZB.....
----------------------------------------------------------------- Line 1 of 36
=================================== T O P ====================================
Thread title: New Message Thread Entry-2
--------------------------------------------- New Message Thread Entry-2
-------------------------------------------- This will be entry #1 =>ZZB
Date: Tuesday August 6, 1991 Time: 16.19.36
Add this the zzc Thread
-------------------------------------------- This will be entry #2 =>ZZB
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PF1 Help 2 3 Exit 4 Print 5 6

The Print Thread screen contains the following fields:
Error/Status As seen previously, this is the line of hyphens at the top.
The mode on the left will be DoPrint. The right side of the
line will display any messages issued by DoPrint.
Destination: The printer destination the output is sent to. If this is blank,
the default set with the Set Options utility is used.

PRINT Tag The name that identifies the printed output. The thread
prefix code is the first three characters.
<= more => This field is displayed if the threads comprise more that one
screen.
Thread entries The rest of the display contains the thread and all the
thread entries comprising it. Each thread is separated by a
line of hyphens; the thread entry title is on the right side
and the thread it defines is below.
To print the thread, fill in the two fields listed on the top of the screen, and
press PF4/16 PRINT. You receive a response on the right side of the Error/Status
line telling you if the print request was successful.
35-18 User Guide

35.6 Advantage CA-Roscoe User Dialog Capabilities
35.6.1 Send a Message to Another Advantage CA-Roscoe User

The Advantage CA-Roscoe/BulletinBoard contains a feature that allows you to
send messages to other Advantage CA-Roscoe users, and still remain in your
BulletinBoard session. These messages are like any other Advantage
CA-Roscoe SEND messages. This is done through the ZMsg Mode. ZMsg
functions include:
■ Sending and receiving one-line messages to and from other Advantage
CA-Roscoe users.
■ Viewing all of the messages in your ZZZZZMSG member.
■ Viewing an account of all of the messages you have sent.
■ Deleting all ZZZZZMSG messages; clearing this file allows you to keep
daily, weekly, etc., accounts of messages sent and received.
■ Checking to see if another Advantage CA-Roscoe user is signed on, and
what command they last executed.
Note: To inquire about another Advantage CA-Roscoe user requires that
the Advantage CA-Roscoe/Unicenter CA-SysView interface be
active.
35.6.2 The ZMsg Mode and Functions

ZMsg is a facility that allows you to carry on a conversation with one or more
Advantage CA-Roscoe users. The ZMsg panel displays the current contents of
your ZZZZZMSG member in a full-screen environment. It also records any
messages you send to other users and puts them in the same member as your
messages. This gives you a complete record of the conversation(s) you have.
Because the display is your ZZZZZMSG member, you can receive all of your
Advantage CA-Roscoe console messages to this same member.
To view all messages in your ZZZZZMSG member, or to send another

Advantage CA-Roscoe user a message while you are in the BulletinBoard
System, use the following function:
PF12/24 ZMSG.
This function is listed on all screens, in all modes (except when already within
the ZMsg mode), and is always PF12/24. Issuing the ZMsg command will
place you in the ZMsg mode.
Some other information regarding ZMsg:

■ ZMsg requires a screen which contains at least 13 lines.

■ Sending another Advantage CA-Roscoe user a message through ZMsg

makes use of the Advantage CA-Roscoe SEND command. The message(s)
you send does not get posted on the BulletinBoard, but goes only to the
Advantage CA-Roscoe prefix or ID you specify.
■ The first time you enter ZMsg mode, you are presented with the latest
ZMsg News Announcements. After you view this screen, press Enter to
continue to your messages. This announcement screen is not presented to
you again, unless you specifically request it (using PF2/14 News). If any
new ZMsg announcements are posted, this screen is issued the next time
you enter the ZMsg mode.
■ ZMsg runs in split screen mode. You may keep it active in one screen
while you work in another.
■ If you have suppression set, it is possible (but not likely) that you can miss
a message between the time you press PF3/15/CLEAR to exit ZMsg and
the time ZMsg restores your original SEND option.
35.6.3 ZMsg Function

The ZMsg Mode Screen
-- ZMsg ------------------------------------------------------------- 11.14.44

Enter prefix: or key:
Message:
GetMsgs active ------------------------------------------------------ Column 1
=================================== T O P ==================================
JOB NOTI: JES REQUEST 3 SUBMITTED TO DEST ADRPMVS3
================================ B O T T O M ===============================
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PF1 Help 2 News 3 Exit 4 Swap 5 Delete 6 FindUser
7 Backward 8 Forward 9 SetOpts 1 Top 11 Bottom 12 Refresh

The ZMsg display shown above has several fields:
Error/Status The first line of hyphens at the top. If you request an
invalid function, ZMsg issues a highlighted error message
in this field. Otherwise, the field contains the time the
screen was last updated.
Prefix/Key Enter the 2- or 3- character Advantage CA-Roscoe prefix,
or the Advantage CA-Roscoe key of the user to which you
are sending a message. If you enter data in both fields,
35-20 User Guide

only the prefix is used. ZMsg then checks that a valid

prefix or key was entered. If it is invalid, you are notified
in the Error/Status line.
<= more => This field and its arrows are displayed when there are
more messages to be viewed, but do not fit on the screen.
If '<=' is shown, press PF7/19 to scroll backward to view
more messages. If '=>' is shown, press PF8/20 to scroll
forward.
Message The line where you enter the text of the message to be sent
to another Advantage CA-Roscoe user.
Options This is the second line of hyphens. It has two fields:
1. on the far left: GetMsgs active or Suppress active
2. on the far right: COLUMN N.
GetMsgs active Indicates that the GetMsgs processing is

active. The contents of ZZZZZMSG are
processed to make them easier to read. If
GetMsgs is not active, the message text is
not modified.
Suppress active Indicates the Suppress (Advantage
CA-Roscoe message) processing is active.
This prevents any messages you receive,
while in ZMsg, from being redisplayed to
you when you exit the BBS.
Note: The function PF9/21 SETOPTS allows
you to set GetMsgs and Suppress
on or off.
Column n The columns to be displayed on the
screen. This number is either 1 to
display columns 1 through 40, or 40 to
display columns 40 through 80.
The displayed columns can be changed
using the SWAP function (PF9/21).
The current messages
This area contains all of the messages you sent, received,
and those which are in your ZZZZZMSG member. They
are surrounded by the TOP and BOTTOM file markers.

35.6.4 Viewing Messages on ZMsg

When you invoke ZMsg, you are presented with all of the messages currently
in your ZZZZZMSG member. This message display is updated every time you
press Enter or a PF-key. The time posted in the left corner of the Status/Error
line contains the time of the last screen update.
If you want to begin your ZMsg message communications with a clear

message display, use PF5/17 Delete. This deletes all messages contained in the
display (the ZZZZZMSG member).
About the messages:

■ If GetMsgs processing is not active, the contents are shown exactly as they
appear in the member. The newest messages are displayed first.
■ If GetMsgs is in effect, messages are shown in chronological order, with
the oldest shown first.
■ You can distinguish which messages you received from those you sent by
the character notation that precedes the message, and the highlighting of
the message.
– The messages you send have a low intensity attribute setting (default)
and are denoted by the following characters: *>> . These characters are
directly followed by the prefix of the recipient, and then the message
text. For example, if you send a message to the prefix USR, you see the
following in your ZMsg member:
*>>USR : THIS IS THE MESSAGE I SENT TO USR.
If GetMsgs is not active, the date, time, and your key are on the line
directly above the message(the message is in ZZZZZMSG format):
MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS MYKEY
(*>>USR) THIS IS THE MESSAGE I SENT TO USR.
– The messages you receive are highlighted, and contain the first eight
characters of the sender's Advantage CA-Roscoe key, followed by the
message text (and the date and time if GetMsgs is inactive.)
35.6.5 Sending a Message to an Advantage CA-Roscoe User

To send a one-line message to another Advantage CA-Roscoe user, fill in the
ZMsg fields. Enter the Advantage CA-Roscoe prefix or the key of the user you
are sending the message to. If the key or prefix does not exist, you receive an
error message on the Error/Status line. Enter the message text in the Message
field.
To send the message, press Enter. The message is sent, and your message field
is immediately updated to include this information. The following panel
displays this activity.
35-22 User Guide

Message Sent Results

-- ZMsg ----------------------------------------------- Message sent to pfx=ro
Enter prefix: RO or key:

Message: send this message to myself
GetMsgs active ------------------------------------------------------ Column 1
=================================== T O P ==================================
JOB NOTI: JES REQUEST 3 SUBMITTED TO DEST ADRPMVS3
ROSCOE.C: send this message to myself
>>RO : send this message to myself
================================ B O T T O M ===============================
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PF1 Help 2 News 3 Exit 4 Swap 5 Delete 6 FindUser
7 Backward 8 Forward 9 SetOpts 1 Top 11 Bottom 12 Refresh

You can see that the Status line on the top of the screen tells you that the
message was sent, and to what prefix. Because GetMsgs is active, you see only
the message and key or prefix. Notice that the new messages are added after
the existing message from the Console. In this example, the user sent a
message to himself, so the display contains both messages sent and received.
From this ZMsg panel, you can also choose any of the PF-key functions listed
on the bottom. The following functions are specific to this ZMsg screen:
PF1/13 Help Displays Help for ZMsg.
PF2/14 News Displays the current News Announcements specific to the
ZMsg mode.
PF4/16 Swap Switches text display from column 1 to 40, and back.
PF5/17 Delete Deletes your ZZZZZMSG member.
PF6/18 FindUser Checks if a specified Advantage CA-Roscoe user is signed
on.
PF9/21 SetOpts Invokes ZMsgOpts, to set up specific ZMsg options.
PF12/24 Refresh Updates the display.
ENTER Sends a message to a specified user.
CLEAR Exits ZMsg.

35.6.6 Set ZMsg Message Options

You can set up your ZMsg environment to support your processing needs or
preferences. Use PF9/21 SETOPTS, to display the ZMsgOpts panel.
ZMsg Options Panel

-- ZMsgOpts ------------------------------------------------------ PF3 to exit
Suppress ROSCOE messages when exiting ZMsg? (Y/N): N

GetMsgs processing active? (Y/N): Y
Save AWS on entry to ZMsg for ROSCOE 5.6 and lower (Y/N)? N

The above panel shows the ZMsg options:
1. Suppress Advantage CA-Roscoe messages when exiting ZMsg? (Y/N):
This controls whether you receive all of the messages that were sent to you
while you were in the BBS. If this is set to 'Y', or YES, the words "Suppress
active" appears on the right side of the Options line. When Suppress is
active, an Advantage CA-Roscoe SET SEND OPR command is issued. This
command permits only those messages sent by the operator to be
displayed at your terminal, and suppresses all other messages. When you
exit the BBS, you do not receive the Advantage CA-Roscoe messages you
already viewed in the ZMsg member.
If it is set to 'N', all Advantage CA-Roscoe messages are redisplayed on the
Response line, one at a time, after you exit the BBS.
2. GetMsgs processing active? (Y/N):
This controls how the ZMsg member is displayed. When this is set to
'Y'(default), the words "GetMsgs active" appear on the right side of the
Options line. The contents of ZZZZZMSG are processed to make them
easier to read. The message text only contains the key you sent the
message to or received the message from, a colon, and the message text. If
GetMsgs is not active, the message text is not modified. It contains the
time and date, and is in the original ZZZZZMSG format.
35-24 User Guide

Note: When GetMsgs is active, ZMsg is slower, especially if there are

many messages.

CA-SysView Interface
If the Unicenter CA-SysView interface for Advantage CA-Roscoe is active at
your site, you can check if another Advantage CA-Roscoe user is signed on.
From any of the ZMsg panels, press PF6/18 FindUser. This displays the
FindUser mode. Enter the Advantage CA-Roscoe prefix or key for the user.
You receive the information shown in the following panel:
Find User Information

-- FindUser ------------------------------------------------------------------
Enter the prefix: djh or the key:
Job name Status Time S Last command, if any

-------- ------------------------- - --------------------
ROSCOE1 TERM IO WAIT ::8.86 1 A L+ (COMM)
ROSCOE2 DSN SUBTASK ::3.31 1 A D ROSCOE.+ (COMM)
ROSCOE3 TERM IO WAIT :1:57.64 1 i b (COMM)
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
PF1 Help 2 News 3 Exit 4 5 6

The information provided through FindUser is the same as the data you
receive when you issue the following command.
LOO D ROS ST Key(or PFx)=Id
All other functions that can be executed from this panel have been previously
described.

35-26 User Guide
Chapter 36. Advantage CA-Roscoe and DB2
Advantage CA-Roscoe supports the IBM program product DATABASE2 (DB2).

This means that you can execute the DB2 Command Processor. (This is
controlled by site management. See your site management to determine if this
facility is available and how you can execute the DB2 Command Processor.)
The option Advantage CA-Roscoe/DB2 may also be available at your site. It

provides facilities that can be used by application developers and data base
administrators for the creation of DB2 applications and objects. With this
interface, these DB2 activities can be performed during your Advantage
CA-Roscoe session with other Advantage CA-Roscoe activities.
DB2: Sample Menu
ROSCOE TO DB2

1. ROSCOE USING SQL TERMINAL INPUT (RUSTI)
2. SOURCE LANGUAGE DECLARES (DECLGEN)
3. CREATE APPLICATION PLAN (BIND)
4. REPLACE APPLICATION PLAN (REBIND)
5. REMOVE APPLICATION PLAN (FREE)
6. ISSUE DB2 COMMANDS (CMNDS)
7. EXECUTE PROGRAM UNDER ETSO (RUN)
DESIRED FUNCTION ===> _ DB2 SYSTEM ===> ____
<CLEAR> PFK3
REFRESH EXIT

As illustrated by this sample menu, you can use this facility to execute the
following DB2 services:
■ Dynamic SQL Execution:
Chapter 36. Advantage CA-Roscoe and DB2 36-1

SQL statements entered into the active AWS or saved in an Advantage
CA-Roscoe library member can be executed and the results displayed at
the terminal.
■ High-Level Language Structure Definition:
COBOL, COBOL2, C or PLI language structures and SQL table declares
can be created from existing DB2 table or view definitions.
■ Application Plan Services:
Data Base Request Modules (DBRM) created through the DB2 pre-compiler
can be bound to create an application plan. Application plans can also be
replaced and removed.
■ DB2 Command Execution:
Authorized DB2 commands can be executed to request the DB2 subsystem
to perform an operator function.
■ User-Program Execution:
User-written DB2 application programs can be executed under the
Advantage CA-Roscoe/DB2 execution environment.
For detailed information about using this facility, see the Advantage
CA-Roscoe/DB2 User Guide.
36-2 User Guide

Chapter 37. DMF - Dialog Management Facility
DMF (Dialog Management Facility) is an application subsystem written in the

RPF language. It is designed to assist you in creating and maintaining
applications that are heavily panel-oriented.
When developing an application, you are presented with a series of prompt

panels that allow you to:
■ Paint the panels that you want to use in the application.
DMF takes the information you supply and builds a panel which it then
saves as a member in your library. It places no restriction on the type of
panel you can define.
■ Designate the sequence in which the panels are to be used.
All you have to do is provide the name of the member containing the next
panel to be displayed. DMF generates the linkage between the panels to
ensure that they are displayed in their proper sequence.
■ Designate how the panel information is to be processed.
When creating a panel, you can specify validation criteria for the input
fields. DMF generates an RPF program to verify those fields and invokes
the program when appropriate.
You can preset a panel field while defining the panel or through an
initialization RPF program. This flexibility means that you can include, for
example, specific default values (such as account numbers) when defining
the panel or writing an initialization program that provides variable values
(such as a user's sign-on key).
The only RPF program you need to write is the execution program that
evaluates and processes the contents of the panel. Once you have
associated this program with your panel, DMF ensures that it is invoked at
the appropriate point during the execution of your application.
Since DMF builds the panels, you only have to be concerned with formatting
the information unique to each panel. DMF provides each panel with a title
line, error message line and lines for displaying PF key assignments.
Chapter 37. DMF - Dialog Management Facility 37-1

DMF also provides a set of basic functions that you can assign to any of the PF
keys. Once you have made the assignments, DMF includes them in every
generated panel. If the terminal user presses a PF key to which you have
assigned a function, DMF handles the processing.
One of the PF key functions is a Help facility. To use this facility, all you need
do is tell DMF which DMF Help panel to use. If the individual executing the
application requests Help, DMF will display the appropriate Help panel.
With these features, DMF frees you from doing the repetitive or routine
portions of your panel-driven application.

RPF Language Guide.
37-2 User Guide

Chapter 38. ETSO - Application Execution System
ETSO (Extended Time-Sharing Option) is an application execution system that

is distributed as part of Advantage CA-Roscoe. You can use it to execute
online under Advantage CA-Roscoe most purchased or site-developed
applications without modification.
Chapter 38. ETSO - Application Execution System 38-1

38.1 Determining Executable Applications
38.1 Determining Executable Applications

The types of applications that can be executed include:
■ Applications that provide an interactive environment of their own. For
example, applications that use the Statistical Analysis System (SAS) from
the SAS Institute.
■ Applications for data entry/inquiry against a data base.
■ Applications to handle site-specific tasks that extend Advantage CA-Roscoe
capabilities. For example, an application might be written that uses a batch
program to process data in an AWS.
■ Applications that use CLISTs and REXX execs. Both explicit (EXEC) and
implicit (%) invocations are supported.
ETSO can also be used to execute interactive applications. Many of the

applications that currently run under TSO execute successfully under ETSO.
If you are interested in executing a specific application, you should contact

your site management to determine:
1. If the application is already defined to ETSO.
2. If not, what procedures should be followed to have the site evaluate the
application for execution under ETSO.
If you are interested in executing an application containing CLISTs or REXX

execs, you should contact your site management to determine if the TSO
command is supported at your site. A requirement to execute those facilities is
TSO/E 2.1 or above.
38-2 User Guide

38.2 Executing Applications Under ETSO

Conceptually, there is little difference between executing an application in
background through Advantage CA-Roscoe or online through ETSO. In both
cases, you must allocate the files used by the application and then initiate
execution of that application.
Frequently, sites provide RPF programs that handle file allocation and
application invocation. Thus, all you need to do is execute the RPF program.
The sample RPF programs shown in the following example illustrate two
methods of executing the IBM utility IEBCOPY.
ETSO: Application Execution Comparison
IEBCOPY1

>
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5...
...... ================================ T O P ==============
1 <<IEBCOPY1>> : Execute Via ETSO
2 ALLOCATE SYSPRINT SYSOUT=T
3 ALLOCATE INDD DSN=SAMPLE.INPUT,DISP=SHR
4 ALLOCATE OUTDD DSN=SAMPLE.OUTPUT,DISP=SHR
5 ALLOCATE SYSUT3 UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,2)
6 ALLOCATE SYSUT4 UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,2)
7 ALLOCATE SYSIN DSN=SAMPLE.CONTROL,DISP=SHR
8 CALL IEBCOPY

IEBCOPY2
>
> <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5...
...... ================================ T O P ==============
1 <<IEBCOPY2>> : Execute Batch Job
2 WRITE AWS T
3 '//BATCHJOB JOB . . . '
4 '// EXEC PGM=IEBCOPY'
5 '//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=T'
6 '//INDD DD DSN=SAMPLE.INPUT,DISP=SHR'
7 '//OUTDD DD DSN=SAMPLE.OUTPUT,DISP=SHR'
8 '//SYSUT3 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,2)'
9 '//SYSUT4 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,2)'
1 '//SYSIN DD DSN=SAMPLE.CONTROL,DISP=SHR'
11 ENDWRITE
12 SUBMIT

As illustrated in the upper portion of the screen, the ALLOCATE command
allocates the needed files and assigns them DD names that are referenced by
the application during execution. The CALL command is then used to identify
and initiate execution of the application.

38.2.1 Allocating Files

ETSO dynamically allocates the files that you designate (through the
ALLOCATE command) for use by the application.
Note: The term file has a special meaning to ETSO. With ETSO, you can
allocate data sets and Advantage CA-Roscoe-managed files (like an
AWS, a library member, or the terminal).
38.2.1.1 Allocating an AWS
You can allocate one or more AWSs. An AWS can be used as either an input
or output file or it can be both. To allocate the active AWS, use the AWS
keyword with the command, as in:
ALLOCATE SYSIN AWS
To allocate a specific AWS, use the AWS= keyword to identify the appropriate
AWS, as in:
ALLOCATE SYSIN AWS=SAMPLE
If an AWS is defined as an input file, the application will read from that AWS
until the end of the AWS is reached.
If an AWS is defined as both an input and output file, the input data in that
AWS is overlaid by the output data written to it when the application ends
(either successfully or unsuccessfully) or the application closes the output file.
38.2.1.2 Allocating a Library Member
A library member can also be used as both an input and output file. To
allocate a library member, include the member name with the keyword
MEM=. If the library member belongs to another user, include that user's
prefix, as in:
ALLOCATE SYSIN MEM=XYZ.CONTROL
If a library member is designated as an input file, the contents are read until
the end of the member is reached.
If you designate a library member as an output file and that member does not
currently exist, the member is created when data are written to it. (If the
non-existent member is defined as an input file, the application terminates.)
38-4 User Guide

38.2.1.3 Allocating the Terminal
To designate that the terminal is to be used as an input or output file, include

an asterisk (*) with the command, as in:
ALLOCATE SYSIN
When the terminal is used as an input or output file, you should determine
what escape sequence you want before executing the application. You need the
escape sequence to:
■ Indicate the end of input. When the application begins executing, the
keyboard is locked. The keyboard unlocks when the application requests
input. To force an end-of-input condition, enter the escape sequence in
response to a prompt for input.
■ Terminate an application. If the terminal is defined as an output file, the
keyboard is unlocked when output exceeding a screen is written to the
terminal. At that time, you can terminate the application by entering the
escape sequence.
While site management has the option of changing the default, it is usually
two consecutive periods (..). To change the escape sequence, use the SET
ESCAPE command, as in:
SET ESCAPE //
which changes the escape sequence to two consecutive slashes.
38.2.1.4 Allocating Data Sets
Any sequential data set, PDS member or temporary data set can be designated
by the ALLOCATE command. For example:
■ To designate that all read/write operations to a file are to be ignored,
follow the DD name with the keyword DUMMY, as in:
ALLOCATE IGNOREDD DUMMY
■ To designate an output file, include the appropriate SYSOUT information,
as in:
ALLOCATE SYSPRINT SYSOUT=(W,,LTRH) DEST=ABCD COPIES=2
■ To allocate space for a data set that is to be referenced by the application,
you might specify:
ALLOCATE SAMPLE DSN=ROSCOE.TEST
DISP=SHR VOL=STOR2 UNIT=338 SPACE=(TRK,(2,2))
RECFM=FB LRECL=122 BLKSIZE=798
This example illustrates the type of information you can specify with the
command. It does, however, violate the rule that a command entered from
the terminal cannot exceed the width of the screen (it cannot be
continued).

■ To use the attributes associated with a previously defined data set, use the
LIKE= operand. If the IBM DFSMS is not installed at the site, the existing
data set's DCB parameters are used. If DFSMS is installed, the attributes
copied from the existing data set are AVGREC, KEYLEN, KEYOFF,
LRECL, RECORG (or RECFM) and SPACE.
ALLOCATE SAMPLE2 DSN=ROSCOE.TEST2@LIKE=ROSCOE.TEST
SPACE=(TRK,(1,5))
In this example, the SPACE= operand is used to override the space
allocation in the existing data set.
■ To allocate a data set that is defined in the Advantage CA-Roscoe JCL, use
the JCLDD= operand, as in:
ALLOCATE MYDD JCLDD=SITEDD
where SITEDD is the DD name associated with the data set. This form of
allocation is useful for data sets that are frequently referenced by one or
more users.
■ To concatenate data sets, list the data set object names in the appropriate
order. You can concatenate a maximum of ten names. They must be bound
by parentheses.
ALLOCATE SITELIB DSN=(ROSCOE.TEST1, ROSCOE.TEST2)...
■ To allocate a temporary data set, omit the keywords DUMMY, SYSOUT=
and DSN=, as in:
ALLOCATE SYSUT3 UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,2)
38.2.2 Querying and Freeing Files

By default, you can allocate a maximum of 19 files during your session. (Your
site management has the option of defining the maximum number of files that
a user may allocate.) This includes any combination of Advantage
CA-Roscoe-managed files and data sets. If, during the course of your session,
you want to find out what files are allocated, you can use the command:
QUERY ALLOCATE
The following example illustrates the type of information that might be

displayed.
38-6 User Guide

ETSO: Sample QUERY ALLOCATE Display
>

>
....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.
DDNAME TYPE DISP MEMBER DATA-SET NAME
------ ---- ---- ------ -------------
SYSIN AWS
SYSIN1 LIBRARY pfx.CONTROL
IGNOREDD DUMMY
SYSPRINT SYSOUT CLASS=W FORM NAME=LTRH
DATASET NEW ROSCOE.TEST
DATASET NEW ROSCOE.TEST2
SYSUT3 DATASET NEW
When your application completes its execution, you should release all of the
files that you allocated. You can use the FREE command to release these files.
For example, to release the file with the DD name SYSIN, you would enter:
FREE SYSIN
To release all of the files you have allocated, enter:

FREE ALL
If any of your files are still allocated when your terminal session ends, they are
automatically released. Also, if your application dynamically allocates any files,
they are freed when your application ends.
38.2.3 Initiating Execution

To initiate execution of an application under ETSO, enter the CALL command
and the application name, as in:
CALL IEBCOPY
You can pass information to the application through the CALL command. For
example, if the application TEST expects an inventory number to be passed,
you might invoke the application by entering:
CALL TEST /SR2O5/
If, after initiating execution, you decide to end the program, you can do so by
pressing the Attention key.
You also have the option of suspending application execution when it is

prompting you for input. To do so, enter:
:U
in any unprotected field and press PF12. The cursor must immediately follow
the command.

Note: The colon and PF key assignment are the Advantage CA-Roscoe
defaults. Use the STATUS SYSTEM display to determine if your site
management has changed these defaults.
When an application is suspended, an E is displayed at the right of the

Response Line.
If you originally initiated application execution by entering a CALL command,

you can resume execution by entering:
RESUME ETSO
If you initiated execution through an RPF program, that program tells you
how to resume execution.
38-8 User Guide

38.3 Executing Distributed Application
38.3 Executing Distributed Application

One of the sample applications distributed with Advantage CA-Roscoe is
named MORTGAGE. This application, written in FORTRAN, computes the
rate, life, amount borrowed or monthly payment of a mortgage loan. If your
site has made this application available, you can perform the following steps to
execute it.
1. Allocate the necessary input and output files.
MORTGAGE uses three files. To assign FT05F001 and FT06F001 to the
terminal and FT07F001 to the active AWS, enter:
2. ALLOCATE FT5F1
3. ALLOCATE FT6F1
4. ALLOCATE FT7F1 AWS
where:
■ FT05F001 is the DD name of the input file.
■ FT06F001 is the DD name of an output files that writes the prompts
and computed results.
■ FT07F001 is the DD name of a second output file that writes the
computed mortgage tables.
5. Initiate execution of the application.
The CALL command initiates execution of applications defined to ETSO.
Therefore, to execute MORTGAGE, enter:
CALL MORTGAGE
Because of the allocations, MORTGAGE writes prompts to the terminal

requesting the necessary input and reads your responses from the terminal.
After you have entered all of the information, MORTGAGE performs its
calculations and writes the results to the terminal and the active AWS.
When the applications end, you should use the FREE command to deallocate
the files. If you do not, your allocated files are automatically released when
you sign off Advantage CA-Roscoe.
If you want to change an allocation or execute another application that uses a

file with the same DD name, you must release it before reallocating it. For
example, to reexecute MORTGAGE and have the output written to the
terminal instead of the active AWS, you would enter:
FREE FT71
ALLOCATE FT71
CALL MORTGAGE

38.4 Executing TSO Commands
38.4 Executing TSO Commands

An extension to ETSO has been created to allow you to easily switch between
the use of TSO facilities and native Advantage CA-Roscoe facilities. You can
execute CLISTs and REXX execs. These procedures are executable directly from
the Advantage CA-Roscoe command line, from within each other (nesting),
and from within ISPF dialogs. Both explicit (EXEC) and implicit (%)
invocations are supported.
Use the TSO command to execute TSO commands from within an RPF or from
the Advantage CA-Roscoe command line. The TSO command can be used in
place of or in conjunction with a CALL command. For example, to allocate
files necessary for logging onto ISPF, enter:
TSO EXEC 'TSTPRN.TSTPRN)1.CLIST(LOGTSO)'
Or, to execute the CLIST MYEXEC from your TSO CLIST library, enter:
TSO %MYEXEC
If the TSO command invokes a full-screen process, that process will take over
the screen. If the process is a line-mode TSO command, output will be written
to the execution area.
38-10 User Guide

Chapter 39. RPF - Roscoe Programming Facility
RPF is a high-level, interactive structured programming language. It supports

a full arithmetic capability, built-in functions and a variety of variables that are
assigned values by RPF and the user. Its commands can be used to:
■ Converse with the terminal user by issuing line-by-line and/or full-screen
displays.
■ Validate data entered by the user against specified criteria.
■ Choose among several possible courses of action based upon the data
entered by the user.
■ Transfer control to another location within the same program or to other
programs.
Perhaps its most important feature is that RPF is designed to take full
advantage of all Advantage CA-Roscoe commands and facilities. All of the
commands can be incorporated without modification into RPF programs. By
using Advantage CA-Roscoe commands with RPF's interactive language,
error-prone and complicated tasks can be simplified so that it becomes easy to:
■ Enter, verify, and edit data.
■ Create, save, access, and modify library members.
■ Build, verify, submit, and track jobs.
■ Retrieve, examine and, optionally, save resulting output.
■ Control utility functions and housekeeping tasks performed against OS
data sets.
RPF programs are stored in the Advantage CA-Roscoe library, with names that
follow standard Advantage CA-Roscoe naming conventions.
Chapter 39. RPF - Roscoe Programming Facility 39-1

To execute an RPF program, enter its name in the Command Area and press
the Enter key. For example, assume the RPF program that updates a customer
master file is saved as the member CUSTOMER. To execute this program, you
would enter:
CUSTOMER
It might prompt for information by displaying a full-screen panel such as the

one shown in the following example.
RPF: Sample Full-Screen Panel

U P D A T E C U S T O M E R M A S T E R F I L E
COMPANY NAME: _ TELEPHONE:
CONTACT: ADDRESS:
TITLE:
CONTRACT NO: LAST ORDER DATE:
ENTER "X" IF NO MORE UPDATES:

If the RPF program you wish to execute belongs to another user, you must
precede the name with that user's prefix (for example, AAA.CUSTOMER).
Occasionally, an RPF program may be given a name that is also the name of
an Advantage CA-Roscoe command (SAVE, for example). When this occurs,
more explicit invocation of the program is required to avoid executing the
Advantage CA-Roscoe command. To explicitly execute an RPF program,
precede the program name with the EXEC command. For example, to execute
an RPF program named SAVE, you would enter:
EXEC SAVE
For additional information about the RPF language and how to write RPF
programs, see the Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive Environment RPF Language
Guide. You can also use TRAINING, which is an interactive application that
introduces RPF. For information about using this learning aid, enter:
HELP TRAINING
39-2 User Guide

Chapter 40. SKETCH - CICS/IMS Panel Generator
SKETCH is a menu-driven RPF application that simplifies the generation of

panels used by programs running under:
■ CICS. SKETCH generates BMS (Basic Mapping Support) macros that define
panels to CICS applications.
■ IMS. SKETCH generates the MFS (Message Format Services) statements
that define panels to IMS applications.
Using just a few prompt panels, you can use SKETCH to:
■ Design a BMS or MFS map. The input can be from: 1) your responses to
SKETCH prompts, 2) an RPF panel, or 3) an existing map.
■ Specify individual fields within a map. Default values for the fields (for
example, attributes and colors) are automatically supplied by SKETCH.
You have the option of modifying the site-defined default values that are
used in generating the macros/statements defining: 1) all maps and map
fields, or 2) a particular map.
■ Generate the macros/statements used in creating the map(s).
Before generating the macros, you have the option of displaying a
prototype map, thus ensuring that the map you are about to generate is
correct.
■ Generate the JCL to:
– Assemble and link-edit the BMS macros. You can also designate
whether the resulting output is to be used in an Assembler, COBOL or
PL/I application program.
– Create the online blocks for the MFS statements. You can designate
whether the resulting output is to be placed in the production or test
library.
While a familiarity with BMS or IMS is helpful, it is not essential when

defining the panels and then generating them to create maps. SKETCH allows
you to create and maintain panels by using the WYSIWYG (What You See Is
What You Get) method.

Extended Development Tools Guide.
Chapter 40. SKETCH - CICS/IMS Panel Generator 40-1

40-2 User Guide
Appendixes

A.1 Beginning a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.2 Establishing Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.3 Signing On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A.4 Ending an Advantage CA-Roscoe Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
A.5 Using a Typewriter Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A.6 Using Advantage CA-Roscoe Commands and Facilities . . . . . . . A-8
A.7 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A.8 Viewing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
A.9 Non-Executable Commands and Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
User Guide
Appendix A. Using Typewriter Devices With
Advantage CA-Roscoe
To Advantage CA-Roscoe, a 'typewriter device' is an IBM 3767 or any device

that operates in a manner similar to a Teletype terminal.

A.1 Beginning a Session
A.1 Beginning a Session

Before signing on to Advantage CA-Roscoe, you must first establish connection
between your typewriter device and your site's computer.
A-2 User Guide

A.2 Establishing Connection
A.2 Establishing Connection

Your site management will tell you what telephone number to dial to establish
connection with the computer. After dialing the number, the computer
'answers' with a high-pitched tone. Turn the terminal on. Place the hand set in
the acoustic coupler (located by, or as a part of, the terminal), or put the mode
on data mode, depending on the type of terminal connection. When the green
terminal connection light lights up, or the terminal clicks the keyboard open,
depress the RETURN key one or more times until Advantage CA-Roscoe
responds with a sign-on prompt message.

A.3 Signing On
A.3 Signing On
At typewriter devices, Advantage CA-Roscoe issues a sign-on prompt like the
one below:
SON03 ENTER KEY FOR CA-Roscoe version - date time
To sign on, type the sign-on key given to you by your site management and
depress the RETURN key.
If RACF protection is in effect at your site and group codes are used, the
group code should be entered with the sign-on key (separated by a slash), as
in:
sign-on key/group code
If the account has previously been assigned a password (either by you or site
management), the following prompt is issued:
SON04 ENTER PASSWORD
After this prompt is issued, the terminal types meaningless characters in the
field where the password is to be entered. This provides a mask, so that other
users are not able to see your password as you enter it.
A new password can be entered at the same time as the current password. The
two passwords must be separated by a slash, as follows:
current password/new password
Once you have signed on, Advantage CA-Roscoe responds in a manner

identical to that found at 3270-type terminals (that is, sign-on procedures are
executed, the sign-on message is displayed, and so forth.).
A-4 User Guide

A.4 Ending an Advantage CA-Roscoe Session
A.4 Ending an Advantage CA-Roscoe Session

To sign off of Advantage CA-Roscoe, enter:
OFF
To sign off of Advantage CA-Roscoe and redisplay the sign-on prompt, enter:
OFFON

A.5 Using a Typewriter Device

Teletype terminals operate in half-duplex mode (that is, the terminal can either
send or receive data but not both at once). When Advantage CA-Roscoe is
reading data from the terminal, the terminal is locked. It is unlocked when
Advantage CA-Roscoe is either writing to the terminal or waiting for a
response from the terminal. Advantage CA-Roscoe normally notifies you that
the terminal is unlocked and ready for input by typing the prompt character,
the backarrow (<-). On some terminals, the backarrow is replaced by an
underscore (_).
If a line sent from the terminal to Advantage CA-Roscoe cannot be received

due to noise on the phone line, Advantage CA-Roscoe displays the following
message:
CMD27: TERMINAL I/O ERROR - DATA LOST
Retype and resend the line. If such an error occurs while the terminal is
executing an RPF program, the program is terminated. If the error occurs
while Advantage CA-Roscoe is attempting to send data to the terminal, retry
procedures are executed. In the rare case that errors are found during the retry
procedures (indicating severe communication problems), Advantage
CA-Roscoe signs the terminal off. Attempt to reestablish connection from
another terminal.
Signoff procedures may be forced by Advantage CA-Roscoe in response to any

of the following conditions:
■ The operator requests Advantage CA-Roscoe to sign you off.
■ You turn the power off or hang up the phone.
■ Unrecoverable error conditions occur on the phone line, leaving the line
inoperable.
When any of these conditions occur, your are signed off. Any data in an AWS
is saved in your library as the member SAVAWSnn where 'nn' is a unique
identifier.
Teletype Terminal Keyboard:

CTRL-E Keys Depressing the CTRL and E keys in unison cancels an input
line, causing Advantage CA-Roscoe to reissue a sequence
number prompt.
CTRL-I Keys Depressing the CTRL and I keys in unison simulates a
hardware TAB key. This action is recognized only if tab
positions have been defined through the TAB command. On
most Teletype terminals, the carrier or cursor is not moved
by this action.
A-6 User Guide

CTRL-S Keys Depressing the CTRL and S keys in unison simulates a

RETURN key, transmitting data from the terminal to
RETURN Key (or CR)
Transmits data from the terminal to Advantage CA-Roscoe.
Backslash Key Erases the last character entered. It can also be used to erase
entire words. (On some models, this function is handled by
the shift-L keys.)
In addition to the above, the software BREAK feature is supported as follows:

■ To terminate output, depress the RETURN key.
■ To resume listing after a pause, depress the CTRL-S keys.

A.6 Using Advantage CA-Roscoe Commands and Facilities
A.6 Using Advantage CA-Roscoe Commands and Facilities

The following commands are available only at typewriter devices:
BREAK Controls the number of lines written to the terminal before pausing.
BREAK should only be used if the terminal does not have a
hardware BREAK key. Output is continued upon receiving a
CTRL-S. Output is terminated upon receiving a carriage return.
SCALE Writes a Scale Line identical in function to the Scale Line displayed
at 3270-type terminals.
TTY Sets the speed characteristics for the terminal. Site management
will tell you of the value associated with each terminal type and the
site defaults.
WIDTH Physically changes the width of the print line from the default
value to a value between 72 and 132 characters.
A-8 User Guide

A.7 Using the Data Set Facility
A.7 Using the Data Set Facility

Primary commands (such as READ DSN) that do not cause a full-screen
display are supported. Commands that require interaction through a panel (for
example, DSN) may not be used at a typewriter device.
If a PAUSE state is entered without a DETACH command being issued, one is

assumed. This means that Selections Lists and data cannot be displayed at the
terminal but may be processed by commands such as COPY DSN or READ
DSN. Note that the DETACH need not be an explicit DETACH DSN. This
permits the data set process to be suspended over a pause and allows a future
RPF program or primary command to continue to access the data/Selection
List.

A.8 Viewing Job Output
A.8 Viewing Job Output

Use the SET DISPLAY command to designate the length of the line to be
printed (for example, SET DISPLAY 1 80 causes the first 80 characters of the
line to be printed). If the device supports lines longer than 80 characters, you
can set the appropriate line length (for example SET DISPLAY 1 132). (The
maximum line length you can specify is 150.) If the line is longer than 132
characters, characters in excess of 132 are wrapped to the next line.
Use the ATTACH JOB command to begin printing the output. After the
number of lines specified by the BREAK command have printed, the carriage
stops at the right side of the device. To continue listing the job, enter:
ATTACH JOB *
A-10 User Guide

A.9 Non-Executable Commands and Facilities

The following commands are not executable at typewriter devices:
■ All line commands and SET DISPLAY NUMX.
■ INCL and EXCL. (SEARCH and OMIT may be used.)
■ SET
■ All SET-related commands used to control the 3270-type terminal display
(for example, SET AWSDSPLY and SET SCROLL).
The following facilities are not available at typewriter devices:

■ Split-screen facility
■ PF/PA key support
■ RPF panel facility

A-12 User Guide

Index
> (Greater Than Sign)

Special Characters As Special Character 4-5, 4-6
- (Reexecuting Last Command) 2-6
-INC Statement Expansion
Changing 6-18 Numerics
Using 28-8 3270-Type Devices
,, (Representing Last Line) 2-5 DELETE Key 16-7
:C (To Copy Screen) ERASE EOF Key
Using 15-8 Control Use Of 6-16, 16-6
:E (To End Split Screens) Screen Components
Using 8-11 Command Area 8-2
:L (To Lock Screen) Execution Area 8-6
Using 8-14 System Control Area 8-3—8-5
:P (To Print Screen) Screen Format
Using 7-2 Change 8-12
:S (To Split Screen) Full/Partial 8-7
Using 8-8 Terminal Lock 8-13, 8-14
:SK (PRINT Formatting Pseudo-Command) 7-4 Signing Off 10-13
:TOP (PRINT Formatting Pseudo-Command) 7-4 Signing On 10-2—10-3
:W (To Swap Split Screens)
Using 8-11
.SK (PRINT Formatting Pseudo-Command) 7-4 A
.TOP (PRINT Formatting Pseudo-Command) 7-4 A (Destination) Line Command 15-4
< (Less Than Sign) With Move 21-3
As Special Character 4-5, 4-6 Access Attribute, Library Member
* (Asterisk) Changing Default 6-18
As Reserved Character 2-6 AD (Destination/Drop) Line Command
Deferring Command Execution 2-6 With COPY 15-4
Representing Addmsg Function (BBS) 35-5
Name of Last FETCHed, SAVEd, UPDATEd Advantage CA-Roscoe
Member 23-5 Controlling Info Messages 6-18
& Documentation, User 12-2
Change Command Delimiter 6-16 HELP Facility 12-3—12-4
+INC Statement Expansion Online Tutorial 12-5
Changing 6-18 Sign On
Using 28-7 From Advantage CA-Roscoe 10-4, 10-5
+ (Plus Sign) From CICS 10-6
As Reserved Character 2-7 From TSO 10-7
Redisplaying Last Executed Command 2-14 From VTAM 10-3
Sign-on Screen 10-2—10-3
Index X-1
AJOB Command ATTACH Command (continued)
Job Execution Status 29-2 Data Set Facility (continued)
Job Facility GDG 25-13
Menu 28-9 LIBRARIAN Module 25-15—25-16
Selection List 28-13 LIBRARIAN Selection List 25-2
Job Information 29-7 Menu 24-2
AllFusion CA-Librarian PDS Member 25-15—25-16
-INC Statement Expansion PDS Selection List 25-18
Controlling 6-18 Volume Selection List 25-27
Attaching Module 25-15 Job Output 30-2—30-5
Attaching Selection List 25-2 Library Facility
Using EXPORT Command 27-55 Member 32-9
AllFusion CA-Panvalet Menu 31-3—31-4
EXPORT Command Selection List 32-2
Using 27-55 VTOC Selection List 25-32—25-33
ALLOCATE Command Attributes
Data Sets Job Output File
Using 27-2, 27-3 Change Using Command 30-16
Under ETSO 38-4—38-5 Change Using Job Menu 30-17
Allocate Function Panel Change Using Selection List 30-18
Description Of 27-3 Change Using STATUS JOB
Using 27-3 Display 30-22—30-23
Allocate SMS Function Panel Displaying 30-22—30-23
Description Of 27-6 Library Member
Using 27-3 Changing Default Access 6-18
Allocating Files Automatic
Data Set Under ETSO 38-5 Indentation
Data Sets 27-2, 27-3 Controlling 6-16
Library Member 38-4 Using 18-13
Terminal 38-5 Line Insertion
ALTER Command Controlling 6-16
AWS Attributes 13-5 Using 18-7
Job File Attributes 30-16 Signoff
Library Member Attributes 34-2, 34-3 Controlling 6-16
Altering Site Defaults 6-13
AWS Attributes 13-5 Terminal Lock
Job File Attributes Controlling 6-18
Commands 30-16 Site Defaults 6-13
Job Facility 30-17 AWS
Selection List 30-18 Adding String To Line
STATUS JOB Display 30-22—30-23 At Beginning 14-2
Library Member Attributes At End 14-2
Command 34-2, 34-3 Between Specific Columns 14-2
Function Panel 34-13 Attaching 13-3
Selection List 34-3, 34-4 Bringing Data Into 13-4
Arithmetic symbols (syntax diagrams) xxvii Creating 13-6, 13-7
ATTACH Command Deleting Contents
AWS 13-3 Using Line Commands 16-4
Controlling Pausing 6-16 Using Primary Commands (By Line
Data Set Facility Number) 16-2
Catalog Selection List 25-7, 25-8, 25-9—25-11 Using Primary Commands (Lines Containing
Data Set 25-25, 25-26 String) 16-2
X-2 User Guide

AWS (continued) AWS (continued)
Detaching 13-8 Recovery (continued)
Discarding Set Attributes 13-6
Change Attribute 13-5 Renaming 13-5
Display/Change Attributes 17-5 Renumber Contents of
Explicit 13-9 Any Time 22-1—22-2
Display/Change Attributes 17-1—17-6 Reorder Contents 14-3
Editing Data Save Contents of 23-2
Changed Line Indicator (Controlling) 6-16 Selecting 13-14
Controlling Column Boundaries 4-1—4-6 AWS Attributes
Editing Data (Character Strings) Change 13-5
Tracking Changes 14-8—14-9 Display/Change 17-1—17-6
Using Line Commands 14-7 Establish 13-6, 13-7
Using Primary Command 14-6, 14-7 AWS Display
Editing Data (Characters) Display Format 5-7, 5-8
Using Line Commands 14-5 Display/Change 17-1—17-6
Using Primary Command 14-4 Sequence Number Display 5-6
Entering Data
Controlling Number of Inserted Lines 6-16
From Command Area 18-11 B
Using a Mask 18-9—18-10 B (Destination) Line Command 15-4
Using Automatic Line Insertion 18-7 With Move 21-3
Using I and IB Line Commands 18-6, 18-7 BASIC Mode
Using PF Key 18-11 Character Translation/Recognition 3-3
Using Primary Commands 18-2—18-5 BB (Destination) Line Command 15-4
Using TE Line Command 18-8 With Move 21-3
With Automatic Indentation 18-13 BBD (Destination/Drop) Line Command
Fill Character, Trailing 6-18 With COPY 15-4
introduction 13-1 BBS
Keyword on System Information Line 8-3 Overview 35-1, 35-2
Locate/Display Data BBSOpt Mode 35-13
All Occurrences (Modifiable BBSSAV 35-14
Display) 20-5—20-7 BD (Destination/Drop) Line Command
All Occurrences (Non-Modifiable With COPY 15-4
Display) 20-6, 20-7 Boundaries
By Occurrence, Line Commands 20-3 See Column Boundaries
By Occurrence, Primary Command 20-2 BOUNDS Line Command 4-5, 4-6
Contents in HEX 5-7, 5-8 BulletinBoard System
Customizing Display 20-9 Addmsg Function 35-9, 35-10
Non-Matching Occurrence (Modifiable Create Message Threads 35-9, 35-10
Display) 20-5 Create Thread Entries 35-9, 35-10
Non-Matching Occurrence (Non-Modifiable deleting unwanted thread 35-15
Display) 20-7 Edit Mode 35-10, 35-11
Positioning Display Error/Status Line 35-4
By Pointer Position 13-10 GetMsgs Processing 35-21
Using Line Commands 13-12 Locate Advantage CA-Roscoe Users 35-25
Using Primary Command 13-11 Message Display Description 35-22
Print Contents of 7-2 Message Selection List 35-4
Reattaching 13-13 News Announcements 35-2
Recovery Overview 35-1
Change Attribute 13-5 Print
Display/Change Attributes 17-5 Message Thread 35-17, 35-18
Index X-3
BulletinBoard System (continued) Catalog Selection List (continued)
Print (continued) Reattaching 26-10
Thread Entry 35-15 Search for String
Prune Profile 35-15 All Occurrences 26-4, 26-5
Reply/Insert Mode 35-9, 35-10 By Occurrence 26-3
Send Messages 9-5 Non-Matching Occurrences 26-4, 26-5
Sending Messages to Advantage CA-Roscoe Selecting Different Level 25-37
Users CB Line Command 15-3
Description 35-19 CC Line Command 15-3
Using ZMsg 35-22—35-24 CDSN Command 27-56
Session parameters, Set 35-13 Center Text
Set Defaults Using Line Commands 19-3, 19-4
Options (Utility) 35-13 Using Primary Command 19-2
Printer 35-14 CHAIN Command 34-7
Read Message Attribute 35-14 Character Set
Unread Message Attribute 35-14 Description Of 2-5
Signing On 35-2 Display/Change Using STATUS AWS 17-5
Suppress Message Processing 35-21 Language
Utility (PF1/13) 35-12—35-18 Changing 6-16
View News Announcements 35-14 Defining 3-2
Viewing Message Thread 35-6 Reserved Characters 2-5, 2-6
Viewing Thread Entries 35-7, 35-8 Translation Mode
ZMsg Function (PF12/24) 35-19—35-24 Changing 6-18
ZMsg Mode 9-5 Defining 3-3
Character Translation
Display/Change 17-5
C Character, Replace
C Line Command 15-3 Using Line Command 14-5
CALL Command 38-7 Using Primary Command 14-4
Cancel Function (BBS) 35-11 CICS
Cancel Job Signing On Via 10-6
Using Job Facility 30-29 COLS
Using Selection List 30-30 Field on System Information Line 8-6
Capitalize Text Column Boundaries
Initial Cap Display/Change 6-2, 6-3
Using Line Commands 19-6 Using STATUS AWS 17-3
Using Primary Command 19-5 Session Change
Lowercase All Using BOUNDS Line Command 4-5, 4-6
Using Line Commands 19-5 Using SET BOUNDS 4-4
Using Primary Command 19-5 Using STATUS AWS 4-3
Printing 7-3 Using STATUS DISPLAY 4-3
Uppercase All Temporary Change 4-2
Using Line Commands 19-5 Comma
Using Primary Command 19-5 repeat symbol, use in xxx
CATALOG Command 27-9 Command Area
Catalog Selection List Change Size of 6-16
Attaching 25-7, 25-8 Description 8-2
Description Of 25-9—25-11 Use To Enter AWS Data 18-11
Detaching 26-2 Commands
Function Codes Correcting Invalid/Incomplete 2-10
List Of 25-9—25-11 Defaults, Site-defined 6-13, 6-14
X-4 User Guide

Commands (continued) CopyMem Function 35-10
Deferring Command Execution 2-6 COPYS Command
Delimiter From Data Set Facility 27-11
Changing 6-16 From Library Facility 34-5
Using 2-2 Into AWS
Evaluation Hierarchy 2-9 From AWS 15-7—15-8
Execution Hierarchy 2-9 From Screen 15-7—15-8
Redisplaying Executed COPYX Command
In Command Area 2-14 From Data Set Facility 27-11
In Execution Area 2-13 From Library Facility 34-5
Reexecuting 2-6 Into AWS
Types Of 2-2, 2-3 From AWS 15-7—15-8
COMPRESS Command 27-18 From Screen 15-7—15-8
Compress PDS 27-18 Create AWS 13-6, 13-7
COPY Command CREATE Command 13-6
From Data Set Facility 27-11 CSR (SCRL Field Value) 8-4
Into AWS CT Line Command 15-3
From AWS 15-7—15-8 Cursor Positioning
From Job Output 30-19 After Command Execution
From Library Facility 34-5 Changing 6-16
From Screen 15-7—15-8 After Lines Inserted
Specific Information 15-7—15-8 Changing 6-16
Within AWS 15-2
Copy Function Panel
Data Set Facility D
Descripiton 27-14 D
Displaying 27-14 Line Command 16-4
Library Facility DASD Space, Release Unused 27-47
Description 34-7, 34-8 Data Set Display
Displaying 34-7, 34-8 Display Format 5-7, 5-8
Copying Data Sequence Number Display 5-6
Between Screens Data Set Facility
All or Range 15-11, 15-12 Attaching
Based on String 15-12 Catalog Selection List 25-7, 25-8, 25-9—25-11
Into AWS Data Set 25-25, 25-26
All or Range 15-7—15-8 GDG 25-13
Based on String 15-9 LIBRARIAN Module 25-15—25-16
From AWS 15-7—15-8 LIBRARIAN Selection List 25-2—25-5
From Data Set Facility (Commands) 27-11 Menu 24-2, 24-3
From Data Set Facility (Function Panel) 27-14 PDS Member 25-15—25-16
From Data Set Facility (Selection List) 27-17 PDS Selection List 25-18
From Job Output 30-19 Volume Selection List 25-27
From Screen 15-7—15-8 VTOC Selection List 25-32—25-33
Using :C 15-8 Cataloging 27-9
Using Commands 34-5 Define GDG
Using Function Panel 34-7, 34-8 Function Panel 27-22
Using Selection List 34-8, 34-9 Defining Alias 27-19, 27-20
Within AWS Detaching 26-2
Description 15-2 Function Panels 24-9
Using Line Commands 15-3 Inquiring About
Using Repeat Line Command 15-5, 15-6 Data Set (Selection List) 27-32
Volume 27-36
Index X-5
Data Set Facility (continued) Data Sets (continued)
Menu Description 24-3—24-6 Renaming (continued)
Printing 27-40 Using Selection List 27-51
Releasing Space 27-47 Searching For String
Renaming 27-48 Lines Limit, Changing 6-16
Search for String Lines Limit, Site Default 6-14
All Occurrences 26-4, 26-5 Uncataloging 27-53
By Occurrence 26-3 Writing To
Non-Matching Occurrences 26-4, 26-5 Controlling Directory Updates 6-18
Selecting Display 25-37 Description 27-54
Selection Lists Using EDSN 27-55
Function Code Hierarchy 24-11 Using EXPORT 27-54
Overview 24-11 Date Format
Refreshing 24-14 Changing 6-16
Uncataloging 27-53 Display Current 6-15
Data Sets Site Defined 6-14
Allocating DB Line Command 16-4
Command 27-2, 27-3 DB2 and Advantage CA-Roscoe 36-1
Attaching 25-25, 25-26 DD Line Command 16-4
Cataloging 27-9 Default values (syntax diagrams) xxxi
COMPRESS Message Control DEFINE ALIAS Command 27-20
Changing 6-16 DEFINE GDG Command 27-22
Compressing PDS Defining
Description 27-18 Alias Function Panel
Copying Description 27-20, 27-21
Using Command 27-11 Displaying 27-19, 27-20
Using Function Panel 27-14 Using 27-19, 27-20
Using Selection List 27-17 GDG Function Panel
Define Alias Description 27-22
Using Command 27-19, 27-20 Displaying 27-22
Using Function Panel 27-20, 27-21 DELETE Command
Define GDG AWS Contents 16-2
Using Command 27-22 Data Set Object 27-25, 27-26
Using Function Panel 27-22 Library Member 34-10
Deleting Delete Confirmation Panel
Using Command 27-25, 27-26 Data Set Facility 27-30
Using Function Panel 27-26 Library Facility
Using Selection List 27-29 Description Of 34-11
Display Contents in HEX 5-7, 5-8 Detaching 34-11
DSCB Empty Control 6-16 Delete Function Panel
Editing 27-55 Data Set Facility 27-26
Function Panel 27-3 Library Facility 27-26
Inquiring About 27-32 DELETE Hardware Key 16-7
Migration Recall Control 6-16 DELETES Command 16-2
Printing DELETEX Command 16-2
Using Command 27-40 Deleting
Using Function Command 27-41 AWS Contents
Using Selection List 27-45 Using ERASE EOF Key (Controlling
Releasing Space 27-47 Extent) 6-16
Renaming Using Line Commands 16-4
Using Command 27-48 Using Primary Commands (By Line
Using Function Panel 27-48 Number) 16-2
X-6 User Guide

Deleting (continued) Display Margins (continued)
AWS Contents (continued) Temporary Change 5-3, 5-4
Using Primary Commands (Lines Containing Display Mode
String) 16-2 Display/Change Using STATUS AWS 17-4
Data Set/Member/Module Displaying
Using Command 27-25, 27-26 Data in HEX 5-7, 5-8
Using Function Panel 27-26 DMF, Description Of 37-1
Using Selection List 27-29 Documentation, Description of User 12-2
Library Member DoPrint Mode (BBS) 35-15—35-18
Function Panel 34-10 DROP Command
Selection List 34-11 With Data Set, Member, Module 26-9
Using Command 34-10 DS Line Command 16-5
Print Request 7-11 DSB Line Command 16-5
Deleting thread entries 35-15 DSN
Delimiter Keyword on System Information Line 8-3
Command 6-16 DST Line Command 16-5
PF/PA Keys 6-18 DT Line Command 16-4
String 2-7 DU Line Command 16-5
Delimiters DX Line Command 16-5
syntax diagrams, use in xxviii DXB Line Command 16-5
DETACH Command DXT Line Command 16-5
Job Output 30-7
Library Facility 33-2
Detaching E
AWS 13-8 E Line Command 14-7
Data Set Facility 26-2 EB Line Command 14-7
Job Output Edit Messages (BBS) 35-10, 35-11
Using Commands 30-7 EditAgain Function (BBS) 35-11
Using Job Facility 30-7 Editing Data
Library Facility 33-2 BulletinBoard System Messages 35-10, 35-11
Dialog Management Facility (DMF) Changing Indicator Option 6-16
Description Of 37-1 Character
Discarding AWS Using Line Commands 14-5, 14-7
Display/Change Attributes 17-5 Using Primary Command 14-4, 14-6, 14-7
Explicitly 13-9 Track Changes 14-8—14-9
DISPLAY Command EDSN Command 27-55
Job Execution Status 29-2 EE Line Command 14-7
Number of Jobs in Class 29-6 Entering Data In AWS
Status of Initiators 29-5 From Command Area 18-11
Status of Jobs in Class 29-4 Using a Mask 18-9—18-10
Display Format Using Automatic Line Insertion 18-7
Display Data in HEX 5-7, 5-8 Using Line Commands
Display Information About 6-2, 6-3 I and IB 18-6, 18-7
Sequence Numbers TE 18-8
Display Margins 5-6 Using PF Key 18-11
Display Margins Using Primary Commands
Display/Change INPUT Command 18-2—18-4
Description 6-2, 6-3 INPUT TEXTENTR Command 18-5
Using SET DISPLAY 5-5 With Automatic Indentation 18-13
Using STATUS AWS 17-4 ERASE EOF Key
Using STATUS DISPLAY 5-4 Controlling Extent of Deletion 6-16
Index X-7
ERASE EOF Key (continued) Forced Signoff
Using to Delete (AWS Data) 16-6 3270-Type Devices
ET Line Command 14-7 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
ETSO Formatting
Allocating Data
Data Sets 38-5 Using Automatic Indentation 6-16
Files 38-4—38-5 Using Line Commands 19-11, 19-12
Terminal 38-5 Using Primary Command 19-10, 19-11
Applications Using TAB Facility 18-14, 18-15
Executing 38-3 FRAM (SCRL Field Value) 8-4
Change Escape Sequence 6-18 FREE Command 38-7
Determining Executable Applications 38-2 FULL (SCRL Field Value) 8-4
Executing
Applications 38-3, 38-7
TSO Procedures 38-10 G
Freeing Files 38-6 Generation Data Group (GDG)
Overview 38-1 See Data Set Facility
Querying Files 38-6 GetMsgs Processing (BBS) 35-21
Release Allocated Files 38-6 GROUP CODE Field on Sign-on Screen 10-3
Resume Application Execution 38-7
Suspend Application Execution 38-7
EXCL Command
H
HALF (SCRL Field Value) 8-4
AWS 20-5, 20-6
HELP Command 12-3—12-4
Job Output 30-9
HELP Facility 12-3—12-4
Hex
EXCL Line Command 20-7
Locate String In 20-10, 20-11
Execution Area 8-6
Hexadecimal Display
Exit Function (BBS) 35-3
Setting 5-7, 5-8
EXPLICIT
Hierarchy
LIB ALTER Operand 34-3, 34-4
Command Evaluation 2-9
EXPORT Command 27-54
HLP Keyword on System Information Line 8-3
Extended Time-Sharing Option
See ETSO
I
F I Line Command 18-6, 18-7
IB Line Command 18-6, 18-7
FETCH Command 34-6
Ignore! Function (BBS) 35-5
Fill Character
IM Line Command 18-9
AWS 6-18
IMPLICIT
Display/Change 17-4
LIB ALTER Operand 34-3, 34-4
FILL Command 14-2
INCL Command
FindUser Function (BBS) 35-25
AWS 20-5, 20-6
FIRST Command
Job Output 30-9
AWS 20-2
Job Output
INCL Line Command 20-7
Locate String 30-8
Initial Cap Text
Position Within 30-12
Using Line Commands 19-6
Library Facility 33-3, 33-4
Using Primary Command 19-5
FIRST Line Command 20-3
INPUT Command
Firstnew Function (BBS) 35-5, 35-6
Entering Data 18-2—18-4
Using Power Typing 18-5
X-8 User Guide

Insert Data In AWS Job Output (continued)
From Command Area 18-11 Copy to AWS (continued)
Using a Mask 18-9—18-10 Primary Commands 30-19
Using Automatic Line Insertion 18-7 Selection List 30-21
Using Line Commands Description 30-4
I and IB 18-6, 18-7 Detaching
TE 18-8 Using Commands 30-7
Using PF Key 18-11 Using Job Facility 30-7
Using Primary Commands Display Format 5-7, 5-8
INPUT Command 18-2—18-4 Displaying
INPUT TEXTENTR Command 18-5 Data in HEX 5-7, 5-8
With Automatic Indentation 18-13 Execution Status 29-2
Internal Pointer Positioning File Attributes 30-22—30-23
AWS 13-10 Sequence Number Displaying 5-6
File Attributes
Change Using Command 30-16
J Change Using Job Menu 30-17
JCK Command 28-2, 28-3 Change Using Modifiable
JCL Syntax Checker 28-2, 28-3 Display 30-22—30-23
JES Printers Change Using Selection List 30-18
Change Location Positioning Display
For Request 7-9 Between Files 30-12
For Session 7-9 To String 30-8
Displaying Locations 7-9 Printing Files
Print At 7-2 Using Commands 30-25
JOB Using Job Menu 30-25
Keyword on System Information Line 8-3 Using Job Section List 30-28
Job Facility Reattaching 30-14, 30-15
Alter Job Searching For String
Display Description 30-17 All Occurrences 30-9
Using 30-17 Line Limit, Changing 6-18
Cancel Job 30-29 Lines Limit, Site Default 6-14
Copy Job Non-Matching Occurrences 30-9
Display Description 30-20 Specific Occurrence 30-8
Using 30-19 SYSOUT Class Requirements 30-4
Detaching Job 30-7 Job Selection List
Displaying Alter Job 30-18
Menu 28-9 Copy Job 30-21
Selection List 28-13 Job Status 30-24
Operator Control 28-15 Print Job 30-28
Print Job Join Lines
Display Description 30-27 Using Line Commands 19-17
Using 30-25 Using Primary Command 19-14, 19-15
Job Information
AJOB Command 29-7
Job Output K
Attaching 30-2—30-5 KEY Field on Sign-on Screen 10-2
Cancel Job Keywords (syntax diagrams) xxvii
Using Commands 30-28
Using Job Facility 30-29, 30-30
Copy to AWS
Job Menu 30-19
Index X-9
L Library Member (continued)
Creating 23-2
Language Character Set Deleting
Changing 6-16 Using Command 34-10
LAST Command Using Function Panel 34-10
AWS 20-2 Using Selection List 34-11
Job Output Display Format 5-7
Locate String 30-8 Displaying
Position Within 30-12 Data in HEX 5-7, 5-8
Library Facility 33-3, 33-4 Format of Display 32-10
LAST Line Command 20-3 HEX display 5-7, 5-8
Lastread Function (BBS) 35-5 Inquiring About 34-13
LC Line Command 19-5 Position Display
LCB Line Command 19-5 To Named Line 33-8
LCC Line Command 19-5 To Specific Line 33-8
LCT Line Command 19-5 Printing
LIB Using Command 34-15
Keyword on System Information Line 8-3 Using Function Panel 34-15
LIBRARIAN Selection List Using Selection List 34-18
Detaching 26-2 Renaming
Reattaching 26-10 Using 34-20
Search for String Using Command 34-20
All Occurrences 26-4, 26-5 Using Function Panel 34-20
By Occurrence 26-3 Using Selection List 34-21
Non-Matching Occurrences 26-4, 26-5 Save AWS Contents As 23-2
Selecting Different Level 25-37 Search for String
LIBRARY Command 31-3—31-4 All Occurrences 33-4
Library Facility Non-Matching Occurrences 33-4
Alter Member Attributes 34-2, 34-3 Specific Occurrence 33-3, 33-4
Attaching Update Contents 23-5
Member 32-9 Library Member Display
Selection List 32-2 Display Format 5-8
Copying 34-5 Sequence Number Display 5-6
Deleting 34-10 Library System, Description 31-1
Detaching 33-2 Line Commands
Function Panels Description 31-6 Correcting Invalid/Incomplete 2-10
Inquiring About Member 34-13 Description of Use 2-3, 2-4
Library System 31-1 Display Format Description 2-2
Menu 31-3—31-4 Evaluation Hierarchy 2-9
Printing 34-15 Locate Advantage CA-Roscoe Users (BBS) 35-25
Reattaching 33-10 Locate/Display Data
Selection List All Occurrences
Function Code Hierarchy 31-8, 31-9 In AWS (Modifiable Display) 20-6, 20-7
Refresh 31-9 In AWS (Non-Modifiable Display) 20-6, 20-7
Using 31-7 By Occurrence
Wildcard Characters 32-2 In AWS (Line Commands) 20-3
Library Member In AWS (Primary Command) 20-2
Attaching 32-9 Change Search Boundaries (For Command) 4-2
Copying Change Search Boundaries (For Session)
Using Command 34-5 Using BOUNDS Line Command 4-5, 4-6
Using Function Panel 34-7, 34-8 Using SET BOUNDS 4-4
Using Selection List 34-8, 34-9 Using STATUS AWS 4-3
X-10 User Guide

Locate/Display Data (continued) Margins, Display
Change Search Boundaries (For Session) Change Using SET DISPLAY 5-5
(continued) Change Using STATUS DISPLAY 5-4
Using STATUS DISPLAY 4-3 Temporary Change 5-3, 5-4
Customizing Display 20-9 MASK Line Command 18-9—18-10
Non-Matching Occurrence MAX (SCRL Field Value) 8-5
In AWS (Modifiable Display) 20-5 MB Line Command 21-3
In AWS (Non-Modifiable Display) 20-6, 20-7 MERGE Command 34-7
Position Display 20-11 Message Selection List(BBS)
Qualify String 20-9 Description 35-4
Translate Search String 20-9 PFKey Functions 35-5
Using HEX String 20-10, 20-11 Message Thread Entry (BBS)
Logical Not (¬) Create 35-9, 35-10
Change Tab Character 17-5 Description 35-7
LOWCASE Command 19-5 PFKey Functions 35-8
Lowercase Data Message Thread Selection List(BBS)
All Characters Description 35-6
Using Line Commands 19-5 PFKey Functions 35-6
Using Primary Command 19-5 Message Threads (BBS)
With Initial Cap Create 35-9, 35-10
Using Line Commands 19-6 Description 35-4
Using Primary Command 19-5 Print 35-17, 35-18
LSHIFT Command 19-10, 19-11 Viewing 35-6
Message Title (BBS), Create 35-11
Messages
M Advantage CA-Roscoe Info Messages 6-18
M Line Command 21-3 Controlling Display
Manipulate Text SEND Messages (Received) 9-2
Center Submit Confirmation 28-4
Using Line Commands 19-3, 19-4 Monitor Error Messages 6-18
Using Primary Command 19-2 Monitor Info Messages 6-18
Initial Cap PRINT Completion 7-7
Using Line Commands 19-6 Transmit Via BulletinBoard System 9-5
Using Primary Command 19-5 Transmit Via SEND 9-4, 9-5
Join Lines View Using BulletinBoard System 35-19—35-22
Using Line Commands 19-17 MM Line Command 21-3
Using Primary Command 19-14, 19-15 Monitor Commands
Lowercase All Controlling Messages
Using Line Commands 19-5 Error 6-18
Using Primary Command 19-5 Informational 6-18
Reformat Deferring Command Execution 2-6
Using Line Command 19-8—19-9 Reexecuting 2-6
Using Primary Command 19-7, 19-8 MOVE Command 21-2
Shift Lines Moving Lines Within AWS
Using Line Commands 19-11, 19-12 Using Line Commands 21-3
Using Primary Command 19-10, 19-11 Using Primary Command 21-2
Split Line MT Line Command 21-3
Using Primary Commands 19-13, 19-14
Uppercase All
Using Primary Command 19-5
Index X-11
N OMIT Command 20-6, 20-7
OMT Line Command 18-10
Name OO (Destination/Overlay) Line Command
Field on System Information Line 8-3 With COPY 15-4
Print Request With Move 21-3
Assigning 7-5 Operator
Displaying 7-11 Job Facility 28-15
News Announcements (BBS) ORDER Command 14-3
Description 35-2 ORDER Operand, Library Facility 32-7
View 35-14 Ordering Library Selection List 32-7
NewThread Function (BBS) 35-11 OT (Destination/Overlay) Line Command
NEXT Command With COPY 15-4
AWS 20-2 With Move 21-3
Job Output Overlay Line Commands
Locate String 30-8 With COPY 15-5
Position Within 30-12 With Move 21-4
Library Facility 33-3, 33-4
NEXT Line Command 20-3
Nextnew Function (BBS) 35-7 P
NONUM Parentheses
Define Sequence Number Display 5-6 syntax diagrams, use in xxviii
NOPRESERVE Mode Password
Character Translation 3-4 Changing User
NOTE Command During Session 10-8, 10-9
With Data Set, Member, Module 26-8, 26-9 When Signing On 10-3, 10-8
With Job Output 30-13 PASSWORD Field on Sign-on Screen 10-2
With Library Member 33-8 PAU Keyword on System Information Line 8-4
Note Names PDS Member 25-15—25-16
Library Member 33-8 PDS Selection List
Notification Messages Attaching 25-18
PRINT Completion 7-7 Description Of 25-19
NUM Detaching 26-2
Define Sequence Number Display 5-6 Function Code List 25-19—25-21
NUM2 Inquire About
Define Sequence Number Display 5-6 Load Module 25-19—25-21
NUMX Source Module 25-22—25-24
Define Sequence Number Display 5-6 Reattaching 26-10
Search for String
O All Occurrences 26-4, 26-5

By Occurrence 26-3
O (Destination/Overlay/Drop) Line Command Non-Matching Occurrences 26-4, 26-5
With COPY 15-4 Selecting Different Level 25-37
O (Destination/Overlay) Line Command PF/PA Keys
With COPY 15-4 BulletinBoard System 35-2
With Move 21-3 Changing Assignment
OB (Destination/Overlay) Line Command Description 11-7, 11-8
With COPY 15-4 Fixed Assignment 11-9, 11-10
With Move 21-3 Scroll Functions 11-12
OM Line Command 18-10 Special Functions 11-15
OMB Line Command 18-10 Variable Assignment 11-11
Command Delimiter 11-10
Changing 6-18
X-12 User Guide

PF/PA Keys (continued) Print Message Utility (BBS) 35-15—35-18
Default Assignments 11-2 PRINT RELEASE Command 7-12
Processing Hierarchy 11-7 PRINT ROUTE Command 7-12
Using 11-4 PRINT STATUS Command 7-11
PFv (SCRL Field Value) 8-5 Printing (At 328x/System Printer)
PGM Keyword on System Information Line 8-4 ANSI Controlled 7-4
Plus sign Cancelling Request 7-11
Redisplaying last executed command 2-14 Changing Priorities 7-12
POINT Command 13-11 Designating Location 7-9
Library Facility 33-4 Display Information About
With Data Set, Member, Module 26-8 Printers 7-10
With Job Output Printing Locations 7-9
Position Within 30-12 Request Status 7-11
To Noted Line 30-13 Formatting Request 7-3—7-4
Power Typing (Data Entry) Holding Requests 7-12
Using Line Command 18-8 Naming Requests 7-5
Using Primary Command 18-5 Notification Messages, Requesting 7-7
PREFIX Command 14-2 Partial Requests 7-6
PRESERVE Mode Referencing Requests 7-5
Character Translation 3-4 Releasing Requests 7-12
PREV Command Requesting Copies 7-6
AWS 20-2 Rerouting Requests 7-12
Job Output System Printer Controls 7-7
Locate String 30-8 Using
Position Within 30-12 :P 7-2
Library Facility 33-3, 33-4 PRINT Command 7-2
PREV Line Command 20-3 Printing Data
Prevnew Function (BBS) 35-6 Message Thread (BBS) 35-17, 35-18
Primary Commands Notification Messages
Controlling Info Messages 6-18 Setting Default 6-18
Correcting Invalid/Incomplete 2-10 Thread Entry (BBS) 35-15
Deferring Command Execution 2-6 Using
Description of Use 2-2 Data Set Facility 27-41
Reexecuting 2-6 Printing Location
Using With Line Commands 2-2 Changing
PRINT CANCEL Command 7-11 For Request 7-9
PRINT Command For Session 7-9
Data Set 27-40 Displaying
Description 7-2 All 7-9
Job Output Current 6-5
Commands 30-25 Profile Cleanup (BBS) 35-15
Job Facility 30-25 Program Access Keys
Selection List 30-28 See PF/PA Keys
With Library Facility 34-15 Program Attention Keys
PRINT DEVICE Command 7-10 See PF/PA Keys
Print Function Panel Program Function Keys
Data Set Facility 27-41 See PF/PA Keys
Library Facility 34-15 Programs
PRINT HOLD Command 7-12 comma
PRINT LOCATION Command 7-9 repeat symbol, use in xxx
parentheses
syntax diagrams, use in xxviii
Index X-13
Programs (continued) Response Line 8-3
punctuation RPF Programs
syntax diagrams, use in xxvii Description Of 39-1
Prune Profile Utility (BBS) 35-15 Execution Library, Control Use Of 6-18
Punctuation marks (syntax diagrams) xxvii Looping
PURGE Command Change Limit 6-18
Job Output 30-28 Limit Defaults 6-14
Write Limit
Change Setting 6-18
R Site Defaults 6-14
R Line Command 15-5, 15-6 RR Line Command 15-5, 15-6
RBX Prefix 35-2 RSHIFT Command 19-10, 19-11
Read Message Attribute (BBS) 35-14
Reattaching
AWS 13-13 S
Data Set Object 26-10 SAVE Command
Job Output 30-14, 30-15 Assigning Attributes 23-3
Library Facility 33-10 Assigning Description 23-3
Reexecuting Last Command/RPF 2-6 Creating Library Member 23-2
Reformat Lines Saving AWS Contents 23-2
Using Line Command 19-8—19-9 Scale Line 8-6
Using Primary Command 19-7, 19-8 Screen
REFRESH Command Change
Data Set Facility 24-14 Copy Destination 6-16
Library Facility 31-9 Size 8-12
Refresh Function (BBS) 35-5 Components of
Refreshing Selection List Command Area 8-2
Data Set Facility 24-14 Description 8-2
Library Facility 31-9 Execution Area 8-6
RELEASE Command 27-47 Response Line 8-3
RENAME Command Scale Line 8-6
AWS 13-5 System Control Area 8-3—8-5
Data Set Object 27-48 System Information Line 8-3
Library Member 34-20 Copy 15-8
Rename Function Panel Print 7-2
Data Set Facility 27-48 Split
Renaming Full 8-7—8-8
AWS Overview 8-7
Using Command 13-5 Partial 8-9
Using STATUS AWS 17-3 Resplit 8-10
Data Set Object Swap 8-10, 8-11
Using Command 27-48 Terminate 8-11
Using Function Panel 27-48 Types of
Using Selection List 27-51 Full/Half 8-7
Renumber AWS Contents Terminal Lock 8-13, 8-14
Any Time 22-1—22-2 SCREEN Command 8-12
RENUMBER Command 22-1—22-2 Screen Types of 10-2—10-3
Reserved Sign-on 10-3
Characters 2-5, 2-6 Sign-on' 10-2
RESET Line Command 2-11 SDSN Command 27-56
X-14 User Guide

SEARCH Command 20-6, 20-7 Session Attributes (continued)
SELECT Command (Advantage CA-Roscoe) Automatic
With AWS 13-14 Indentation, Display/Change 6-16
With Library Facility 32-12 Line Insertion, Display/Change 6-16
Selection Lists Signoff, Site Defaults 6-13
Copying From 27-17 Terminal Lock, Site Defaults 6-13
Data Set Facility AWS
Catalog 25-7, 25-8, 25-9—25-11 Data Protection 6-16
Data Set 25-25, 25-26 Edit Indicator 6-16
Function Code Hierarchy 24-11 ERASE EOF Key Control 6-16
LIBRARIAN 25-2—25-5 Fill Character (Trailing Blanks) 6-16
Overview 24-11 Highlighting 6-16
PDS Load 25-19—25-21 Recovery, Change 17-5
PDS Source 25-22—25-24 Selection, Change 17-6
Printing From 27-45 Sequence Number Attribute, Change 17-6
Refreshing 24-14 Tab Character/Positions, Change 17-5
Source 25-22—25-24 Character Set
Volume 25-28—25-30 Changing 6-16
VTOC 25-34—25-36 Using 3-2
Library Facility Character Translation
Attach Member 32-10 Changing 6-16
Copy 34-8, 34-9 Using 3-3
Description 31-7, 32-2 Column Boundaries 6-16
Detaching 33-2 Command Area
Function Code Hierarchy 31-8, 31-9 Changing 6-16
Refreshing 31-9 Command Delimiter (Advantage CA-Roscoe)
Sorting Display (ORDER Command) 32-7 Changing 6-16
SEND Command Using 2-2
Controlling Message Display 6-18 Command Delimiter (PF/PA Key)
Receiving Messages 9-2 Changing 6-18
Transmitting Messages 9-4, 9-5 Cursor Positioning 6-16
Sequence Number Attributes Data Set Objects
AWS COMPRESS Message Control, Changing 6-18
Change Using STATUS AWS 17-4 Directory Update Setting 6-18
Change When Printing 7-3 DSCB Empty Setting 6-16
Change When Submitting 28-5 Migration Recall 6-16
Sequence Numbers Search Limits, Changing 6-16
Display 5-6 Date Format 6-16
Printing 7-3 Display
Renumbering 22-2 Advantage CA-Roscoe ID 6-18
SESSION List of All 6-5
duplicate commands User ID 6-18
saving 6-16 Display Format
Session Attributes Change All 6-16
:C (COPY) Destination Change Display Format 5-7, 5-8
Changing 6-16 Change Display Margins 5-5
+INC Statement Expansion Change Sequence Number Display 5-6
Changing 6-18 DSCB Setting, Change 6-18
AllFusion CA-Librarian -INC Expansion ETSO Escape Sequence
Changing 6-16 Changing 6-18
ATTACH Pause Setting 6-16 Jobs
-INC Expansion Control, Changing 6-18
Index X-15
Session Attributes (continued) SET COPYDEST Command
Jobs (continued) STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
+INC Expansion Control 6-18 SET CURSOR Command 6-16
Data Width Control 6-18 SET DATEFORM Command 6-16
Search Limits, Changing 6-18 SET DISPLAY Command
List Of 6-5 Change Display Format 5-7, 5-8
Messages, Controlling Display Change Display Margins 5-5
From Advantage CA-Roscoe 6-18 Change Sequence Number Display 5-6
From Monitor 6-18 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
PRINT Completion Notification Changing 7-7 SET DSNCMLST Command
Printing Destination STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
Changing 6-18 SET DSNCNT Command
Printing Location Site Default 6-14
Establish 7-9 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
Printing Notification SET DSNEMPTY Command 6-16
Changing 6-18 SET DSNRECALL command 6-16
RPF SET DUPCR command 6-16
Control Execution Library Use 6-16 SET EDITCHNG Command
Control Loop Limit 6-18 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
Control Write Limit 6-18 Tracking Changed Lines 14-8—14-9
Screen Copy Destination SET EOF Command
Changing 6-16 Control ERASE EOF Use 16-6
Screen Positioning When String Located 6-18 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
SCRL Field Value SET ESCAPE Command
Changing 6-18 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
Search Column Boundaries SET EXECPFX command 6-16
Changing 6-16 SET FILL Command
Sequence Number Display 6-18 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
Signoff SET JOBCNT Command
Changing Option 6-16 Site Default 6-14
SET ATTACH Command 6-16 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
SET AUTOFF Command SET MASTER Command
Site Defaults 6-13 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16 SET MODE Command
SET AUTOINDENT Command Control Character Recognition/Translation 3-3
Inserting Lines 18-13 Control Non-Displayable Character
STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16 Translation 3-4
SET AUTOINSERT Command STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
Insert Additional Lines 18-7 SET MONLEVEL command 6-16
STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16 SET MONTRAP command 6-16
SET AWSDSPLY Command 6-16 SET MSGLEVEL Command
SET BOUNDS Command STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
Change Column Boundaries 4-4 With Job Submission 28-4
STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16 Set Options Utility (BBS) 35-13
SET CHARSET Command SET PFKDELIM Command
Changing Language Code 3-2 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16
STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16 SET RPSDEST Command
SET CMDLINES Command STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-10
STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16 SET RPSNOTIFY Command
SET Command For PRINT Completion Notification 7-7
STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-18
X-16 User Guide

SET SAVEATTR Command SMS-Managed Data Sets
STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-18 Allocating
SET SCROLL Command Using Command 27-2, 27-3
STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-18 Special Characters
SET SEARCH Command 6-18 Asterisk (*) 2-6
SET SEND Command Double Comma (,,) 2-5
Controlling Display 9-2 Minus Sign (-) 2-6
STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-18 Plus Sign (+) 2-7
SET STATS Command 6-18 Wildcard Characters 2-5
SET STMTCNT Command 6-18 Split Line
Site Default 6-14 Using Line Commands 19-16
SET SUBMIT Command Using Primary Commands 19-13, 19-14
Controlling Sequence Numbers 28-5 Split Screen Facility
Expanding +INC Statements 28-7 Full 8-7—8-8
STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-18 Overview 8-7
SET SYSID Command 6-18 Partial 8-9
SET TLOCK Command Resplitting 8-10
Activating Terminal Lock 8-13 Swapping 8-10, 8-11
Site Defaults 6-13 Terminating 8-11
STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-18 Split screen setting 6-11
SET USERID Command 6-18 STA Keyword on System Information Line 8-4
SET WRITECNT Command 6-18 STANDARD Mode
SetOpts Function (ZMsg BBS) 35-24 Character Translation/Recognition 3-3
Shifting Data STATUS AWS Command 17-1—17-6
Description STATUS COMMAND Command 2-13
Using Line Commands 19-11, 19-12 STATUS DISPLAY Command
Using Primary Command 19-10, 19-11 Changing
Using TAB Facility 18-14, 18-15 Column Boundaries 4-3
Show News Utility (BBS) 35-14 Display Format 5-7, 5-8
Sign On Sequence Number Display 5-6
BulletinBoard System 35-2 Description 6-2, 6-3
From Advantage CA-Roscoe 10-4, 10-5 STATUS SESSION Command 6-5
From CICS 10-6 STATUS SYSTEM Command 6-13, 6-14
From Sign-on Screen 10-2—10-3 String Handling
From TSO 10-7 Adding
Using VTAM 10-3 At Beginning 14-2
Sign-on Program At End 14-2
Creating 10-9, 10-10 Changing Character Within
Sign-on Screen 10-2—10-3 Using Line Commands 14-5
Signoff Using Primary Command 14-4
Automatic Changing String
Description 10-12 Tracking Changes 14-8—14-9
Site Defaults 6-13 Using Line Commands 14-7
Explicit 10-13 Using Primary Command 14-6, 14-7
SKETCH Delimiter Characters 2-7
Description Of 40-1 HEX
SMS-Managed Data Set Display In 5-7, 5-8
Allocating Locate All Occurrences
Using Function Panel 27-6 In AWS (Modifiable Display) 20-6, 20-7
Cataloging 27-9 In AWS (Non-Modifiable Display) 20-6, 20-7
Locate Non-Matching Occurrence
In AWS (Modifiable Display) 20-5, 20-6, 20-7
Index X-17
String Handling (continued) Thread entries, deleting 35-15
Locate Non-Matching Occurrence (continued) Thread Entry (BBS)
In AWS (Non-Modifiable Display) 20-6, 20-7 Create 35-9, 35-10
Locating By Occurrence Print 35-15
In AWS (Line Commands) 20-3 View 35-7
In AWS (Primary Command) 20-2 Thread Title (BBS), Create 35-11
Translate TIME Command 6-15
On Input/Edit 3-3 Time, Display 6-15
With Command 3-3 Title, Message/Thread (BBS) 35-11
SUBMIT Command 28-4 TJ Line Command 19-17
Submitting Data TRACE Command 14-9
Changing Defaults 6-18 Tracking Changed Lines 14-8—14-9
Description 28-4 Translation, Character
SUFFIX Command 14-2 Non-display 3-4
Suppress Message Processing (BBS) 35-21 When Entering/Editing Data 3-3
Syntax Checking When Searching For String 3-3
JCL 28-2, 28-3 When Specified with Advantage CA-Roscoe
Syntax diagrams Commands 3-3
reading (how to) xxvii—xxxii TS Line Command 19-16
SYSOUT Class Requirements 30-4 TSO
System Control Area 8-3—8-5 Command 38-10
System Information Line 8-3 Procedure Execution 38-10
System Printers Signing on to Advantage CA-Roscoe 10-7
Changing Locations TSO Command 38-10
For Request 7-9 TT (Destination) Line Command 15-4
For Session 7-9 With Move 21-3
Displaying Locations 7-9 TTD (Destination/Drop) Line Command
Setting Parameters 7-7 With COPY 15-4
Using 7-2 TUTORIAL, Advantage CA-Roscoe
Description 12-5
TXTCENT Command 19-2
T TXTFLOW Command 19-7
Tab Character TXTJOIN Command 19-14, 19-15
Change Via STATUS AWS 17-5 TXTLCASE Command 19-5
TAB Command 18-14, 18-15 TXTSPLIT Command 19-13, 19-14
TC Line Command 19-3 Typewriter Devices
TCB Line Command 19-3 Establishing Communications A-2
TCC Line Command 19-3 Non-Executable Commands A-11
TCT Line Command 19-3 Signing Off A-5
TE Line Command 18-8 Signing On A-4
Terminal Lock Facility Using The Data Set Facility A-9
Changing Options 6-18 Viewing Job Output A-10
Invoking 8-13, 8-14
Site Defaults 6-13
Terminating 8-13, 8-14 U
Terminate UC Line Command 19-5
Split Screens 8-11 UCB Line Command 19-5
Terminal Lock Screen 8-13 UCC Line Command 19-5
TEXTENTR (Operand of INPUT Command) 18-5 UCT Line Command 19-5
TF Line Command 19-8—19-9 Uncataloging Data Set 27-53
X-18 User Guide

UNCATLG Command 27-53 Wildcard Characters (continued)
Unicenter CA-SysView FindUser mode 35-25 With Library Facility 32-2
Unread Message Attribute (BBS) 35-14
UPCASE Command 19-5
UPDATE Command 23-5 X
Uppercase Data XCOPY Command
Using Line Commands 19-5 Between Screens 15-11—15-12
Using Primary Command 19-5 XCOPYS Command
Using PF/PA Keys Between Screens 15-11—15-12
Inserting Data In AWS 18-11 XCOPYX Command
Utility Function (BBS) 35-5, 35-12 Between Screens 15-11—15-12
Utility Menu (BBS) 35-12 XL Line Command 14-5
XLB Line Command 14-5
XLT Line Command 14-5
V XTENDED Mode
Variables (syntax diagrams) xxvii Character Translation/Recognition 3-3
Viewing Message Thread (BBS) 35-6 XTPM
Viewing Message Thread Entries (BBS) 35-7, 35-8 Signing On Advantage CA-Roscoe 10-4
Volume Selection List
Attaching 25-27
Description Of 25-28—25-30 Z
Detaching 26-2 ZAnn Mode (BBS) 35-14
Function Code List 25-28—25-30 ZMsg (BBS)
Reattaching 26-10 Function 35-5
Search for String Mode, Using 35-19—35-24
All Occurrences 26-4, 26-5 PFKey Functions 35-23
By Occurrence 26-3 Set Options 35-24
Non-Matching Occurrences 26-4, 26-5 ZMsgOpts Display (BBS) 35-24
Selecting Different Level 25-37 ZZZZZMSG Member
Wildcard Characters 25-27 View Using BulletinBoard System 35-19—35-22
VTAM Sign-on
Initial 10-3
Signing Off 10-13
VTOC Selection List
Attaching 25-32—25-33
Description Of 25-34—25-36
Detaching 26-2
Function Code List 25-34—25-36
Reattaching 26-10
Search for String
All Occurrences 26-4, 26-5
By Occurrence 26-3
Non-Matching Occurrences 26-4, 26-5
Selecting Different Level 25-37
Wildcard Characters 24-7, 25-32
W
Wildcard Characters
With Data Set Facility
For Catalog/VTOC Selection List 24-7
For LIBRARIAN/PDS/Volume Selection
List 24-8
Index X-19
X-20 User Guide

ROSCOE - B001733e - User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

ROSCOE - B001733e - User Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ROSCOE - B001733e - User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Advantage CA-Roscoe

The manufacturer of this Documentation is CA.

Copyright  2005 CA. All rights reserved.

About This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii

Part I. Getting Started (General Information)

Chapter 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Chapter 3. Controlling Character Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Chapter 4. Defining Column Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Chapter 5. Defining the Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Chapter 7. Printing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Chapter 8. Selecting a Screen Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Chapter 9. Sending/Receiving Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Chapter 10. Signing On and Off Advantage CA-Roscoe . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Chapter 12. Using the Training Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Part II. The AWS (Creating and Manipulating Data)

Chapter 13. AWS: Introducing the AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Chapter 14. AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Chapter 16. AWS: Deleting Data From an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

Chapter 17. AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information . . . . . . 17-1

Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS . . . . . 18-1

Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1

Chapter 20. AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1

Chapter 21. AWS: Moving Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21-1

Chapter 22. AWS: Renumbering Data in the AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . 22-1

Chapter 23. AWS: Saving and Updating a Library Member . . . . . . 23-1

Part III. Data Sets (Browsing and Maintaining Data Sets)

viii User Guide

Chapter 26. Data Sets: Browsing Data Set Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . 26-1

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks . . . . . 27-1

Part IV. Jobs (Submitting and Managing Jobs)

Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . 28-1

Chapter 29. Jobs: Displaying Job-Related Information . . . . . . . . . 29-1

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-1

Part V. The Library System (Browsing and Managing Local Data)

Chapter 31. Library: Introducing the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . 31-1

Chapter 32. Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal . . . . . 32-1

xii User Guide

Chapter 33. Library: Browsing Attached Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33-1

Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks . . . . . 34-1

Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35-1

Chapter 36. Advantage CA-Roscoe and DB2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36-1

Chapter 37. DMF - Dialog Management Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37-1

Chapter 38. ETSO - Application Execution System . . . . . . . . . . . . 38-1

Chapter 39. RPF - Roscoe Programming Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39-1

Chapter 40. SKETCH - CICS/IMS Panel Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-1

xiv User Guide

This Advantage CA-Roscoe Interactive Environment User Guide provides a

About This Guide xvii

xviii User Guide

About This Guide xix

| The following information has been provided as a quick reference regarding

|Summary of Revisions for Service Pack 7

About This Guide xxi

xxii User Guide

User Series Contents